2014_M6G_OM

Black plate (1,1)

Mazda6_8DL2-EA-13F_Edition1 Page1Monday, June 10 2013 3:51 PM

Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (2,1)


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (3,1)

Thank you for choosing a Mazda. We at Mazda design and build vehicles with completecustomer satisfaction in mind.

To help ensure enjoyable and trouble-free operation of your Mazda, read this manualcarefully and follow its recommendations.

An Authorized Mazda Dealer knows your vehicle best. So when maintenance or service isnecessary, that's the place to go.

Our nationwide network of Mazda professionals is dedicated to providing you with the bestpossible service.

We assure you that all of us at Mazda have an ongoing interest in your motoring pleasureand in your full satisfaction with your Mazda product.

Mazda Motor CorporationHIROSHIMA, JAPAN

Important Notes About This ManualKeep this manual in the glove box as a handy reference for the safe and enjoyable use of your Mazda. Should youresell the vehicle, leave this manual with it for the next owner.

All specifications and descriptions are accurate at the time of printing. Because improvement is a constant goal atMazda, we reserve the right to make changes in specifications at any time without notice and without obligation.

Air Conditioning and the EnvironmentYour Mazda's genuine air conditioner is filled with HFC134a (R134a), a refrigerant that has been found not todamage the earth's ozone layer. If the air conditioner does not operate properly, consult an Authorized MazdaDealer.

PerchlorateCertain components of this vehicle such as [air bag modules, seat belt pretensioners, lithium batteries, ···] may contain Perchlorate Material- - Special handlingmay apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal. Seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Please be aware that this manual applies to all models, equipment and options. As a result, you may findsome explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

©2013 Mazda Motor CorporationPrinted in Japan June 2013 (Print1)

AWord to Mazda Owners


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (4,1)

We want to help you get the most drivingpleasure from your vehicle. Your owner'smanual, when read from cover to cover,can do that in many ways.

Illustrations complement the words of themanual to best explain how to enjoy yourMazda. By reading your manual, you canfind out about the features, importantsafety information, and driving undervarious road conditions.

The symbol below in this manual means“Do not do this” or “Do not let thishappen”.

Index: A good place to start is the Index,an alphabetical listing of all informationin your manual.

You'll find several WARNINGs,CAUTIONs, and NOTEs in the manual.

WARNINGA WARNING indicates a situation inwhich serious injury or death couldresult if the warning is ignored.

CAUTIONA CAUTION indicates a situation inwhich bodily injury or damage toyour vehicle, or both, could result ifthe caution is ignored.

NOTEA NOTE provides information and sometimessuggests how to make better use of yourvehicle.

The symbol below, located on some partsof the vehicle, indicates that this manualcontains information related to the part.Please refer to the manual for a detailedexplanation.

How to Use This Manual


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (5,1)


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Table of Contents

Pictorial IndexInterior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.

1

Essential Safety EquipmentImportant information about safety equipment, including seats, seat beltsystem, child-restraint systems and SRS air bags.

2

Before DrivingUse of various features, including keys, doors, mirrors and windows.

3

When DrivingInformation concerning safe driving and stopping.

4

Interior FeaturesUse of various features for ride comfort, including air-conditioning and audiosystem.

5

Maintenance and CareHow to keep your Mazda in top condition.

6

If Trouble ArisesHelpful information on what to do if a problem arises with the vehicle.

7

Customer Information and Reporting Safety DefectsImportant consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.

8

SpecificationsTechnical information about your Mazda.

9

Index 10

Black plate (6,1)


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (7,1)

1 Pictorial Index

Interior, exterior views and part identification of your Mazda.

Interior Overview .......................................................................... 1-2Interior Equipment (View A) .................................................... 1-2Interior Equipment (View B) .................................................... 1-3Interior Equipment (View C) .................................................... 1-4

Exterior Overview ......................................................................... 1-5

1-1


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (8,1)

Interior Equipment (View A)

Door-lock knob .................................................................................................. page 3-18DSC OFF switch ............................................................................................... page 4-95Tire pressure monitoring system set switch ..................................................... page 4-120Turn and lane-change signal .............................................................................. page 4-68Lighting control ................................................................................................. page 4-59Instrument cluster .............................................................................................. page 4-10Dashboard illumination knob ............................................................................ page 4-13Wiper and washer lever ..................................................................................... page 4-69Push button start .................................................................................................. page 4-2LDWS switch .................................................................................................. page 4-134AFS OFF switch ................................................................................................ page 4-63BSM OFF switch ............................................................................................. page 4-130Outside mirror switch ........................................................................................ page 3-29Door-lock switch ............................................................................................... page 3-15Power window lock switch ................................................................................ page 3-36Power window switches .................................................................................... page 3-32

1-2

Pictorial Index

The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle

Interior Overview


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (9,1)

Interior Equipment (View B)

Audio control switches ...................................................................................... page 5-56SRS air bags ...................................................................................................... page 2-39Cruise control switches .................................................................................... page 4-112Navigation system (if equipped) .......................................... Refer to the separate manualAudio system ..................................................................................................... page 5-13Hazard warning flasher switch .......................................................................... page 4-75Climate control system ........................................................................................ page 5-2Rear window defroster switch ........................................................................... page 4-73MT shift lever .................................................................................................... page 4-47AT shift lever ...................................................................................................... page 4-49Accessory socket ............................................................................................. page 5-116Parking brake ..................................................................................................... page 4-83Seat warmer switches .......................................................................................... page 2-7Lock release lever .............................................................................................. page 3-28Hood release handle .......................................................................................... page 6-18Remote fuel-filler lid release ............................................................................. page 3-26Remote release button ....................................................................................... page 3-20

Pictorial Index

Interior Overview

1-3The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (10,1)

Interior Equipment (View C)

Seat belts ............................................................................................................ page 2-14SRS air bag ........................................................................................................ page 2-39Bottle holder .................................................................................................... page 5-118Vanity mirror .................................................................................................... page 5-112Moonroof switch ............................................................................................... page 3-37Overhead lights ................................................................................................ page 5-113Rearview mirror ................................................................................................. page 3-30Sunvisor ........................................................................................................... page 5-112Glove compartment ......................................................................................... page 5-120Commander switch ............................................................................................ page 5-58Cup holders ...................................................................................................... page 5-117Front seat ............................................................................................................. page 2-5Center console ................................................................................................. page 5-120Rear seat ............................................................................................................ page 2-10

1-4

Pictorial Index

The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle

Interior Overview


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (11,1)

Hood .................................................................................................................. page 6-18Windshield wiper blades .................................................................................... page 6-27Moonroof ........................................................................................................... page 3-37Doors and keys .................................................................................................. page 3-12Fuel-filler lid ...................................................................................................... page 3-26Wheels and Tires ............................................................................................... page 6-34Exterior lights .................................................................................................... page 6-40Trunk lid ............................................................................................................ page 3-19Child safety locks .............................................................................................. page 3-19Outside mirror .................................................................................................... page 3-29

Pictorial Index

Exterior Overview

1-5The equipment and installation position varies by vehicle


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (12,1)

1-6


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (13,1)

2 Essential Safety Equipment

Important information about safety equipment, including seats, seat beltsystem, child-restraint systems and SRS air bags.

Seats ............................................................................................... 2-2Seat Precaution .......................................................................... 2-2Front Seat .................................................................................. 2-5Rear Seat ................................................................................. 2-10Head Restraints ....................................................................... 2-12

Seat Belt Systems ........................................................................ 2-14Seat Belt Precautions .............................................................. 2-14Seat Belt .................................................................................. 2-17Seat Belt Warning Systems ..................................................... 2-18Front Seat Belt Pretensioner and Load Limiting Systems ....... 2-18Seat Belt Extender ................................................................... 2-20

Child Restraint ............................................................................ 2-22Child Restraint Precautions ..................................................... 2-22Child-Restraint System Installation ........................................ 2-27Installing Child-Restraint Systems .......................................... 2-28

SRS Air Bags ............................................................................... 2-39Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions ................ 2-39Supplemental Restraint System Components ......................... 2-45How the SRS Air Bags Work .................................................. 2-47SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria .......................................... 2-51Limitations to SRS Air Bag .................................................... 2-52Front Passenger Occupant Classification Systemí ................ 2-54Constant Monitoring ............................................................... 2-60

2-1íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (14,1)

Seat Precaution

WARNINGMake sure the adjustable components of a seat are locked in place:

Adjustable seats and seatbacks that are not securely locked are dangerous. In asudden stop or collision, the seat or seatback could move, causing injury. Make surethe adjustable components of the seat are locked in place by attempting to slide theseat forward and backward and rocking the seatback.

Do not drive with the seatback unlocked:All of the seatbacks play an important role in your protection in a vehicle. Leavingthe seatback unlocked is dangerous as it can allow passengers to be ejected orthrown around and baggage to strike occupants in a sudden stop or collision,resulting in severe injury. After adjusting the seatback at any time, even when thereare no other passengers, rock the seatback to make sure it is locked in place.

Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is stopped:Adjusting the driver's seat while the vehicle is moving is dangerous. The driver couldlose control of the vehicle and have an accident.

Do not modify or replace the front seats:Modifying or replacing the front seats such as replacing the upholstery or looseningany bolts is dangerous. The front seats contain air bag components essential to thesupplemental restraint system. Such modifications could damage the supplementalrestraint system and result in serious injury. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer ifthere is any need to remove or reinstall the front seats.

Do not drive with damaged front seats:Driving with damaged front seats is dangerous. A collision, even one not strongenough to inflate the air bags, could damage the front seats which contain essentialair bag components. If there was a subsequent collision, an air bag may not deploywhich could lead to injuries. Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect thefront seats, front seat belt pretensioners and air bags after a collision.

Do not drive with either front seats reclined:Sitting in a reclined position while the vehicle is moving is dangerous because you donot get the full protection from seat belts. During sudden braking or a collision, youcan slide under the lap belt and suffer serious internal injuries. For maximumprotection, sit well back and upright.

Do not place an object such as a cushion between the seatback and your back:Putting an object such as a cushion between the seatback and your back isdangerous because you will be unable to maintain a safe driving posture and theseat belt cannot function at its full capacity in a collision, which could result in aserious accident, injury or death.

2-2

Essential Safety Equipment

Seats


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (15,1)

Do not place objects under the seat:The object could get stuck and cause the seat to not be fixed securely, and result inan accident.

Do not stack cargo higher than the seatbacks:Stacking luggage or other cargo higher than the seatbacks is dangerous. Duringsudden braking or a collision, objects can fly around and become projectiles thatmay hit and injure passengers.

Make sure luggage and cargo is secured before driving:Not securing cargo while driving is dangerous as it could move or be crushed duringsudden braking or a collision and cause injury.

Never allow a passenger to sit or stand on the folded seatback while the vehicle ismoving:

Driving with a passenger on the folded seatback is dangerous. Allowing a child to situp on the folded seatback while the vehicle is moving is particularly dangerous. In asudden stop or even a minor collision, a child not in a proper seat or child-restraintsystem and seat belt could be thrown forward, back or even out of the vehicleresulting in serious injuries or death. The child in the baggage area could be throwninto other occupants and cause serious injury.

Never give the car keys to children and do not allow them to play in the vehicle:Playing with the folding rear seats is dangerous. Once the seatbacks are back up, achild in the trunk would not be able to get out the way they had entered. If you havesmall children, keep the seatbacks locked.

Always leave your car locked and keep the car keys safely away from children:Leaving your car unlocked or the keys in reach of children is dangerous. Childrenwho find their way into the trunk through an unlocked rear seatback or an opentrunk can become accidentally locked in the trunk. This could result in death or braindamage from heat prostration, particularly in the summer. Always lock the doorsand the trunk, and as an added measure, keep the rear seatbacks locked, whetheryou have children in your home or not.


Seats

2-3


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (16,1)

CAUTIONØ When operating a seat, be careful not to put your hands or fingers near the

moving parts of the seat or on the side trim to prevent injury.Ø When moving the seats, make sure there is no cargo in the surrounding area. If

the cargo gets caught it could damage the cargo.Ø (Manual Seat)

When returning a rear-reclined seatback to its upright position, make sure youhold onto the seatback with your other hand while operating the lever. If theseatback is not supported, it will flip forward suddenly and could cause injury.

Ø (Power Seat)The seat-bottom power adjustment is operated by motors. Avoid extendedoperation because excessive use can damage the motors.Ø To prevent the battery from running down, avoid using the power adjustment

when the engine is stopped. The adjuster uses a large amount of electricalpower.

Ø Do not use the switch to make more than one adjustment at a time.

NOTEWhen returning a rear seat to its original position, also replace the seat belt to its normal position.Verify that the seat belt pulls out and retracts.

2-4


Seats


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (17,1)

Front Seat

qSeat Operation

Power operation

Seat Slide(Manual Seat)To move a seat forward or backward, raise the lever and slide the seat to the desiredposition and release the lever.Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seat is locked in place byattempting to push it forward and backward.(Power Seat)To slide the seat, move the slide lifter switch on the outside of the seat to the front or backand hold it. Release the switch at the desired position.

Height Adjustment (Driver's Seat)(Manual Seat)To adjust the seat height, move the lever up or down.(Power Seat)To adjust the seat height, move the switch up or down.

Front Height Adjustment of Seat Bottom (Driver's Power Seat)í

To adjust the front height of the seat bottom, raise or lower the front of the slide lifterswitch.


Seats

2-5íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (18,1)

Seat Recline(Manual Seat)To change the seatback angle, lean forward slightly while raising the lever. Then lean backto the desired position and release the lever.Make sure the lever returns to its original position and the seatback is locked in place byattempting to push it forward and backward.(Power Seat)To change the seatback angle, press the front or rear side of the reclining switch. Releasethe switch at the desired position.

Lumbar Support Adjustment (Driver's Seat)(Manual Operation)To increase the seat firmness, push the lever forward. Pull the lever backward to decreasefirmness.(Power Operation)To increase the seat firmness, press and hold the front part of the switch to the desiredposition, then release it.Press the rear part of the switch to decrease firmness.

2-6


Seats


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (19,1)

qSeat Warmerí

The front seats are electrically heated. Theignition must be switched ON.Press the seat warmer switch to illuminatethe indicator light while the ignition isswitched ON. The mode changes asfollow each time the seat warmer switch ispressed.

Fully Automatic Type Climate Control

OFF

High

Mid

Low

Manual Type Climate Control

OFF

High

Mid

Low

WARNINGBe careful when using the seat warmer:

The heat from the seat warmer maybe too hot for some people, asindicated below, and could cause alow-temperature burn.Ø Infants, small babies, elderly

people, and physically challengedpeople

Ø People with delicate skinØ People who are excessively

fatiguedØ People who are intoxicatedØ People who have taken sleep-

inducing medicine such assleeping pills or cold medicine

Do not use the seat warmer withanything having high moisture-retention ability such as a blanket orcushion on the seat:

The seat may be heated excessivelyand cause a low-temperature burn.

Do not use the seat warmer even whentaking a short nap in the vehicle:

The seat may be heated excessivelyand cause a low-temperature burn.

Do not place heavy objects with sharpprojections on the seat, or insertneedles or pins into it:

This could cause the seat to becomeexcessively heated and result in injuryfrom a minor burn.

CAUTIONDo not use organic solvents to cleanthe seat. It may damage the seatsurface and the heater.


Seats

2-7íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (20,1)

NOTEl If the ignition is switched off while the seat

warmer is operating (High, Mid or Low)and then switched ON again, the seatwarmer will automatically operate at thetemperature set before switching off theignition.

l Use the seat warmer when the engine isrunning. Leaving the seat warmer on forlong periods with the engine not runningcould cause the battery power to bedepleted.

l The temperature of the seat warmer cannotbe adjusted beyond High, Mid and Lowbecause the seat warmer is controlled by athermostat.

qSeat Position Memory (Driver'sseat)í

The seat position memory function allowsyou to program the driver's seat to adesired seat position and to call up aprogrammed position with the simpletouch of a button.

CAUTIONDo not place fingers or hands aroundthe bottom of the seat while the seatmemory function is operating. Theseat moves automatically while theseat memory function is operatingand fingers or hands could getpinched and injured.

SET button

The seat position can be programmed oroperated using the following operations.l Operation of the buttons on the side ofthe seat.

l Operation using the key

NOTEl Individual seat positions can be

programmed to the two availableprogramming buttons on the side of thedriver's seat, plus one seat position for eachregistered key.

l If the vehicle has been serviced and thebattery cables disconnected, theprogrammed seat positions will have beenerased. Re-program the seat positions.

Programming

1. Switch the ignition OFF.

2. Adjust the seat to the desired positionusing the slide lifter and recliningswitches.Refer to Seat Operation on page 2-5.

3. Press and hold the memory SET buttonuntil a beep sound is heard.

2-8


íSome models.

Seats


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (21,1)

4. Perform one of the following settingswithin 5 seconds of completing step 3above:

l To program memory button 1 or 2,press and hold the button until abeep sound is heard.

l To program a key, press and holdthe key switch until a beep soundis heard.

Adjusting a programmed position

(Programming to a button on the seatside)

1. While the vehicle is stopped, press theprogramming button for the seatposition you want to call up (button 1or 2).

2. A beep sound is heard when the seatposition adjustment is completed.

NOTEl If seat movement is not required, only the

beep sounds.l When the ignition is switched ON, the seat

position memory function does not operateunless the selector lever is in the P position(Automatic transaxle) or the parking brakeis applied (Manual transaxle).

l When the ignition is switched OFF, the seatposition memory function is operable whilethe selector lever is in a position other thanP position (Automatic transaxle) or theparking brake is not applied (Manualtransaxle), however, if the ignition isswitched ON while the seat positionmemory function is operating, the operationis stopped.

l The seat position adjustment is canceled inthe following cases:l Any of the seat adjustment switches is

operated.l The SET button is pressed.l Programming button 1 or 2 is pressed.l The key lock switch or unlock switch is

operated.l The vehicle starts moving.

(When programming to the key)

1. Unlock the doors by pressing a requestswitch or the key switch.

2. After unlocking the doors, the seatposition adjustment begins within 40seconds of opening the driver's door,and a beep sounds when the operationis finished.


Seats

2-9


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (22,1)

NOTEl If there is no seat position movement, a

beep is not heard.l When the ignition is switched ON, the seat

position memory function does not operateunless the selector lever is in the P position(Automatic transaxle) or the parking brakeis applied (Manual transaxle).

l When the ignition is switched OFF, the seatposition memory function is operable whilethe selector lever is in a position other thanP position (Automatic transaxle) or theparking brake is not applied (Manualtransaxle), however, if the ignition isswitched ON while the seat positionmemory function is operating, the operationis stopped.

l The seat position adjustment is canceled inthe following cases:l Any of the seat adjustment switches is

operated.l The SET button is pressed.l Programming button 1 or 2 is pressed.l The key switch or switch is

operated.l The vehicle starts moving.

Erasing programmed seat positions

(Erasing the seat positions programmedto the key)

1. Switch the ignition OFF.

2. Continue pressing the seat SET buttonuntil a beep sound is heard.

3. After the beep sounds, press the keyswitch continuously within 5 secondsuntil the beep sounds.

Rear Seat

qSplit Folding

By lowering the rear seatbacks theluggage compartment space can beexpanded.

WARNINGDo not drive the vehicle with occupantson folded down seatbacks or in theluggage compartment.

Putting occupants in the luggagecompartment is dangerous becauseseat belts cannot be fastened whichcould lead to serious injury or deathduring sudden braking or a collision

Do not allow children to play inside thevehicle with the seatbacks lowered.

Allowing children to play in thevehicle with the seatbacks foldeddown is dangerous, If a child entersthe luggage compartment and theseatbacks were raised back up, thechild may become trapped in theluggage compartment which couldlead to an accident.

Tightly secure cargo in the luggagecompartment when it is transportedwith the seatbacks folded down.

Driving without tightly securingcargo and luggage is dangerous as itcould move and become anobstruction to driving duringemergency braking or a collisionresulting in an unexpected accident.

2-10


Seats


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (23,1)

When transporting cargo, do not allowthe cargo to exceed the height of theseatbacks.

Transporting cargo stacked higherthan the seatbacks is dangerous asvisibility to the rear and sides of thevehicle is reduced which couldinterfere with driving operations andlead to an accident.

Lowering the seatbacks

1. Open the trunk lid and pull the leverfor the seatback you want to folddown.

2. Open a rear door and fold the rear seatforward.

To return the seatback to its uprightposition:

WARNINGWhen returning a seatback to itsupright position, make sure the 3-pointseat belt is not caught in the seatback.

If the seat belt is used while it iscaught in the seatback, the seat beltcannot function at its full capacity,which could cause serious injury ordeath.

Press the seatback rearward and lock it inplace. After returning the seatback to itsupright position, make sure it is securelylocked.

qArmrest

The rear armrest in the center of the rearseatback can be used (no occupant in thecenter seat) or placed upright.


Seats

2-11


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (24,1)

Head RestraintsYour vehicle is equipped with headrestraints on all outboard seats and therear center seat. The head restraints areintended to help protect you and thepassengers from neck injury.

WARNINGAlways drive with the head restraintsinstalled when seats are being usedand make sure they are properlyadjusted.:

Driving with the head restraintsadjusted too low or removed isdangerous. With no support behindyour head, your neck could beseriously injured in a collision.

Height adjustment

To raise a head restraint, pull it up to thedesired position.To lower the head restraint, press the stop-catch release, then push the head restraintdown.Adjust the head restraint so that the centeris even with the top of the passenger'sears.

Front outboard seat

Rear outboard seat

Rear center seat

2-12


Seats


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (25,1)

Removal/Installation

To remove the head restraint, pull it upwhile pressing the stop-catch.To install the head restraint, insert the legsinto the holes while pressing the stop-catch.

WARNINGAlways drive with the head restraintsinstalled when seats are being usedand make sure they are properlyinstalled:

Driving with the head restraints notinstalled is dangerous. With nosupport behind your head, your neckcould be seriously injured in acollision.


Seats

2-13


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (26,1)

Seat Belt PrecautionsSeat belts help to decrease the possibility of severe injury during accidents and suddenstops. Mazda recommends that the driver and all passengers always wear seat belts.

All of the seat belt retractors are designed to keep the lap/shoulder belts out of the waywhen not in use.

The driver's seat belt has no provisions for child-restraint systems and has only anemergency locking mode. The driver may wear it comfortably, and it will lock during acollision.

However, in some models (with automatic locking mode) the front passenger's seat and allrear lap/shoulder belt retractors operate in two modes: emergency locking mode, and forchild-restraint systems, automatic locking mode. While we recommend you put all childrenin the rear seats, if you must use the front passenger seat for a child, slide the frontpassenger seat as far back as possible and make sure any child-restraint system is securedproperly.

WARNINGAlways wear your seat belt and make sure all occupants are properly restrained:

Not wearing a seat belt is extremely dangerous. During a collision, occupants notwearing seat belts could hit someone or things inside the vehicle or even be thrownout of the vehicle. They could be seriously injured or even killed. In the samecollision, occupants wearing seat belts would be much safer.

Do not wear twisted seat belts:Twisted seat belts are dangerous. In a collision, the full width of the belt is notavailable to absorb the impact. This puts more force on the bones beneath the belt,which could cause serious injury or death. So, if your seat belt is twisted, you muststraighten the seat belt to remove any twists and to allow the full width of the belt tobe used.

Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat beltused in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengerscould be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt formore than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupantproperly restrained.

Do not operate a vehicle with a damaged seat belt:Using a damaged seat belt is dangerous. An accident could damage the beltwebbing of the seat belt in use. A damaged seat belt cannot provide adequateprotection in a collision. Have an Authorized Mazda Dealer inspect all seat beltsystems in use during an accident before they are used again.

2-14


Seat Belt Systems


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (27,1)

Have your seat belts changed immediately if the pretensioner or load limiter hasbeen expended:

Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately inspect the front seat beltpretensioners and air bags after any collision. Like the air bags, the front seat beltpretensioners and load limiters will only function once and must be replaced afterany collision that caused them to deploy. A seat belt with an expended pretensioneror load limiter is still better than wearing no seat belt at all; however, if the frontseat belt pretensioners and load limiters are not replaced, the risk of injury in acollision will increase.

Positioning the Shoulder Portion of the Seat Belt:Improper positioning of the shoulder portion of the seat belt is dangerous. Alwaysmake sure the shoulder portion of the seat belt is positioned across your shoulderand near your neck, but never under your arm, on your neck, or on your upper arm.

Positioning the Lap Portion of the Seat Belt:The lap portion of the seat belt worn too high is dangerous. In a collision, this wouldconcentrate the impact force directly on the abdominal area, causing serious injury.Wear the lap portion of the belt snugly and as low as possible.

CAUTIONBelt retraction may become difficult if the belts and rings are soiled, so try to keepthem clean. For more details about cleaning the seat belts, refer to “Cleaning theLap/Shoulder Belt Webbing” (page 6-65).

Ring


Seat Belt Systems

2-15


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (28,1)

qPregnant Women and Persons with Serious Medical Conditions

Pregnant women should always wear seat belts. Ask your doctor for specificrecommendations.The lap belt should be worn SNUGLYAND AS LOWAS POSSIBLE OVER THE HIPS.The shoulder belt should be worn across your shoulder properly, but never across thestomach area.Persons with serious medical conditions also should wear seat belts. Check with yourdoctor for any special instructions regarding specific medical conditions.

qEmergency Locking Mode

When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode.In the emergency locking mode, the belt remains comfortable on the occupant and theretractor will lock in position during a collision.If the belt is locked and cannot be pulled out, retract the belt once, and then try pulling itout slowly. If this fails, pull the belt strongly one time and loosen, then pull it out againslowly.(Seat Belt with Automatic Locking Mode)When the seat belt is fastened, it will always be in the emergency locking mode until it isswitched to automatic locking mode by pulling it all the way out to its full length. If thebelt feels tight and hinders comfortable movement while the vehicle is stopped or inmotion, it may be in the automatic locking mode because the belt has been pulled too farout. To return the belt to the more comfortable emergency locking mode, wait until thevehicle has stopped in a safe, level area, retract the belt fully to convert it back toemergency locking mode and then extend it around you again.

qAutomatic Locking Mode

Always use the automatic locking mode to keep the child-restraint system from shifting toan unsafe position in the event of an accident. To enable seat belt automatic locking mode,pull it all the way out and connect it as instructed on the child-restraint system. It willretract down to the child-restraint system and stay locked on it. See the section on childrestraint (page 2-22).

2-16


Seat Belt Systems


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (29,1)

Seat Belt

qFastening the Seat Belt

Seat belt buckle

Seat belt tongue

Position the lap belt as low as possible,not on the abdominal area, then adjust theshoulder belt so that it fits snugly againstyour body.

Keep low on hip bone

Too high

Take up slack

qUnfastening the Seat Belt

Depress the button on the seat belt buckle.If the belt does not fully retract, pull it outand check for kinks or twists. Then makesure it remains untwisted as it retracts.

Button

NOTEIf a belt does not fully retract, inspect it forkinks and twists. If it is still not retractingproperly, have it inspected at an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

qFront Shoulder Belt Adjuster

To raise To lower

Make sure the adjuster is locked.


Seat Belt Systems

2-17


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (30,1)

Seat Belt Warning SystemsIf it detects that the driver's seat belt isunfastened, the warning light or beepalerts the driver.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page4-23.

Front Seat Belt Pretensionerand Load Limiting Systems

For optimum protection, the driver andfront passenger seat belts are equippedwith pretensioner and load limitingsystems. For both these systems to workproperly you must wear the seat beltproperly.

Pretensioners:In moderate or severe frontal or near-frontal accidents, the front air bag andpretensioner systems deploysimultaneously.For deployment details, refer to the SRSAir Bag Deployment Criteria (page 2-51).The front seat belt retractors remove slackquickly as the air bags are expanding.Any time the air bags and seat beltpretensioners have fired they must bereplaced.A system malfunction or operationconditions are indicated by a warning.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page4-23.Refer to Air Bag/Front Seat BeltPretensioner System Warning Beep onpage 7-39.(With Front Passenger OccupantClassification System)In addition, the pretensioner system forthe front passenger, like the front and sidepassenger air bag, is designed to onlydeploy in accordance with the total seatedweight on the front passenger seat.For details, refer to the front passengerseat weight sensors(page 2-54).

2-18


Seat Belt Systems


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (31,1)

Load limiter:The load limiting system releases beltwebbing in a controlled manner to reducebelt force on the occupant's chest. Whilethe most severe load on a seat belt occursin frontal collisions, the load limiter hasan automatic mechanical function and canactivate in any accident mode withsufficient occupant movement.Even if the pretensioners have not fired,the load limiting function must bechecked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

WARNINGWear seat belts only as recommendedin this owner's manual:

Incorrect positioning of the driver andfront passenger seat belts isdangerous. Without properpositioning, the pretensioner andload limiting systems cannot provideadequate protection in an accidentand this could result in serious injury.For more details about wearing seatbelts, refer to “Fastening the seatbelts” (page 2-17).

Have your seat belts changedimmediately if the pretensioner or loadlimiter has been expended:

Always have an Authorized MazdaDealer immediately inspect the frontseat belt pretensioners and air bagsafter any collision. Like the air bags,the front seat belt pretensioners andload limiters will only function onceand must be replaced after anycollision that caused them to deploy.A seat belt with an expendedpretensioner or load limiter is stillbetter than wearing no seat belt atall; however, if the front seat beltpretensioners and load limiters arenot replaced, the risk of injury in acollision will increase.

Do not modify the components orwiring, or use electronic testing deviceson the pretensioner system:

Modifying the components or wiringof the pretensioner system, includingthe use of electronic testing devices isdangerous. You could accidentallyactivate it or make it inoperablewhich would prevent it fromactivating in an accident. Theoccupants or repairers could beseriously injured.

Properly dispose of the pretensionersystem:

Improper disposal of the pretensionersystem or a vehicle with non-deactivated pretensioners isdangerous. Unless all safetyprocedures are followed, injury couldresult. Have an Authorized MazdaDealer safely dispose of thepretensioner system or scrap apretensioner system equipped vehicle.


Seat Belt Systems

2-19


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (32,1)

NOTEl The pretensioner system will activate in a

moderate or greater frontal or near-frontal,or a severe side collision. It will notactivate in most rollovers, rear impacts.(With Front Passenger OccupantClassification System)In addition, the pretensioner system for thefront passenger is designed to only deployin accordance with the total seated weighton the front passenger seat.

l Some smoke (non-toxic gas) will bereleased when the air bags andpretensioners deploy. This does not indicatea fire. This gas normally has no effect onoccupants, however, those with sensitiveskin may experience light skin irritation. Ifresidue from the deployment of the air bagsor the front pretensioner system gets on theskin or in the eyes, wash it off as soon aspossible.

Seat Belt ExtenderIf your seat belt is not long enough, evenwhen fully extended, a seat belt extendermay be available to you at no charge fromyour Authorized Mazda Dealer.This extender will be only for you and forthe particular vehicle and seat. Even if itplugs into other seat belts, it may not holdin the critical moment of a crash.When ordering an extender, only orderone that provides the necessary additionallength to fasten the seat belt properly.Please contact your Authorized MazdaDealer for more information.

WARNINGDo not use a seat belt extender unlessit is necessary:

Using a seat belt extender when notnecessary is dangerous. The seat beltwill be too long and not fit properly.In an accident, the seat belt will notprovide adequate protection and youcould be seriously injured. Only usethe extender when it is required tofasten the seat belt properly.

2-20


Seat Belt Systems


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (33,1)

Do not use an improper extender:Using a seat belt extender that is foranother person or a different vehicleor seat is dangerous. The seat beltwill not provide adequate protectionand the user could be seriouslyinjured in an accident. Only use theextender provided for you and for theparticular vehicle and seat. NEVERuse the extender in a different vehicleor seat. If you sell your Mazda, donot leave your seat belt extender inthe vehicle. It could be usedaccidentally by the new owner of thevehicle. After removing the seat beltextender, discard it. Never use theseat belt extender in any othervehicle you may own in the future.

Do not use an extender that is toolong:

Using an extender that is too long isdangerous. The seat belt will not fitproperly. In an accident, the seat beltwill not provide adequate protectionand you could be seriously injured.Do not use the extender or chooseone shorter in length if the distancebetween the extender's buckle andthe center of the user's body is lessthan 15 cm (6 in).

Do not leave a seat belt extenderconnected to the buckle:

Leaving a seat belt extenderconnected to the buckle withoutusing the seat belt is dangerous.When the seat belt extender isconnected to the driver's seat beltbuckle (or front passenger) seat, theSRS driver's (or front passenger's) airbag system will determine that thedriver (or front passenger) is wearingthe seat belt even if the driver (orfront passenger) is not wearing it.This condition could cause thedriver's (or front passenger's) air bagto not activate correctly and result indeath or serious injury in the event ofcollision. Always wear the seat beltwith the seat belt extender.

Do not use the seat belt extender wheninstalling a child-restraint system onthe front or rear passenger seat:

Using a seat belt extender to fasten achild-restraint system on any seat isdangerous. Always follow the child-restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation instructions and neveruse a seat belt extender.

NOTEWhen not in use, remove the seat belt extenderand store it in the vehicle. If the seat beltextender is left connected, the seat beltextender might get damaged as it will notretract with the rest of the seat belt and caneasily fall out of the door when not in use andbe damaged. In addition, the seat belt warninglight will not illuminate and function properly.


Seat Belt Systems

2-21


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (34,1)

Child Restraint PrecautionsMazda strongly urges the use of child-restraint systems for children small enough to usethem.

You are required by law to use a child-restraint system for children in the U.S. and Canada.Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safetyof children riding in your vehicle.

Whatever child-restraint system you consider, please pick the appropriate one for the ageand size of the child, obey the law and follow the instructions that come with the individualchild-restraint system.

A child who has outgrown child-restraint systems should sit in the rear and use seat belts,both lap and shoulder. If the shoulder belt crosses the neck or face, move the child closer tothe center of the vehicle in the outboard seats, and towards the buckle on the right if thechild is seated on the center seat.

Statistics confirm that the rear seat is the best place for all children up to 12 years of age,and more so with a supplemental restraint system (air bags).

A rear-facing child-restraint system should NEVER be used on the front seat with the airbag system activated. The front passenger's seat is also the least preferred seat for otherchild-restraint systems.

(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, thefront passenger seat weight sensors work as a part of the supplemental restraint system.This system deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the frontpassenger seat belt pretensioner system when the front passenger air bag deactivationindicator light illuminates.

When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, the system shuts off the frontpassenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system, so make sure the frontpassenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.

Even if the front passenger air bag is shut off, Mazda strongly recommends that children beproperly restrained and child-restraint systems of all kinds are properly secured on the rearseats which are the best place for children.

For more details, refer to “Front passenger seat weight sensors” (page 2-54).

2-22


Child Restraint


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (35,1)

WARNINGUse the correct size child-restraint system:

For effective protection in vehicle accidents and sudden stops, a child must beproperly restrained using a seat belt or child-restraint system depending on age andsize. If not, the child could be seriously injured or even killed in an accident.

Follow the manufacturer's instructions and always keep the child-restraint systembuckled down:

An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision itcould move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Makesure any child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions. When not in use, remove it from thevehicle or fasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchorsfor LATCH child-restraint systems and the corresponding tether anchor.

Always secure a child in a proper child-restraint system:Holding a child in your arms while the vehicle is moving is extremely dangerous. Nomatter how strong the person may be, he or she cannot hold onto a child in asudden stop or collision and it could result in serious injury or death to the child orother occupants. Even in a moderate accident, the child may be exposed to air bagforces that could result in serious injury or death to the child, or the child may beslammed into an adult, causing injury to both child and adult.

Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag thatcould deploy:

Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous eventhough you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based onthe fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates. Thechild-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violentlybackward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.


Child Restraint

2-23


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (36,1)

(Except Mexico)Vehicles with a front passenger air bag have a warning label attached as shownbelow. The warning label reminds you not to put a rear-facing child-restraint systemon the front passenger seat at any time.

(Mexico)NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVEAIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.Vehicles with a front passenger air bag have a warning label attached as shownbelow. The warning label reminds you not to put a rear-facing child-restraint systemon the front passenger seat at any time.

Do not install a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passenger seat unlessit is unavoidable:

In a collision, the force of a deploying air bag could cause serious injury or death tothe child. If installing a front-facing child-restraint system on the front passengerseat is unavoidable, move the front passenger seat as far back as possible.

2-24


Child Restraint


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (37,1)

Seating a child in a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat is dangerousunder certain conditions (With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System):

Your vehicle is equipped with front passenger seat weight sensors. Even with thefront passenger seat weight sensors, if you must use the front passenger seat to seata child, using a child-restraint system on the front passenger seat under thefollowing conditions increases the danger of the front passenger air bag deployingand could result in serious injury or death to the child.Ø The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when

seating a child in the child-restraint system.Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint

system.Ø A rear passenger or luggage pushing or pulling down on the front passenger

seatback.Ø A rear passenger puts their feet on the front seat rails.Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.Ø Heavy items are placed in the seatback map pocket.Ø The seat is washed.Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items

placed behind it.Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver

seat.Ø Any accessories, which might increase the total seated weight on the front

passenger seat, are attached to the front passenger seat.The designated positions with seat belts on the rear seats are the safest places forchildren. Always use seat belts and child restraints.

Do not allow a child or anyone to lean over or against the side window of a vehiclewith side and curtain air bags:

It is dangerous to allow anyone to lean over or against the side window, the area ofthe front passenger seat, the front and rear window pillars and the roof edge alongboth sides from which the side and curtain air bags deploy, even if a child-restraintsystem is used. The impact of inflation from a side or curtain air bag could causeserious injury or death to an out of position child. Furthermore, leaning over oragainst the front door could block the side and curtain air bags and eliminate theadvantages of supplemental protection. With the front air bag and the additionalside air bag that comes out of the front seat, the rear seat is always a better locationfor children. Take special care not to allow a child to lean over or against the sidewindow, even if the child is seated in a child-restraint system.


Child Restraint

2-25


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (38,1)

Never use one seat belt on more than one person at a time:Using one seat belt for more than one person at a time is dangerous. A seat beltused in this way cannot spread the impact forces properly and the two passengerscould be crushed together and seriously injured or even killed. Never use one belt formore than one person at a time and always operate the vehicle with each occupantproperly restrained.

CAUTIONA seat belt or child-restraint system can become very hot in a closed vehicle duringwarm weather. To avoid burning yourself or a child, check them before you or yourchild touches them.

NOTEYour Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designed LATCHchild-restraint systems in the rear seats. When using these anchors to secure a child-restraint system,refer to “Using LATCH Lower Anchor ” (page 2-35).

2-26


Child Restraint


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (39,1)

Child-Restraint System Installation

qChild-Restraint System Types

In this owner's manual, explanation ofchild-restraint systems is provided for thefollowing three types of popular child-restraint systems: infant seat, child seat,booster seat.

NOTEl Installation position is determined by the

type of child-restraint system. Always readthe manufacturer's instructions and thisowner's manual carefully.

l Due to variations in the design of child-restraint systems, vehicle seats and seatbelts, all child-restraint systems may not fitall seating positions. Before purchasing achild-restraint system, it should be tested inthe specific vehicle seating position (orpositions) where it is intended to be used. Ifa previously purchased child-restraintsystem does not fit, you may need topurchase a different one that will.

Infant seatAn infant seat provides restraint bybracing the infant's head, neck and backagainst the seating surface.

Child seatA child seat restrains a child's body usingthe harness.

Booster seatA booster seat is a child restraintaccessory designed to improve the fit ofthe seat belt system around the child'sbody.


Child Restraint

2-27


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (40,1)

Installing Child-RestraintSystems

Accident statistics reveal that a child issafer in the rear seat. The front passenger'sseat is clearly the worst choice for anychild under 12, and with rear-facing child-restraint systems it is clearly unsafe due toair bags.

NOTEEven if your vehicle is equipped with frontpassenger seat weight sensors (page 2-54),which automatically deactivates the frontpassenger air bag, a rear seat is the safestplace for a child of any age or size.

Some child-restraint systems now comewith tethers and therefore must beinstalled on the seats that take tethers tobe effective. In your Mazda, tetheredchild-restraint systems can only beaccommodated in the three positions onthe rear seat.

Some child-restraint systems also employspecially designed LATCH attachments;refer to “Using LATCH Lower Anchor”(page 2-35).

WARNINGTethered Child-Restraint Systems WorkOnly on Tether-Equipped Rear Seats:

Installation of a tether equippedchild-restraint system in the frontpassenger's seat defeats the safetydesign of the system and will result inan increased chance of serious injuryif the child-restraint system goesforward without benefit of beingtethered.Place tether equipped child-restraintsystems where there are tetheranchors.

qAnchor Bracket

Anchor brackets for securing child-restraint systems are equipped in thevehicle. Locate each anchor positionusing the illustration.To install a child-restraint system, alwaysfollow the instruction manualaccompanying the child-restraint system.

Anchor bracket locationUse the indicated anchor bracket locationswhen installing a child-restraint systemequipped with a tether.

Anchor bracket

For left

For rightFor center

*1

*1

Except Mexico

2-28


Child Restraint


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (41,1)

WARNINGAlways attach the tether strap to thecorrect tether anchor position:

Attaching the tether strap to theincorrect tether anchor position isdangerous. In a collision, the tetherstrap could come off and loosen thechild-restraint system. If the child-restraint system moves it could resultin death or injury to the child.

Always route the tether strap betweenthe head restraint and the seatback:

Routing the tether strap on top of thehead restraint is dangerous. In acollision the tether strap could slideoff the head restraint and loosen thechild-restraint system. The child-restraint system could move whichmay result in death or injury to thechild.

Anchor bracket

Tether strap

Anchor bracket

Tether strap


Child Restraint

2-29


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (42,1)

qUsing Automatic Locking Mode

Follow these instructions when using achild-restraint system, unless you areattaching a LATCH-equipped child-restraint system to the rear LATCH loweranchors. Refer to “Using LATCH LowerAnchor” (page 2-35).

NOTEFollow the child-restraint systemmanufacturer's instructions carefully. If youare not sure whether you have a LATCHsystem or tether, check in the child-restraintsystem manufacturer's instructions and followthem accordingly. Depending on the type ofchild-restraint system, it may use LATCHsystem instead of seat belts or if the belt goesacross the child's chest, may recommendagainst using automatic locking mode.

1. Make sure the seatback is securelylatched by pushing it back until it isfully locked.

2. Raise the head restraint to the toplocked position.Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-12.

3. Secure the child-restraint system withthe lap portion of the lap/shoulder belt.See the manufacturer's instructions onthe child-restraint system for beltrouting instructions.

4. To get the retractor into the automaticlocking mode, pull the shoulder beltportion of the seat belt until the entirelength of the belt is out of the retractor.

5. Push the child-restraint system firmlyinto the vehicle seat. Be sure the beltretracts as snugly as possible. Aclicking noise from the retractor will beheard during retraction if the system isin the automatic locking mode. If thebelt does not lock the seat down tight,repeat this step.

2-30


Child Restraint


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (43,1)

NOTEInspect this function before each use of thechild-restraint system. You should not be ableto pull the shoulder belt out of the retractorwhile the system is in the automatic lockingmode. When you remove the child-restraintsystem, be sure the belt fully retracts to returnthe system to emergency locking mode beforeoccupants use the seat belts.

6. If your child-restraint system requiresthe use of a tether strap, refer to themanufacturer's instructions to hook andtighten the tether strap.

WARNINGUse the tether and tether anchor onlyfor a child-restraint system:

Using the tether or tether anchor tosecure anything but a child-restraintsystem is dangerous. This couldweaken or damage the tether ortether anchor and result in injury.



Anchor bracket

Tether strap

Anchor bracket

Tether strap

Always attach the tether strap to thecorrect tether anchor position:



Child Restraint

2-31


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (44,1)

qIf You Must Use the Front Seatfor Children

If you cannot put all children in the rearseat, at least put the smallest children inthe rear and be sure the largest child upfront uses the shoulder belt over theshoulder.NEVER put a rear-facing child-restraintsystem on the front passenger seatwhether your vehicle is equipped with aseat weight sensor or not.This seat is also not set up for tetheredchild-restraint systems, put them in one ofthe rear seat positions set up with tetheranchors.Likewise the LATCH child-restraintsystem cannot be secured in the frontpassenger's seat and should be used in therear seat.Do not allow anyone to sleep against theside window since your vehicle has sideand curtain air bags, it could cause seriousinjuries to an out of position occupant. Aschildren more often sleep in cars, it isbetter to put them in the rear seat. Ifinstalling the child-restraint system on thefront seat is unavoidable, follow theseinstructions when using a front-facingchild-restraint system in the frontpassenger's seat.

NOTEl To check if your front seats have side air

bags:Mazda vehicles equipped with side air bagwill have a “SRS AIRBAG” tag on theoutboard shoulder of the front seats.

l To check if your vehicle has curtain airbags:Mazda vehicles equipped with curtain airbag will have an “SRS AIRBAG” markingon the window pillars along the roof edge.

WARNINGAlways move the front passenger seatas far back as possible if installing afront-facing child-restraint system on itis unavoidable:

As your vehicle has front air bagsand doubly so because your vehiclehas side air bags, a front-facingchild-restraint system should be puton the front passenger seat onlywhen it is unavoidable.Even if the front passenger air bagdeactivation indicator lightilluminates, always move the seat asfar back as possible, because theforce of a deploying air bag couldcause serious injury or death to thechild.

Never use a rear-facing child-restraintsystem in the front seat with an air bagthat could deploy:

Rear-facing child-restraint systemson the front seat are particularlydangerous.Even in a moderate collision, thechild-restraint system can be hit by adeploying air bag and movedviolently backward resulting inserious injury or death to the child.Even though you may feel assuredthat the front passenger air bag willnot deploy based on the fact that thefront passenger air bag deactivationindicator light illuminates, youshould not use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat.

2-32


Child Restraint


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (45,1)

Do not allow a child or anyone to leanover or against the side window of avehicle with side and curtain air bags:

It is dangerous to allow anyone tolean over or against the side window,the area of the front passenger seat,the front and rear window pillars andthe roof edge along both sides fromwhich the side and curtain air bagsdeploy, even if a child-restraintsystem is used. The impact ofinflation from a side or curtain airbag could cause serious injury ordeath to an out of position child.Furthermore, leaning over or againstthe front door could block the sideand curtain air bags and eliminatethe advantages of supplementalprotection. With the front air bag andthe additional side air bag thatcomes out of the front seat, the rearseat is always a better location forchildren. Take special care not toallow a child to lean over or againstthe side window, even if the child isseated in a child-restraint system.

Front Passenger's Seat Child-RestraintSystem Installation (With automaticlocking mode seat belt)

1. Switch the ignition ON.

2. Slide the seat as far back as possible.

3. Place the child-restraint system on theseat without putting your weight on theseat and fasten the seat belt. See themanufacturer's instructions on thechild-restraint system for belt routinginstructions.

4. To get the retractor into the automaticlocking mode, pull the shoulder beltportion of the seat belt until the entirelength of the belt is out of the retractor.

5. Push the child-restraint system firmlyinto the vehicle seat. Be sure the beltretracts as snugly as possible. Aclicking noise from the retractor will beheard during retraction if the system isin automatic locking mode. If the beltdoes not lock the seat down tight,repeat the previous step and also thisone.


Child Restraint

2-33


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (46,1)

NOTEl Inspect this function before each use of the

child-restraint system. You should not beable to pull the shoulder belt out of theretractor while the system is in theautomatic locking mode. When you removethe child-restraint system, be sure the beltfully retracts to return the system toemergency locking mode before occupantsuse the seat belts.

l Follow the child-restraint systemmanufacturer's instructions carefully.Depending on the type of child-restraintsystem, it may not employ seat belts whichare in automatic locking mode.

6. Seat your child safely in the child-restraint system and secure the childaccording to the instructions from thechild-restraint system manufacturer.

7. (With Front Passenger OccupantClassification System)Make sure the front passenger air bagdeactivation indicator light illuminatesafter installing a child-restraint systemon the front passenger seat.If the front passenger air bagdeactivation indicator light does notilluminate, remove the child-restraintsystem, switch the ignition to OFF, andthen re-install the child-restraintsystem. (page 2-54)

Climate control

Fully Automatic Type

Manual Type

WARNINGDo not seat a child in a child-restraintsystem on the front passenger seat ifthe front passenger air bagdeactivation indicator light does notilluminate (With Front PassengerOccupant Classification System):

While it is always better to install anychild-restraint system on the rearseat, it is imperative that a child-restraint system ONLY be used on thefront passenger seat if thedeactivation indicator lightilluminates when the child is seatedin the child-restraint system (page2-54). Seating a child in a child-restraint system installed on the frontpassenger seat with the frontpassenger air bag deactivationindicator light not illuminated isdangerous. If this indicator light doesnot illuminate, this means that thefront passenger front and side airbags, and seat belt pretensioner areready for deployment. If an accidentwere to deploy an air bag, a child ina child-restraint system sitting in thefront passenger seat could beseriously injured or killed. If theindicator light does not illuminateafter seating a child in a child-restraint system on the frontpassenger seat, seat a child in achild-restraint system on the rearseat and consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer as soon as possible.

2-34


Child Restraint


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (47,1)

qUsing LATCH Lower Anchor

Your Mazda is equipped with LATCH lower anchors for attachment of specially designedLATCH child-restraint systems in the rear seats. Both anchors must be used, otherwise theseat will bounce around and put the child in danger. Most LATCH child-restraint systemsmust also be used in conjunction with a tether to be effective. If they have a tether youmust use it to better assure your child's safety.

WARNINGFollow the manufacturer's instructions for the use of the child-restraint system:

An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision itcould move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Makesure the child-restraint system is properly secured in place according to the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions.

Never attach two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor:Attaching two child-restraint systems to the same LATCH lower anchor is dangerous.In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child-restraintsystem attachments, and it may break, causing serious injury or death. If you use theseat position for another child-restraint system when an outboard LATCH position isoccupied, use the center seat belts instead, and the tether if tether-equipped.

Make sure the child-restraint system is properly secured:An unsecured child-restraint system is dangerous. In a sudden stop or a collision itcould move causing serious injury or death to the child or other occupants. Followthe child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions on belt routing to secure theseat just as you would with a child in it so that nobody is tempted to put a child inan improperly secured seat later on. When not in use, remove it from the vehicle orfasten it with a seat belt, or latch it down to BOTH LATCH lower anchors for LATCHchild-restraint systems.

Make sure there are no seat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH child-restraint system:

Not following the child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions when installingthe child-restraint system is dangerous. If seat belts or a foreign object prevent thechild-restraint system from being securely attached to the LATCH lower anchors andthe child-restraint system is installed improperly, the child-restraint system couldmove in a sudden stop or collision causing serious injury or death to the child orother occupants. When installing the child-restraint system, make sure there are noseat belts or foreign objects near or around the LATCH lower anchors. Always followthe child-restraint system manufacturer's instructions.


Child Restraint

2-35


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (48,1)

Installation on rear outboard seats

1. First, adjust the front seat to allowclearance between the child-restraintsystem and the front seat (page 2-5).

2. Make sure the seatback is securelylatched by pushing it back until it isfully locked.

3. Expand the area between the seatbottom and the seatback slightly toverify the locations of the LATCHlower anchors.

NOTEThe markings above the LATCH lower anchorsindicate the locations of the LATCH loweranchors for the attachment of a child-restraintsystem.

4. Raise the head restraint to the toplocked position.Refer to Head Restraints on page 2-12.

5. Secure the child-restraint system usingBOTH LATCH lower anchors,following the child-restraint systemmanufacturer's instruction. Pull on thechild-restraint to be sure both anchorsare engaged.

6. If your child-restraint system cameequipped with a tether, that means it isvery important to properly secure thetether for child safety. Please carefullyfollow the child-restraint systemmanufacturer's instructions wheninstalling tethers.

2-36


Child Restraint


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (49,1)

WARNINGUse the tether and tether anchor onlyfor a child-restraint system:

Using the tether or tether anchor tosecure anything but a child-restraintsystem is dangerous. This couldweaken or damage the tether ortether anchor and result in injury.



Anchor bracket

Tether strap



Installation on rear center seat

The LATCH lower anchors at the centerof the rear seat are much further apart thanthe sets of LATCH lower anchors forchild-restraint system installation at otherseating positions. Child-restraint systemswith rigid LATCH attachments cannot beinstalled on the center seating position.Some LATCH equipped child-restraintsystems can be placed in the centerposition and will reach the nearestLATCH lower anchors which are 443 mm(17.4 in) apart. LATCH compatible child-restraint systems (with attachments on beltwebbing) can be used at this seatingposition only if the child-restraint systemmanufacturer's instructions state that thechild-restraint system can be installed toLATCH lower anchors that are 443 mm(17.4 in) apart. Do not attach two child-restraint systems to the same LATCHlower anchor. If your child-restraintsystem has a tether, it must also be usedfor your child's optimum safety.

The procedure for installation on the rearoutboards seats is the same.

LATCH lower anchor location


Child Restraint

2-37


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (50,1)

WARNINGAlways route the tether strap betweenthe head restraint and the seatback:


Anchor bracket

Tether strap



2-38


Child Restraint


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (51,1)

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) PrecautionsThe front and side supplemental restraint systems (SRS) include up to 6 air bags. Pleaseverify which kinds of air bags are equipped on your vehicle by locating the “SRSAIRBAG” location indicators. These indicators are visible in the area where the air bagsare installed.The air bags are installed in the following locations:

l The steering wheel hub (driver air bag)l The front passenger dashboard (front passenger air bag)l The outboard sides of the front seatbacks (side air bags)l The front and rear window pillars, and the roof edge along both sides (curtain air bags)

The air bag supplemental restraint systems are designed to provide supplemental protectionin certain situations so seat belts are always important in the following ways:

Without seat belt usage, the air bags cannot provide adequate protection during an accident.Seat belt usage is necessary to:l Keep the occupant from being thrown into an inflating air bag.l Reduce the possibility of injuries during an accident that is not designed for air baginflation, such as roll-over or rear impact.

l Reduce the possibility of injuries in frontal, near frontal or side collisions that are notsevere enough to activate the air bags.

l Reduce the possibility of being thrown from your vehicle.l Reduce the possibility of injuries to lower body and legs during an accident because theair bags provide no protection to these parts of the body.

l Hold the driver in a position which allows better control of the vehicle.


SRS Air Bags

2-39


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (52,1)

If your vehicle is also equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system,refer to the Front Passenger Occupant Classification System (page 2-54) for details.If your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger occupant classification system, the frontpassenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates for a specified time after theignition is switched ON.

Climate control

Fully Automatic Type

Manual Type

Small children must be protected by a child-restraint system as stipulated by law in everystate and province. In certain states and provinces, larger children must use a child-restraintsystem (page 2-22).

Carefully consider which child-restraint system is necessary for your child and follow theinstallation directions in this Owner's Manual as well as the child-restraint systemmanufacturer's instructions.

WARNINGSeat belts must be worn in air bag equipped vehicles:

Depending only on the air bags for protection during an accident is dangerous.Alone, air bags may not prevent serious injuries. The appropriate air bags can beexpected to inflate only in the first accident, such as frontal, near frontal or sidecollisionsthat are at least moderate. Vehicle occupants should always wear seatbelts.

Children should not ride in the front passenger seat:Placing a child, 12 years or under, in the front seat is dangerous. The child could behit by a deploying air bag and be seriously injured or even killed. A sleeping child ismore likely to lean against the door and be hit by the side air bag in moderatecollision to the front-passenger side of the vehicle. Whenever possible, always securea child 12 years and under on the rear seats with an appropriate child-restraintsystem for the child's age and size.

2-40


SRS Air Bags


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (53,1)

Never use a rear-facing child-restraint system in the front seat with an air bag thatcould deploy:

Rear-facing child-restraint systems on the front seat are particularly dangerous eventhough you may feel assured that a front passenger air bag will not deploy based onthe fact that the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates. Thechild-restraint system can be hit by a deploying air bag and moved violentlybackward resulting in serious injury or death to the child.

Do not sit too close to the driver and front passenger air bags:Sitting too close to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placing handsor feet on them is extremely dangerous. The driver and front passenger air bagsinflate with great force and speed. Serious injuries could occur if someone is tooclose. The driver should always hold onto only the rim of the steering wheel. Thefront seat passenger should keep both feet on the floor. Front seat occupants shouldadjust their seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against theseatbacks with seat belts worn properly.

Sit in the center of the seat and wear seat belts properly:Sitting too close to the side air bag modules or placing hands on them, or sleepingup against the door or hanging out the windows is extremely dangerous. The sideand curtain air bags inflate with great force and speed directly expanding along thedoor on the side the car is hit. Serious injury could occur if someone is sitting tooclose to the door or leaning against a window, or if rear seat occupants grab thesides of the front seatbacks. Give the side and curtain air bags room to work bysitting in the center of the seat while the vehicle is moving with seat belts wornproperly.

Do not attach objects on or around the area where driver and front passenger airbags deploy:

Attaching an object to the driver and front passenger air bag modules or placingsomething in front of them is dangerous. In an accident, an object could interferewith air bag inflation and injure the occupants.


SRS Air Bags

2-41


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (54,1)

Do not attach objects on or around the area where a side air bag deploys:Attaching objects to the front seat in such a way as to cover the outboard side of theseat in any way is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with the sideair bag, which inflates from the outboard side of the front seats, impeding the addedprotection of the side air bag system or redirecting the air bag in a way that isdangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut open releasing the gas.Do not hang net bags, map pouches or backpacks with side straps on the frontseats. Never use seat covers on the front seats. Always keep the side air bag modulesin your front seats free to deploy in the event of a side collision.

Do not attach objects on or around the area where a curtain air bag deploys:Attaching objects to the areas where the curtain air bag activates such as on thewindshield glass, side door glass, front and rear window pillars and along the roofedge and assist grips is dangerous. In an accident the object could interfere with thecurtain air bag, which inflates from the front and rear window pillars and along theroof edge, impeding the added protection of the curtain air bag system or redirectingthe air bag in a way that is dangerous. Furthermore, the bag could be cut openreleasing the gas.Do not place hangers or any other objects on the assist grips. When hanging clothes,hang them on the coat hook directly. Always keep the curtain air bag modules freeto deploy in the event of a side collision .

Do not touch the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bagshave inflated:

Touching the components of the supplemental restraint system after the air bagshave inflated is dangerous. Immediately after inflation, they are very hot. You couldget burned.

Never install any front-end equipment to your vehicle:Installation of front-end equipment, such as frontal protection bar (kangaroo bar,bull bar, push bar, or other similar devices), snowplow, or winches, is dangerous. Theair bag crash sensor system could be affected. This could cause air bags to inflateunexpectedly, or it could prevent the air bags from inflating during an accident.Front occupants could be seriously injured.

Do not modify the suspension:Modifying the vehicle suspension is dangerous. If the vehicle's height or thesuspension is modified, the vehicle will be unable to accurately detect a collisionresulting in incorrect or unexpected air bag deployment and the possibility of seriousinjuries.

2-42


SRS Air Bags


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (55,1)

Do not modify a front door or leave any damage unrepaired. Always have anAuthorized Mazda Dealer inspect a damaged front door:

Modifying a front door or leaving any damage unrepaired is dangerous. Each frontdoor has a side crash sensor as a component of the supplemental restraint system. Ifholes are drilled in a front door, a door speaker is left removed, or a damaged door isleft unrepaired, the sensor could be adversely affected causing it to not detect thepressure of an impact correctly during a side collision. If a sensor does not detect aside impact correctly, the side and curtain air bags and the front seat beltpretensioner may not operate normally which could result in serious injury tooccupants.

Do not modify the supplemental restraint system:Modifying the components or wiring of the supplemental restraint system isdangerous. You could accidentally activate it or make it inoperable. Do not makeany modifications to the supplemental restraint system. This includes installing trim,badges, or anything else over the air bag modules. It also includes installing extraelectrical equipment on or near system components or wiring. An Authorized MazdaDealer can provide the special care needed in the removal and installation of frontseats. It is important to protect the air bag wiring and connections to assure that thebags do not accidentally deploy and that the seats retain an undamaged air bagconnection.

Do not place luggage or other objects under the front seats:Placing luggage or other objects under the front seats is dangerous. The componentsessential to the supplemental restraint system could be damaged, and in the event ofa side collision, the appropriate air bags may not deploy, which could result in deathor serious injury. To prevent damage to the components essential to thesupplemental restraint system, do not place luggage or other objects under the frontseats.

Do not operate a vehicle with damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner systemcomponents:

Expended or damaged air bag/seat belt pretensioner system components must bereplaced after any collision which caused them to deploy or damage them. Only atrained Authorized Mazda Dealer can fully evaluate these systems to see that theywill work in any subsequent accident. Driving with an expended or damaged air bagor pretensioner unit will not afford you the necessary protection in the event of anysubsequent accident which could result in serious injury or death.

Do not remove interior air bag parts:Removing any components such as the front seats, front dashboard, the steeringwheel or parts on the front and rear window pillars and along the roof edge,containing air bag parts or sensors is dangerous. These parts contain essential airbag components. The air bag could accidentally activate and cause serious injuries.Always have an Authorized Mazda Dealer remove these parts.


SRS Air Bags

2-43


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (56,1)

Properly dispose of the air bag system:Improper disposal of an air bag or a vehicle with live air bags in it can be extremelydangerous. Unless all safety procedures are followed, injury could result. Have anAuthorized Mazda Dealer safely dispose of the air bag system or scrap an air bagequipped vehicle.

NOTEl If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraint

system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with acertified physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to “Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)”(page 8-2).

l When an air bag deploys, a loud inflation noise can be heard and some smoke will be released.Neither is likely to cause injury, however, the texture of the air bags may cause light skin injurieson body parts not covered with clothing through friction.

l Should you sell your Mazda, we urge you to tell the new owner of its air bag systems and thatfamiliarization with all instructions about them, from the Owner's Manual, is important.

l This highly-visible label is displayed which warns against the use of rear-facing child-restraintsystems on the front passenger seat.

(Except Mexico)

(Mexico)

2-44


SRS Air Bags


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (57,1)

Supplemental Restraint System Components

With front passenger occupant classification system


SRS Air Bags

2-45


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (58,1)

Without front passenger occupant classification system

Driver/Front passenger inflators and air bagsCrash sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)Front seat belt pretensioners (page 2-18)Front air bag sensorsSide crash sensorsAir bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light (page 4-23)Side and curtain inflators and air bagsFront passenger air bag deactivation indicator light (page 2-54)Front passenger seat weight sensors (page 2-54)Front passenger seat weight sensor control moduleDriver and front passenger seat belt buckle switches (page 2-59)

NOTE- are equipped only on models with the front passenger occupant classification system.

2-46


SRS Air Bags


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (59,1)

How the SRS Air Bags WorkYour Mazda is equipped with the following types of SRS air bags. SRS air bags aredesigned to work together with the seat belts to help to reduce injuries during an accident.The SRS air bags are designed to provide further protection for passengers in addition tothe seat belt functions. Be sure to wear seat belts properly.

qFront Seat Belt Pretensioners

The front seat belt pretensioners are designed to deploy in moderate or severe frontal, nearfrontal collisions. In addition, during a side collision, the pretensioner operates on the sidein which the collision occurs.

qDriver Air Bag

The driver's air bag is mounted in the steering wheel.When air bag crash sensors detect a frontal impact of greater than moderate force, thedriver's air bag inflates quickly helping to reduce injury mainly to the driver's head or chestcaused by directly hitting the steering wheel.For more details about air bag deployment, refer to “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”(page 2-51).(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)The driver's dual-stage air bag controls air bag inflation in two energy stages. During animpact of moderate severity the driver's air bag deploys with lesser energy, whereas duringmore severe impacts, it deploys with more energy.

qFront Passenger Air Bag

The front passenger air bag is mounted in the front passenger dashboard.The inflation mechanism for the front passenger air bag is the same as the driver's air bag,as mentioned above.For more details about air bag deployment, refer to “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”(page 2-51).


SRS Air Bags

2-47


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (60,1)

(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)In addition, the front passenger air bag is designed to only deploy in accordance with thetotal seated weight on the front passenger seat. For details, refer to the front passengeroccupant classification system (page 2-54).

qSide Air Bags

The side air bags are mounted in the outboard sides of the front seatbacks.When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, thesystem inflates the side air bag only on the side in which the vehicle was hit. The side airbag inflates quickly to reduce injury to the driver or front passenger's chest caused bydirectly hitting interior parts such as a door or window.For more details about air bag deployment, refer to “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”(page 2-51).(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)In addition, the front passenger side air bag is designed to only deploy in accordance withthe total seated weight on the front passenger seat. For details, refer to the front passengeroccupant classification system (page 2-54).

2-48


SRS Air Bags


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (61,1)

qCurtain Air Bags

The curtain air bags are mounted in the front and rear window pillars, and the roof edgealong both sides.When the air bag crash sensors detect a side impact of greater than moderate force, thecurtain air bag inflates quickly and helps to reduce injury mainly to the rear outboardpassenger's head caused by directly hitting interior parts such as a door or window.For more details about air bag deployment, refer to “SRS Air Bag Deployment Criteria”(page 2-51).In a side impact:Greater than moderate impact to one side of the vehicle will cause the curtain air bag onthat side only to inflate.

Only one side curtain air bag will deploy on the side of the vehicle that receives the force of an impact.

(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)In an angled collision:During a collision, the driver and front passenger's air bags will deploy. Depending on thenature of the impact, the side air bag and the curtain air bag may deploy.


SRS Air Bags

2-49


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (62,1)

qWarning Light/Beep

A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-23.Refer to Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Beep on page 7-39.

2-50


SRS Air Bags


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (63,1)

SRS Air Bag Deployment CriteriaThis chart indicates the applicable SRS equipment that will deploy depending on the typeof collision.(The illustrations are the representative cases of collisions.)

SRSequipment

Types of collision

A severe frontal/near frontal collision A severe side collision A rear collision

Front seatbelt

pretensionerX*1 (both sides) X*1 (impact side only)

No air bag and front seatbelt pretensioner will beactivated in a rear collision.

Driver airbag

X

Frontpassenger air

bagX*1

Side air bag X*2 X*1 (impact side only)

Curtain airbag

X*2 X (impact side only)

X: The SRS air bag equipment is designed to deploy in a collision.*1 (With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)

The front passenger front and side air bags and the seat belt pretensioner are designedto deploy depending on the condition of the total seated weight on the front passengerseat.

*2 (With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)In an angled collision, the side air bag and curtain air bag may deploy.


SRS Air Bags

2-51


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (64,1)

Limitations to SRS Air BagIn severe collisions such as those described previously in “SRS Air Bag DeploymentCriteria”, the applicable SRS air bag equipment will deploy. However, in some accidents,the equipment may not deploy depending on the type of collision and its severity.

Limitations to front/near front collision detection:The following illustrations are examples of front/near front collisions that may not bedetected as severe enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.

Impacts involving trees or poles Frontal offset impact to the vehicle

Rear-ending or running under a truck's tail gate

Limitations to side collision detection:The following illustrations are examples of side collisions that may not be detected assevere enough to deploy the SRS air bag equipment.

Side impacts involving trees or poles Side impacts with two-wheeled vehicles

2-52


SRS Air Bags


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (65,1)

Roll-over


SRS Air Bags

2-53


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (66,1)

Front Passenger Occupant Classification Systemí

First, please read “Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Precautions” (page 2-39)carefully.

qFront Passenger Seat Weight Sensor

Your vehicle is equipped with a front passenger seat weight sensors as a part of thesupplemental restraint system. These sensors are located under both of the front passengerseat rails. These sensors determine the total seated weight on the front passenger seat andmonitor the seat belt buckle for the front passenger seat. The SAS unit is designed toprevent the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system fromdeploying if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.To reduce the chance of injuries caused by deployment of the front passenger air bag, thesystem deactivates the front passenger front and side air bags and also the seat beltpretensioner system when the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator lightilluminates. Refer to the following table for the front passenger air bag deactivationindicator light illumination conditions.

This system shuts off the front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensionersystem, so make sure the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminatesaccording to the following table.

The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light flashes and the frontpassenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates if the sensors have a possiblemalfunction. If this happens, the front passenger front and side air bags and seat beltpretensioner system will not deploy.

2-54


íSome models.

SRS Air Bags


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (67,1)

Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light

This indicator light illuminates to remind you that the front passenger front and side airbags and seat belt pretensioner will not deploy during a collision.

Fully Automatic Type climate controlManual Type climate control

If the front passenger weight sensors are normal, the indicator light illuminates when theignition is switched ON. The light turns off after a few seconds.The front/passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates or is off under the following conditions:

Condition detected by thefront passenger occupant

classification system

Front passenger air bagdeactivation indicator light

Front passenger front andside air bags

Front passenger seatbelt pretensioner

system

Empty (Not occupied) On Deactivated Deactivated

Child or child-restraintsystem*1 On Deactivated Deactivated

Adult*2 Off Ready Ready

*1 : If a larger child sits on the front passenger seat, the sensors might detect the child as being an adult dependingon the child's physique.

*2 : If a smaller adult sits on the front passenger seat, the sensors might detect the person as being a childdepending on the person's physique.

The curtain air bag is ready for inflating regardless of the chart above.

If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate when theignition is switched ON and does not illuminate as indicated in the above chart, do notallow a child to sit in the front passenger seat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer assoon as possible. The system may not work properly in an accident.


SRS Air Bags

2-55


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (68,1)

WARNINGDo not decrease the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:

When an adult or large child sits on the front passenger seat, decreasing the totalseated weight on the front passenger seat required for air bag deployment isdangerous. The front passenger seat weight sensors will detect the reduced totalseated weight condition and the front passenger front and side air bags and seatbelt pretensioner system will not deploy during an accident. The front passenger willnot have the supplementary protection of the air bag, which could result in seriousinjury. Decreasing the total seated weight on the front passenger seat could result inan air bag not deploying under the following conditions, for example:

2-56


SRS Air Bags


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (69,1)

Ø A front passenger is seated as shown in the following figure:

Ø A rear passenger pushes up on the front passenger seat with their feet.Ø Luggage or other items placed under the front passenger seat or between the

front passenger seat and driver seat that push up the front passenger seatbottom.

Ø Any accessories which might decrease the total seated weight on the frontpassenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.

The front passenger front and side air bags and seat belt pretensioner systems willdeactivate if the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates.


SRS Air Bags

2-57


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (70,1)

Do not increase the total seated weight on the front passenger seat:When an infant or small child sits on the front passenger seat, increasing the totalseated weight on the front passenger seat is dangerous. The front passenger seatweight sensors will detect the increased total seated weight, which could result in theunexpected deployment of the front passenger front and side air bags and seat beltpretensioner system in an accident and may cause serious injury. Increasing the totalseated weight on the front passenger seat could result in the front passenger frontand side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system deployment in an accident underthe following conditions, for example:Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seat with the child in the child-restraint

system.Ø A rear passenger or luggage push or pull down on the front passenger seatback.Ø A rear passenger steps on the front passenger seat rails with their feet.Ø Luggage or other items are placed on the seatback or hung on the head restraint.Ø Heavy items are placed in the seatback map pocket.Ø The seat is washed.Ø Liquids are spilled on the seat.Ø The front passenger seat is moved backward, pushing into luggage or other items

placed behind it.Ø The front passenger seatback contacts the rear seat.Ø Luggage or other items are placed between the front passenger seat and driver

seat.Ø Any accessories which might increase the total seated weight on the front

passenger seat are attached to the front passenger seat.

CAUTIONØ To assure proper deployment of the front air bag and to prevent damage to the

sensors in the front seat bottoms:Ø Do not place sharp objects on the front seat bottoms or leave heavy luggage on

them.Ø Do not spill any liquids on the front seats or under the front seats.

Ø To allow the sensors to function properly, always perform the following:Ø Adjust the front seats as far back as possible and always sit upright against the

seatbacks with seat belts worn properly.Ø If you place your child on the front passenger seat, secure the child-restraint

system properly and slide the front passenger seat as far back as possible(page2-30).

2-58


SRS Air Bags


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (71,1)

NOTEl The system requires about 10 seconds to alternate between turning the front passenger front and

side air bags and seat belt pretensioner system on or off.l The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate repeatedly if luggage or

other items are put on the front passenger seat, or if the temperature of the vehicle's interiorchanges suddenly.

l The front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light may illuminate for 10 seconds if the totalseated weight on the front passenger seat changes.

l The air bag/front seat belt pretensioner system warning light might illuminate if the frontpassenger seat receives a severe impact.

l If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light does not illuminate after installing achild-restraint system on the front passenger seat, first, re-install your child-restraint systemaccording to the procedure in this owner's manual. Then, if the front passenger air bagdeactivation indicator light still does not illuminate, install the child-restraint system on the rearseat and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon as possible.

l If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator light illuminates when an adult is seated inthe front passenger seat, have the passenger re-adjust their posture by sitting with their feet on thefloor, and then re-fastening the seat belt. If the front passenger air bag deactivation indicator lightstill illuminates, move the passenger to the rear seat. If sitting in the rear seat is not possible, slidethe front passenger seat as far back as possible. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer as soon aspossible.

qDriver and Front Passenger Buckle Switches

The buckle switches on the front seat belts detect whether or not the front seat belts aresecurely fastened and further control the deployment of the air bags.


SRS Air Bags

2-59


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (72,1)

Constant MonitoringThe following components of the air bag systems are monitored by a diagnostic system:

l Crash sensors, and diagnostic module (SAS unit)l Front air bag sensorsl Air bag modulesl Side crash sensorsl Air bag/Front seat belt pretensioner system warning lightl Front seat belt pretensionersl Related wiring(With Front Passenger Occupant Classification System)l Front passenger air bag deactivation indicator lightl Front passenger seat weight sensorsl Front passenger seat weight sensor control modulel Front passenger seat belt buckle switches

The diagnostic module continuously monitors the system's readiness. This begins when theignition is switched ON and continues while the vehicle is being driven.

2-60


SRS Air Bags


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (73,1)

3 Before Driving

Use of various features, including keys, doors, mirrors and windows.

Keys .......................................................... 3-2Keys .................................................... 3-2Keyless Entry System ......................... 3-3

Advanced Keyless Entry System ............ 3-9Advanced Keyless Entry Systemí ..... 3-9Operational Range ............................ 3-10

Doors and Locks .................................... 3-11Door Locks ....................................... 3-11Trunk Lid .......................................... 3-19Inside Trunk Release Leverí ............ 3-21

Fuel and Emission ................................. 3-23Fuel and Engine ExhaustPrecautions ........................................ 3-23Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap ..................... 3-26

Steering Wheel ....................................... 3-28Steering Wheel .................................. 3-28

Mirrors ................................................... 3-29Mirrors .............................................. 3-29

Windows ................................................. 3-32Power Windows ................................ 3-32Moonroofí ....................................... 3-37

Security System ..................................... 3-40Modification and Add-OnEquipment ......................................... 3-40Immobilizer System .......................... 3-40Theft-Deterrent Systemí .................. 3-42

Driving Tips ........................................... 3-44Break-In Period ................................. 3-44Money-Saving Suggestions .............. 3-44Hazardous Driving ............................ 3-45Floor Mat .......................................... 3-45Rocking the Vehicle .......................... 3-46Winter Driving .................................. 3-46Driving In Flooded Area ................... 3-48Overloading ...................................... 3-48Driving on Uneven Road .................. 3-49

Towing .................................................... 3-50Trailer Towing ................................... 3-50Recreational Towing ......................... 3-50

3-1íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (74,1)

Keys

WARNINGDo not leave the key in your vehiclewith children and keep them in a placewhere your children will not find orplay with them:

Leaving children in a vehicle with thekey is dangerous. This could result insomeone being badly injured or evenkilled. Children may find these keysto be an interesting toy to play withand could cause the power windowsor other controls to operate, or evenmake the vehicle move.

CAUTIONØ Because the key (transmitter) uses

low-intensity radio waves, it maynot function correctly under thefollowing conditions:Ø The key is carried with

communication devices such ascellular phones.

Ø The key contacts or is coveredby a metal object.

Ø The key is near electronicdevices such as personalcomputers.

Ø Non-Mazda genuine electronicequipment is installed in thevehicle.

Ø There is equipment whichdischarges radio waves near thevehicle.

Ø The key (transmitter) mayconsume battery power excessivelyif it receives high-intensity radiowaves. Do not place the key nearelectronic devices such astelevisions or personal computers.

Ø To avoid damage to the key(transmitter), DO NOT:Ø Drop the key.Ø Get the key wet.Ø Disassemble the key.Ø Expose the key to high

temperatures on places such asthe dashboard or hood, underdirect sunlight.

Ø Expose the key to any kind ofmagnetic field.

Ø Place heavy objects on the key.Ø Put the key in an ultrasonic

cleaner.Ø Put any magnetized objects

close to the key.

3-2

Before Driving

Keys


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (75,1)

A code number is stamped on the plateattached to the key set; detach this plateand store it in a safe place (not in thevehicle) for use if you need to make areplacement key (auxiliary key).Also write down the code number andkeep it in a separate safe and convenientplace, but not in the vehicle.

If your key (auxiliary key) is lost, consultyour Authorized Mazda Dealer and haveyour code number ready.

NOTEThe driver must carry the key to ensure thesystem functions properly.

Operation indicator light

Auxiliary keyTransmitter

Key code number plate

Pull out the auxiliary key from the key(transmitter).

Keyless Entry SystemThis system uses the key buttons toremotely lock and unlock the doors andthe trunk lid, and opens the trunk lid.The system can start the engine withouthaving to take the key out of your purseor pocket.It can also help you signal for attention.Operating the theft-deterrent system isalso possible on theft-deterrent system-equipped vehicles.Press the buttons slowly and carefully.

System malfunctions or warnings areindicated by the following warning lightsor beeps.For vehicles with the type A instrumentcluster, check the displayed message formore information and, if necessary, havethe vehicle inspected at an AuthorizedMazda Dealer, according to the indication.l KEY Warning Light (Red)Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights onpage 4-23.

l Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)Warning BeepRefer to Ignition Not Switched Off(STOP) Warning Beep on page 7-40.

l Key Removed from Vehicle WarningBeepRefer to Key Removed from VehicleWarning Beep on page 7-40.

If you have a problem with the key,consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

If your key is lost or stolen, consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer as soon aspossible for a replacement and to makethe lost or stolen key inoperative.

Before Driving

Keys

3-3


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (76,1)

CAUTIONRadio equipment like this is governedby laws.Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance could voidthe user's authority to operate theequipment.

NOTEl The keyless entry system operation may

vary due to local conditions.l The keyless entry system is fully operational

(door/trunk lid lock/unlock) when the pushbutton start is switched off. The system doesnot operate if the push button start isswitched to any position other than off.

l If the key does not operate when pressing abutton or the operational range becomestoo small, the battery may be dead. Toinstall a new battery, refer to ReplaceElectrical Battery(page 6-32).

l Additional keys can be obtained at anAuthorized Mazda Dealer. Up to 6 keys canbe used with the keyless functions pervehicle. Bring all keys to an AuthorizedMazda Dealer when additional keys arerequired.

qTransmitter

NOTEl (With theft-deterrent system)

The hazard warning lights flash when thetheft-deterrent system is armed or turnedoff.Refer to Theft-Deterrent System on page3-42.

l (With the advanced keyless function)A beep sound can be heard for confirmationwhen the doors and trunk lid are locked/unlocked using the key. If you prefer, thebeep sound can be turned off.The volume of the beep sound can also bechanged.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.

Use the following procedure to change thesetting.1. Switch the ignition off and close all of the

doors and the trunk lid.2. Open the driver's door.3. Within 30 seconds of opening the driver's

door, press and hold the LOCK button onthe key for 5 seconds or longer.All of the doors and the trunk lid lock andthe beep sound activates at the currently setvolume. (If the beep sound is currently setto not activate, it will not activate.) Thesetting changes each time the LOCK buttonon the key is pressed and the beep soundactivates at the set volume. (If the beepsound has been set to not activate, it willnot activate.)

4. The setting change is completed by doingany one of the following:l Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.l Close the driver's door.l Open the trunk lid.l The key is not operated for 10 seconds.l Press any button except the LOCK

button on the key.l A request switch is pressed.

3-4

Before Driving

Keys


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (77,1)

The operation indicator light flashes whenthe buttons are pressed.

Lock button

To lock the doors and the trunk lid, pressthe lock button and the hazard warninglights will flash once.(With the advanced keyless function)A beep sound will be heard once.

To confirm that all doors and the trunk lidhave been locked, press the lock buttonagain within 5 seconds. If they are closedand locked, the horn will sound.

NOTEl The doors and the trunk lid can be locked

by pressing the lock button while any otherdoor or the trunk lid is open. The hazardwarning lights will not flash.When the lock button is pressed while anydoor is open and then the door is closed, allthe doors and the trunk lid are locked.

l Confirm that all doors and the trunk lid arelocked visually or audibly by use of thedouble click.

l Make sure all doors and the trunk lid arelocked after pressing the button.

l (With theft-deterrent system)When the doors are locked by pressing thelock button on the key while the theft-deterrent system is armed, the hazardwarning lights will flash once to indicatethat the system is armed.

Unlock button

To unlock the driver's door, press theunlock button and the hazard warninglights will flash twice.(With the advanced keyless function)A beep sound will be heard twice.

To unlock all doors, press the unlockbutton again within 3 seconds and twomore beep sounds will be heard.

NOTEl The system can be set to unlock all doors by

performing a single operation.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.



door, press and hold the UNLOCK buttonon the key for 5 seconds or longer. Thesound of the doors locking/unlocking canbe heard.After this, the system switches the settingeach time the UNLOCK button is pressed(the sound of the doors locking/unlockingcan be heard).

Before Driving

Keys

3-5


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (78,1)

4. The setting change is completed by doingany one of the following:l Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.l Close the driver's door.l Open the trunk lid.l The key is not operated for 10 seconds.l Press any button except the UNLOCK


l (Auto re-lock function)After unlocking with the key, all doors andthe trunk lid will automatically lock if anyof the following operations are notperformed within about 60 seconds. If yourvehicle has a theft-deterrent system, thehazard warning lights will flash forconfirmation.The time required for the doors to lockautomatically can be changed.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.l A door or the trunk lid is opened.l The push button start is switched to any

position other than off.l (With theft-deterrent system)

When the doors are unlocked by pressingthe unlock button on the key while the theft-deterrent system is turned off, the hazardwarning lights will flash twice to indicatethat the system is turned off.

Trunk button

To open the trunk lid, press and hold thetrunk button until the trunk lid opens.

Panic button

If you witness from a distance someoneattempting to break into or damage yourvehicle, press and hold the panic button toactivate the vehicle's alarm.

NOTEThe panic button will work whether any dooror the trunk lid is open or closed.

(Turning on the alarm)

Pressing the panic button for 1 second ormore will trigger the alarm for about 2minutes and 30 seconds, and thefollowing will occur:l The horn sounds intermittently.l The hazard warning lights flash.

(Turning off the alarm)

The alarm stops by pressing any button onthe key.

3-6

Before Driving

Keys


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (79,1)

qOperational Range

The system operates only when the driveris in the vehicle or within operationalrange while the key is being carried.

Starting the Engine

NOTEl Starting the engine may be possible even if

the key is outside of the vehicle andextremely close to a door and window,however, always start the engine from thedriver's seat.If the vehicle is started and the key is not inthe vehicle, the vehicle will not restart afterit is shut off and the push button start isswitched to off.

l The trunk is out of the assured operationalrange, however, if the key (transmitter) isoperable the engine will start.

With the advanced keyless function

Interior antenna

Operational range

Without the advanced keyless function

Interior antenna

Operational range

NOTEThe engine may not start if the key is placed inthe following areas:l Around the dashboardl In the storage compartments such as the

glove compartmentl On the rear parcel shelf

qKey Suspend Function

If a key is left in the vehicle, the functionsof the key left in the vehicle aretemporarily suspended to prevent theft ofthe vehicle.The following are inoperable:l Starting the engine using the pushbutton start.

l (With the advanced keyless function)Operating the request switches.

To restore these functions, perform anyone of the following:l Press a button on the key which hashad its functions temporarilysuspended.

Before Driving

Keys

3-7


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (80,1)

l (Manual transaxle)When carrying another key, depress theclutch pedal until the KEY indicatorlight (green) illuminates.(Automatic transaxle)When carrying another key, depress thebrake pedal until the KEY indicatorlight (green) illuminates.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights onpage 4-23.

3-8

Before Driving

Keys


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (81,1)

Advanced Keyless EntrySystemí

WARNINGRadio waves from the key may affectmedical devices such as pacemakers:

Before using the key near people whouse medical devices, ask the medicaldevice manufacturer or yourphysician if radio waves from the keywill affect the device.

The advanced keyless function allows youto lock/unlock the doors and trunk lid, oropen the trunk lid while carrying the keywithout using the key.

System malfunctions or warnings areindicated by the following warning beeps.l Request switch Inoperable WarningBeepRefer to Request Switch InoperableWarning Beep (With the advancedkeyless function) on page 7-40.

l Key Left-in-Trunk Warning BeepRefer to Key Left-in-trunk WarningBeep (With the advanced keylessfunction) on page 7-41.

l Key Left-in-vehicle Warning BeepRefer to Key Left-in-vehicle WarningBeep (With the advanced keylessfunction) on page 7-41.

NOTEThe advanced keyless entry system functionscan be deactivated to prevent any possibleadverse effect on a user wearing a pacemakeror other medical device. If the system isdeactivated, you will be unable to start theengine by carrying the key. Consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer for details. If theadvanced keyless entry system has beendeactivated, you can start the engine byfollowing the procedure indicated when the keybattery goes dead.Refer to Engine Start Function When KeyBattery is Dead on page 4-6.

Before Driving

Advanced Keyless Entry System

3-9íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (82,1)

Operational RangeThe system operates only when the driveris in the vehicle or within operationalrange while the key is being carried.

NOTEWhen the battery power is low, or in placeswhere there are high-intensity radio waves ornoise, the operational range may becomenarrower or the system may not operate.

qLocking, Unlocking the Doorsand the Trunk Lid

Exterior antenna

Operational range

80cm (31in)

80cm (31in)

NOTEThe system may not operate if you are tooclose to the windows, door handles.

qOpening the Trunk Lid

Exterior antenna

Operational range

80cm (31in)

3-10

Before Driving

Advanced Keyless Entry System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (83,1)

Door Locks

WARNINGAlways take all children and pets withyou or leave a responsible person withthem:

Leaving a child or a pet unattendedin a parked vehicle is dangerous. Inhot weather, temperatures inside avehicle can become high enough tocause brain damage or even death.

Do not leave the key in your vehiclewith children and keep them in a placewhere your children will not find orplay with them:

Leaving children in a vehicle with thekey is dangerous. This could result insomeone being badly injured or evenkilled.

Keep all doors locked when driving:Unlocked doors in a moving vehicleare dangerous. Passengers can fallout if a door is accidentally openedand can more easily be thrown out inan accident.

Always close all the windows andmoonroof, lock the doors and take thekey with you when leaving your vehicleunattended:

Leaving your vehicle unlocked isdangerous as children could lockthemselves in a hot vehicle, whichcould result in death. Also, a vehicleleft unlocked becomes an easy targetfor thieves and intruders.

After closing the doors, always verifythat they are securely closed:

Doors not securely closed aredangerous, if the vehicle is drivenwith a door not securely closed, thedoor could open unexpectedlyresulting in an accident.

Always confirm the safety around thevehicle before opening a door:

Suddenly opening a door isdangerous. A passing vehicle or apedestrian could be hit and cause anaccident.

Before Driving

Doors and Locks

3-11


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (84,1)

NOTEl When the ignition is switched to ACC or

ON, the vehicle lock-out prevention featureprevents you from locking yourself out ofthe vehicle.All doors and the trunk lid willautomatically unlock if they are lockedusing the power door locks with any dooropen.The vehicle lock-out prevention featuredoes not operate while the ignition isswitched off.(With the advanced keyless function)When any door is opened from the outsidewhile the key is inside the vehicle, theclosed doors are locked. All the doors areautomatically unlocked by closing the opendoor and the beep sound is heard for about10 seconds to notify the driver that the keyhas been left in the vehicle.

l (Door unlock (control) system withcollision detection)This system automatically unlocks thedoors in the event the vehicle is involved inan accident to allow passengers to get outof the vehicle immediately and preventbeing trapped inside. While the ignition isswitched ON and in the event the vehiclereceives an impact strong enough to inflatethe air bags, all the doors are automaticallyunlocked after about 6 seconds haveelapsed from the time of the accident.The doors may not unlock depending onhow an impact is applied, the force of theimpact, and other conditions of theaccident.If door-related systems or the battery ismalfunctioning, the doors will not unlock.

qLocking, Unlocking with Key

All doors and the trunk lid lockautomatically when the driver's door islocked with the key.All doors unlock when the driver's door isunlocked and the key is held in the unlockposition for one second or longer.Turn the key toward the front to lock,toward the back to unlock.

Lock Unlock

NOTEHolding the key in the unlocked position in thedriver's door lock for about a second unlocksall doors. To unlock only the driver's door,insert the key into the driver's door lock andturn the key briefly to the unlock position andthen immediately return it to the centerposition.

3-12

Before Driving

Doors and Locks


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (85,1)

qLocking, Unlocking with RequestSwitch (With the advancedkeyless function)

All doors and the trunk lid can be locked/unlocked by pressing the request switchon the front doors while the key is beingcarried.Front doors

Request switch

To lock

To lock the doors and the trunk lid, pressthe request switch and the hazard warninglights will flash once.A beep sound will be heard once.

To unlock

Driver's door request switch

To unlock the driver's door, press therequest switch. A beep sound will beheard twice and the hazard warning lightswill flash twice.To unlock all doors, press the requestswitch again within 3 seconds and twomore beep sounds will be heard.

Front passenger door request switch

To unlock all doors, press the requestswitch. A beep sound will be heard twiceand the hazard warning lights will flashtwice.

NOTEl The system can be set to unlock all doors by

performing a single operation.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.



door, press and hold the UNLOCK buttonon the key for 5 seconds or longer. Thesound of the doors locking/unlocking canbe heard.After this, the system switches the settingeach time the UNLOCK button is pressed(the sound of the doors locking/unlockingcan be heard).

4. The setting change is completed by doingany one of the following:l Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.l Close the driver's door.l Open the trunk lid.l The key is not operated for 10 seconds.l Press any button except the UNLOCK


l Confirm that all doors and the trunk lid aresecurely locked.For the trunk lid, move it without pressingthe electric trunk lid opener to verify thatthe trunk lid has not been left ajar.

l All doors and the trunk lid cannot be lockedwhen any door is open.

l It may require a few seconds for the doorsto unlock after the request switch ispressed.

Before Driving

Doors and Locks

3-13


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (86,1)

l A beep sound is heard for confirmationwhen the doors and the trunk lid arelocked/unlocked using the request switch. Ifyou prefer, the beep sound can be turnedoff.The volume of the beep sound can also bechanged.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.



door, press and hold the LOCK button onthe key for 5 seconds or longer.All of the doors and the trunk lid lock andthe beep sound activates at the currently setvolume. (If the beep sound is currently setto not activate, it will not activate.) Thesetting changes each time the LOCK buttonon the key is pressed and the beep soundactivates at the set volume. (If the beepsound has been set to not activate, it willnot activate.)

4. The setting change is completed by doingany one of the following:l Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.l Close the driver's door.l Open the trunk lid.l The key is not operated for 10 seconds.l Press any button except the LOCK


l (With theft-deterrent system)The hazard warning lights flash when thetheft-deterrent system is armed or turnedoff.Refer to Theft-Deterrent System on page3-42.

l The setting can be changed so that thedoors and the trunk lid are lockedautomatically without pressing the requestswitch.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.(Auto-lock function)A beep sound is heard when all doors areclosed while the advanced key is beingcarried. All doors and the trunk lid arelocked automatically after about threeseconds when the advanced key is out of theoperational range. Also, the hazardwarning lights flash once. (Even if thedriver is in the operational range, all doorsand the trunk lid are locked automaticallyafter about 30 seconds.) If you are out ofthe operational range before the doors andthe trunk lid are completely closed oranother key is left in the vehicle, the auto-lock function will not work. Always makesure that all doors and the trunk lid areclosed and locked before leaving thevehicle. The auto-lock function does notclose the power windows.

l (Auto re-lock function)After unlocking with the request switch, alldoors and the trunk lid will automaticallylock if any of the following operations arenot performed within about 60 seconds. Ifyour vehicle has a theft-deterrent system,the hazard warning lights will flash forconfirmation.The time required for the doors to lockautomatically can be changed.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.l A door or the trunk lid is opened.l The ignition is switched to any position

other than off.

3-14

Before Driving

Doors and Locks


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (87,1)

qLocking, Unlocking with Transmitter

All doors and the trunk lid can be locked/unlocked by operating the keyless entrysystem transmitter, refer to Keyless EntrySystem (page 3-3).

qLocking, Unlocking with Door-Lock Switch

All doors and the trunk lid lockautomatically when lock side is pressed.They all unlock when unlock side ispressed.Driver's door

Unlock

Lock

Front passenger's door

Unlock

Lock

To lock all the doors/trunk lid from anopen front door, press the lock side of thedoor lock switch and then close the door.

NOTEWhen locking the doors this way, be carefulnot to leave the key inside the vehicle.

qAuto Lock/Unlock Function

WARNINGDo not pull the inner handle on a frontdoor:

Pulling an inner handle on a frontdoor while the vehicle is moving isdangerous. Passengers can fall out ofthe vehicle if a front door accidentallyopens, which could result in death orserious injury.

l When the vehicle speed exceeds 20km/h (12 mph), all doors and the trunklid lock automatically.

l When the ignition is switched off, alldoors unlock automatically.

These functions can also be disabled sothat they do not operate.

Auto lock/unlock function settingchange using door-lock switch

The doors and the trunk lid can set to lockor unlock automatically by selecting anyone of the functions from the followingtable and using the driver's door-lockswitch on the interior door panel toperform the setting change as indicated inthe procedure which follows.Settings can be changed using thefollowing operation.

Before Driving

Doors and Locks

3-15


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (88,1)

NOTEl Function number 3 is the factory setting for

your vehicle.l There are only a total of five auto lock/

unlock settings available for automatictransaxle vehicles, and three for manualtransaxle vehicles. Be sure to press theunlock side of the driver's door-lock switchthe correct number of times according tothe selected function number. If the switchis mistakenly pressed six times on anautomatic transaxle vehicle or four timeson a manual transaxle, the procedure willbe invalidated. If this occurs, start theprocedure from the beginning.

Functionnumber

Function*1

1The auto door-lock function isdisabled.

2All the doors and the trunk lid lockautomatically when the vehicle speedis about 20 km/h (12 mph) or more.

3

All the doors and the trunk lid lockautomatically when the vehicle speedis about 20 km/h (12 mph) or more.All the doors unlock when the ignitionis switched from ON to Off.

4

(Automatic transaxle vehicles only)When the ignition is switched ON andthe shift lever is shifted from park (P)to any other gear position, all thedoors and the trunk lid lockautomatically.

5

(Automatic transaxle vehicles only)When the ignition is switched ON andthe shift lever is shifted from park (P)to any other gear position, all thedoors and the trunk lid lockautomatically.When the shift lever is shifted to park(P) while the ignition is switched ON,all the doors unlock automatically.

*1 Other settings for the auto door lock function areavailable at an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Fordetails consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-8.

1. Safely park the vehicle. All doors mustremain closed.


3. Press and hold the lock side of thedriver's door-lock switch within 20seconds of switching the ignition ON,and make sure a beep sound is heardabout eight seconds afterwards.

4. Referring to the auto lock/unlockfunction setting table and determine thefunction number for the desired setting.Press the unlock side of the driver'sdoor-lock switch the same number oftimes as the selected function number(Ex. If you select function 2, press theunlock side of the switch only 2 times).

5. Three seconds after the function settinghas been changed, a beep sound willbeep in the amount of the selectedfunction number. (Ex. Functionnumber 3 = 3 beep sounds)

3-16

Before Driving

Doors and Locks


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (89,1)

(Manual transaxle vehicles)

Press 2 times

Press 3 times

Current Function Number

Function Number 1

Function Number 2

Function Number 3

Press 4 times

Press unlock side of lock switch once

Cancel setting

Cancel setting

Function set (The number of beeps heard is the same as the selected function number)

Press lock side of lock switch

Wait for 3 second

(Automatic transaxle vehicles)

Press unlock side of lock switch once

Press 2 times

Press 3 times

Current Function Number

Function Number 1

Function Number 2

Press 4 times

Function Number 3

Press 5 times

Function Number 4

Press 6 times

Function Number 5

Cancel setting

Cancel setting

Function set (The number of beeps heard is the same as the selected function number)

Press lock side of lock switch

Wait for 3 second

NOTEl The doors cannot be locked or unlocked

while the setting function is beingperformed.

l The procedure can be cancelled by pressingthe lock side of the driver's door-lockswitch.

Before Driving

Doors and Locks

3-17


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (90,1)

qLocking, Unlocking with Door-Lock Knob

To lock any door from the inside, pressthe door-lock knob.To unlock, pull it outward.This does not operate the other doorlocks.

Lock

Unlock

To lock the front passenger door with thedoor-lock knob from the outside, press thedoor-lock knob to the lock position andclose the door (holding the door handlepulled is not required).This does not operate the other doorlocks.

Door-lock knob

NOTEWhen locking the door this way:l Be careful not to leave the key inside the

vehicle.l The driver's door lock knob cannot be used

while the driver's door is open.l The red indication can be seen when the

door-lock knob is unlocked.

Red indication

3-18

Before Driving

Doors and Locks


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (91,1)

qRear Door Child Safety Locks

These locks are intended to help preventchildren from accidentally opening therear doors. Use them both whenever achild rides in the vehicle.

If you slide the child safety lock to thelock position before closing that door, thedoor cannot be opened from the inside.The door can be opened only by pullingthe outside handle.

Lock

Unlock

Trunk Lid

WARNINGNever allow a person to ride in thetrunk:

Allowing a person to ride in the trunkis dangerous. The person in the trunkcould be seriously injured or killedduring sudden braking or a collision.

Do not drive with the trunk lid open:Exhaust gas in the cabin of a vehicleis dangerous. An open trunk lid in amoving vehicle will cause exhaustgas to be drawn into the cabin. Thisgas contains CO (carbon monoxide),which is colorless, odorless, andhighly poisonous, and it can causeloss of consciousness and death.Moreover, an open trunk lid couldcause occupants to fall out in anaccident.

CAUTIONØ When loading or unloading

luggage in the trunk, turn off theengine. Otherwise, you could getburned by the heat of the exhaustgas.

Ø Fully open the trunk lid whenopening it. If the trunk lid is onlyopened partially, it could slamshut by vibration or wind gustsresulting in injury.

Before Driving

Doors and Locks

3-19


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (92,1)

qOpening and Closing the Trunk Lid

Opening the trunk lid with Electrictrunk lid opener (With the advancedkeyless function)

A locked trunk lid can also be openedwhile the key is being carried.Press the electric trunk lid opener on thetrunk lid, and then raise the trunk lid whenthe latch releases.

Electric trunk lid opener

While the ignition is switched ON, thetrunk lid can be opened only when thevehicle is stopped.

NOTEl When using the advanced keyless function

to open the trunk lid, it may require a fewseconds for the trunk lid to unlock after theelectric trunk lid opener is pressed.

l The trunk lid can be closed when the doorsare locked with the key left in the vehicle.However, to prevent leaving the key in thevehicle, the trunk lid can be opened bypressing the electric trunk lid opener.

Opening the trunk lid with the remoterelease button

Push the release button.

While the ignition is switched ON, thetrunk lid can be opened only when thevehicle is stopped.

Closing the trunk lid

To close, lower the trunk lid slowly usingthe trunk lid grip recess, and then push thetrunk lid closed using both hands.Do not slam it. Pull up on the trunk lid tomake sure it is secure.

Trunk lid grip recess

3-20

Before Driving

Doors and Locks


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (93,1)

qTrunk Light

The trunk light is on when the lid is openand off when it's closed.

NOTETo prevent the battery from being discharged,do not leave the trunk open for a long periodwhen the engine is not running.

Inside Trunk Release Leverí

Your vehicle is equipped with an insidetrunk release lever that provides a meansof escape for children and adults in theevent they become locked inside thetrunk.

No matter how careful adults might bewith keys and locking their cars, parentsshould be aware that children may betempted to play around vehicles and usethe trunk as a hiding place.

Adults are advised to familiarizethemselves with the operation andlocation of the inside trunk release leverso that all children can be told about it inan appropriate way, keeping in mind thatmost vehicles do not have such levers.

Before Driving

Doors and Locks

3-21íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (94,1)

WARNINGClose the trunk lid, be sure the seatbacks are latched and do not allowchildren to play inside the vehicle:

Leaving the trunk lid open or leavingchildren in the vehicle with the keys isdangerous. Children could open thetrunk lid and climb inside resulting inpossible injury or death from heatexposure.

Always keep the car from being atempting place to play by latching therear seats, doors and the trunk, andkeeping the keys where children cannot play with them:

Leaving children or animalsunattended in a parked vehicle isdangerous. Babies left sleeping andchildren who lock themselves in carsor trunks can die very quickly fromheat prostration. Do not leave yourchildren or pets alone in a car at anytime. Do not leave the car, the rearfolding seats or the trunk unlocked.

qOpening the Trunk Lid from theInside

Slide the inside trunk release lever in thedirection of the arrow. The lever is madeof material that will glow for hours in thedarkness of the trunk following a briefexposure to ambient light.

The inside trunk release lever is locatedon the inside of the trunk lid.

3-22

Before Driving

Doors and Locks


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (95,1)

Fuel and Engine Exhaust Precautions

qFuel Requirements

Vehicles with catalytic converters or oxygen sensors must use ONLY UNLEADED FUEL,which will reduce exhaust emissions and keep spark plug fouling to a minimum.

Your Mazda will perform best with fuel listed in the table.

Fuel Octane Rating* (Anti-knock index)

Regular unleaded fuel 87 [ (R M)/2 method] or above (91 RON or above)

* U.S. federal law requires that octane ratings be posted on gasoline station pumps.

Fuel with a rating lower than 87 octane (91 RON) could cause the emission control systemto lose effectiveness. It could also cause engine knocking and serious engine damage.

CAUTIONØ USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.

Leaded fuel is harmful to the catalytic converter and oxygen sensors and will leadto deterioration of the emission control system and or failures.

Ø Your vehicle can only use oxygenated fuels containing no more than 10 % ethanolby volume. Damage to your vehicle may occur when ethanol exceeds thisrecommendation, or if the gasoline contains any methanol. Stop using gasohol ofany kind if your vehicle engine is performing poorly.

Ø Never add fuel system additives. Otherwise, the emission control system could bedamaged. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details.

Gasoline blended with oxygenates such as alcohol or ether compounds are generallyreferred to as oxygenated fuels. The common gasoline blend that can be used with yourvehicle is ethanol blended at no more than 10 %. Gasoline containing alcohol, such asethanol or methanol, may be marketed under the name “Gasohol”.

Vehicle damage and drivability problems resulting from the use of the following may notbe covered by the Mazda warranty.l Gasohol containing more than 10 % ethanol.l Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol.l Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.

Before Driving

Fuel and Emission

3-23


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (96,1)

qEmission Control System

Your vehicle is equipped with an emission control system (the catalytic converter is part ofthis system) that enables your vehicle to comply with existing exhaust emissionsrequirements.

WARNINGNever park over or near anything flammable:

Parking over or near anything flammable, such as dry grass, is dangerous. Even withthe engine turned off, the exhaust system remains very hot after normal use andcould ignite anything flammable. A resulting fire could cause serious injury or death.

CAUTIONIgnoring the following precautions could cause lead to accumulate on the catalystinside the converter or cause the converter to get very hot. Either condition willdamage the converter and cause poor performance.Ø USE ONLY UNLEADED FUEL.Ø Do not drive your Mazda with any sign of engine malfunction.Ø Do not coast with the ignition switched off.Ø Do not descend steep grades in gear with the ignition switched off.Ø Do not operate the engine at high idle for more than 2 minutes.Ø Do not tamper with the emission control system. All inspections and adjustments

must be made by a qualified technician.Ø Do not push-start or pull-start your vehicle.

NOTEl Under U.S. federal law, any modification to the original-equipment emission control system before

the first sale and registration of a vehicle is subject to penalties. In some states, such modificationmade on a used vehicle is also subject to penalties.

l While the engine is off, the sound of a valve opening and closing can be heard at the rear of theright side of the vehicle, however this does not indicate an abnormality. Your vehicle has a self-checking device and it operates while the engine is off.

3-24

Before Driving

Fuel and Emission


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (97,1)

qEngine Exhaust (Carbon monoxide)

WARNINGDo not drive your vehicle if you smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle:

Engine exhaust gas is dangerous. This gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), which iscolorless, odorless, and poisonous. When inhaled, it can cause loss of consciousnessand death. If you smell exhaust gas inside your vehicle, keep all windows fully openand contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer immediately.

Do not run the engine when inside an enclosed area:Running the engine inside an enclosed area, such as a garage, is dangerous. Exhaustgas, which contains poisonous carbon monoxide, could easily enter the cabin. Lossof consciousness or even death could occur.

Open the windows or adjust the heating or cooling system to draw fresh air whenidling the engine:

Exhaust gas is dangerous. When your vehicle is stopped with the windows closedand the engine running for a long time even in an open area, exhaust gas, whichcontains poisonous carbon monoxide, could enter the cabin. Loss of consciousness oreven death could occur.

Clear snow from underneath and around your vehicle, particularly the tail pipe,before starting the engine:

Running the engine when a vehicle is stopped in deep snow is dangerous. Theexhaust pipe could be blocked by the snow, allowing exhaust gas to enter the cabin.Because exhaust gas contains poisonous carbon monoxide, it could cause loss ofconsciousness or even death to occupants in the cabin.

Before Driving

Fuel and Emission

3-25


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (98,1)

Fuel-Filler Lid and Cap

WARNINGWhen removing the fuel-filler cap,loosen the cap slightly and wait for anyhissing to stop. Then remove it:

Fuel spray is dangerous. Fuel canburn skin and eyes and cause illnessif ingested. Fuel spray is releasedwhen there is pressure in the fueltank and the fuel-filler cap isremoved too quickly.

Before refueling, stop the engine, andalways keep sparks and flames awayfrom the filler neck:

Fuel vapor is dangerous. It could beignited by sparks or flames causingserious burns and injuries.Additionally, use of the incorrect fuel-filler cap or not using a fuel-filler capmay result in fuel leak, which couldresult in serious burns or death in anaccident.

CAUTION(U.S.A. and Canada)Always use only a genuine Mazdafuel-filler cap or an approvedequivalent, available at anAuthorized Mazda Dealer. The wrongcap can result in a seriousmalfunction of the fuel and emissioncontrol systems. It may also causethe check engine light in theinstrument cluster to illuminate.

qFuel-Filler Lid

To open, pull the remote fuel-filler lidrelease.

Remote fuel-filler lid release

qFuel-Filler Cap

To remove the fuel-filler cap, turn itcounterclockwise.Attach the removed cap to the inner sideof the fuel lid.

To close the fuel-filler cap, turn itclockwise until a click is heard.

Open

Close

3-26

Before Driving

Fuel and Emission


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (99,1)

CAUTION(U.S.A. and Canada)If the check fuel cap warning lightilluminates, the fuel-filler cap maynot be properly installed. If thewarning light illuminates, park yourvehicle safely off the right-of-way,remove the fuel-filler cap andreinstall it correctly. After the cap hasbeen correctly installed, the fuel capwarning light may continue toilluminate until a number of drivingcycles have been completed. A drivecycle consists of starting the engine(after four or more hours with theengine off) and driving the vehicle oncity and highway roads.Continuing to drive with the checkfuel cap warning light illuminatedcould cause the check engine light toilluminate as well.

Before Driving

Fuel and Emission

3-27


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (100,1)

Steering Wheel

WARNINGNever adjust the steering wheel whilethe vehicle is moving:

Adjusting the steering wheel whilethe vehicle is moving is dangerous.Moving it can very easily cause thedriver to abruptly turn to the left orright. This can lead to loss of controlor an accident.

qSteering Wheel Adjustment

To change the angle or length of thesteering wheel:

1. Stop the vehicle, and then pull downthe lock release lever under the steeringcolumn.

Lock release lever

2. Tilt the steering wheel and/or adjust thesteering column length to the desiredpositions, and then push the lever up tolock the column.

3. Attempt to push the steering wheel upand down to make sure it's lockedbefore driving.

3-28

Before Driving

Steering Wheel


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (101,1)

MirrorsBefore driving, adjust the inside andoutside mirrors.

qOutside Mirrors

WARNINGBe sure to look over your shoulderbefore changing lanes:

Changing lanes without taking intoaccount the actual distance of thevehicle in the convex mirror isdangerous. You could have a seriousaccident. What you see in the convexmirror is closer than it appears.

Mirror type

Flat type (driver's side)Flat surface mirror.Convex type (front passenger side)The mirror has single curvature on itssurface.

Power mirror adjustment

The ignition must be switched to ACC orON position.

To adjust:

1. Rotate the mirror switch to the left ( )or right ( ) to choose the left or rightside mirror.

2. Press the mirror switch in theappropriate direction.

Mirror switch

Center position

After adjusting the mirror, lock the controlby rotating the switch in the centerposition.

Folding mirror

WARNINGAlways return the outside mirrors tothe driving position before you startdriving:

Driving with the outside mirrorsfolded in is dangerous. Your rear viewwill be restricted, and you could havean accident.

Fold the outside mirror rearward until it isflush with the vehicle.

Before Driving

Mirrors

3-29


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (102,1)

Driver's side auto-dimming doormirrorí

The movement of the auto-dimming doormirror is interlocked with the auto-dimming rearview mirror in the interior toautomatically reduce glare from rear on-coming vehicles.Refer to Rearview Mirror on page 3-30.

NOTEThe front passenger-side door mirror does nothave the auto-dimming feature.

qRearview Mirror

WARNINGDo not stack cargo or objects higherthan the seatbacks:

Cargo stacked higher than theseatbacks is dangerous. It can blockyour view in the rearview mirror,which might cause you to hit anothercar when changing lanes.

Rearview mirror adjustment

Before driving, adjust the rearview mirrorto center on the scene through the rearwindow.

NOTEFor the manual day/night mirror, perform theadjustment with the day/night lever in the dayposition.

Reducing glare from headlights

Manual day/night mirror

Push the day/night lever forward for daydriving. Pull it back to reduce glare ofheadlights from cars at the rear.

Night

Day

Day/Night lever

Auto-dimming mirror

The auto-dimming mirror automaticallyreduces glare of headlights from cars atthe rear when the ignition is switched ON.

3-30

Before Driving

íSome models.

Mirrors


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (103,1)

Press the OFF button ( ) to cancel theautomatic dimming function. Theindicator light will turn off.To reactivate the automatic dimmingfunction, press the ON button ( ). Theindicator light will illuminate.

Indicator light OFF button

ON button

NOTEl Do not use glass cleaner or suspend objects

on or around the light sensor. Otherwise,light sensor sensitivity will be affected andmay not operate normally.

Light sensor

l For information regarding the 3 buttons( , , ) on the auto-dimmingmirror.Refer to HomeLink Wireless Control Systemon page 4-75.

l The auto-dimmer function is canceled whenthe ignition is switched ON and the shiftlever is in reverse (R).

Before Driving

Mirrors

3-31


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (104,1)

Power WindowsThe ignition must be switched ON for thepower windows to operate.

WARNINGMake sure the opening is clear beforeclosing a window:

Closing power windows aredangerous. A person's hands, head,or even neck could be caught by thewindow and result in serious injuryor even death. This warning appliesespecially to children.

Never allow children to play withpower window switches:

Power window switches that are notlocked with the power window lockswitch would allow children tooperate power windowsunintentionally which could result inserious injury if a child's hands, heador neck becomes caught by thewindow.

CAUTIONTo prevent burning out the fuse anddamaging the power window system,do not open or close more than threewindows at once.

qOperating the Power Windows(Type A)

NOTEl Each passenger window can be operated

with each door switch when the powerwindow lock switch on the driver's door isin the unlocked position (page 3-36).

l Each passenger window can also beoperated using the master control switcheson the driver's door.

Left rear window

Right rear window

Front passenger's window

Driver's window

Master control switches

Normal opening/closing

To open the window to the desiredposition, lightly hold down the switch.To close the window to the desiredposition, lightly pull up the switch.

Driver's window

Open

Close


3-32

Before Driving

Windows


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (105,1)

Close

Open

Auto-opening/closing

To fully open the window automatically,press the switch completely down.To fully close the window automatically,pull the switch completely up.

To stop the window partway, pull or pressthe switch in the opposite direction andthen release it.

Power window system initializationprocedure

If the battery was disconnected duringvehicle maintenance, or for other reasons(such as a switch continues to be operatedafter the window is fully open/closed), thewindow will not fully open and closeautomatically.Resetting of the automatic function can beperformed using the master controlswitches or each passenger door switch.The power window auto function resetprocedure can be done on all doorswitches. The power window autofunction will only resume on the powerwindow that has been reset.1 Switch the ignition ON.2 Make sure that the power window lock

switch located on the driver's door isnot depressed.

3 Press the switch and fully open thewindow.

4 Pull up the switch to fully close thewindow and continue holding theswitch for about 2 seconds after thewindow fully closed.

5 Repeat Steps 3-4 for the front passengerpower window while seated in the frontpassenger seat.

6 Repeat Steps 3-4 for both the left andright rear power windows while seatedin the rear seat.

7 Make sure that the power windowsoperate correctly using the doorswitches.

After the system has been re-initialized,each passenger window can be fullyopened or closed automatically using themaster control switches.

Jam-safe window

If a person's hands, head or an objectblocks the window during the manualclosing operation or the auto-closingoperation, the window will stop and openhalfway.

WARNINGMake sure nothing blocks the windowjust before it reaches the fully closedposition or while fully holding up thepower window switch:

Blocking the power window justbefore it reaches the fully closedposition or while fully holding up thepower window switch is dangerous.In this case, the jam-safe functioncannot prevent the window fromclosing all the way. If fingers arecaught, serious injuries could occur.

Before Driving

Windows

3-33


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (106,1)

NOTEl Depending on driving conditions, a closing

power window could stop and start openingwhen the window feels a shock that issimilar to something blocking it.In the event the jam-safe function activatesand the power window cannot be closedautomatically, pull and hold the switch fullyand the window will close.

l The jam-safe window function does notoperate until the system has been reset.

Engine-off power window operation

The power window can be operated forabout 40 seconds after the ignition isswitched from ON to off with all doorsclosed. If any door is opened, the powerwindow will stop operating.

NOTEFor engine-off operation of the power window,the switch must be held up firmly throughoutwindow closure because the auto-closingfunction will be inoperable.

qOperating the Driver's SidePower Window (Type B)

Normal opening/closing

To open the window to the desiredposition, lightly hold down the switch.To close the window to the desiredposition, lightly pull up the switch.

Driver's window

Open

Close


Auto-opening/closing

To fully open the window automatically,press the switch completely down, thenrelease. The window will fully openautomatically.To fully close the window automatically,pull the switch completely up, thenrelease. The window will fully closeautomatically.

To stop the window partway, pull or pressthe switch in the opposite direction andthen release it.

3-34

Before Driving

Windows


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (107,1)

Power window system initializationprocedure

If the battery was disconnected duringvehicle maintenance, or for other reasons(such as a switch continues to be operatedafter the window is fully open/closed), thewindow will not fully open and closeautomatically.The power window auto function willonly resume on the power window thathas been reset.1 Switch the ignition ON.2 Make sure that the power window lock

switch located on the driver's door isnot depressed.

3 Press the switch and fully open thewindow.

4 Pull up the switch to fully close thewindow and continue holding theswitch for about 2 seconds after thewindow fully closed.

Jam-safe window

If a person's hands, head or an objectblocks the window during the auto-closing operation, the window will stopand open halfway.

WARNINGMake sure nothing blocks the windowjust before it reaches the fully closedposition or while holding up the powerwindow switch:

Blocking the power window justbefore it reaches the fully closedposition or while holding up thepower window switch is dangerous.In this case, the jam-safe functioncannot prevent the window fromclosing all the way. If fingers arecaught, serious injuries could occur.


power window could stop and start openingwhen the window feels a shock that issimilar to something blocking it.In the event the jam-safe function activatesand the power window cannot be closedautomatically, pull and hold the switch andthe window will close.

l The jam-safe window function does notoperate until the system has been reset.

Engine-off power window operation

The power window can be operated forabout 40 seconds after the ignition isswitched from ON to off with all doorsclosed. If any door is opened, the powerwindow will stop operating.

NOTEFor engine-off operation of the power window,the switch must be held up firmly throughoutwindow closure because the auto-closingfunction will be inoperable.

Before Driving

Windows

3-35


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (108,1)

qOperating the Passenger PowerWindows (Type B)

The power windows may be operatedwhen the power window lock switch onthe driver's door is in the unlockedposition.

The passenger windows may be opened orclosed using the master control switcheson the driver's door.

Left rear window

Right rear window

Front passenger's window

Driver's window


To open the window to the desiredposition, hold down the switch.To close the window to the desiredposition, pull up the switch.

Close

Open

qPower Window Lock Switch

This feature prevents all power windowsfrom operating, except the driver's powerwindow. Keep this switch in the lockedposition while children are in the vehicle.Locked position (button depressed):Only the driver's power window can beoperated.Unlocked position (button notdepressed):All power windows on each door can beoperated.

Locked position

Unlocked position

3-36

Before Driving

Windows


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (109,1)

Moonroofí

The moonroof can be opened or closedelectrically only when the ignition isswitched ON.

Tilt/Slide switch

WARNINGDo not let passengers stand up orextend part of the body through theopen moonroof while the vehicle ismoving:

Extending the head, arms, or otherparts of the body through themoonroof is dangerous. The head orarms could hit something while thevehicle is moving. This could causeserious injury or death.

Make sure the opening is clear beforeclosing the moonroof:

A closing moonroof is dangerous. Thehands, head, or even neck of aperson, especially a child, could becaught in it as it closes, causingserious injury or even death.

NOTEBefore washing your Mazda, make sure themoonroof is completely closed so that waterdoes not get inside the cabin area. Afterwashing your Mazda or after it rains, wipe thewater off the moonroof before operating it toavoid water penetration which could causerust and water damage to your headliner.

qTilt Operation

The rear of the moonroof can be tiltedopen to provide more ventilation.

To fully tilt automatically, momentarilypress the tilt/slide switch.To fully close automatically, momentarilypress the tilt/slide switch in the forwarddirection.To stop tilting partway, press the tilt/slideswitch.

Close (Tilt down)

Tilt up

Before Driving

Windows

3-37íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (110,1)

qSlide Operation

To fully open automatically, momentarilypress the tilt/slide switch in the backwarddirection.To fully close automatically, momentarilypress the tilt/slide switch in the forwarddirection.To stop sliding partway, press the tilt/slideswitch.

Close

Open

qPower Moonroof Re-set Procedure

If the battery is disconnected, themoonroof will not operate. The moonroofwill not operate correctly until it is re-set.Carry out the following procedure to re-set the moonroof and resume operation:


2. Press the tilt switch, to partially tiltopen the rear of the moonroof.

3. Repeat Step 2. The rear of themoonroof tilts open to the fully openposition, then closes a little.

NOTEIf the re-set procedure is performed while themoonroof is in the slide position (partiallyopen) it will close before the rear tilt opens.

qJam-safe Moonroof

If a person's hands, head or an objectblocks the moonroof during closingoperation, the moonroof will stop andopen halfway.

WARNINGMake sure nothing blocks themoonroof just before it reaches thefully closed position:

Blocking the moonroof just before itreaches the closed position isdangerous.In this case, the jam-safe functioncannot prevent the moonroof fromclosing. If fingers are caught, seriousinjuries could occur.


moonroof could stop and start openingwhen the moonroof feels a shock that issimilar to something blocking it.

l The moonroof's jam-safe function does notfunction while the moonroof is initializing.

3-38

Before Driving

Windows


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (111,1)

qSunshade

The sunshade can be opened and closedby hand.

The sunshade opens automatically whenthe moonroof is opened, but must beclosed by hand.

Sunshade

CAUTIONØ The sunshade does not tilt. To

avoid damaging the sunshade, donot push up on it.

Ø Do not close the sunshade whilethe moonroof is opening. Trying toforce the sunshade closed coulddamage it.

Before Driving

Windows

3-39


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (112,1)

Modification and Add-OnEquipment

Mazda cannot guarantee the immobilizerand the theft-deterrent systems' operationif the system have been modified or if anyadd-on equipment has been installed.

CAUTIONTo avoid damage to your vehicle, donot modify the system or install anyadd-on equipment to the immobilizerand the theft-deterrent systems orthe vehicle.

Immobilizer SystemThe immobilizer system allows the engineto start only with a key the systemrecognizes.

If someone attempts to start the enginewith an unrecognized key, the engine willnot start, thereby helping to prevent thetheft of your vehicle.If you have a problem with theimmobilizer system or the key, consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

CAUTIONØ Radio equipment like this is

governed by laws.Changes or modifications notexpressly approved by the partyresponsible for compliance couldvoid the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Ø To avoid damage to the key, donot:Ø Drop the key.Ø Get the key wet.Ø Expose the key to any kind of

magnetic field.Ø Expose the key to high

temperatures on places such asthe dashboard or hood, underdirect sunlight.

Ø If the engine does not start withthe correct key, and the securityindicator light keeps illuminatingor flashing, the system may havea malfunction. Consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

3-40

Before Driving

Security System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (113,1)

NOTEl The keys carry a unique electronic code.

For this reason, and to assure your safety,obtaining a replacement key requires somewaiting time. They are only availablethrough an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

l Always keep a spare key in case one is lost.If a key is lost, consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer as soon as possible.

l If you lose a key, an Authorized MazdaDealer will reset the electronic codes ofyour remaining keys and immobilizersystem. Bring all the remaining keys to anAuthorized Mazda Dealer to reset.Starting the vehicle with a key that has notbeen reset is not possible.

qOperation

NOTEl The engine may not start and security

indicator light may illuminate or flash if thekey is placed in an area where it is difficultfor the system to detect the signal, such ason the dashboard or in the glovecompartment. Move the key to a locationwithin the signal range, switch the ignitionoff, and then restart the engine.

l Signals from a TVor radio station, or froma transceiver or mobile telephone couldinterfere with your immobilizer system. Ifyou are using the proper key and the enginefails to start, check the security indicatorlight.

Arming

The system is armed when the pushbutton start is pressed from ON to off.The security indicator light in theinstrument cluster flashes every 2 secondsuntil the system is disarmed.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page4-23.

Disarming

The system is disarmed when the ignitionis switched ON with the correctprogrammed key. The security indicatorlight illuminates for about 3 seconds andthen turns off. If the engine does not startwith the correct key, and the securityindicator light remains illuminated orflashing, try the following:Make sure the key is within theoperational range for signal transmission.Switch the ignition off, and then restartthe engine. If the engine does not startafter 3 or more tries, contact anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTEl If the security indicator light flashes

continuously while you are driving, do notshut off the engine. Go to an AuthorizedMazda Dealer and have it checked. If theengine is shut off while the indicator light isflashing, you will not be able to restart it.

l Because the electronic codes are reset whenthe immobilizer system is repaired, the keysare needed. Make sure to bring all the keysto an Authorized Mazda Dealer so that theycan be programmed.

Before Driving

Security System

3-41


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (114,1)

Theft-Deterrent Systemí

If the theft deterrent system detects aninappropriate entry into the vehicle, whichcould result in the vehicle or its contentsbeing stolen, the alarm alerts thesurrounding area of an abnormality bysounding the horn and flashing the hazardwarning lights.

The system will not function unless it'sproperly armed. So when you leave thevehicle, follow the arming procedurecorrectly.

qOperation

System triggering conditions

The horn sounds intermittently and thehazard warning lights flash for about 30seconds when the system is triggered byany one of the following:l Unlocking a door with the keyí, doorlock switch, or an inside door-lockknob.

l Forcing open a door, the hood or thetrunk lid.

l Opening the hood by operating thehood release handle.

l Switching the ignition ON withoutusing the push button start.

If the system is triggered again, the lightsand horn will activate until the driver'sdoor or the trunk lid is unlocked with theauxiliary keyí or with the transmitter.(With advanced key)The lights and horn can also bedeactivated by pressing the request switchon a door.

NOTEIf the battery goes dead while the theft-deterrent system is armed, the horn willactivate and the hazard warning lights willflash when the battery is charged or replaced.

qHow to Arm the System

1. Close the windows and the moonroofí

securely.

2. Press the push button start off.

3. Make sure the hood, the doors, and thetrunk lid are closed.

4. Press the lock button on the transmitteror lock the driver's door from theoutside with the auxiliary key.The hazard warning lights will flashonce.The following method will also arm thetheft-deterrent system:Press the door-lock switch “ ” whileany door is open and then close all ofthe doors.(With the advanced keyless function)Press a request switch.

The security indicator light in theinstrument panel flashes twice persecond for 20 seconds.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights onpage 4-23.

5. After 20 seconds, the system is fullyarmed.

3-42

Before Driving

íSome models.

Security System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (115,1)

NOTEl The theft deterrent system can also be

armed by activating the auto relockfunction with all the doors, the trunk lidand the hood closed.Refer to Transmitter on page 3-4.

l The system will disarm if one of thefollowing operations takes place within 20seconds after pressing the lock button:l Unlocking a door.l Any door or the trunk lid is opened.l The hood is opened.l The ignition is switched on.l (With the advanced keyless function)

Press the electric trunk lid opener whilethe key is being carried.

To rearm the system, do the armingprocedure again.

l When the doors are locked by pressing thelock button on the transmitter or using theauxiliary key while the theft-deterrentsystem is armed, the hazard warning lightswill flash once to indicate that the system isarmed.

qTo Turn Off an Armed System

An armed system can be turned off usingany one of the following methods:l Unlock the driver's door with theauxiliary key.í

l Press the unlock button on thetransmitter.

l Switch the ignition ON.l (With the advanced keyless function)Press a request switch on the doors.

The hazard warning lights will flashtwice.

NOTEWhen the doors are unlocked by pressing theunlock button on the transmitter or using theauxiliary keyí while the theft-deterrent systemis turned off, the hazard warning lights willflash twice to indicate that the system is turnedoff.

qTo Stop the Alarm

A triggered alarm can be turned off usingany one of the following methods:l Unlock the driver's door with theauxiliary key.í

l Press the unlock button on thetransmitter.

l The engine is started with the pushbutton start.

l (With the advanced keyless function)l Press a request switch on the doors.l Press the electric trunk lid opener

while the key is being carried.The hazard warning lights will flashtwice.

qTheft-Deterrent Labels

A label indicating that your vehicle isequipped with a Theft-Deterrent System isin the glove compartment.

Mazda recommends that you affix it to thelower rear corner of a front door window.

Before Driving

Security System

3-43íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (116,1)

Break-In PeriodNo special break-in is necessary, but a fewprecautions in the first 1,000 km (600miles) may add to the performance,economy, and life of your Mazda.l Do not race the engine.l Do not maintain one constant speed,either slow or fast, for a long period oftime.

l Do not drive constantly at full-throttleor high engine rpm for extendedperiods of time.

l Avoid unnecessary hard stops.l Avoid full-throttle starts.

Money-Saving SuggestionsHow you operate your Mazda determineshow far it will travel on a tank of fuel. Usethese suggestions to help save money onfuel and repairs.l Avoid long warm-ups. Once the engineruns smoothly, begin driving.

l Avoid fast starts.l Follow the maintenance schedule (page6-4) and have an Authorized MazdaDealer perform inspections andservicing.

l Use the air conditioner only whennecessary.

l Slow down on rough roads.l Keep the tires properly inflated.l Do not carry unnecessary weight.l Do not rest your foot on the brakepedal while driving.

l Keep the wheels in correct alignment.l Keep windows closed at high speeds.l Slow down when driving in crosswindsand headwinds.

WARNINGNever stop the engine when goingdown a hill:

Stopping the engine when goingdown a hill is dangerous. This causesthe loss of power steering and powerbrake control, and may causedamage to the drivetrain. Any loss ofsteering or braking control couldcause an accident.

3-44

Before Driving

Driving Tips


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (117,1)

Hazardous Driving

WARNINGBe extremely careful if it is necessary todownshift on slippery surfaces:

Downshifting into lower gear whiledriving on slippery surfaces isdangerous. The sudden change in tirespeed could cause the tires to skid.This could lead to loss of vehiclecontrol and an accident.

When driving on ice or in water, snow,mud, sand, or similar hazards:l Be cautious and allow extra distancefor braking.

l Avoid sudden braking and suddenmaneuvering.

l Do not pump the brakes. Continue topress down on the brake pedal.Refer to Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 4-93.

l If you get stuck, select a lower gear andaccelerate slowly. Do not spin the frontwheels.

l For more traction in starting onslippery surfaces such as ice or packedsnow, use sand, rock salt, chains,carpeting, or other nonslip materialunder the front wheels.

NOTEUse snow chains only on the front wheels.

Floor Mat

WARNINGMake sure the floor mats are hookedon the retention pins to prevent themfrom bunching up under the footpedals:

Using a floor mat that is not securedis dangerous as it will interfere withthe accelerator and brake pedaloperation, which could result in anaccident.

Do not install two floor mats, one ontop of the other, on the driver's side:

Installing two floor mats, one on topof the other, on the driver's side isdangerous as the retention pins canonly keep one floor mat from slidingforward.In using a heavy duty floor mat forwinter use always remove theoriginal floor mat.Loose floor mat(s) will interfere withthe foot pedal and could result in anaccident.

When setting a floor mat, position thefloor mat so that its grommets are insertedover the pointed end of the retentionposts.

Before Driving

Driving Tips

3-45


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (118,1)

Rocking the Vehicle

WARNINGDo not spin the wheels at more than 56km/h (35 mph), and do not allowanyone to stand behind a wheel whenpushing the vehicle:

When the vehicle is stuck, spinningthe wheels at high speed isdangerous. The spinning tire couldoverheat and explode. This couldcause serious injuries.

CAUTIONToo much rocking may cause engineoverheating, transaxle failure, andtire damage.

If you must rock the vehicle to free it fromsnow, sand or mud, depress theaccelerator slightly and slowly move theshift lever from 1 (D) to R.

Winter DrivingCarry emergency gear, including tirechains, window scraper, flares, a smallshovel, jumper cables, and a small bag ofsand or salt.Ask an Authorized Mazda Dealer toperform the following precautions:l Have the proper ratio of antifreeze inthe radiator.Refer to Engine Coolant on page 6-23.

l Inspect the battery and its cables. Coldreduces battery capacity.

l Use an engine oil appropriate for thelowest ambient temperatures that thevehicle will be driven in (page 6-21).

l Inspect the ignition system for damageand loose connections.

l Use washer fluid made withantifreeze―but do not use enginecoolant antifreeze for washer fluid(page 6-25).

l Do not use the parking brake infreezing weather as it may freeze.Instead, shift to P with an automatictransaxle and to 1 or R with a manualtransaxle. Block the rear wheels.

l Snow left on the windshield isdangerous as it could obstruct vision.Remove snow before driving.

l Do not apply excessive force to awindow scraper when removing ice orfrozen snow on the mirror glass andwindshield.

l Never use warm or hot water forremoving snow or ice from windowsand mirrors as it could result in theglass cracking.

3-46

Before Driving

Driving Tips


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (119,1)

l Braking performance can be adverselyaffected if snow or ice adheres to thebrake components. If this situationoccurs, drive the vehicle slowly,releasing the accelerator pedal andlightly applying the brakes severaltimes until the brake performancereturns to normal.

qSnow Tires

Use snow tires on all four wheels

Do not go faster than 120 km/h (75 mph)while driving with snow tires. Inflatesnow tires 30 kPa (0.3 kgf/cm2, 4.3 psi)more than recommended on the tirepressure label (driver's door frame), butnever more than the maximum cold-tirepressure shown on the tires.

Your vehicle is originally equipped withall season radials designed to be used allyear around. In some extreme climatesyou may find it necessary to replace themwith snow tires during the winter monthsto further improve traction on snow andice covered roads.

WARNINGUse only the same size and type tires(snow, radial, or non-radial) on all fourwheels:

Using tires different in size or type isdangerous. Your vehicle's handlingcould be greatly affected and resultin an accident.

CAUTIONCheck local regulations before usingstudded tires.

qTire Chains

Check local regulations before using tirechains.

CAUTIONØ Chains may affect handling.Ø Do not go faster than 50 km/h (30

mph) or the chain manufacturer'srecommended limit, whichever islower.

Ø Drive carefully and avoid bumps,holes, and sharp turns.

Ø Avoid locked-wheel braking.Ø Do not use chains on a temporary

spare tire; it may result in damageto the vehicle and to the tire.

Ø Do not use chains on roads thatare free of snow or ice. The tiresand chains could be damaged.

Ø Chains may scratch or chipaluminum wheels.

NOTEThe tire pressure monitoring system may notfunction correctly when using tire chains.

Install the chains on the front tires only.Do not use chains on the rear tires.Please consult an Authorized MazdaDealer.

Installing the chains

1. Secure the chains on the front tires astightly as possible.Always follow the chainmanufacturer's instructions.

2. Retighten the chains after driving 1/2―1 km (1/4―1/2 mile).

Before Driving

Driving Tips

3-47


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (120,1)

Driving In Flooded Area

WARNINGDry off brakes that have become wetby driving slowly, releasing theaccelerator pedal and lightly applyingthe brakes several times until the brakeperformance returns to normal:

Driving with wet brakes isdangerous. Increased stoppingdistance or the vehicle pulling to oneside when braking could result in aserious accident. Light braking willindicate whether the brakes havebeen affected.

CAUTIONDo not drive the vehicle on floodedroads as it could cause shortcircuiting of electrical/electronicparts, or engine damage or stallingfrom water absorption. If the vehiclehas been immersed in water, consultan Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Overloading

WARNINGBe careful not to overload your vehicle:

The gross axle weight rating (GAWR)and the gross vehicle weight rating(GVWR) of your vehicle are on theMotor Vehicle Safety Standard Labelon the driver's door frame. Exceedingthese ratings can cause an accidentor vehicle damage. You can estimatethe weight of your load by weighingthe items (or people) before puttingthem in the vehicle.

3-48

Before Driving

Driving Tips


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (121,1)

Driving on Uneven RoadYour vehicle's suspension and underbody can be damaged if driven on rough/uneven roadsor over speed bumps at excessive speeds. Use care and reduce speed when traveling onrough/uneven roads or over speed bumps.

Use care not to damage the vehicle's underbody, bumpers or muffler(s) when driving underthe following conditions:l Ascending or descending a slope with a sharp transition anglel Ascending or descending a driveway or trailer ramp with a sharp transition angle

Your vehicle is equipped with low profile tires allowing class-leading performance andhandling. As a result, the sidewall of the tires are very thin and the tires and wheels can bedamaged if driven through potholes or on rough/uneven roads at excessive speeds. Usecare and reduce speed when traveling on rough/uneven roads or through potholes.

Before Driving

Driving Tips

3-49


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (122,1)

Trailer TowingThe Mazda6 is not designed for towing.Never tow a trailer with your Mazda6.

Recreational TowingAn example of “recreational towing” istowing your vehicle behind a motorhome.The transaxle is not designed for towingthis vehicle on all 4 wheels.When doing recreational towing refer to“Towing Description” (page 7-26)and“Tiedown Hook” (page 7-27)and carefullyfollow the instructions.

3-50

Before Driving

Towing


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (123,1)

4 When Driving

Information concerning safe driving and stopping.

Start/Stop Engine .................................... 4-2Ignition Switch .................................... 4-2Starting the Engine .............................. 4-3Turning the Engine Off ....................... 4-8

Instrument Cluster and Display ........... 4-10Meters and Gauges ............................ 4-10Warning/Indicator Lights .................. 4-23

Transaxle ................................................ 4-47Manual Transaxle Operation ............. 4-47Automatic Transaxle Controls .......... 4-49

Switches and Controls ........................... 4-59Lighting Control ............................... 4-59High Beam Control System (HBC)í ... 4-64Fog Lightsí ...................................... 4-68Turn and Lane-Change Signals ......... 4-68Windshield Wipers and Washer ........ 4-69Rear Window Defroster ..................... 4-73Horn .................................................. 4-74Hazard Warning Flasher .................... 4-75HomeLink Wireless ControlSystemí ............................................ 4-75

Radar Sensor .......................................... 4-79Radar Sensorí .................................. 4-79

Brake ...................................................... 4-82Brake System .................................... 4-82Hill Launch Assist (HLA) ................. 4-85Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)í... 4-87

ABS/TCS/DSC ....................................... 4-93Antilock Brake System (ABS) .......... 4-93Traction Control System (TCS) ........ 4-94Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) ..... 4-95

i-ELOOP ................................................. 4-97i-ELOOPí ........................................ 4-97

Drive Selection ..................................... 4-100Drive Selectioní ............................. 4-100

Power Steering ..................................... 4-102Power Steering ................................ 4-102

Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)... 4-103Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)í ... 4-103

Cruise Control ..................................... 4-112Cruise Controlí .............................. 4-112

Forward Obstruction Warning(FOW) ................................................... 4-115

Forward Obstruction Warning(FOW)í .......................................... 4-115

Tire Pressure Monitoring System ....... 4-118Tire Pressure Monitoring System .... 4-118

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)System .................................................. 4-122

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)Systemí .......................................... 4-122

Lane Departure Warning System(LDWS) ................................................ 4-131

Lane Departure Warning System(LDWS)í ....................................... 4-131

Rear View Monitor .............................. 4-138Rear View Monitorí ...................... 4-138

4-1íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (124,1)

Ignition Switch

qPush Button Start Positions

The system operates only when the driveris in the vehicle or within operationalrange while the key is being carried.Each time the push button start is pressed,the ignition switches in the order of off,ACC, and ON. Pressing the push buttonstart again from ON switches the ignitionoff.

Indicator light

NOTEl The engine starts by pressing the push

button start while depressing the clutchpedal (manual transaxle) or the brakepedal (automatic transaxle). To switch theignition position, press the push button startwithout depressing the pedal.

l Do not leave the ignition switched ONwhile the engine is not running. Doing socould result in the battery going dead. If theignition is left in ACC (For automatictransaxle, the shift lever is in the P position,and the ignition is in ACC), the ignitionswitches off automatically after about 25minutes.

Off

The power supply to electrical devicesturns off and the push button startindicator light (amber) also turns off.

WARNINGBefore leaving the driver's seat, alwaysswitch the ignition off, set the parkingbrake, and make sure the shift lever isin P (automatic transaxle) or in 1st gearor R (manual transaxle):

Leaving the driver's seat withoutswitching the ignition off, setting theparking brake, and shifting the shiftlever to P (automatic transaxle) or to1st gear or R (manual transaxle) isdangerous. Unexpected vehiclemovement could occur which couldresult in an accident.In addition, if your intention is toleave the vehicle for even a shortperiod, it is important to switch theignition off, as leaving it in anotherposition will disable some of thevehicle's security systems and run thebattery down.

ACC (Accessory)

Some electrical accessories will operateand the indicator light (amber)illuminates.

NOTEThe keyless entry system does not functionwhile the push button start has been pressed toACC, and the doors will not lock/unlock evenif they have been locked manually.

4-2

When Driving

Start/Stop Engine


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (125,1)

ON

This is the normal running position afterthe engine is started. The indicator light(amber) turns off. (The indicator light(amber) illuminates when the ignition isswitched ON and the engine is notrunning.)Some indicator lights/warning lightsshould be inspected before the engine isstarted (page 4-23).

NOTEWhen the push button start is pressed to ON,the sound of the fuel pump motor operatingnear the fuel tank can be heard. This does notindicate an abnormality.

Starting the Engine

WARNINGRadio waves from the key may affectmedical devices such as pacemakers:

Before using the key near people whouse medical devices, ask the medicaldevice manufacturer or yourphysician if radio waves from the keywill affect the device.

When Driving

Start/Stop Engine

4-3


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (126,1)

NOTEl The key must be carried because the key

carries an immobilizer chip that mustcommunicate with the engine controls atshort range.

l The engine can be started when the pushbutton start is pressed from off, ACC, orON.

l The push button start system functions(function which can start the engine by onlycarrying the key) can be deactivated toprevent any possible adverse effect on auser wearing a pacemaker or other medicaldevice. If the system is deactivated, you willbe unable to start the engine by carryingthe key. Consult an Authorized MazdaDealer for details. If the push button startsystem functions have been deactivated, youcan start the engine by following theprocedure indicated when the key batterygoes dead.Refer to Engine Start Function When KeyBattery is Dead on page 4-6.

l After starting a cold engine, the enginespeed increases and a whining sound fromthe engine compartment can be heard.This is for improved exhaust gaspurification and does not indicate defect ofthe parts.

l Engine-starting is controlled by the sparkignition system.This system meets all CanadianInterference-Causing Equipment Standardrequirements regulating the impulseelectrical field strength of radio noise.

1. Make sure you are carrying the key.

2. Occupants should fasten their seatbelts.

3. Make sure the parking brake is on.

4. Continue to press the brake pedalfirmly until the engine has completelystarted.

5. (Manual transaxle)Continue to press the clutch pedalfirmly until the engine has completelystarted.(Automatic transaxle)Put the vehicle in park (P). If you mustrestart the engine while the vehicle ismoving, shift into neutral (N).

NOTE(Manual transaxle)The starter will not operate if the clutch pedalis not depressed sufficiently.(Automatic transaxle)The starter will not operate if the shift lever isnot in P or N and the brake pedal is notdepressed sufficiently.

6. Verify that the KEY indicator light(green) (if equipped) in the instrumentcluster and the push button startindicator light (green) illuminate. Referto Warning/Indicator Lights on page4-23. If the push button start indicatorlight (green) flashes, make sure that thekey is being carried (for vehicles with atype A meter (page 4-23), messages aredisplayed in the instrument cluster). Ifthe push button start indicator light(green) flashes with the key beingcarried, touch the key to the pushbutton start and start the engine (forvehicles with a type A meter (page4-23), messages are displayed in theinstrument cluster). Refer to EngineStart Function When Key Battery isDead on page 4-6.

4-4

When Driving

Start/Stop Engine


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (127,1)

CAUTIONIf the KEY warning light (red)illuminates, or the push button startindicator light (amber) flashes, thiscould indicate a problem with theengine starting system and theinability to start the engine or switchthe ignition to ACC or ON (forvehicles with a type A meter (page4-23), messages are displayed in theinstrument cluster). Have yourvehicle inspected at an AuthorizedMazda Dealer as soon as possible.

NOTEl Under the following conditions, the KEY

warning light (red) flashes after the pushbutton start is pressed to inform the driverthat the push button start will not switch toACC even if it is pressed from off (forvehicles with a type A meter (page 4-23),messages are displayed in the instrumentcluster).l The key battery is dead.l The key is out of operational range.l The key is placed in areas where it is

difficult for the system to detect thesignal (page 3-7).

l A key from another manufacturer similarto the key is in the operational range.

l (Forced engine starting method)If the KEY warning light (red) illuminates,or the push button start indicator light(amber) flashes, this could indicate that theengine may not start using the usualstarting method (for vehicles with a type Ameter, messages are displayed in theinstrument cluster). Have your vehicleinspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealeras soon as possible. If this occurs, theengine can be force-started. Press and holdthe push button start until the engine starts.Other procedures necessary for starting theengine such as having the key in the cabin,and depressing the clutch pedal (manualtransaxle) or the brake pedal (automatictransaxle) are required.

l When the engine is force-started, the KEYwarning light (red) (if equipped) remainsilluminated and the push button startindicator light (amber) remains flashing.

l (Automatic transaxle)When the shift lever is in the neutral (N)position, the KEY indicator light (green) (ifequipped) and the push button startindicator light (green) do not illuminate.

When Driving

Start/Stop Engine

4-5


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (128,1)

7. Press the push button start after boththe KEY indicator light (green) (ifequipped) in the instrument cluster andthe push button start indicator light(green) illuminate.

NOTEl After starting the engine, the push button

start indicator light (amber) turn off andthe ignition is in the ON position.

l After pressing the push button start andbefore the engine starts, the operationsound of the fuel pump motor from near thefuel tank can be heard, however, this doesnot indicate a malfunction.

8. After starting the engine, let it idle forabout ten seconds.

NOTEl Whether the engine is cold or warm, it

should be started without the use of theaccelerator.

l If the engine does not start the first time,refer to Starting a Flooded Engine underEmergency Starting. If the engine still doesnot start, have your vehicle inspected by anAuthorized Mazda Dealer (page 7-23).

qEngine Start Function When KeyBattery is Dead

CAUTIONWhen starting the engine by holdingthe transmitter over the push buttonstart due to a dead key battery or amalfunctioning key, be careful not toallow the following.Otherwise the signal from the keywill not be received correctly and theengine may not start.Ø Metal parts of other keys or metal

objects touch the key.

Ø Spare keys or keys for othervehicles equipped with animmobilizer system touch or comenear the key.

Ø Devices for electronic purchases, orsecurity passage which touch orcome near the key.

If the engine cannot be started due to adead key battery, the engine can be startedusing the following procedure:

1. Depress the brake pedal (automatictransaxle) or fully depress the clutchpedal (manual transaxle).

4-6

When Driving

Start/Stop Engine


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (129,1)

2. Verify that the push button startindicator light (green) flashes.

NOTEThe push button start indicator light (green)will flash even if the push button start ispressed before depressing the brake pedal(automatic transaxle) or the clutch pedal(manual transaxle). If the clutch pedal isdepressed (manual transaxle) or the brakepedal is depressed (automatic transaxle) underthis condition, the engine can be started byresuming the procedure following this.

3. Touch the push button start using thebackside of the key (as shown) whilethe push button start indicator light(green) flashes.

Key

Indicator light

Push button start

4. After the push button start indicatorlight (green) changes to fullillumination, press the push button startwith your finger.

NOTEl The engine cannot be started unless the

clutch pedal is fully depressed (manualtransaxle) or the brake pedal is fullydepressed (automatic transaxle).

l If there is a malfunction with the pushbutton start function, the push button startindicator light (amber) flashes. In this case,the engine may start, however, have thevehicle checked at an Authorized MazdaDealer as soon as possible.

l If the push button start indicator light(green) does not illuminate, perform theoperation from the beginning again. If itdoes not illuminate, have the vehiclechecked at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

l If you just want to change the ignitionposition (with a dead key battery), after thepush button start indicator light (green)changes to illumination, release the brakepedal (automatic transaxle) or the clutchpedal (manual transaxle), and press thepush button start. The ignition switches inthe order of ACC, ON, and OFF each timeit is pressed. Once the ignition switches off,the ignition position can no longer beswitched. Therefore, if the engine starts,perform the operation from the beginningagain.

When Driving

Start/Stop Engine

4-7


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (130,1)

qEmergency Operation forStarting the Engine

If the KEY warning light (red)illuminates, or the push button startindicator light (amber) flashes, this couldindicate that the engine may not startusing the usual starting method (forvehicles with a type A meter, messagesare displayed in the instrument cluster).Have your vehicle inspected at anAuthorized Mazda Dealer as soon aspossible. If this occurs, the engine can beforce-started. Press and hold the pushbutton start until the engine starts. Otherprocedures necessary for starting theengine such as having the key in thecabin, and depressing the clutch pedal(manual transaxle) or the brake pedal(automatic transaxle) are required.

Turning the Engine Off

WARNINGDo not stop the engine while thevehicle is moving:

Stopping the engine while the vehicleis moving for any reason other thanin an emergency is dangerous.Stopping the engine while the vehicleis moving will result in reducedbraking ability due to the loss ofpower braking, which could cause anaccident and serious injury.

1. Stop the vehicle completely.

2. (Manual transaxle)Shift into neutral.(Automatic transaxle)Shift the shift lever to the P position.

3. Press the push button start to turn offthe engine. The ignition position is off.

CAUTIONWhen leaving the vehicle, make surethe push button start is pressed tooff.

4-8

When Driving

Start/Stop Engine


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (131,1)

NOTEl The electrical fan in the engine

compartment could turn on for a fewminutes after the ignition is switched fromON to OFF, whether or not the A/C is on oroff, to cool the engine compartment quickly.

l If the system detects that the remainingbattery power of the key is low when theignition is switched from ON to ACC orOFF, the following is indicated.Replace with a new battery before the keybecomes unusable.Refer to Battery Replacement on page 6-32.(Vehicle equipped with Type A*1

instrument cluster)A message is indicated in the display of theinstrument cluster.*1 Refer to Type A on page 4-23.(Vehicle equipped with Type B*2

instrument cluster)The KEY indicator light (green) flashes forapproximately 30 seconds.*2 Refer to Type B on page 4-27.

l (Automatic transaxle)If the engine is turned off while the shiftlever is in a position other than P, theignition switches to ACC.

qEmergency Engine Stop

Continuously pressing the push buttonstart while the engine is running or thevehicle being driven, or quickly pressingit any number of times will turn theengine off immediately. The ignitionposition will be ACC.

When Driving

Start/Stop Engine

4-9


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (132,1)

Meters and Gauges

Type A

Type B

Speedometer ....................................................................................................... page 4-11Odometer, Trip Meter and Trip Meter Selector .................................................. page 4-11Tachometer ........................................................................................................ page 4-12Fuel Gauge ........................................................................................................ page 4-13Dashboard Illumination ..................................................................................... page 4-13Outside Temperature Display ............................................................................. page 4-14Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed Display (Type A instrument cluster) ............ page 4-15Maintenance Monitor (Type A instrument cluster) ............................................ page 4-15Trip Computer and INFO Switch ...................................................................... page 4-18

4-10

When Driving

Instrument Cluster and Display


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (133,1)

qSpeedometer

The speedometer indicates the speed ofthe vehicle.

qOdometer, Trip Meter and TripMeter Selector

The display mode can be changedbetween trip meter A and trip meter B bypressing the selector while one of them isdisplayed. The selected mode will bedisplayed.Type A

Press the selector

Press the selector

Trip meter A

Odometer

Trip meter B

Odometer

Type B

Press the selector

Press the selector

Trip meter A

Odometer

Trip meter B

Odometer

NOTEWhen the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF,the odometer or trip meters cannot bedisplayed, however, pressing the selector caninadvertently switch the trip meters or resetthem during an approximate ten-minute periodin the following cases:l After the ignition is switched to OFF from

ON.l After the driver's door is opened.

Odometer

The odometer records the total distancethe vehicle has been driven.

Trip meter

The trip meter can record the totaldistance of two trips. One is recorded intrip meter A, and the other is recorded intrip meter B.

When Driving


4-11


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (134,1)

For instance, trip meter A can record thedistance from the point of origin, and tripmeter B can record the distance fromwhere the fuel tank is filled.

When trip meter A is selected, pressingthe selector again within one second willchange to trip meter B mode.

When trip meter A is selected, TRIPAwill be displayed. When trip meter B isselected, TRIP B will be displayed.

The trip meter records the total distancethe vehicle is driven until the meter isagain reset. Return it to “0.0” by holdingthe selector depressed for 1 second ormore. Use this meter to measure tripdistances and to compute fuelconsumption.

NOTEl Only the trip meters record tenths of

kilometers (miles).l The trip record will be erased when:

l The power supply is interrupted (blownfuse or the battery is disconnected).

l The vehicle is driven over 9999.9 km(mile).

qTachometer

The tachometer shows engine speed inthousands of revolutions per minute(rpm).

Red zone

Striped zone

CAUTIONDo not run the engine with thetachometer needle in the RED ZONE.This may cause severe enginedamage.

NOTEWhen the tachometer needle enters theSTRIPED ZONE, this indicates to the driverthat the gears should be shifted before enteringthe RED ZONE.

4-12

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (135,1)

qFuel Gauge

The fuel gauge shows approximately howmuch fuel is remaining in the tank whenthe ignition is switched ON. Werecommend keeping the tank over 1/4 full.Type A

Full

1/4 Full

Type B

Full

1/4 Full

If the low fuel warning light illuminates orthe fuel level is very low, refuel as soon aspossible.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page4-23.

NOTEl After refueling, it may require some time for

the indicator to stabilize. In addition, theindicator may deviate while driving on aslope or curve since the fuel moves in thetank.

l The display indicating a quarter or lessremaining fuel has more segments to showthe remaining fuel level in greater detail.

l The direction of the arrow ( ) indicatesthat the fuel-filler lid is on the left side ofthe vehicle.

qDashboard Illumination

Rotate the knob to adjust the brightness ofthe instrument cluster and otherilluminations in the dashboard.

NOTEl The brightness of dashboard illuminations

can be adjusted when the headlights andParking lights are turned on.

l When the dashboard illuminationbrightness cannot be adjusted any more, abeep sound will be heard.

Dim

Bright

Canceling the illumination dimmer

When the headlight switch is in theor position, the illumination of theinstrument cluster dims.

When Driving


4-13


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (136,1)

When driving on snowy or foggy roads,or in other situations when the instrumentcluster's visibility is reduced due to glarefrom surrounding brightness, cancel theillumination dimmer and increase theillumination intensity.

To cancel the illumination dimmer, rotatethe knob clockwise fully. You will hear abeep sound and the illumination dimmerwill be canceled.

NOTEl This symbol ( ) indicates the knob to

adjust the brightness of the dashboardillumination.

l If the dashboard illumination knob is keptat the illumination dimmer cancel position,the instrument cluster will not dim when theheadlight switch is turned to the or

position again. Rotate the dashboardillumination knob counterclockwise toactivate the illumination dimmer.

qOutside Temperature Display

When the ignition is switched ON, theoutside temperature is displayed.

Type A

Type B

NOTEUnder the following conditions, the outsidetemperature display may differ from the actualoutside temperature depending on thesurroundings and vehicle conditions:l Significantly cold or hot temperatures.l Sudden changes in outside temperature.l The vehicle is parked.l The vehicle is driven at low speeds.

(Type B instrument cluster)The outside temperature unit can beswitched between Celsius and Fahrenheitusing the following procedure.

1. Press the INFO button with the ignitionswitched off and continue pressing theINFO button for 5 seconds or longerwhile switching the ignition ON. Theoutside temperature display flashes.

2. Press the up or down part of theINFO switch to change the outsidetemperature unit.

3. Press and hold the INFO button for 3seconds or longer while the outsidetemperature display is flashing. Theoutside temperature displayilluminates.

4-14

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (137,1)

qCruise Control Set Vehicle SpeedDisplay (Type A instrument cluster)

The vehicle speed preset using the cruisecontrol is displayed.

qMaintenance Monitor (Type Ainstrument cluster)

The following maintenance periodnotifications can be displayed by turningthe Maintenance Monitor on.l Scheduled Maintenancel Tire Rotationl Tire Pressure CheckThe maintenance monitor displays theinformation when the ignition is switchedON.

NOTEThis function is inoperable while the vehicle isbeing driven.

Initial setting method

1. Press the up or down part of theINFO switch and select Settings, andthen press the INFO button.

2. Press the up or down part of theINFO switch and select Maintenance,and then press the INFO button.

3. Press the up or down part of theINFO switch to select the item youwant to turn on from the following, andthen press the INFO button.

l Scheduledl Tire Rotationl Tire Pressure

NOTEIf a Scheduled Maintenance item has been set,both the time and distance can be set. Foritems other than Scheduled Maintenance,either distance or time can be set.

4. Press the up or down part of theINFO switch and select Set Time or SetDistance, and then press the INFObutton. The screen for setting thedistance or time to the nextmaintenance period is displayed.

When Driving


4-15


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (138,1)

5. Press the up or down part of theINFO switch to change the set distanceor time, and press the INFO button. Ifno changes are necessary, press theINFO button.

NOTEl The initial setting values are displayed

corresponding to the maintenance schedule(except some countries). For each regionalmaintenance schedule, Refer to ScheduledMaintenance on page 6-4.

l is displayed on the set items.

Message display

When the remaining time or the distanceapproaches 0, a message is displayed eachtime the ignition is switched ON.

NOTEl If any of the INFO switches (up , down

, or INFO button) is pressed while amessage is displayed, it will no longer bedisplayed the next time the ignition isswitched ON.

l After the vehicle is serviced and theremaining time/distance is reset, themessage for the next maintenance periodwill be displayed when the remainingdistance or time to the next maintenanceperiod approaches 0 (displays when engineis started).

l If there are multiple messages, they aredisplayed according to their order.

l If OFF is set for Messages, messages arenot displayed.

4-16

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (139,1)

Message display

Item Start of message display Displayed message

ScheduledMaintenance

When remaining distance is less than500 km (250 mile), or remaining days areless than 15 (whichever comes first)

Scheduled Maintenance Due

Tire Rotation When remaining distance is less than500 km (250 mile)

Tire Rotation Due

Tire Pressure Check When remaining days are less than 15 Tire Pressure Increase Pressure

Reset method

If resetting is performed after amaintenance has been completed, anotification of the next maintenanceperiod will be displayed when the periodapproaches.



3. Press the up or down part of theINFO switch to select the item youwant to reset from the following, andthen press the INFO button.


NOTEl The current remaining distance and time is

displayed.l Even if the remaining distance or time have

surpassed 0, the display does not display aminus (_) and leaves the value at 0.

4. Press the up or down part of theINFO switch and select Set Time or SetDistance, and then press the INFObutton. The remaining time anddistance values return to the valuespreviously set. If no changes arenecessary, press the INFO button.

NOTEl If the settings are changed from the initial

values, the values which you set aredisplayed, not the initial values.

l Even if the battery is disconnected, theremaining distance and time information isnot erased.

When Driving


4-17


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (140,1)

Method for turning the system off

The maintenance monitor can be turnedoff even after it has been turned on. If youwant to turn it off, the remaining distanceand time calculation to the nextmaintenance period is stopped, and amessage does not display to indicate anapproaching maintenance period.



3. Press the up or down part of theINFO switch to select the item youwant to turn off from the following,and then press the INFO button.


4. Select OFF and press the INFO button.

qTrip Computer and INFO Switch

The following information can be selectedby pressing the up or down part ofthe INFO switch with the ignitionswitched ON.l Approximate distance you can travelon the available fuel

l Average fuel economyl Current fuel economyl Average vehicle speedl i-ELOOP display (Type A instrumentcluster)í

l Lane departure warning system(LDWS) display (Type A instrumentcluster)í

l Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)display (Type A instrument cluster)í

l Settings (Type A instrument cluster)l Warning (Type A instrument cluster)If you have any problems with your tripcomputer, consult an Authorized MazdaDealer.

Distance-to-empty mode

This mode displays the approximatedistance you can travel on the remainingfuel based on the fuel economy.

4-18

When Driving

íSome models.



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (141,1)

The distance-to-empty will be calculatedand displayed every second.

Type A

Type B

NOTEl Even though the distance-to-empty display

may indicate a sufficient amount ofremaining driving distance before refuelingis required, refuel as soon as possible if thefuel level is very low or the low fuelwarning light illuminates.

l The display will not change unless you addmore than approximately 10 L (2.6 US gal,2.2 Imp gal) of fuel.

l The distance-to-empty is the approximateremaining distance the vehicle can bedriven until all the graduation marks in thefuel gauge indicating the remaining fuelsupply disappear.

Average fuel economy mode

This mode displays the average fueleconomy by calculating the total fuelconsumption and the total traveleddistance since purchasing the vehicle, re-connecting the battery after disconnection,or resetting the data. The average fueleconomy is calculated and displayedevery minute.

Type A

Type B

To clear the data being displayed, pressthe INFO button for more than 1.5seconds.After pressing the INFO button, - - - L/100 km (- - - mpg) will be displayed forabout 1 minute before the fuel economy isrecalculated and displayed.

Current fuel economy mode

This mode displays the current fueleconomy by calculating the amount offuel consumption and the distancetraveled.

When Driving


4-19


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (142,1)

Current fuel economy will be calculatedand displayed every 2 seconds.

Type A

Type B

When you've slowed to about 5 km/h (3mph), - - - L/100 km (- - - mpg) will bedisplayed.

Average vehicle speed mode

This mode displays the average vehiclespeed by calculating the distance and thetime traveled since connecting the batteryor resetting the data.

Average vehicle speed will be calculatedand displayed every 10 seconds.

Type A

Type B

To clear the data being displayed, pressthe INFO button for more than 1.5seconds. After pressing the INFO button,- - - km/h (- - - mph) will be displayed forabout 1 minute before the vehicle speed isrecalculated and displayed.

4-20

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (143,1)

i-ELOOP display (Type A instrumentcluster)í

The i-ELOOP operation status isdisplayed.Refer to i-ELOOP on page 4-97.

Lane Departure Warning System(LDWS) display (Type A instrumentcluster)í

Information regarding the Lane DepartureWarning System (LDWS) is displayed.Refer to Lane Departure Warning System(LDWS) on page 4-131.

Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)display (Type A instrument cluster)í

Information regarding the Mazda RadarCruise Control (MRCC) is displayed.Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) on page 4-103.

Settings (Type A instrument cluster)

The following settings can be changed(Setting changes cannot be made whiledriving because the settings are notdisplayed.):l Reset Averagesl Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)l Lane Departure Warning System(LDWS)

l Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Systeml Maintenancel Optional Screenl Volumesl Unitsl Languagel Restore Default

To change settings


When Driving


4-21íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (144,1)

2. Press the up or down part of theINFO switch to select the item youwant to change, and then press theINFO button.

3. Press the up or down part of theINFO switch to select the desiredsetting, and then press the INFObutton.

Warning (Display Indication) (Type Ainstrument cluster)

A message is displayed to notify the userof the system operation status andmalfunctions or abnormalities.Check the indicated message.

4-22

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (145,1)

Warning/Indicator Lights

qType A

Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas

(Display example)Displays as follows:

Master warning light

Indication in display and master warning light in instrument cluster are illuminatedat same timeThis indicates a malfunction with the vehicle system. Check the message indicated in thedisplay and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. For details, refer to the explanations forthe warning/indicator lights, in the warning/indicator lights section, which match thesymbol in the upper part of the display. If a message is not indicated in the display, operatethe INFO switch to display the “Warning” screen.

Multi-information display

A message such as the system operation status, a malfunction, or an abnormality isindicated.l (When a symbol and message are indicated in the display)For details on the symbols indicated in the upper part of the screen, check the indicationand method for taking action list.

When Driving


4-23


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (146,1)

l (When only a message is indicated in the display)Follow the instructions indicated in the display.

If any of the content in the following illustrations is indicated, there may be a problem withthe vehicle. The method for taking action differs depending on the indication.Check the following illustrations below.

Action: Park the vehicle immediately, view the symbol indicated in the upper part ofthe screen and then refer to the “Indication and method for taking action list”containing the symbol to see what action should be taken.

Indication on display

Action: Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have your vehicle inspected. View thesymbol indicated in the upper part of the screen and refer to the “Indication andmethod for taking action list” containing the symbol to see what action should betaken.


Action: Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer to have your vehicle inspected.


4-24

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (147,1)

Indication and method for taking action list

Signal Warning/Indicator Lights Page

Master Warning Light 4-29

Brake System Warning Light 4-30

ABS Warning Light 4-30

Charging System Warning Indication 4-31

Engine Oil Warning Indication 4-32

Check Engine Light 4-32

High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light (Red) 4-33

BSM OFF Indicator Light 4-45

Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Warning Light (Amber)/IndicatorLight (Green)

4-33

Automatic Transaxle Warning Indication 4-34

Power Steering Malfunction Indication 4-34

Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light 4-35

Low Fuel Warning Light 4-36

Check Fuel Cap Warning Indication 4-36

Seat Belt Warning Light 4-36

When Driving


4-25


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (148,1)


Door-Ajar Warning Indication 4-37

Trunk lid-Ajar Warning Indication 4-38

Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Indication 4-38

Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light 4-38

KEY Warning Indication 4-40

High Beam Control System (HBC) Warning Light (Amber)/Indicator Light(Green)

4-42

Wrench Indication 4-42

TCS/DSC Indicator Light 4-42

DSC OFF Indicator Light 4-42

AFS OFF Indicator Light 4-43

Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light (Blue) 4-43

Shift Position Indication 4-43

SPORT Mode Indicator Light 4-44

Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light 4-44

4-26

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (149,1)


Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights 4-44

Security Indicator Light 4-44

Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green) 4-45

Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Warning Light (Amber)/IndicatorLight (Green)

4-45

Lights-On Indicator Light 4-46

qType B

Warning/Indicator lights will appear in any of the highlighted areas


Master Warning Light 4-29

Brake System Warning Light 4-30

ABS Warning Light 4-30

Charging System Warning Light 4-31

Engine Oil Warning Light 4-32

When Driving


4-27


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (150,1)


Check Engine Light 4-32

High Engine Coolant Temperature Warning Light (Red) 4-33

BSM OFF Indicator Light 4-45

Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Warning Light (Amber)/IndicatorLight (Green)

4-33

Automatic Transaxle Warning Light 4-34

Power Steering Malfunction Light 4-34

Air Bag/Front Seat Belt Pretensioner System Warning Light 4-35

Low Fuel Warning Light 4-36

Check Fuel Cap Warning Light 4-36

Seat Belt Warning Light 4-36

Door-Ajar Warning Light 4-37

Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Light 4-38

Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light 4-38

KEY Warning Light 4-40

High Beam Control System (HBC) Warning Light (Amber)/Indicator Light(Green)

4-42

TCS/DSC Indicator Light 4-42

4-28

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (151,1)


DSC OFF Indicator Light 4-42

AFS OFF Indicator Light 4-43

Low Engine Coolant Temperature Indicator Light (Blue) 4-43

Shift Position Indication 4-43

Headlight High-Beam Indicator Light 4-44

Turn Signal/Hazard Warning Indicator Lights 4-44

Security Indicator Light 4-44

Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)/Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green) 4-45

Lights-On Indicator Light 4-46

qMaster Warning Light

This warning light stays on for a fewseconds when the ignition is switchedON.

Type A

Displays when notification of the systemmalfunctions is required.Check the message indicated in thedisplay and consult an Authorized MazdaDealer.

Type B

The light illuminates continuously if anyone of the following occurs. Consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.l There is a malfunction in the batterymanagement system.

l There is a malfunction in the brakeswitch.

When Driving


4-29


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (152,1)

qBrake System Warning Light

This warning has the following functions:

Parking brake warning/Warning lightinspection

The light illuminates when the parkingbrake is applied with the ignition switchedto START or ON. It turns off when theparking brake is fully released.

Low brake fluid level warning

If the light stays on after the parking brakeis fully released there may be a problemwith the brakes.

Drive to the side of the road and park offthe right-of-way.

You may notice that the pedal is harder todepress or that it may go closer to thefloor. In either case, it will take longer tostop the vehicle.

1. With the engine stopped, open thehood and check the brake fluid levelimmediately, and then add fluid ifrequired (page 6-25).

2. After adding fluid, check the lightagain.

If the warning light remains on, or if thebrakes do not operate properly, do notdrive the vehicle. Have it towed to anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

Even if the light turns off, have yourbrake system inspected as soon aspossible by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTEHaving to add brake fluid is sometimes anindicator of leakage. Consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer as soon as possible even if thebrake light is no longer illuminated.

WARNINGDo not drive with the brake systemwarning light illuminated. Contact anAuthorized Mazda Dealer to have thebrakes inspected as soon as possible:

Driving with the brake systemwarning light illuminated isdangerous. It indicates that yourbrakes may not work at all or thatthey could completely fail at anytime. If this light remainsilluminated, after checking that theparking brake is fully released, havethe brakes inspected immediately.

qABS Warning Light

The warning light stays on for a fewseconds when the ignition is switchedON.

4-30

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (153,1)

If the ABS warning light stays on whileyou're driving, the ABS control unit hasdetected a system malfunction. If thisoccurs, your brakes will function normallyas if the vehicle had no ABS.Should this happen, consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer as soon as possible.

NOTEl When the engine is jump-started to charge

the battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABSwarning light may illuminate. If this occurs,it is the result of the weak battery and doesnot indicate an ABS malfunction.Recharge the battery.

l The brake assist system does not operatewhile the ABS warning light is illuminated.

qElectronic Brake ForceDistribution System Warning

If the electronic brake force distributioncontrol unit determines that somecomponents are operating incorrectly, thecontrol unit may illuminate the brakesystem warning light and the ABSwarning light simultaneously. Theproblem is likely to be the electronicbrake force distribution system.

WARNINGDo not drive with both the ABS warninglight and brake warning lightilluminated. Have the vehicle towed toan Authorized Mazda Dealer to havethe brakes inspected as soon aspossible:

Driving when the brake systemwarning light and ABS warning lightare illuminated simultaneously isdangerous.When both lights are illuminated, therear wheels could lock more quicklyin an emergency stop than undernormal circumstances.

qCharging System WarningIndication/Warning Light

Type B

This warning light illuminates when theignition is switched ON and turns offwhen the engine is started.

Type A/Type B

If the warning light/indication illuminateswhile driving, it indicates a malfunctionof the alternator or of the charging system.Drive to the side of the road and park offthe right-of-way. Consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

When Driving


4-31


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (154,1)

CAUTIONDo not continue driving when thecharging system warning light isilluminated because the engine couldstop unexpectedly.

qEngine Oil Warning Indication/Warning Light

Type B

This warning light illuminates when theignition is switched ON and turns offwhen the engine is started.

Type A/Type B

This warning light/warning indicationindicates low engine oil pressure.

CAUTIONDo not run the engine if the oilpressure is low. Otherwise, it couldresult in extensive engine damage.

If the light illuminates or the warningindication is displayed while driving:

1. Drive to the side of the road and parkoff the right-of-way on level ground.

2. Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutesfor the oil to drain back into the oilpan.

3. Inspect the engine oil level (page 6-22).If it's low, add the appropriate amountof engine oil while being careful not tooverfill.

CAUTIONDo not run the engine if the oil levelis low. Otherwise, it could result inextensive engine damage.

4. Start the engine and check the warninglight/warning indication.

If the light/indication remains illuminatedeven though the oil level is normal or afteradding oil, stop the engine immediatelyand have your vehicle towed to anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

qCheck Engine Light

This indicator light illuminates when theignition is switched ON and turns offwhen the engine is started.

If this light illuminates while driving, thevehicle may have a problem. It isimportant to note the driving conditionswhen the light illuminated and consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

The check engine light may illuminate inthe following cases:l The fuel tank level being very low orapproaching empty.

l The engine's electrical system has aproblem.

l The emission control system has aproblem.

l The fuel-filler cap is missing or nottightened securely.

4-32

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (155,1)

If the check engine light remains on, or itflashes continuously, do not drive at highspeeds and consult an Authorized MazdaDealer as soon as possible.

qHigh Engine Coolant TemperatureWarning Light (Red)

When the ignition is switched ON, thelight illuminates momentarily and thenturns off.

The light flashes when the engine coolanttemperature is extremely high, andilluminates when the engine coolanttemperature increases further.

Handling Procedure

Flashing light

Drive slowly to reduce engine load untilyou can find a safe place to stop thevehicle and wait for the engine to cooldown.

Illuminated light

This indicates the possibility ofoverheating. Park the vehicle in a safeplace immediately and stop the engine.Refer to Overheating (page 7-24).

CAUTIONDo not drive the vehicle with the highengine coolant temperature warninglight illuminated. Otherwise, it couldresult in damage to the engine.

qLDWSWarning Light (Amber)/LDWS Indicator Light (Green)í

LDWS warning light (Amber)

When illuminated

l When the ignition is switched ON, thewarning light illuminates.

l The indicator light turns off when theLDWS is canceled.

l The indicator light illuminates whenLDWS is on standby.

Under the following conditions, theLDWS warning light (amber) illuminatescontinuously.l The windshield glass in front of theforward sensing camera (FSC) isfogged or there is an obstruction.

l When the vehicle is driven at less thanabout 60 km/h (37 mph).

l White (yellow) lines are not detected.

When flashing

l The warning light flashes when thesystem has a malfunction. Have yourvehicle inspected at an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

l The LDWS does not operate when thewarning light flashes.

When Driving


4-33íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (156,1)

CAUTIONØ If any of the following cases

occurs, the system may have amalfunction. Have the vehicleinspected at an Authorized MazdaDealer.Ø The light flashes while the

vehicle is being driven.Ø The light does not illuminate

when the ignition is switchedON.

Ø Always use tires for all wheels thatare of the specified size, and thesame manufacture, brand, andtread pattern. In addition, do notuse tires with significantlydifferent wear patterns on thesame vehicle. If such impropertires are used, the LDWS may notoperate normally.

Ø When an emergency spare tire isused, the system may not operatenormally.

LDWS indicator light (Green)

When illuminated

l The LDWS indicator light illuminatesfrom the standby condition when thefollowing conditions are met.l The vehicle speed is 65 km/h (40

mph) or faster.l White (yellow) lines are detected.

l The indicator light turns off when theLDWS switch is pressed.

When flashing

The indicator flashes when the systemdetermines that the vehicle may bedeviating from its lane.

qAutomatic Transaxle WarningIndication/Warning Lightí

Type B

This warning light stays on for a fewseconds when the ignition is switchedON.

Type A/Type B

The light/indication illuminates when thetransaxle has a problem.

CAUTIONIf the automatic transaxle warninglight/warning indication illuminates,the transaxle has an electricalproblem. Continuing to drive yourMazda in this condition could causedamage to your transaxle. Consultan Authorized Mazda Dealer as soonas possible.

qPower Steering MalfunctionIndication/Indicator Light

Type B

This indicator light illuminates when theignition is switched ON, and turns offwhen the engine is started.

4-34

When Driving

íSome models.



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (157,1)

Type A/Type B

The power steering malfunction indicatorlight/warning indication illuminates ifthere is a malfunction with the powersteering while the engine is running.If the indicator light/warning indicationilluminates, park the vehicle in a safeplace immediately and stop the engine.If the indicator light/warning indicationdoes not turn off even if the engine isrestarted afterwards, consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTEl If the indicator light/warning indication

illuminates, the power steering will notoperate normally. If this happens, thesteering wheel can still be operated,however, the operation may feel heavycompared to normal, and the steeringwheel could vibrate when turning.

l Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel leftand right while the vehicle is stopped ormoving extremely slowly will cause thepower steering system to go into protectivemode which will make the steering feelheavy, but this does not indicate a problem.If this occurs, park the vehicle safely andwait several minutes for the system toreturn to normal.

qAir Bag/Front Seat BeltPretensioner System Warning Light

If the air bag/front seat belt pretensionersystem is working properly, the warninglight illuminates when the ignition isswitched ON or after the engine iscranked. The warning light turns off aftera specified period of time.

A system malfunction is indicated if thewarning light constantly flashes,constantly illuminates or does notilluminate at all when the ignition isswitched ON. If any of these occur,consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer assoon as possible. The system may notoperate in an accident.

WARNINGNever tamper with the air bag/pretensioner systems and always havean Authorized Mazda Dealer performall servicing and repairs:

Self-servicing or tampering with thesystems is dangerous. An air bag/pretensioner could accidentallyactivate or become disabled causingserious injury or death.

When Driving


4-35


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (158,1)

qLow Fuel Warning Light

This warning light signals that the fueltank will soon be empty.Refuel as soon as possible.

qCheck Fuel Cap Warning Light

Type B

This warning light illuminates for a fewseconds when the ignition is switchedON.

Type A/Type B

If the check fuel cap warning lightilluminates/indication while driving, thefuel-filler cap may not be installedproperly. Stop the engine and reinstall thefuel-filler cap.Refer to Fuel-Filler Cap on page 3-26.

qSeat Belt Warning Light

Driver's seat

Front passenger's seatí

With warning light for frontpassenger's seat

The seat belt warning light illuminates ifthe driver or front passenger's seat isoccupied and the seat belt is not fastenedwith the ignition switched ON.

Without warning light for frontpassenger's seat

The seat belt warning light illuminates ifthe driver's seat is occupied and the seatbelt is not fastened with the ignitionswitched ON.

4-36

When Driving

íSome models.



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (159,1)

Seat belt reminder

NOTEConsult an Authorized Mazda Dealer todeactivate or restore the belt reminder. Thoughthe belt reminder can be deactivated, doing sowill defeat the purpose of the system to warnthe driver and the front passenger in the eventthat their seat belts are not fastened. For thesafety of the driver and front passenger, Mazdarecommends not deactivating the beltreminder.

Front seat

If the vehicle is driven with the driver orfront passenger's seat belt unfastened, theseat belt warning light illuminates and awarning beep sounds.

NOTESome models do not have the seat beltreminder function for the front passenger'sseat.

If the driver or front passenger's seat beltis unfastened (only when the frontpassenger seat is occupied) and thevehicle is driven at a speed faster thanabout 20 km/h (12 mph), the warninglight will flash and a beep sound will beheard. After a short time, the warninglight stops flashing, but remainsilluminated, and the beep sound stops.

Until a seat belt is fastened or a givenperiod of time has elapsed, the beep soundwill not stop even if the vehicle speedfalls below 20 km/h (12 mph).

NOTEl The warning light flashes and a beep sound

will be heard for about 6 seconds if thedriver's seat belt is not fastened when theignition is switched ON.

l If a driver or front passenger's seat belt isunfastened after the beep sound turns off(warning light remains illuminated), andthe vehicle speed exceeds 20 km/h (12mph), the warning light flashes and beepsound activates again.

l Placing heavy items on the front passengerseat may cause the front passenger seat beltwarning function to operate depending onthe weight of the item.

l To allow the front passenger seat weightsensor to function properly, do not placeand sit on an additional seat cushion on thefront passenger seat. The sensor may notfunction properly because the additionalseat cushion could cause sensorinterference.

l When a small child sits on the frontpassenger seat, it is possible that thewarning light will not operate.

qDoor-Ajar Warning Indication/Warning Light

Type A

Type B

When Driving


4-37


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (160,1)

Type A

This warning indication illuminates whenany door is not securely closed.Close the door securely before driving thevehicle.

Type B

This warning light illuminates when anydoor or the trunk lid is not securelyclosed.Close the door or the trunk lid securelybefore driving the vehicle.

qTrunk lid-Ajar Warning Indication(Type A instrument cluster)í

This warning indication is illuminatedwhen the trunk lid is not securely closed.Close the trunk lid securely before drivingthe vehicle.

qLow Washer Fluid Level WarningIndication/Warning Lightí

This warning light/warning indicationindicates that little washer fluid remains.Add fluid (page 6-25).

qTire Pressure Monitoring SystemWarning Light

This warning light illuminates for a fewseconds when the ignition is switchedON.

The warning light illuminates and a beepis heard when tire pressure is too low inone or more tires, and flashes when thereis a system malfunction.

4-38

When Driving

íSome models.



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (161,1)

WARNINGIf the tire pressure monitoring systemwarning light illuminates or flashes, orthe tire pressure warning beep sound isheard, decrease vehicle speedimmediately and avoid suddenmaneuvering and braking:

If the tire pressure monitoring systemwarning light illuminates or flashes,or the tire pressure warning beepsound is heard, it is dangerous todrive the vehicle at high speeds, orperform sudden maneuvering orbraking. Vehicle drivability couldworsen and result in an accident.To determine if you have a slow leakor a flat, pull over to a safe positionwhere you can check the visualcondition of the tire and determine ifyou have enough air to proceed to aplace where air may be added andthe system monitored again by anAuthorized Mazda Dealer or a tirerepair station.

Do not ignore the TPMS Warning Light:Ignoring the TPMS warning light isdangerous, even if you know why it isilluminated. Have the problem takencare of as soon as possible before itdevelops into a more serioussituation that could lead to tirefailure and a dangerous accident.

Warning light illuminates/Warningbeep sounds

When the warning light illuminates, andthe warning beep sound is heard (about 3seconds), tire pressure is too low in one ormore tires.

Adjust the tire pressure to the correct tirepressure and initialize TPMS. Refer to thespecification charts (page 9-7).

NOTEl Perform tire pressure adjustment when the

tires are cold. Tire pressure will varyaccording to the tire temperature, thereforelet the vehicle stand for 1 hour or only driveit 1.6 km (1 mile) or less before adjustingthe tire pressures. When pressure isadjusted on hot tires to the cold inflationpressure, the TPMS warning light/beep mayturn on after the tires cool and pressuredrops below specification.Also, an illuminated TPMS warning light,resulting from the tire air pressure droppingdue to cold ambient temperature willremain illuminated even if the ambienttemperature rises. In this case, it will alsobe necessary to adjust the tire air pressures.If the TPMS warning light illuminates dueto a drop in tire air pressure, make sure tocheck and adjust the tire air pressures.

l Tires lose air naturally over time and theTPMS cannot tell if the tires are getting toosoft over time or you have a flat. However,when you find one low tire in a set of four-that is an indication of trouble; you shouldhave someone drive the vehicle slowlyforward so you can inspect any low tire forcuts and any metal objects sticking throughtread or sidewall. Put a few drops of waterin the valve stem to see if it bubblesindicating a bad valve. Leaks need to beaddressed by more than simply reinflatingthe tire as leaks are dangerous - take it toan Authorized Mazda Dealer.

If the warning light illuminates again evenafter the tire pressures are adjusted and theTPMS initialization is performed, theremay be a tire puncture. Replace thepunctured tire with the temporary sparetire (page 7-13).

When Driving


4-39


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (162,1)

Warning light flashes

If the tire pressure monitoring system hasa malfunction, the tire pressure warninglight flashes for about 1 minute when theignition is switched ON and thencontinues illuminating. Have your vehiclechecked by an Authorized Mazda Dealeras soon as possible.

qKEY Indication/Warning Light(Red)/Indicator Light (Green)

Type A

“Keyless System Inspection Required”is displayed

This message is displayed if the advancedkeyless entry & push button start systemhas a problem.Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

CAUTIONIf the above message is indicated, orthe push button start indicator light(amber) flashes, the engine may notstart. If the engine cannot be started,try starting it using the emergencyoperation for starting the engine, andhave the vehicle inspected at anAuthorized Mazda Dealer as soon aspossible.Refer to Emergency Operation forStarting the Engine on page 4-8.

“Set Power to OFF” is displayed

This message is displayed when thedriver's door is opened without switchingthe ignition off.

“Key not found” is displayed

This message is displayed when any ofthe following operations is performedwith the key out of the operational rangeor placed in areas inside the cabin where itis difficult for the key to be detected.l The push button start is pressed withthe ignition switched off

l The ignition is switched onl All doors are closed without switchingthe ignition off

“Depress the Brake Pedal and Touchthe Key to the Start Button”(Automatic Transaxle vehicle)/“Depressthe Clutch Pedal and Touch the Key tothe Start Button” (Manual Transaxlevehicle) is displayed


l Brake pedal (Automatic transaxlevehicle)/Clutch pedal (Manualtransaxle vehicle) is depressed with theignition switched off

“Key Battery is low” is displayed

This message is displayed when theremaining battery power of the key is lowand the ignition is switched from on tooff.

4-40

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (163,1)

NOTEBecause the key utilizes low-intensity radiowaves, the Key Removed From VehicleWarning may activate if the key is carriedtogether with a metal object or it is placed in apoor signal reception area.

Type B

This indicator has two colors.

KEY Warning Light (Red)

When illuminatedIf any malfunction occurs in the keylessentry system, it illuminates continuously.

CAUTIONIf the key warning indicator lightilluminates or the push button startindicator light (amber) flashes, theengine may not start. If the enginecannot be started, try starting itusing the emergency operation forstarting the engine, and have thevehicle inspected at an AuthorizedMazda Dealer as soon as possible.Refer to Emergency Operation forStarting the Engine on page 4-8.

When flashingl Under the following conditions, theKEY warning light (red) flashes tonotify the driver that the ignitioncannot be switched from off.l The key battery is dead.l The key is not within operational

range.l The key is placed in areas where it is

difficult for the system to detect thesignal (page 3-7).

l A key from another manufacturersimilar to the key is in theoperational range.

l Under the following conditions, theKEY warning light (red) will flashcontinuously when the ignition has notbeen switched off to notify the driverthat the key has been removed from thevehicle. The KEY warning light (red)will stop flashing when the key is backinside the vehicle:The ignition has not been switched offand all the doors and the trunk lid areclosed after removing the key from thevehicle.


KEY Indicator Light (Green)

When illuminatedWhen the brake pedal is depressed withan automatic transaxle or the clutch pedalis depressed with a manual transaxle, thesystem confirms that the correct key isinside the vehicle, the KEY indicator light(green) illuminates, and the engine can bestarted (page 4-3).When flashingWhen the ignition is switched from ON tooff, the KEY indicator light (green)flashes for approximately 30 secondsindicating that the remaining batterypower is low. Replace with a new batterybefore the key becomes unusable.Refer to Battery Replacement on page6-32.

When Driving


4-41


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (164,1)

qHBC Warning Light (Amber)/HBC Indicator Light (Green)í

HBC warning light (Amber)

When illuminated

When the ignition is switched ON, thiswarning light illuminates and then turnsoff after a few seconds. The warning lightilluminates if the area of the windshield infront of the forward sensing camera (FSC)is fogged or obstructed.

When flashing

This light flashes if there is a malfunctionin the high beam control system (HBC).Have your vehicle inspected by anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

HBC indicator light (Green)

This indicator light illuminates when thesystem is operating and turns off when thesystem operation is canceled.

qWrench Warning Indicationí

Type A

Perform maintenance in accordance withthe message.

qTCS/DSC Indicator Light

This indicator light stays on for a fewseconds when the ignition is switchedON. If the TCS or DSC is operating, theindicator light flashes.

If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or thebrake assist system may have amalfunction and they may not operatecorrectly. Take your vehicle to anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTEl In addition to the indicator light flashing, a

slight lugging sound will come from theengine. This indicates that the TCS/DSC isoperating properly.

l On slippery surfaces, such as fresh snow, itwill be impossible to achieve high rpmwhen the TCS is on.

qDSC OFF Indicator Light

This indicator light stays on for a fewseconds when the ignition is switchedON.It also illuminates when the DSC OFFswitch is pressed and TCS/DSC isswitched off.Refer to DSC OFF Switch on page 4-95.

4-42

When Driving

íSome models.



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (165,1)

If the light remains illuminated and theTCS/DSC is not switched off, take yourvehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.The DSC may have a malfunction.

qAFS OFF Indicator Lightí

When illuminated

This indicator light illuminates brieflywhen the ignition is switched ON, andthen turns off.Pressing the AFS OFF switch cancels theAFS function and illuminates theindicator light.

When flashing

The indicator light flashes continuously ifthe system is malfunctioning. Consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTEl Even if the AFS is not operating due to

some malfunction, the normal headlightfunction is still operable.

l If there is a malfunction with the headlightauto-leveling function, the indicator lightflashes.

qLow Engine Coolant TemperatureIndicator Light (Blue)

The light illuminates continuously whenthe engine coolant temperature is low andturns off after the engine is warm.

If the low engine coolant temperatureindicator light remains illuminated afterthe engine has been sufficiently warmedup, the temperature sensor could have amalfunction. Consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

qShift Position Indication

This indicates the selected shift position.

Gear position indicator

In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shiftposition indicator illuminates and thenumeral for the selected gear displays.

When Driving


4-43íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (166,1)

qSPORT Mode Indicator Light

The light is illuminated while in SPORTmode.

NOTEThe indicator light flashes a few times toindicate that the mode cannot be switched toSPORT mode even if the drive select switch ispressed under the following conditions:l The vehicle is driven on a slippery road

surface such as an icy or snow-bound road.l The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)

system/cruise control is operating.l The vehicle is making a curve.

qHeadlight High-Beam IndicatorLight

This light indicates one of two things:l The high-beam headlights are on.l The turn signal lever is in the flash-to-pass position.

qTurn Signal/Hazard WarningIndicator Lights

When operating the turn signal lights, theleft or right turn signal indicator lightflashes to indicate which turn signal lightis operating (page 4-68).

When operating the hazard warninglights, both turn signal indicator lightsflash (page 4-75).

If an indicator light remains illuminated(does not flash) or if it flashes abnormally,one of the turn signal bulbs may beburned out. Consult an Authorized MazdaDealer.

qSecurity Indicator Light

This indicator light starts flashing everytwo seconds when the ignition is switchedfrom ON to OFF and the immobilizersystem is armed.

The light stops flashing when the ignitionis switched ON with the correct key.At this time, the immobilizer system isdisarmed and the light illuminates forabout three seconds and then turns off.

4-44

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (167,1)

If the engine does not start with thecorrect key, and the security indicatorlight keeps illuminating or flashing, thesystem may have a malfunction. Consultan Authorized Mazda Dealer.

qMazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) Warning Light (Amber)/Indicator Light (Green)í

Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)Warning Light (Amber)

Illuminated

When the ignition is switched ON, thewarning light is illuminated and then turnsoff after a few seconds.

Flashing

The warning light flashes if there is amalfunction in the system while theMazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)system is on. Have your vehicle inspectedat an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)Indicator Light (Green)

Illuminated

Illuminated when the speed for the MazdaRadar Cruise Control (MRCC) system isset.

qCruise Main Indicator Light(Amber)/Cruise Set IndicatorLight (Green)í

The indicator light has two colors.

Cruise Main Indicator Light (Amber)

The indicator light illuminates amberwhen the ON switch is pressed and thecruise control system is activated.

Cruise Set Indicator Light (Green)

The indicator light illuminates green whena cruising speed has been set.

qBSM OFF Indicator Lightí

This indicator light illuminates for a fewseconds when the ignition is switchedON.

The BSM OFF indicator light illuminateswhen the BSM system is turned off bypressing the BSM OFF switch.The indicator light flashes if the BSMsystem has a malfunction. Consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

When Driving


4-45íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (168,1)

NOTEIf the vehicle is driven on a road with lesstraffic and few vehicles that the radar sensorscan detect, the system may pause (The BSMOFF indicator light in the instrument panelflashes). However, it does not indicate amalfunction.

qLights-On Indicator Light

This indicator light illuminates when theexterior lights and dashboard illuminationare on.

The light continues to flash if the lightingsystem has a malfunction. Consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

4-46

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (169,1)

Manual Transaxle Operation

qManual Transaxle Shift Pattern

Neutral position

The shift pattern of the transaxle isconventional, as shown.

Depress the clutch pedal all the way downwhile shifting; then release it slowly.

Your vehicle is equipped with a device toprevent shifting to R (reverse) by mistake.Push the shift lever downward and shift toR.

WARNINGDo not use sudden engine braking onslippery road surfaces or at highspeeds:

Shifting down while driving on wet,snowy, or frozen roads, or whiledriving at high speeds causes suddenengine braking, which is dangerous.The sudden change in tire speedcould cause the tires to skid. Thiscould lead to loss of vehicle controland an accident.

Be sure to leave the shift lever in 1 or Rposition and set the parking brakewhen leaving the vehicle unattended:

Otherwise the vehicle could moveand cause an accident.

CAUTIONØ Keep your foot off the clutch pedal

except when shifting gears. Also,do not use the clutch to hold thevehicle on an upgrade. Riding theclutch will cause needless clutchwear and damage.

Ø Do not apply any excessive lateralforce to the gear lever whenchanging from 5th to 4th gear.This could lead to the accidentalselection of 2nd gear, which canresult in damage to the transaxle.

Ø Make sure the vehicle comes to acomplete stop before shifting to R.Shifting to R while the vehicle isstill moving may damage thetransaxle.

NOTEIf shifting to R is difficult, shift back intoneutral, release the clutch pedal, and tryagain.

When Driving

Transaxle

4-47


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (170,1)

qRecommendations for Shifting

Upshifting

For normal acceleration, we recommendthese shift points.(U.S.A. and Canada)

Gear Vehicle speed

1 to 2 24 km/h (15 mph)

2 to 3 42 km/h (26 mph)

3 to 4 60 km/h (37 mph)

4 to 5 75 km/h (46 mph)

5 to 6 79 km/h (49 mph)

(Mexico)

Gear Vehicle speed

1 to 2 15 km/h (9 mph)

2 to 3 35 km/h (22 mph)

3 to 4 50 km/h (31 mph)

4 to 5 70 km/h (43 mph)

5 to 6 100 km/h (62 mph)

For cruising (U.S.A. and Canada)

Gear Vehicle speed

1 to 2 13 km/h (8 mph)

2 to 3 29 km/h (18 mph)

3 to 4 49 km/h (30 mph)

4 to 5 63 km/h (39 mph)

5 to 6 70 km/h (43 mph)

Downshifting

When you must slow down in heavytraffic or on a steep upgrade, downshiftbefore the engine starts to overwork. Thisreduces the chance of stalling and givesbetter acceleration when you need morespeed.On a steep downgrade, downshiftinghelps maintain safe speed and prolongsbrake life.

4-48

When Driving

Transaxle


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (171,1)

Automatic Transaxle Controls

Indicates the shift lever can be shifted freely into any position.

Indicates that you must hold in the lock-release button to shift.

Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal and hold in the lock-release button to shift (The ignition must be switched ON).

Various Lockouts:

With i-ELOOP system

Without i-ELOOP system

Lock-release button

Indicates that you must depress the brake pedal to shift (The ignition must be switched to ON).

Indicates the shift lever can be shifted freely into any position.

Various Lockouts:

NOTEThe Sport AT has an option that is not included in the traditional automatic transaxle giving thedriver the option of selecting each gear instead of leaving it to the transaxle to shift gears. Even ifyou intend to use the automatic transaxle functions as a traditional automatic, you should also beaware that you can inadvertently shift into manual shift mode and an inappropriate gear may beretained as the vehicle speed increases. If you notice the engine speed going higher or hear theengine racing, confirm you have not accidentally slipped into manual shift mode (page 4-52).

When Driving

Transaxle

4-49


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (172,1)

qDisplay Indication

For vehicles with the type A instrumentcluster, check the vehicle condition orhave the vehicle inspected at anAuthorized Mazda Dealer according tothe indication.

qWarning Light

A system malfunction or operationconditions are indicated by a warning.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page4-23.

qTransaxle Ranges

l The shift position indicator light in theinstrument cluster illuminates.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights onpage 4-23.

l The shift lever must be in P or N tooperate the starter.

P (Park)

P locks the transaxle and prevents thefront wheels from rotating.

WARNINGAlways set the shift lever to P and setthe parking brake:

Only setting the shift lever to the Pposition without using the parkingbrake to hold the vehicle isdangerous. If P fails to hold, thevehicle could move and cause anaccident.

CAUTIONØ Shifting into P, N or R while the

vehicle is moving can damageyour transaxle.

Ø Shifting into a driving gear orreverse when the engine is runningfaster than idle can damage thetransaxle.

R (Reverse)

In position R, the vehicle moves onlybackward. You must be at a complete stopbefore shifting to or from R, except underrare circumstances as explained inRocking the Vehicle (page 3-46).

N (Neutral)

In N, the wheels and transaxle are notlocked. The vehicle will roll freely evenon the slightest incline unless the parkingbrake or brakes are on.

WARNINGIf the engine is running faster than idle,do not shift from N or P into a drivinggear:

It's dangerous to shift from N or Pinto a driving gear when the engineis running faster than idle. If this isdone, the vehicle could movesuddenly, causing an accident orserious injury.

Do not shift into N when driving thevehicle:

Shifting into N while driving isdangerous. Engine braking cannot beapplied when decelerating whichcould lead to an accident or seriousinjury.

4-50

When Driving

Transaxle


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (173,1)

CAUTIONDo not shift into N when driving thevehicle. Doing so can cause transaxledamage.

NOTEApply the parking brake or depress the brakepedal before moving the shift lever from N toprevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly.

D (Drive)

D is the normal driving position. From astop, the transaxle will automatically shiftthrough a 6-gear sequence.

M (Manual)

M is the manual shift mode position.Gears can be shifted up or down byoperating the shift lever.Refer to Manual Shift Mode (page 4-52).

qActive Adaptive Shift (AAS)

Active Adaptive Shift (AAS)automatically controls the transaxle shiftpoints to best suit the road conditions anddriver input. This improves driving feel.The transaxle may switch to AAS modewhen driving up and down slopes,cornering, or depressing the acceleratorpedal quickly while the shift lever is in theD position.Depending on the driving conditions andvehicle operations, the transaxle may notshift gears, however, this does not indicatea problem because the AAS mode willmaintain the optimum gear position.

qShift-Lock System

The shift-lock system prevents shiftingout of P unless the brake pedal isdepressed.

To shift from P:

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. (With i-ELOOP system)Press and hold the lock-release button.

4. Move the shift lever.

NOTEl When the ignition is switched to ACC or the

ignition is switched off, the shift levercannot be shifted from P.

l The ignition cannot be switched to OFF ifthe shift lever is not in P.

qShift-Lock Override

If the shift lever will not move from Pusing the proper shift procedure, continueto hold down the pedal.

1. Remove the shift-lock override coverusing a cloth-wrapped flat headscrewdriver.

2. Insert a screwdriver and push it down.

When Driving

Transaxle

4-51


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (174,1)

With i-ELOOP system

Cover


Cover

3. Move the shift lever.

4. Take the vehicle to an AuthorizedMazda Dealer to have the systemchecked.

qManual Shift Mode

This mode gives you the feel of driving amanual transaxle vehicle by operating theshift lever and allows you to controlengine rpm and torque to the drive wheelsmuch like a manual transaxle when morecontrol is desired.

To change to manual shift mode, shift thelever from D to M.

NOTEChanging to manual shift mode while drivingwill not damage the transaxle.

With i-ELOOP system


To return to automatic shift mode, shiftthe lever from M to D.

NOTEl If you change to manual shift mode when

the vehicle is stopped, the gear will shift toM1.

l If you change to manual shift mode withoutdepressing the accelerator pedal whendriving in D range, 5th gear/6th gear, thegear will shift to M4/M5.

4-52

When Driving

Transaxle


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (175,1)

Indicators

Manual shift mode indicator

In manual shift mode, the “M” of the shiftposition indicator in the instrument panelilluminates.


The numeral for the selected gearilluminates.

Manual shift mode indicator


NOTEl If the gears cannot be shifted down when

driving at higher speeds, the gear positionindicator will flash twice to signal that thegears cannot be shifted down (to protect thetransaxle).

l If the automatic transaxle fluid (ATF)temperature becomes too high, there is thepossibility that the transaxle will switch toautomatic shift mode, canceling manualshift mode and turning off the gear positionindicator illumination. This is a normalfunction to protect the AT. After the ATFtemperature has decreased, the gearposition indicator illumination turns backon and driving in manual shift mode isrestored.

Shifting

You can shift gears up and down byoperating the shift lever or the steeringshift switchesí.

Manually Shifting up

(M1 → M2 → M3 → M4 → M5 → M6)To shift up to a higher gear, tap the shiftlever back ( ) once.With i-ELOOP system


When Driving

Transaxle

4-53íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (176,1)

To shift up to a higher gear with thesteering shift switches, pull the UP switchtoward you once with your fingers.

UP switch

WARNINGKeep your hands on the steering wheelrim when using fingers on the steeringshift switches:

Putting your hands inside the rim ofthe steering wheel when using thesteering shift switches is dangerous.If the driver's air bag were to deployin a collision, your hands could beimpacted causing injury.

NOTEl When driving slowly, the gears may not

shift up.l In manual shift mode, do not run the engine

with the tachometer needle in the REDZONE. When the engine rpm is high, a gearmay shift up automatically to protect theengine.

l When depressing the accelerator fully, thetransaxle will shift to a lower gear,depending on vehicle speed.

Manually Shifting down

(M6 → M5 → M4 → M3 → M2 → M1)To shift down to a lower gear, tap the shiftlever forward ( ) once.

With i-ELOOP system


To shift down to a lower gear with thesteering shift switches, pull the DOWNswitch toward you once with your fingers.

DOWN switch

4-54

When Driving

Transaxle


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (177,1)

WARNINGDo not use engine braking on slipperyroad surfaces or at high speeds:

Shifting down while driving on wet,snowy, or frozen roads, or whiledriving at high speeds causes suddenengine braking, which is dangerous.The sudden change in tire speedcould cause the tires to skid. Thiscould lead to loss of vehicle controland an accident.

Keep your hands on the steering wheelrim when using fingers on the steeringshift switches:

Putting your hands inside the rim ofthe steering wheel when using thesteering shift switches is dangerous.If the driver's air bag were to deployin a collision, your hands could beimpacted causing injury.

NOTEl When driving at high speeds, the gear may

not shift down.l During deceleration, the gear may

automatically shift down depending onvehicle speed.

l When depressing the accelerator fully, thetransaxle will shift to a lower gear,depending on vehicle speed.

Second gear fixed mode

When the shift lever is tapped back ( )while the vehicle is stopped or driven atthe following speeds, the transaxle is setin the second gear fixed mode.Except Mexico(With i-ELOOP system)10.5 km/h (6.52 mph) or less(Without i-ELOOP system)10.1 km/h (6.27 mph) or lessMexico9.7 km/h (6.0 mph) or less

The gear is fixed in second while in thismode for easier starting and driving onslippery roads. If the shift lever is tappedback ( ) or forward ( ) while in thesecond gear fixed mode, the mode will becanceled.

NOTEWhen depressing the accelerator fully, thetransaxle will shift to M1, depending on thevehicle speed.

Shifting specification

Shifting up

If the vehicle speed is lower than thespeed specified for each gear, the gearcannot be shifted up to a higher gear.

(Except Mexico)

With i-ELOOP system

Gear Vehicle speed*1

M1 →M2 0 km/h (0 mph)

M2 →M3 25.6 km/h (16.0 mph)

M3 →M4 37.1 km/h (23.1 mph)

M4 →M5 51.3 km/h (31.9 mph)

M5 →M6 70.0 km/h (43.5 mph)

*1: Always observe local speed limit regulations.



M1 →M2 0 km/h (0 mph)

M2 →M3 24.2 km/h (15.0 mph)

M3 →M4 35.2 km/h (21.9 mph)

M4 →M5 52.0 km/h (32.3 mph)

M5 →M6 70.0 km/h (43.5 mph)


When Driving

Transaxle

4-55


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (178,1)

(Mexico)


M1 →M2 0 km/h (0 mph)

M2 →M3 22.8 km/h (14.2 mph)

M3 →M4 34.3 km/h (21.3 mph)

M4 →M5 45.7 km/h (28.4 mph)

M5 →M6 53.5 km/h (33.3 mph)


Shifting down

If the vehicle speed is higher than thespeed specified for each gear, the gearcannot be shifted to a lower gear so as toprotect the transaxle.

(Except Mexico)

With i-ELOOP system


M6 →M5 290.9 km/h (180.7 mph)

M5 →M4 204.3 km/h (126.9 mph)

M4 →M3 141.6 km/h (87.98 mph)

M3 →M2 100.0 km/h (62.13 mph)

M2 →M1 51.8 km/h (32.1 mph)




M6 →M5 274.1 km/h (170.4 mph)

M5 →M4 192.5 km/h (119.6 mph)

M4 →M3 133.5 km/h (83.0 mph)

M3 →M2 94.3 km/h (58.6 mph)

M2 →M1 48.9 km/h (30.4 mph)


(Mexico)


M6 →M5 257.8 km/h (160.2 mph)

M5 →M4 181.0 km/h (112.5 mph)

M4 →M3 125.4 km/h (77.9 mph)

M3 →M2 88.5 km/h (55.0 mph)

M2 →M1 45.9 km/h (28.5 mph)


NOTERegarding the vehicle speed at the highestgear indicated above, achieving this speedmay not actually be possible depending onvarious driving conditions such as the wind,upslope, and road surface.

During deceleration, the gears shift downautomatically when speed is reduced tothe following:

(Except Mexico)

With i-ELOOP system


M6 →M5 67.0 km/h (41.6 mph)

M5 →M4 48.3 km/h (30.0 mph)

M4 →M3 34.1 km/h (21.1 mph)

M3 →M2 14.5 km/h (9.00 mph)

M2 →M1 7.5 km/h (4.6 mph)




M6 →M5 66.8 km/h (41.5 mph)

M5 →M4 45.4 km/h (28.2 mph)

M4 →M3 32.2 km/h (20.0 mph)

M3 →M2 13.6 km/h (8.5 mph)

M2 →M1 7.1 km/h (4.4 mph)


(Mexico)


M6 →M5 50.5 km/h (31.4 mph)

M5 →M4 42.7 km/h (26.5 mph)

M4 →M3 30.3 km/h (18.8 mph)

M3 →M2 12.8 km/h (8.0 mph)

M2 →M1 6.7 km/h (4.2 mph)


4-56

When Driving

Transaxle


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (179,1)

If the vehicle is kicked down at thefollowing speeds or lower, the gears shiftdown automatically:

(Except Mexico)

With i-ELOOP system


M6 →M5 280.9 km/h (174.5 mph)

M5 →M4 196.1 km/h (121.8 mph)

M4 →M3 134.0 km/h (83.26 mph)

M3 →M2 92.6 km/h (57.5 mph)

M2 →M1 33.6 km/h (20.8 mph)




M6 →M5 264.1 km/h (164.1 mph)

M5 →M4 184.2 km/h (114.5 mph)

M4 →M3 125.7 km/h (78.1 mph)

M3 →M2 86.7 km/h (53.9 mph)

M2 →M1 31.7 km/h (19.7 mph)


(Mexico)


M6 →M5 247.8 km/h (154.0 mph)

M5 →M4 172.5 km/h (107.2 mph)

M4 →M3 117.5 km/h (73.0 mph)

M3 →M2 80.8 km/h (50.2 mph)

M2 →M1 29.8 km/h (18.5 mph)


Recommendations for shifting (U.S.A.and Canada)

Upshifting

For normal acceleration and cruising, werecommend these shift points.


M1 to M2 24 km/h (15 mph)






Downshifting

When you must slow down in heavytraffic or on a steep upgrade, downshiftbefore the engine starts to overwork. Thisgives better acceleration when you needmore speed.

On a steep downgrade, downshiftinghelps maintain safe speed and prolongsbrake life.

qDirect Mode

Direct mode can be used for temporarilyswitching gears by operating the steeringshift switch while the vehicle is beingdriven with the selector lever in the Drange.While in direct mode, the D and Mindicator lights illuminate and the gearposition in use is illuminated.Direct mode is canceled (released) underthe following conditions.l The UP switch is pulled rearward for acertain amount of time or longer.

l The vehicle is driven for a certainamount of time or longer (time differsdepending on the driving conditionswhile operating).

When Driving

Transaxle

4-57


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (180,1)

l The vehicle is stopped or moving at aslow speed.


Direct mode indicator

NOTEShifting up and down while in direct mode maynot be possible depending on the vehiclespeed. In addition, because direct mode iscanceled (released) depending on the rate ofacceleration or if the accelerator is fullydepressed, use of the manual shift mode isrecommended if you need to drive the vehiclein a particular gear for long periods.

qDriving Tips

WARNINGDo not allow the vehicle to move inreverse on an up-slope while theselector lever is in a forward gearposition, or move forward on a down-slope while the selector lever is in thereverse position:

Otherwise, the engine will stop,causing the loss of the power brakeand power steering functions, andmake it difficult to control the vehiclewhich could result in an accident.

Passing

For extra power when passing anothervehicle or climbing steep grades, depressthe accelerator fully. The transaxle willshift to a lower gear, depending on vehiclespeed.

NOTEThe accelerator pedal feels heavy as it is beingdepressed, but then lightens as it is fullydepressed. This change in pedal force aids theengine control system in determining howmuch the accelerator pedal has beendepressed for performing kickdown, andfunctions to control whether or not kickdownshould be performed.

Climbing steep grades from a stop

To climb a steep grade from a stoppedposition:

1. Depress the brake pedal.

2. Shift to D or M1, depending on theload weight and grade steepness.

3. Release the brake pedal whilegradually accelerating.

Descending steep grades

When descending a steep grade, shift tolower gears, depending on load weightand grade steepness. Descend slowly,using the brakes only occasionally toprevent them from overheating.

4-58

When Driving

Transaxle


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (181,1)

Lighting Control

qHeadlights

l Turn the headlight switch to turn the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboardillumination on or off.

l For vehicles with the type A instrument cluster, check the vehicle condition or have thevehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer according to the indication.

l A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-23.

NOTEl If the light switch is left on, the lights will automatically switch off approximately 30 seconds after

switching the ignition off.The time setting can be changed.Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-8.

l To prevent discharging the battery, do not leave the lights on while the engine is off unless safetyrequires them.

Without auto-light control

Switch Position

Ignition Position ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Headlights Off Off Off Off On On

Daytime running lights On Off On Off Off Off

TaillightsParking lightsLicense lightsSide-marker lightsDashboard illumination

Off Off On On On On

When Driving

Switches and Controls

4-59


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (182,1)

With auto-light control

Switch Position

Ignition Position ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF

Headlights Off Off Auto* Off Off Off On On

Daytime running lights On Off Auto* Off On Off Off Off

TaillightsParking lightsLicense lightsSide-marker lightsDashboard illumination

Off Off Auto* Off On On On On

* The headlight and other light settings switch automatically depending on the surrounding brightness detected bythe sensor.

4-60

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (183,1)

Auto-light control

When the headlight switch is in the position and the ignition is switched ON, thelight sensor senses the surrounding lightness or darkness and automatically turns theheadlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination on or off (see chart above).

CAUTIONØ Do not shade the light sensor by adhering a sticker or a label on the windshield.

Otherwise the light sensor will not operate correctly.

Light sensor Light sensor

Type A Type B

Ø The light sensor also works as a rain sensor for the auto-wiper control. Keephands and scrapers clear of the windshield when the wiper lever is in theposition and the ignition is switched ON as fingers could be pinched or the wipersand wiper blades damaged when the wipers activate automatically. If you aregoing to clean the windshield, be sure the wipers are turned off completely ― thisis particularly important when clearing ice and snow ― when it is particularlytempting to leave the engine running.

NOTEl The headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination may not turn off immediately

even if the surrounding area becomes well-lit because the light sensor determines that it isnighttime if the surrounding area is continuously dark for several minutes such as inside longtunnels, traffic jams inside tunnels, or in indoor parking lots.In this case, the lights turn off if the light switch is turned to the position.

l When the headlight switch is in the position and the ignition is switched to ACC or theignition is switched off, the headlights, other exterior lights and dashboard illumination will turnoff.

l The dashboard illumination can be adjusted by rotating the knob in the instrument cluster. Also,the day/night mode can be changed by rotating the knob until a beep sound is heard. To adjust thebrightness of the dashboard illumination:Refer to Dashboard Illumination on page 4-13.

l The sensitivity of the AUTO lights may be changed by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-8.

When Driving


4-61


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (184,1)

Xenon fusion headlight bulbsí

The low-beam bulbs of the headlights have xenon fusion bulbs that produce a bright whitebeam over a wide area.

WARNINGDo not replace the xenon fusion bulbs yourself

Replacing the xenon fusion bulbs yourself is dangerous. Because the xenon fusionbulbs require high voltage, you could receive an electric shock if the bulbs arehandled incorrectly. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer when the replacement isnecessary.

NOTEIf the headlights flicker, or the brightness weakens, the bulb-life may be depleted and a replacement isnecessary. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

qHeadlight High-Low Beam

Press the lever forward to turn on the highbeams.Pull the lever back to its original positionfor the low beams.The headlight high-beam indicator light inthe instrument cluster illuminates whilethe high beams are turned on.

High beam

Low beam

qFlashing the Headlights

To flash the headlights, pull the lever fullytowards you (the headlight switch doesnot need to be on). The headlight high-beam indicator light in the instrumentcluster illuminates simultaneously. Thelever will return to the normal positionwhen released.

OFF

Flashing

4-62

When Driving

íSome models.



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (185,1)

qHeadlight Levelingí

The number of passengers and weight ofcargo in the luggage compartment changethe angle of the headlights.

The angle of the headlights will beautomatically adjusted when turning onthe headlights.


qAdaptive Front Lighting System(AFS)í

The adaptive front lighting system (AFS)automatically adjusts the headlight beamsto the left or right in conjunction with theoperation of the steering wheel after theheadlights have been turned on.


AFS OFF switch

Pressing the AFS OFF switch turns off theAFS. The AFS OFF indicator light in theinstrument cluster illuminates.Pressing the AFS OFF switch again turnsoff the switch illumination and turns onthe AFS operation. The AFS OFFindicator light turns off.

qDaytime Running Lightsí

Some countries require moving vehiclesto have their lights on (daytime runninglights) during the daytime.

Daytime running lights turn onautomatically when the ignition isswitched ON.They turn off when the parking brake isoperated or the shift lever is shifted to theP position (automatic transaxle vehicle).

NOTE(Except Canada)The daytime running lights can be deactivated.Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-8.

When Driving


4-63íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (186,1)

High Beam Control System (HBC)í

l The High Beam Control System (HBC) determines the conditions in front of the vehiclewhile driving at night using the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) to automatically switchthe headlights between high and low beams.While driving the vehicle at a speed of about 30 km/h (18 mph), the headlights areswitched to high beams when there are no vehicles in front of your vehicle orapproaching in the opposite direction.The system switches the headlights to low beams during the following:l When the system detects a vehicle or the headlights/lights of a vehicle approaching in

the opposite direction.l When driving on roads lined with streetlamps or on roads in well-lit cities and towns.l When the vehicle is driven at less than about 20 km/h (12 mph).



Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)

The recognition distance of the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) varies according to the surrounding conditions.

4-64

When Driving

íSome models.



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (187,1)

CAUTIONØ Do not adjust the vehicle height, modify the headlight units, or remove the

camera. Otherwise, the system will not operate normally.Ø Heed the following cautions to assure correct operation of the High Beam Control

System (HBC).Ø Do not place objects on the dashboard which reflect light.Ø Keep the area of the windshield glass near the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)

clean.Ø Do not apply accessories, stickers or film to the windshield near the Forward

Sensing Camera (FSC). If there are objects in front of the Forward SensingCamera (FSC) lens, even a transparent sticker, they will obstruct the lens andcause the system to not operate correctly.

Ø Before performing repairs around the rearview mirror, consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

Ø Always keep the windshield glass around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)clean. If the windshield fogs, defog it using the front defroster.

Ø When cleaning the windshield, do not allow glass cleaners or similar cleaningfluids to get on the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens. In addition, do nottouch the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens.

Ø Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding cleaning the interior side of thewindshield around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).

NOTEUnder the following conditions, the timing in which the system switches the headlights changes. If thesystem does not switch the headlights appropriately, manually switch between high and low beamsaccording to the visibility, and road and traffic conditions.l When there are sources of light in the area such as street lamps, illuminated signboards, and

traffic signals.l When there are reflective objects in the surrounding area such as reflective plates and signs.l When visibility is reduced under rain, snow and foggy conditions.l When driving on roads with sharp curves or undulations.l When the headlights/rear lamps of vehicles in front of you or in the opposite lane are dim or not

illuminated.l When there is sufficient darkness such as at dawn or dusk.l When the luggage compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger seats are

occupied.l When visibility is reduced due to a vehicle in front of you spraying water from its tires onto your

windshield.

When Driving


4-65


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (188,1)


The High Beam Control System (HBC) camera, located near the rearview mirror, alsofunctions as the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) for the Lane Departure Warning System(LDWS).


CAUTIONHeed the following cautions to assure the correct operation of the Forward SensingCamera (FSC).Ø Do not remove the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) cover.Ø Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding cleaning of the camera lens.Ø Do not hit or apply strong force to the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) or the area

around it. If the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) has been severely hit, do not usethe High Beam Control System (HBC) and consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Ø Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before performing repairs around theForward Sensing Camera (FSC).

Ø The Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is installed to the windshield. Consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer for windshield repair and replacement.

Ø The direction in which the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) is pointed has beenfinely adjusted. Do not change the installation position of the Forward SensingCamera (FSC) or remove it. Otherwise, it could result in damage or malfunction.

Ø Be careful not to scratch the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens or allow it to getdirty. Also, do no take the camera apart. Otherwise, it could result in damage ormalfunction.

Ø Always keep the windshield glass around the camera clean by removing dirt orfogging. Use the windshield defroster to remove fogging on the windshield.

4-66

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (189,1)

qTo Operate the System

The High Beam Control System (HBC)operates to switch the headlightsautomatically between high and lowbeams after the ignition is switched ONand the headlight switch is in the AUTOand high beam position. At the same time,the High Beam Control System (HBC)indicator light (green) in the instrumentcluster illuminates.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page4-23.The High Beam Control System (HBC)determines that it is nighttime based onthe brightness of the surrounding area.

NOTEl When the vehicle speed is 30 km/h (18 mph)

or higher, the headlights automaticallyswitch to high beams when there are novehicles in front of your vehicle orapproaching in the opposite direction.When the vehicle speed is less than about20 km/h (12 mph), the High Beam ControlSystem (HBC) switches the headlights tolow beams.

l The low beams may not switch to highbeams when cornering the vehicle.

l Operation of the High Beam ControlSystem (HBC) function can bedisabled.Refer to Personalization Featureson page 9-8.

qManual Switching

Switching to low beams

Shift the lever to the low beam position.The High Beam Control System (HBC)indicator light (Green) turns off.

Switching to high beams

Turn the headlight switch to theposition.The High Beam Control System (HBC)indicator light (Green) turns off and the

is illuminated.

When Driving


4-67


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (190,1)

Fog Lightsí

Use this switch to turn on the fog lights.The fog lights will improve visibility atnight and during foggy conditions.

To turn the fog lights on, rotate the foglight switch to the position.The headlight switch must be in theposition before turning on the fog lights.

Fog light switch

To turn the fog lights off, rotate the foglight switch to the position or turnthe headlight switch to the orposition.

NOTEl The fog lights will turn off when the

headlights are set at high beams.l (With auto-light control)

If the fog light switch is in the positionand the headlight switch is in theposition, the fog lights will turn on whenthe headlights, the exterior lights anddashboard illumination turn on.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

NOTEl If an indicator light stays on without

flashing or if it flashes abnormally, one ofthe turn signal bulbs may be burned out.

l A personalized function is available tochange the turn indicator sound volume.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.

qTurn Signals

Move the signal lever down (for a leftturn) or up (for a right turn) to the stopposition. The signal will self-cancel afterthe turn is completed.

If the indicator light continues to flashafter a turn, manually return the lever toits original position.

Right turn

Left turn

Right lane change

Left lane change

OFF

Green indicators on the dashboard showwhich signal is working.

4-68

When Driving

íSome models.



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (191,1)

qLane-Change Signals

To signal a lane change, press the turnsignal lever up or down halfway andrelease. After releasing the lever, the turnsignal indicator flashes three times.

NOTEA personalized function is available to changethe number of flashes.

Windshield Wipers andWasher

The ignition must be switched ON.

WARNINGUse only windshield washer fluid orplain water in the reservoir:

Using radiator antifreeze as washerfluid is dangerous. If sprayed on thewindshield, it will dirty thewindshield, affect your visibility, andcould result in an accident.

Only use windshield washer fluidmixed with anti-freeze protection infreezing weather conditions:

Using windshield washer fluidwithout anti-freeze protection infreezing weather conditions isdangerous as it could freeze on thewindshield and block your visionwhich could cause an accident.In addition, make sure thewindshield is sufficiently warmedusing the defroster before sprayingthe washer fluid.

When Driving


4-69


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (192,1)

NOTEBecause heavy ice and snow can jam the wiperblades, the wiper motor is protected frommotor breakdown, overheating and possiblefire by a circuit breaker. This mechanism willautomatically stop operation of the blades, butonly for about 5 minutes.If this happens, turn off the wiper switch andpark off the right-of-way, and remove the snowand ice.After 5 minutes, turn on the switch and theblades should operate normally. If they do notresume functioning, consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer as soon as possible. Drive tothe side of the road and park off the right-of-way. Wait until the weather clears before tryingto drive with the wipers inoperative.

qWindshield Wipers

Turn the wipers on by pressing the leverup or down.

With intermittent wiper

SwitchPosition

Wiper operation

MIST Single wipe cycle (mist)

INTIntermittent(vehicle speed-sensing)

LO Low speed

HI High speed

With auto-wiper control

SwitchPosition

Wiper operation

MIST Single wipe cycle (mist)

AUTO Auto control

LO Low speed

HI High speed

Variable-speed intermittent wipers

Set the lever to the intermittent positionand choose the interval timing by rotatingthe ring.

INT ring Fast

Slow

NOTEIf the vehicle speed increases, the intermittentinterval will be shortened.

4-70

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (193,1)

Auto-wiper control

When the wiper lever is in theposition, the rain sensor senses theamount of rainfall on the windshield andturns the wipers on or off automatically(off―intermittent―low speed―highspeed).

The sensitivity of the rain sensor can beadjusted by turning the switch on thewiper lever.From the center position (normal), rotatethe switch downward for highersensitivity (faster response) or rotate itupward for less sensitivity (slowerresponse).

Higher sensitivity

Less sensitivitySwitch

Center position

CAUTIONØ Do not shade the rain sensor by

adhering a sticker or a label onthe windshield. Otherwise the rainsensor will not operate correctly.

Type A

Rain sensor

Type B

Rain sensor

When Driving


4-71


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (194,1)

Ø When the wiper lever is in theAUTO position and the ignition isswitched ON, the wipers maymove automatically in thefollowing cases:Ø If the windshield above the rain

sensor is touched or wiped witha cloth.

Ø If the windshield is struck witha hand or other object fromeither outside or inside thevehicle.

Keep hands and scrapers clear ofthe windshield when the wiperlever is in the AUTO position andthe ignition is switched ON asfingers could be pinched or thewipers and wiper blades damagedwhen the wipers activateautomatically.If you are going to clean thewindshield, be sure the wipers areturned off completely―this isparticularly important whenclearing ice and snow―when it ismost likely that the engine is leftrunning.

NOTEl Switching the auto-wiper lever from the

to the position while drivingactivates the windshield wipers once, afterwhich they operate according to the rainfallamount.

l The auto-wiper control may not operatewhen the rain sensor temperature is about_10 °C or lower, or about 85 °C or higher.

l If the windshield is coated with waterrepellent, the rain sensor may not be able tosense the amount of rainfall correctly andauto-wiper control may not operateproperly.

l If dirt or foreign matter (Such as ice ormatter containing salt water) adheres to thewindshield above the rain sensor or if thewindshield is iced, it could cause the wipersto move automatically. However, if thewipers cannot remove this ice, dirt orforeign matter, the auto-wiper control willstop operation. In this case, set the wiperlever to the low speed position or highspeed position for manual operation, orremove the ice, dirt or foreign matter byhand to restore the auto-wiper operation.

l If the auto-wiper lever is left in theposition, the wipers could operateautomatically from the effect of strong lightsources, electromagnetic waves, or infraredlight because the rain sensor uses anoptical sensor. It is recommended that theauto-wiper lever be switched to theposition other than when driving the vehicleunder rainy conditions.

l The auto-wiper control functions can beturned off.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.

4-72

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (195,1)

qWindshield Washer

Pull the lever toward you and hold it tospray washer fluid.

Washer

OFF

NOTEWith the wiper lever in the orintermittent position/ position, thewipers will operate continuously until the leveris released.

If the washer does not work, inspect thefluid level (page 6-25). If it's normal,consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Rear Window DefrosterThe rear window defroster clears frost,fog, and thin ice from the rear window.

The ignition must be switched ON.

Press the switch to turn on the rearwindow defroster. The rear windowdefroster operates for about 15 minutesand turns off automatically.The indicator light illuminates duringoperation.

To turn off the rear window defrosterbefore the 15 minutes has elapsed, pressthe switch again.

Fully Automatic Type Climate Control

Indicator light

When Driving


4-73


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (196,1)

Manual Type Climate Control

Indicator light

CAUTIONDo not use sharp instruments orwindow cleaners with abrasives toclean the inside of the rear windowsurface. They may damage thedefroster grid inside the window.

NOTEThis defroster is not designed for melting snow.If there is an accumulation of snow on the rearwindow, remove it before using the defroster.

qMirror Defrosterí

To turn on the mirror defrosters, switchthe ignition ON and press the rear windowdefroster switch (page 4-73).

HornTo sound the horn, press the mark onthe steering wheel.

4-74

When Driving

íSome models.



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (197,1)

Hazard Warning FlasherThe hazard warning lights should alwaysbe used when you stop on or near aroadway in an emergency.

The hazard warning lights warn otherdrivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazardand that they must take extreme cautionwhen near it.

Depress the hazard warning flasher and allthe turn signals will flash. The hazardwarning indicator lights in the instrumentcluster flash simultaneously.

NOTEl The turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning lights are on.l Check local regulations about the use of

hazard warning lights while the vehicle isbeing towed to verify that it is not inviolation of the law.

HomeLink WirelessControl Systemí

NOTEHomeLink and HomeLink house are registeredtrademarks of Johnson Controls.

The HomeLink system replaces up to 3hand-held transmitters with a single built-in component in the auto-dimming mirror.Pressing the HomeLink button on theauto-dimming mirror activates garagedoors, gates and other devicessurrounding your home.

HomeLink button

Indicator light

When Driving


4-75íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (198,1)

WARNINGDo not use the HomeLink system withany garage door opener that lacks thesafety stop and reverse feature:

Using the HomeLink system with anygarage door opener that lacks thesafety stop and reverse feature asrequired by federal safety standardsis dangerous. (This includes garagedoors manufactured before April 1,1982.)Using these garage door openers canincrease the risk of serious injury ordeath. For further information,contact HomeLink at 1-800-355-3515or www.homelink.com or yourAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

Always check the areas surroundinggarage doors and gates for people orobstructions before programming orduring operation of the HomeLinksystem:

Programming or operating theHomeLink system without verifyingthe safety of areas surroundinggarage doors and gates is dangerousand could result in an unexpectedaccident and serious injury ifsomeone were to be hit.

NOTEThe programming will not be erased even ifthe battery is disconnected.

qPre-programming the HomeLinkSystem

NOTEIt is recommended that a new battery beplaced in the hand-held transmitter of thedevice being programmed to HomeLink forquicker training and accurate transmission ofthe radio-frequency signal.

l Verify that there is a remote controltransmitter available for the device youwould like to program.

l Disconnect the power to the device.

qProgramming the HomeLink System

CAUTIONWhen programming a garage dooropener or a gate, disconnect thepower to these devices beforeperforming programming, ascontinuous operation of the devicescould damage the motor.

The HomeLink system provides 3 buttonswhich can be individually selected andprogrammed using the transmitters forcurrent, on-market devices as follows:

1. Position the end of your hand-heldtransmitter 2.5―7.5 cm (1―3 inches)away from the HomeLink button youwish to program while keeping theindicator light in view.

2. Simultaneously press and hold both thechosen HomeLink and hand-heldtransmitter buttons. Do not release thebuttons until step 3 has beencompleted.

NOTESome gate operators and garage door openersmay require you to replace this ProgrammingStep 2 with procedures noted in the “GateOperator/Canadian Programming” section.

3. After the HomeLink indicator lightchanges from a slow to a rapidlyblinking light, release both theHomeLink and hand-held transmitterbuttons.

4-76

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (199,1)

NOTEIf the HomeLink indicator light does notchange to a rapidly blinking light, contactHomeLink at www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515 for assistance.

4. Firmly press and hold the programmedHomeLink button for five seconds, andthen release it. Perform this operationtwo times to activate the door. If thedoor does not activate, press and holdthe just-trained HomeLink button andobserve the indicator light.

If the indicator light stays on constantly,programming is complete and yourdevice should activate when theHomeLink button is pressed and released.

NOTETo program the remaining two HomeLinkbuttons, begin with “Programming”― step 1.

If the indicator light blinks rapidly fortwo seconds and then turns to aconstant light, continue with“Programming” steps 5―7 to completethe programming of a rolling codeequipped device (most commonly agarage door opener).

5. At the garage door opener receiver(motor-head unit) in the garage, locatethe “learn” or “smart” button. This canusually be found where the hangingantenna wire is attached to the motor-head unit.

6. Firmly press and release the “learn” or“smart” button. (The name and color ofthe button may vary by manufacturer.)

NOTEComplete the programming within 30 seconds.

7. Return to the vehicle and firmly press,hold for two seconds and release theprogrammed HomeLink button. Repeatthe “press/hold/release” sequence asecond time, and, depending on thebrand of the garage door opener (orother rolling code equipped device),repeat this sequence a third time tocomplete the programming process.

HomeLink should now activate yourrolling code equipped device.

NOTETo program the remaining two HomeLinkbuttons, begin with “Programming”― step 1.

For questions or comments, please contactHomeLink at www.homelink.com or 1-800-355-3515.

qGate operator/CanadianProgramming

Canadian radio-frequency laws requiretransmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)after several seconds of transmission ―which may not be long enough forHomeLink to pick up the signal duringprogramming. Similar to this Canadianlaw, some U.S. gate operators aredesigned to “time-out” in the samemanner.

If you live in Canada or you are havingdifficulties programming a gate operatorby using the “Programming” procedures(regardless of where you live), replace“Programming HomeLink” step 2 withthe following:

NOTEIf programming a garage door opener or gateoperator, it is advised to unplug the deviceduring the “cycling” process to preventpossible overheating.

When Driving


4-77


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (200,1)

Continue to press and hold the HomeLinkbutton while you press and release―every two seconds (“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until the frequency signalhas successfully been accepted byHomeLink. (The indicator light will flashslowly and then rapidly.)Proceed with “Programming” step 3 tocomplete.

qOperating the HomeLink System

Press the programmed HomeLink buttonto operate a programmed device. Thecode will continue being transmitted for amaximum of 20 seconds.

qReprogramming the HomeLinksystem

To program a device to HomeLink using aHomeLink button previously trained,follow these steps:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLinkbutton. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flashafter 20 seconds. Without releasing theHomeLink button, proceed with“Programming” - step 1.

qErasing Programmed HomeLinkButtons

To erase the existing programming fromall three operating channels, press andhold the two outside buttons ( , )on the auto-dimming mirror until theHomeLink indicator light begins to flashafter approximately 10 seconds.Verify that the programming has beenerased when you resell the vehicle.

4-78

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (201,1)

Radar Sensorí

Your vehicle is equipped with a radar sensor.The following systems also use the radar sensor.l Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)l Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)The radar sensor functions by detecting the radio waves reflected off a vehicle ahead or anobstruction sent from the radar sensor.The radar sensor is mounted behind the front emblem.

Radar Sensor

If “Radar blocked” is displayed in the multi-display of the instrument cluster, clean the areaaround the radar sensor.

When Driving

Radar Sensor

4-79íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (202,1)

CAUTIONHeed the following precautions to assure correct operation of each system.Ø Do not adhere stickers (including transparent stickers) to the surface of the

radiator grille and front emblem in and around the radar sensor, and do notreplace the radiator grille and front emblem with any product that is not agenuine product designed for use with the radar sensor.

Ø The radar sensor includes a function for detecting soiling of the radar sensor'sfront surface and informing the driver, however, depending on the conditions, itmay require time to detect or it may not detect plastic shopping bags, ice or snow.If this occurs, the system may not operate correctly, therefore always keep theradar sensor clean.

Ø Do not install a grille guard.Ø If the front part of the vehicle has been damaged in a vehicle accident, the

position of the radar sensor may have moved. Stop the system immediately andalways have the vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Ø Do not use the front bumper to push other vehicles or obstructions such as whenpulling out of a parking space. Otherwise, the radar sensor could be hit and itsposition deviated.

Ø Do not remove, disassemble, or modify the radar sensor.Ø For repairs, replacement or paint work around the radar sensor, consult an

Authorized Mazda Dealer.Ø Do not modify the suspension. If the suspension are modified, the vehicle's posture

could change and the radar sensor may not be able to correctly detect a vehicleahead or an obstruction.

4-80

When Driving

Radar Sensor


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (203,1)

NOTEl In the following cases, the radar sensor may not be able to detect vehicles ahead or obstructions.

l The rear surface of a vehicle ahead does not reflect radio waves effectively, such as anunloaded trailer or an automobile with a loading platform covered by a soft top, vehicles witha hard plastic tailgate, and round-shaped vehicles.

l Vehicles ahead with low vehicle height and thus less area for reflecting radio waves.l Visibility is reduced due to a vehicle ahead casting off water, snow, or sand from its tires and

onto your windshield.l The trunk/luggage compartment is loaded with heavy objects or the rear passenger seats are

occupied.l Ice, snow, or soiling is on the front surface of the front emblem.l During inclement weather such as rain, snow, or sand storms.l When driving near facilities or objects emitting strong radio waves.

l In the following cases, the radar sensor may detect vehicles in the opposite lane or surroundingobstructions, or it may not be able to detect vehicles ahead or obstructions.l The beginning and end of a curve.l Roads with continuous curves.l Narrow lane roads due to road construction or lane closures.l The vehicle ahead enters the radar sensor's blind spot.l The vehicle ahead is running abnormally due to accident or vehicle damage.l Roads with repeated up and down slopesl Driving on poor roads or unpaved roads.l The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead is extremely short.l A vehicle suddenly comes close such as by cutting into the lane.

l To prevent incorrect operation of the system, use tires of the same specified size, manufacturer,brand, and tread pattern on all four wheels. In addition, do not use tires with significantlydifferent wear patterns or tire pressures on the same vehicle. (Including the temporary spare tire)

l If the battery power is weak, the system may not operate correctly.l When driving on roads with little traffic and few vehicles ahead or obstructions for the radar

sensor to detect, “Radar blocked” may be temporarily displayed, however, this does not indicate aproblem.

When Driving

Radar Sensor

4-81


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (204,1)

Brake System

qFoot Brake

Your Mazda has power-assisted brakesthat adjust automatically through normaluse.

Should power-assist fail, you can stop byapplying greater force than normal to thebrake pedal. But the distance required tostop will be greater than usual.

WARNINGDo not coast with the engine stalled orturned off, find a safe place to stop:

Coasting with the engine stalled orturned off is dangerous. Braking willrequire more effort, and the brake'spower-assist could be depleted if youpump the brake. This will causelonger stopping distances or even anaccident.

Shift to a lower gear when going downsteep hills:

Driving with your foot continuouslyon the brake pedal or steadilyapplying the brakes for longdistances is dangerous. This causesoverheated brakes, resulting inlonger stopping distances or eventotal brake failure. This could causeloss of vehicle control and a seriousaccident. Avoid continuousapplication of the brakes.

Dry off brakes that have become wetby driving slowly, releasing theaccelerator pedal and lightly applyingthe brakes several times until the brakeperformance returns to normal:


4-82

When Driving

Brake


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (205,1)

CAUTIONØ Do not drive with your foot held

on the clutch pedal or brake pedal,or hold the clutch pedal depressedhalfway unnecessarily. Doing socould result in the following:Ø The clutch and brake parts will

wear out more quickly.Ø The brakes can overheat and

adversely affect brakeperformance.

Ø Always depress the brake pedalwith the right foot. Applying thebrakes with the unaccustomed leftfoot could slow your reaction timeto an emergency situationresulting in insufficient brakingoperation.

Ø Wear shoes appropriate for drivingin order to avoid your shoecontacting the brake pedal whendepressing the accelerator pedal.

qParking Brake

CAUTIONDriving with the parking brake onwill cause excessive wear of the brakeparts.

NOTEFor parking in snow, refer to Winter Driving(page 3-46) regarding parking brake use.

Setting the parking brake

Depress the brake pedal and then firmlypull the parking brake lever fully upwardswith sufficient force to hold the vehicle ina stationary position.

Releasing the parking brake

Depress the brake pedal and pull theparking brake lever upwards, then pressthe release button. While holding thebutton, lower the parking brake lever allthe way down to the released position.

When Driving

Brake

4-83


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (206,1)

qDisplay Indication

For vehicles with the type A instrumentcluster, check the vehicle condition orhave the vehicle inspected at anAuthorized Mazda Dealer according tothe indication.

qWarning Light


qBrake Pad Wear Indicator

When the disc brake pads become worn,the built-in wear indicators contact thedisc plates. This causes a screeching noiseto warn that the pads should be replaced.

When you hear this noise, consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer as soon aspossible.

WARNINGDo not drive with worn disc pads:

Driving with worn disc pads isdangerous. The brakes could fail andcause a serious accident. As soon asyou hear a screeching noise consultan Authorized Mazda Dealer.

qBrake Assist

During emergency braking situationswhen it is necessary to depress the brakepedal with greater force, the brake assistsystem provides braking assistance, thusenhancing braking performance.

When the brake pedal is depressed hard ordepressed more quickly, the brakes applymore firmly.

NOTEl When the brake pedal is depressed hard or

depressed more quickly, the pedal will feelsofter but the brakes will apply more firmly.This is a normal effect of the brake assistoperation and does not indicate amalfunction.

l When the brake pedal is depressed hard ordepressed more quickly, a motor/pumpoperation noise may be heard. This is anormal effect of the brake assist and doesnot indicate a malfunction.

l The brake assist equipment does notsupersede the functionality of the vehicle'smain braking system.

4-84

When Driving

Brake


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (207,1)

Hill Launch Assist (HLA)Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is a functionwhich assists the driver in acceleratingfrom a stop while on a slope. When thedriver releases the brake pedal anddepresses the accelerator pedal while on aslope, the function prevents the vehiclefrom rolling.The braking force is maintainedautomatically after the brake pedal isreleased on a steep grade.For vehicles with a manual transaxle, HillLaunch Assist (HLA) operates on adownward slope when the shift lever is inthe reverse (R) position, and on anupward slope when the shift lever is in aposition other than the reverse (R)position.For vehicles with an automatic transaxle,Hill Launch Assist (HLA) operates on adownward slope when the shift lever is inthe reverse (R) position, and on anupward slope when the shift lever is in aforward gear.

WARNINGDo not rely completely on Hill LaunchAssist (HLA):

Hill Launch Assist (HLA) is anauxiliary device for accelerating froma stop on a slope. The system onlyoperates for about two seconds andtherefore, relying only on the system,when accelerating from a stop isdangerous because the vehicle maymove (roll) unexpectedly and causean accident.The vehicle could roll depending onthe vehicle's load or if it is towingsomething. In addition, for vehicleswith a manual transaxle, the vehiclecould still roll depending on how theclutch pedal or the accelerator pedalis operated.Always confirm the safety around thevehicle before starting to drive thevehicle.

When Driving

Brake

4-85


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (208,1)

NOTEl Hill Launch Assist (HLA) does not operate

on a gentle slope. In addition, the gradientof the slope on which the system willoperate changes depending on the vehicle'sload.

l Hill Launch Assist (HLA) does not operateif the parking brake is applied, the vehiclehas not stopped completely, or the clutchpedal is released.

l While Hill Launch Assist (HLA) isoperating, the brake pedal may feel stiffand vibrate, however, this does not indicatea malfunction.

l Hill Launch Assist (HLA) does not operatewhile the TCS/DSC indicator light isilluminated.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page4-23.

l Hill Launch Assist (HLA) does not turn offeven if the DSC OFF switch is pressed toturn off the TCS/DSC.

4-86

When Driving

Brake


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (209,1)

Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)í

l The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is designed to reduce damage in theevent of a collision by operating the brake control (SCBS brake) when the system's lasersensor detects a vehicle ahead and determines that a collision with the vehicle ahead isunavoidable. It may also be possible to avoid a collision if the relative speed betweenyour vehicle and the vehicle ahead is less than about 15 km/h (9.3 mph).In addition, when the driver depresses the brake pedal while the system is in theoperation range at about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph), the brakes are applied firmly andquickly to assist. (Brake Assist (SCBS brake assist))



Laser sensor

WARNINGDo not rely on the Smart City Brake Support System (SCBS) as a substitute for safedriving:

The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system cannot compensate for unsafe andreckless driving, excessive speed, tailgating (following another vehicle too closely),and driving on slippery roads such as wet, snowy, and icy roads (reduced tire frictionand road contact because of water on the road surface). You can still have anaccident.

When Driving

Brake

4-87íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (210,1)

Do not rely completely on the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system:Ø The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is only designed to reduce damage in

the event of a collision. Over reliance on the system leading to the acceleratorpedal or brake pedal being mistakenly operated could result in an accident.

Ø The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) is a system which operates in response to avehicle ahead. The system may not be able to detect or react to 2-wheeled vehiclesor pedestrians.

Ø The laser sensor for the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is installed nearthe rearview mirror. To assure the correct operation of the Smart City BrakeSupport (SCBS), heed the following cautions.Ø Do not apply stickers to the surface of the windshield near the laser sensor

(including transparent stickers). Otherwise, the laser sensor may not be able todetect vehicles or obstructions ahead which could result in an accident.

Ø Do not disassemble the laser sensor.Ø If cracks or damage caused by flying gravel or debris is visible near the laser

sensor, stop using the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system immediatelyand have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer. If the vehiclecontinues to be driven with cracks or scratch marks left on the windshield nearthe laser sensor, the system may operate unnecessarily and cause anunexpected accident.Refer to Stopping The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) System Operation onpage 4-92.

Ø When replacing the windshield wipers or windshield, consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

Do not modify the suspension:If the vehicle height or inclination is changed, the system will not be able to correctlydetect vehicles or obstructions ahead. This will result in the Smart City Brake Support(SCBS) system not operating normally or mistakenly operating, which could cause aserious accident.

Turn off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) when the vehicle is running on a chassisroller or being towed:

Turn off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system to prevent mistaken operationwhen the vehicle is running on a chassis roller or being towed. See the next page onhow to turn off the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS).Refer to Stopping The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) System Operation on page4-92.

4-88

When Driving

Brake


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (211,1)

CAUTIONØ When driving off-road in areas where there is grass or forage, it is recommended

that the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system be turned off.Ø Always use tires for all wheels that are of the specified size, and the same

manufacture, brand, and tread pattern. In addition, do not use tires withsignificantly different wear patterns on the same vehicle. Do not use tires withsignificantly different wear patterns on the same vehicle as the Smart City BrakeSupport (SCBS) system may not operate normally.

Ø The laser sensor includes a function for detecting a soiled windshield andinforming the driver, however, depending on the conditions, it may not detectplastic shopping bags, ice or snow on the windshield. In such cases, the systemcannot accurately determine a vehicle or obstruction ahead and may not be ableto operate normally. Always drive carefully and pay attention to the road ahead.

NOTEl The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system will operate under the following conditions.

l The engine is running.l The display in the instrument cluster does not indicate that the system requires inspection or it

cannot be used.l The vehicle speed is between about 4 to 30 km/h (2 to 18 mph).l The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system is not turned off.l The DSC operation is not turned off using the DSC OFF switch.l The DSC is not malfunctioning.l The driver is not deliberately performing driving operations (accelerator pedal, steering

wheel, and braking operations).l The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) detects a vehicle ahead by emitting a near-infrared laser

beam and receiving the beam reflected off the reflector of the vehicle ahead, and then using it forthe measurement. Consequently, the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) may not operate under thefollowing conditions:l Reflection of the laser is poor due to the shape of the vehicle ahead.l The vehicle ahead is significantly dirty.l Under bad weather condition, such as rain, fog and snow.l The window washer is being used or the windshield wipers are not used when it's raining.l The windshield is dirty.l The steering wheel is turned completely left or right, or the vehicle is accelerated rapidly and

comes close to the vehicle ahead.l Trucks with low loading platforms, vehicles traveling at extremely low speeds, and vehicles

with a high profile.l Vehicles with certain shapes such as a vehicle carrier.

When Driving

Brake

4-89


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (212,1)

l Under the following conditions, the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system may not operatenormally.l Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat.l When there is the possibility of partial contact with a vehicle or obstruction ahead.l When driving on continuously curving roads, entering and exiting curves, and unstable driving

due to a vehicle accident or breakdown in a driving lane.l Elongated luggage or cargo is loaded onto installed roof rails and covers the laser sensor.l Exhaust gas from the vehicle in front, sand, snow, and water vapor rising from manholes and

grating, and water splashed into the air.l When towing a malfunctioning vehicle.

l In the following cases, the laser sensor may inadvertently determine that there is a vehicle aheadand the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system may operate.l Objects on the road at the entrance to a curve.l Vehicles passing in the opposite lane while making a curve.l Metal objects, bumps, or protruding objects on the road.l When passing through a toll gate.l When passing under a vinyl curtain or flag.l Plastic objects such as pylons.l Two-wheeled vehicles, pedestrians, animals or standing trees.

l If the vehicle is driven with some of the tires having significant wear, the system may not operatecorrectly. If the tires are returned to a normal state and the master warning light still illuminates,have your vehicle inspected by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

qLaser Sensor Handling

The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) laser sensor is installed at the top of the windshieldnear the rearview mirror.

Laser sensor

Always keep the surface of the windshield around the laser sensor clean to assure properoperation of the Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) system.

4-90

When Driving

Brake


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (213,1)

WARNINGAs there is the possibility of eye damage occurring from the laser, always heed thefollowing precautions:

Ø Never remove the sensor.Ø A removed sensor will not meet the conditions for a class 1M laser under the IEC

60825-1 specification and therefore eye safety cannot be assured.Ø Do not peer into the sensor using optical instruments with a magnification

function such as magnifying glasses, and microscopic and objective lenses withina distance of 100 mm (3.94 in) from the sensor.

Laser sensor radiation dataMaximum average power: 45 mWPulse duration: 33 nsWavelength: 905 nmDivergence angle (horizontal×vertical): 28 degrees×12 degrees

When Driving

Brake

4-91


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (214,1)

qStopping The Smart City BrakeSupport (SCBS) System Operation

The Smart City Brake Support (SCBS)system can be temporarily deactivated.Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switchon page 4-18.When the engine is restarted, the systembecomes operational.

4-92

When Driving

Brake


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (215,1)

Antilock Brake System (ABS)The ABS control unit continuouslymonitors the speed of each wheel. If onewheel is about to lock up, the ABSresponds by automatically releasing andreapplying that wheel's brake.

The driver will feel a slight vibration inthe brake pedal and may hear a chatteringnoise from the brake system. This isnormal ABS system operation. Continueto depress the brake pedal withoutpumping the brakes.


WARNINGDo not rely on ABS as a substitute forsafe driving:

The ABS cannot compensate forunsafe and reckless driving, excessivespeed, tailgating (following anothervehicle too closely), driving on ice andsnow, and hydroplaning (reduced tirefriction and road contact because ofwater on the road surface). You canstill have an accident.

NOTEl Braking distances may be longer on loose

surfaces (snow or gravel, for example)which usually have a hard foundation. Avehicle with a normal braking system mayrequire less distance to stop under theseconditions because the tires will build up awedge of surface layer when the wheelsskid.

l The sound of the ABS operating may beheard when starting the engine orimmediately after starting the vehicle,however, it does not indicate a malfunction.

When Driving

ABS/TCS/DSC

4-93


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (216,1)

Traction Control System(TCS)

The Traction Control System (TCS)enhances traction and safety bycontrolling engine torque and braking.When the TCS detects driving wheelslippage, it lowers engine torque andoperates the brakes to prevent loss oftraction.

This means that on a slick surface, theengine adjusts automatically to provideoptimum power to the drive wheels,limiting wheel spin and loss of traction.


WARNINGDo not rely on the Traction ControlSystem (TCS) as a substitute for safedriving:

The Traction Control System (TCS)cannot compensate for unsafe andreckless driving, excessive speed,tailgating (following another vehicletoo closely), and hydroplaning(reduced tire friction and roadcontact because of water on the roadsurface). You can still have anaccident.

Use snow tires or tire chains and driveat reduced speeds when roads arecovered with ice and/or snow:

Driving without proper tractiondevices on snow and/or ice-coveredroads is dangerous. The TractionControl System (TCS) alone cannotprovide adequate traction and youcould still have an accident.

NOTETo turn off the TCS, press the DSC OFF switch(page 4-95).

4-94

When Driving

ABS/TCS/DSC


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (217,1)

Dynamic Stability Control(DSC)

The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)automatically controls braking and enginetorque in conjunction with systems suchas ABS and TCS to help control side slipwhen driving on slippery surfaces, orduring sudden or evasive maneuvering,enhancing vehicle safety.

Refer to ABS (page 4-93) and TCS (page4-94).

DSC operation is possible at speedsgreater than 20 km/h (12 mph).


WARNINGDo not rely on the Dynamic StabilityControl as a substitute for safe driving:

The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC)cannot compensate for unsafe andreckless driving, excessive speed,tailgating (following another vehicletoo closely), and hydroplaning(reduced tire friction and roadcontact because of water on the roadsurface). You can still have anaccident.

CAUTIONØ The DSC may not operate correctly

unless the following are observed:Ø Use tires of the correct size

specified for your Mazda on allfour wheels.

Ø Use tires of the samemanufacturer, brand and treadpattern on all four wheels.

Ø Do not mix worn tires.Ø The DSC may not operate correctly

when tire chains are used or atemporary spare tire is installedbecause the tire diameter changes.

qDSC OFF Switch

Press the DSC OFF switch to turn off theTCS/DSC. The DSC OFF indicator lightin the instrument cluster will illuminate.

Press the switch again to turn the TCS/DSC back on. The DSC OFF indicatorlight will turn off.

When Driving

ABS/TCS/DSC

4-95


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (218,1)

NOTEl When DSC is on and you attempt to free the

vehicle when it is stuck, or drive it out offreshly fallen snow, the TCS (part of theDSC system) will activate. Depressing theaccelerator will not increase engine powerand freeing the vehicle may be difficult.When this happens, turn off the TCS/DSC.

l If the TCS/DSC is off when the engine isturned off, it automatically activates whenthe ignition is switched ON.

l Leaving the TCS/DSC on will provide thebest traction.

l If the DSC OFF switch is pressed and heldfor 10 seconds or more, the DSC OFFswitch malfunction detection functionoperates and the DSC system activatesautomatically. The DSC OFF indicatorlight turns off while the DSC system isoperative.

4-96

When Driving

ABS/TCS/DSC


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (219,1)

i-ELOOPí

On conventional vehicles, the kinetic energy that is generated when the vehicle isdecelerated by applying the brakes or during engine braking ends up being discarded asheat. By utilizing this discarded kinetic energy to generate electricity and use it to powerthe vehicle's electrical devices and accessories such as the A/C and audio, fuelconsumption can be reduced. Mazda's system for generating electricity from this kineticenergy is called the Deceleration Energy Generation System (i-ELOOP).

Electric componentsEngine Components

Vehicle Systems:Air-conditioningAudioHead-lights, etc

Accelerator OFF

Accelerator ON

Energy regeneration Charge

Battery

Battery

Power

PowerElectric componentsEngine Components

Vehicle Systems:Air-conditioningAudioHead-lights, etc

EngineVariable Voltage alternator

Variable Voltage alternator

Engine

Tire

Tire

Capacitor

Capacitor

DC-DC converter

DC-DC converter

Kinetic energyElectrical

When Driving

i-ELOOP

4-97íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (220,1)

A capacitor is incorporated as the device for storing the generated electricity, which canstore and use large amounts of electricity instantly.

Variable Voltage alternator

Capacitor

DC-DC Converter

CAUTIONHigh-current electricity flows through the following areas, therefore do not touchthem.Ø Variable Voltage alternatorØ DC-DC converterØ Capacitor

NOTEl When installing high power consumption devices such high-output speakers, consult an

Authorized Mazda Dealer.l A difference in the fuel economy may occur depending on use conditions such as with the A/C and

headlights.l If the capacitor is to be disposed of, always consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

For details, go to the following URL.http://www.mazda.com/csr/environment/recycling

qi-ELOOP Display

Displays the power generating status.The status is displayed when the ignition is switched ON and the INFO button is pressed.

4-98

When Driving

i-ELOOP


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (221,1)

There are two types of displays which can be switched from one to the next.Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switch on page 4-18.

Screen 1 Screen 2

Displays the level of electricity generated using deceleration energy.Displays the status of the generated electricity flowing to the capacitor.Displays the amount of the electricity stored in the capacitor.Displays the status of the stored electricity being supplied to the electrical devices

(Screen 2 only).

qi-ELOOP Charging Display

If the engine is started after the vehiclehas not been driven for a long period oftime, an “i-ELOOP charging” messagemay be indicated in the display.Leave the engine idling and wait until themessage disappears.

NOTEIf the vehicle is driven while the message isdisplayed, a beep sound is heard.If you turn the steering wheel while themessage is displayed, it will feel heavier thannormal, but this does not indicate anabnormality. Stop the vehicle in a safe locationwith the engine running and do not attempt toturn the steering wheel. The steering operationwill return to normal after the message is nolonger displayed.

When Driving

i-ELOOP

4-99


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (222,1)

Drive Selectioní

Mazda Drive Selection provides an opportunity to select a different driving characteristicwhen SPORT mode is activated. By selecting SPORT mode, greater vehicle response isachieved through automatic adjustments in transaxle shift control and engine throttlecontrol. This provides additional quick acceleration which may be needed to safely makemaneuvers such as lane changes, merging onto freeways, or passing other vehicles.

NOTEIf driving long distances in SPORT mode, the fuel economy will decrease due to the frequency ofdriving in lower gears. Driving in SPORT mode all of the time is not recommended. SPORT mode isbest used only in situations requiring quick, responsive driving.

4-100

When Driving

íSome models.

Drive Selection


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (223,1)

qDrive Selection Switch

The SPORT mode indicator light in theinstrument cluster is illuminated while inSPORT mode.

NOTEl If the SET button of the Mazda Radar

Cruise Control (MRCC) system/cruisecontrol is pressed while in SPORT mode,SPORT mode is automatically switched off.

l When the ignition is switched off, SPORTmode is also switch off.

l When SPORT mode is selected, thetransaxle may automatically shift down orthe vehicle speed may accelerate dependingon the vehicle speed.

qSPORT Mode Indicator Light

The light is illuminated while in SPORTmode.

NOTEThe indicator light flashes a few times toindicate that the mode cannot be switched toSPORT mode even if the drive select switch ispressed under the following conditions:l The vehicle is driven on a slippery road

surface such as an icy or snow-bound road.l The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)

system/cruise control is operating.l The vehicle is making a turn or driving on a

curved road.

When Driving

Drive Selection

4-101


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (224,1)

Power Steeringl Power steering is only operable whenthe engine is running. If the engine isoff or if the power steering system isinoperable, you can still steer, but itrequires more physical effort.If the steering feels stiffer than usualduring normal driving or the steeringvibrates, consult an Authorized MazdaDealer.

l For vehicles with the type A instrumentcluster, check the vehicle condition orhave the vehicle inspected at anAuthorized Mazda Dealer according tothe indication.

l A system malfunction or operationconditions are indicated by a warning.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights onpage 4-23.

CAUTIONNever hold the steering wheel to theextreme left or right for more than 5seconds with the engine running.This could damage the powersteering system.

4-102

When Driving

Power Steering


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (225,1)

Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)í

The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is designed to maintain headwaycontrol*1 according to the vehicle speed using a radar sensor to detect the distance to avehicle ahead, and by presetting the vehicle speed between 30 km/h (19 mph) and 145km/h (90 mph) the driver is freed from having to constantly use the accelerator or brakepedals.*1 Headway Control: Control of the distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead

detected by the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system.Additionally, if your vehicle starts closing in on the vehicle ahead because, for example,the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly, a warning sound and a warning indication in the displayare activated simultaneously to alert you to maintain a sufficient distance between thevehicles.

Use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system on expressways and other highwayswhich do not require a lot of repeated acceleration and deceleration.

When Driving

Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)

4-103íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (226,1)

WARNINGDo not rely completely on the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system andalways drive carefully:

The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is designed to reduce load on thedriver, and although it maintains a constant vehicle speed, or specifically, itmaintains a constant distance between your vehicle and the detected vehicle aheadaccording to the vehicle speed, the system has detection limitations depending on thetype of vehicle ahead and its conditions, the weather conditions, and the roadconditions. Additionally, the system may be unable to decelerate sufficiently to avoidhitting the vehicle ahead if the vehicle ahead applies the brakes suddenly or anothervehicle cuts into the driving lane, which could result in an accident. Always verify thesafety of the surrounding area and depress the brake pedal or accelerator pedalwhile keeping a safe distance from vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.

Do not use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system in the following locations.Otherwise, it could lead to an accident:

Ø Roads with sharp curves and where vehicle traffic is heavy and there is insufficientspace between vehicles. Roads where frequent and repetitive acceleration anddeceleration occur (Driving under these conditions using the Mazda Radar CruiseControl (MRCC) system is not possible).

Ø When entering and exiting interchanges, service areas, and parking areas ofhighways (If you exit a highway while headway control is in use, the vehicleahead will no longer be tracked and your vehicle may accelerate to the set speed).

Ø Slippery roads such as ice or snow-bound roads (The tires could spin causing youto lose vehicle control).

Ø Long descending slopes (to maintain distance between vehicles, the systemautomatically and continuously applies the brakes which could result in the lossof brake power).

For the purposes of safety, switch the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system offwhen it is not being used.

CAUTIONIf the vehicle is towed or you are towing something, switch the Mazda Radar CruiseControl (MRCC) system off to prevent a miss-operation.

4-104

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (227,1)

NOTEl The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system operates when all of the following conditions

are met.l The vehicle speed is about 30 km/h (19 mph) to 145 km/h (90 mph).l The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is turned on.l The parking brake is not applied.l The Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) is operating normally.(Manual transaxle)l The shift lever is in a position other than reverse (R) or neutral (N).l The clutch pedal is not depressed.(Automatic transaxle)l The selector lever is in the drive (D) position or manual (M) position (manual mode).

l In the following cases, the warnings may not activate even if your vehicle starts closing in on thevehicle ahead.l You are driving at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.l Directly after the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system has been set.l When the accelerator pedal is depressed or directly after the accelerator pedal is released.l Another vehicle cuts into the driving lane.

l The following are not detected as physical objects.l Vehicles approaching in the opposite directionl Pedestriansl Stationary objects (stopped vehicles, obstructions)

l If a vehicle ahead is traveling at an extremely low speed, the system may not detect it correctly.l During headway control travel, do not set the system on two-wheeled vehicles such as motorcycles

and bicycles.l Do not use the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system under conditions in which the close

proximity warnings are frequently activated.l During headway control travel, the system accelerates and decelerates your vehicle in

conjunction with the speed of the vehicle ahead. However, if it is necessary to accelerate for a lanechange or if the vehicle ahead brakes suddenly causing you to close in on the vehicle rapidly,accelerate using the accelerator pedal or decelerate using the brake pedal depending on theconditions.

l While the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is in use, it does not cancel even if theselector lever (automatic transaxle)/shift lever (manual transaxle) is operated and any intendedengine braking will not occur. If deceleration is required, lower the vehicle speed setting ordepress the brake pedal.

When Driving


4-105


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (228,1)

qMazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) Display Indication

The setting status of the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) system is indicated in thedisplay in the instrument cluster.A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-23.Refer to Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) System Warnings on page 7-42.

Vehicle ahead display

MRCC Distance between vehicle display

MRCC Set vehicle speed

qClose Proximity Warning

If your vehicle rapidly closes in on thevehicle ahead because the vehicle appliesthe brakes suddenly while you aretraveling in headway control, the warningsound activates and the brake warning isindicated in the display. Always verify thesafety of the surrounding area and depressthe brake pedal while keeping a safedistance from the vehicle ahead.Additionally, always keep a safe distancefrom the vehicles behind you.

4-106

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (229,1)

qSetting the System

CANCEL switch

switchswitch

RES switch

OFF switch ON switch

Cruise control SET+/SET- switch

When the ON switch is pressed, the vehicle speed and the distance between vehicles whilein headway control can be set. The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) indication isshown in the display of the instrument cluster.

NOTEWhen the ignition is switched to ACC or OFF while the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) is ON,the Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC) remains ON automatically.

When Driving


4-107


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (230,1)

How to Set the Speed

1. Adjust the vehicle speed to the desiredsetting using the accelerator pedal.

2. Headway control begins when theSET or SET switch is pressed.The set speed and the inter-vehicledistance display filled with white linesis displayed. The Mazda Radar CruiseControl (MRCC) indicator light (green)is indicated simultaneously.

Travel status Display

During travel at constantspeed

During travel underheadway control

NOTEl If a vehicle ahead is detected while

traveling at a constant speed, the vehicle-ahead indication is displayed and headwaycontrol is performed. Additionally, when avehicle ahead is no longer detected, thevehicle-ahead indication turns off and thesystem switches back to travel at constantspeed.

l If you are driving the vehicle at a speedfaster than the set speed, headway controlon the vehicle ahead is not possible Adjustthe system to the desired vehicle speedusing the accelerator pedal.

How to Set the Distance BetweenVehicles During Headway Control

The distance between vehicles is set to ashorter distance each time the switchis pressed. The distance between vehiclesis set to a longer distance by pressing the

switch. The distance-between-vehiclescan be set to 4 levels; Long, medium,short, and extremely short distance.

Distance-between-vehi-cles guideline

(at 80 km/h (50 mph)vehicle speed)


Long(about 50 m (164 ft))

Medium(about 40 m (131 ft))

Short(about 30 m (98 ft))

Extremely short(about 25 m (82 ft))

NOTEl The distance between vehicles differs

depending on the vehicle speed, and theslower the vehicle speed, the shorter thedistance.

l When the ignition is switched to ACC orOFF and then the engine is started again,the system automatically sets the distancebetween vehicles to the previous setting.

4-108

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (231,1)

Changing the Set Vehicle Speed

Changing the set vehicle speed usingthe SET switch

Press the SET switch to accelerate.Press the SET switch to decelerate.The set vehicle speed changes as followseach time the SET switch is pressed.

Short press 1 km/h (1 mph)

Long press 10 km/h (5 mph)

NOTEFor example, the set vehicle speed is changedby pressing the SET switch four times asfollows:The vehicle speed accelerates or deceleratesby 4 km/h (4 mph).

To accelerate using accelerator pedal

Depress the accelerator pedal and pressand release the SET or SET switch atthe desired speed. If a switch cannot beoperated, the system returns to the setspeed when you release your foot fromthe accelerator pedal.

CAUTIONThe warnings and brake control donot operate while the acceleratorpedal is depressed.

NOTEl When accelerating using the SET switch

while in headway control, the set vehiclespeed can be adjusted but acceleration isnot possible. If there is no longer a vehicleahead, acceleration continues untilreaching the set vehicle speed. Check theset vehicle speed by viewing the set vehiclespeed display in the display in theinstrument cluster.

l When depressing the accelerator pedal, theinter-vehicle distance display in the displayin the instrument cluster changes to thewhite-line display.

l The minimum settable speed is 30 km/h (19mph). If the set vehicle speed reaches 30km/h (19 mph) using the switch operation,constant speed travel is maintained atabout 30 km/h (19 mph) even if the SETswitch is pressed. The Mazda Radar CruiseControl (MRCC) system is not canceled.

To Deactivate

The Mazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) is canceled when the OFFswitch is pressed.

When the system is temporarilycanceled

In the following cases, the Mazda RadarCruise Control (MRCC) system istemporarily canceled and the “MRCCCancelled” indication is displayed in thedisplay in the instrument cluster. TheMazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)indicator light (green) turns offsimultaneously.l The CANCEL switch is pressed.l The brake pedal is depressed.l The parking brake is applied.l The selector lever is shifted to park (P),neutral (N) or reverse (R) (automatictransaxle).

When Driving


4-109


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (232,1)

l The shift lever is in the reverse (R)position (manual transaxle).

l In the following cases, the “MRCCCancelled” indication is displayed andthe beep sounds one time.l The vehicle speed decreases to less

than 25 km (16 mph).l The DSC has operated.l The TCS has operated for a certain

period of time.l The Smart City Brake Support

(SCBS) has operated.l When traveling on a down slope for

a long period of time.l There is a problem with the system.(Manual transaxle)l The shift lever is shifted to neutral

(N) for a certain period of time.l The clutch is depressed for a certain

period of time.l The engine stalls.

NOTEl The Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)

system may be canceled during rain, fog,snow or other inclement weatherconditions, or the front surface of theradiator grille is dirty.

l If the Mazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) system has been temporarilycanceled, you can return to the previouslyset vehicle speed by pressing the RESswitch after the following conditions havebeen met.l All of the Mazda Radar Cruise Control

(MRCC) operation conditions have beenmet.

l A certain period of time has elapsedsince the system was automaticallycanceled while driving for a long timeon a down slope.

l If the SET or RES switch is pressed before acertain period of time has elapsed since thesystem was automatically canceled whiledriving for a long time on a down slope,“MRCC Not available” is displayed in thedisplay.

l If the OFF switch is pressed to cancel theMazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC), thesystem does not return to the previously setspeed even if the RES switch is pressed.

4-110

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (233,1)

qShift-up/Shift-down RequestDisplay (Manual Transaxle)

The shift-up or shift-down request displayin the display of the instrument clustermay be displayed while the Mazda RadarCruise Control (MRCC) system isoperating. When this occurs, shift gearsbecause the gear position is notappropriate.

Request Indication on display

Shift up

Shift down

NOTEl If the gears are not shifted up even though

the shift-up request indication is displayed,load will be applied to the engine and theMazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)system may be automatically canceled orengine damage could occur.

l If the gears are not shifted down eventhough the shift-down request indication isdisplayed, the Mazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) system may be automaticallycanceled or engine stalling could occur.

qRadar Sensor Handling

The Mazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) laser sensor is installed on thebackside of the radiator grille.Refer to Radar Sensor on page 4-79.

When Driving


4-111


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (234,1)

Cruise Controlí

With cruise control, you can set and automatically maintain any speed of more than about25 km/h (16 mph).

WARNINGDo not use the cruise control under the following conditions:

Using the cruise control under the following conditions is dangerous and could resultin loss of vehicle control.Ø Hilly terrainØ Steep inclinesØ Heavy or unsteady trafficØ Slippery or winding roadsØ Similar restrictions that require inconsistent speed

qCruise Control Switch

CANCEL switch

OFF switch

ON switch

RES switch

Cruise control SET+/SET- switch

4-112

When Driving

íSome models.

Cruise Control


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (235,1)

qActivation/Deactivation

To activate the system, press the ONswitch.The cruise main indicator light (Amber)illuminates.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page4-23.

To deactivate the system, press the OFFswitch.The cruise main indicator light (Amber)turns off.

WARNINGAlways turn off the cruise controlsystem when it is not in use:

Leaving the cruise control system inan activation-ready state while thecruise control is not in use isdangerous as the cruise control couldunexpectedly activate if theactivation button is accidentallypressed, and result in loss of vehiclecontrol and an accident.

qTo Set Speed

1. Activate the cruise control system bypressing the ON switch.The cruise main indicator light(Amber) illuminates. Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-23.

2. Accelerate to the desired speed, whichmust be more than 25 km/h (16 mph).

3. Set the cruise control by pressing theSET or SET - switch at the desiredspeed. The cruise control is set at themoment the SET or SET - switch ispressed. Release the accelerator pedalsimultaneously. The cruise set indicatorlight (Green) illuminates.

NOTEl Release the SET or SET - switch at the

desired speed, otherwise the speed willcontinue increasing while the SETswitch is pressed and held, and continuedecreasing while the SET - switch is pressedand held (except when the acceleratorpedal is depressed).

l On a steep grade, the vehicle maymomentarily slow down while ascending,or speed up while descending.

l Cruise control will cancel if the vehiclespeed decreases below 21 km/h (13 mph)when cruise is activated, such as whenclimbing a steep grade.

l Cruise control may cancel at about 15 km/h(9 mph) below the preset speed (such asmay happen when climbing a long, steepgrade).

For the Type A meter, the vehicle speedpreset using the cruise control is displayedin the instrument cluster.

qTo Increase Cruising Speed

Follow either of these procedures.

To increase speed using cruise controlswitch

Press the SET switch and hold it. Yourvehicle will accelerate.Release the switch at the speed you want.

When Driving

Cruise Control

4-113


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (236,1)

Press the SET and release itimmediately to adjust the preset speed.Multiple operations will increase thepreset speed according to the number oftimes it is operated.Increasing speed with a single SEToperationMeter display for vehicle speed indicatedin km/h: 1 km/h (0.6 mph)Meter display for vehicle speed indicatedin mph: 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

To increase speed using acceleratorpedal

Depress the accelerator pedal to accelerateto the desired speed. Press the SET orSET - switch and release it immediately.

NOTEAccelerate if you want to speed up temporarilywhen the cruise control is on. Greater speedwill not interfere with or change the set speed.Take your foot off the accelerator to return tothe set speed.

qTo Decrease Cruising Speed

Press the SET - switch and hold it. Thevehicle will gradually slow.Release the switch at the speed you want.

Press the SET- switch and release itimmediately to adjust the preset speed.Multiple operations will decrease thepreset speed according to the number oftimes it is operated.Decreasing speed with a single SET-operationMeter display for vehicle speed indicatedin km/h: 1 km/h (0.6 mph)Meter display for vehicle speed indicatedin mph: 1 mph (1.6 km/h)

qTo Resume Cruising Speed atMore Than 25 km/h (16 mph)

If some other method besides the OFFswitch was used to cancel cruising speed(such as applying the brake pedal) and thesystem is still activated, the most recentset speed will automatically resume whenthe RES switch is pressed.If vehicle speed is below 25 km/h (16mph), increase the vehicle speed up to 25km/h (16 mph) or more and press the RESswitch.

qTo Temporarily Cancel

To temporarily cancel the system, use oneof these methods:l Slightly depress the brake pedal.l Depress the clutch pedal (Manualtransaxle only).

l Press the CANCEL switch.If the RESUME switch is pressed whenthe vehicle speed is 25 km/h (16 mph) orhigher, the system reverts to thepreviously set speed.

qTo Deactivate

To deactivate the system, press the OFFswitch.

4-114

When Driving

Cruise Control


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (237,1)

Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)í

Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) is a system which alerts the driver of a possiblecollision using an indicator and warning sound in the instrument cluster while the vehicle isbeing driven at about 15 km/h or faster (10 mph or faster) and the system's radar sensordetermines that your vehicle may hit a vehicle or obstruction ahead.

WARNINGDo not rely completely on the Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) system andalways drive carefully:

Do not rely on the Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) system as a substitute forsafe driving. The Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) system cannot compensate forunsafe and reckless driving, excessive speed, tailgating (following another vehicle tooclosely), and driving on slippery roads such as wet, snowy and icy roads (reduced tirefriction and road contact because of water on the road surface). You can still have anaccident. The Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) system is only designed to reducedamage in the event of a collision. The ability to detect an obstruction is limiteddepending on the obstruction, weather conditions, or traffic conditions. Therefore, ifthe accelerator pedal or brake pedal is mistakenly operated it could result in anaccident. Always verify the safety of the surrounding area and depress the brakepedal or accelerator pedal while keeping a safe distance from vehicles ahead or on-coming vehicles.

When Driving

Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)

4-115íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (238,1)

NOTEThe Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) system operates when all of the following conditions aremet:l The ignition is switched ON.l The Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) system is on.l The vehicle speed is about 15 km/h (10 mph) or faster.l The relative speed between your vehicle and the vehicle or obstruction ahead is about 15 km/h (10

mph)―145 km/h (90 mph).The Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW) system may not operate under the following conditions:l If there is the possibility of hitting only a part of a vehicle or obstruction ahead.l If the vehicle is accelerated rapidly and it comes close to a vehicle ahead.l The DSC is malfunctioning.l The vehicle is driven at the same speed as the vehicle ahead.l The accelerator pedal is depressed.l The brake pedal is depressed.l The steering wheel is being operated.l The selector lever is being operated.l The turn signal is being used.Although the objects which activate the system are 4-wheeled vehicles, the radar sensor could detectthe following objects, determine them to be an obstruction, and operate the Forward ObstructionWarning (FOW) system.l Objects on the road at the entrance to a curve (including guardrails and snow banks).l A vehicle appears in the opposite lane while cornering or rounding a curve.l When crossing a narrow bridge.l When passing under a low gate or through a tunnel or narrow gate.l When entering an underground parking area.l Metal objects, bumps, or protruding objects on the road.l If you suddenly come close to a vehicle ahead.l When driving in areas where there is high grass or forage.l Two-wheeled vehicles such as motorbikes or bicycles.l Pedestrians or non-metallic objects such as standing trees.

4-116

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (239,1)

qIndication on Display

The Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)system's operation status or malfunctionsare indicated in the display in theinstrument cluster. Regardingmalfunctions, check the vehicleconditions or have it inspected by anAuthorized Mazda Dealer according tothe content of the displayed message.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page4-23.

The display can also be turned off bypressing the INFO button of the steeringswitch.Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switchon page 4-18.

qCollision Warning

If there is the possibility of a collisionwith a vehicle or obstruction ahead, thebeep sounds continuously and a warningis indicated in the display.

qRadar Sensor Handling

The Forward Obstruction Warning (FOW)radar sensor is installed on the backside ofthe radiator grille.Refer to Radar Sensor on page 4-79.

When Driving


4-117


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (240,1)

Tire Pressure Monitoring Systeml The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) monitors the air pressure of all four tires.If the air pressure of one or more tires is too low, the system warns the driver byindicating the tire pressure monitoring system warning light in the instrument cluster(the warning is also indicated in the display on the type A*1 instrument cluster) andoperating a beep sound. The system monitors the tire pressures indirectly using the datasent from the ABS wheel speed sensors.To allow the system to operate correctly, the system needs to be initialized with thespecified tire pressure (value on the tire pressure label). Follow the procedure andperform the initialization.*1 Refer to Type A on page 4-23.

l For vehicles with the type A*1 instrument cluster, check the vehicle condition or havethe vehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer according to the indication.*1 Refer to Type A on page 4-23.

l A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-23.Refer to Tire Inflation Pressure Warning Beep on page 7-41.

ABS wheel speed sensor

4-118

When Driving

Tire Pressure Monitoring System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (241,1)

CAUTIONEach tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when coldand inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of adifferent size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressurelabel, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantly under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Underinflationalso reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handlingand stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it isthe driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if underinflation hasnot reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicatewhen the system is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately oneminute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When themalfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons,including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehiclethat prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.To avoid false readings, the system samples for a little while before indicating aproblem. As a result it will not instantaneously register a rapid tire deflation or blowout.

When Driving


4-119


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (242,1)

NOTEBecause this system detects slight changes in tire conditions, the timing of the warning may be fasteror slower in the following cases:l The size, manufacturer, or the type of tires is different from the specification.l The size, manufacturer, or the type of a tire is different from the others, or the level of tire wear is

excessively different between them.l A run-flat tire, studless tire, snow tire, or tire chains are used.l An emergency tire is used (The tire pressure monitoring system warning light may flash and then

continue illuminating).l A tire is repaired using the emergency flat tire repair kit.l The tire pressure is excessively higher than the specified pressure, or the tire pressure is suddenly

lowered for some reason such as a tire burst during driving.l The vehicle speed is lower than about 15 km/h (9.3 mph) (including when the vehicle is stopped),

or the drive period is shorter than 5 minutes.l The vehicle is driven on an extremely rough road or a slippery, icy road.l Hard steering and rapid acceleration/deceleration are repeated such as during aggressive driving

on a winding road.l Load on the vehicle is applied to a tire such as by loading heavy luggage to one side of the

vehicle.l System initialization has not been implemented with the specified tire pressure.

qTire Pressure Monitoring SystemInitialization

In the following cases, systeminitialization must be performed so thatthe system operates normally.l A tire pressure is adjusted.l Tire rotation is performed.l A tire or wheel is replaced.l The battery is replaced or completelydrained.

l The tire pressure monitoring systemwarning light is illuminated.

Initialization method

1. Park the car in a safe place and firmlyapply the parking brake.

2. Let the tires cool, then adjust the tirepressure of all four (4) tires to thespecified pressure indicated on the tirepressure label located on the door jambof the driver's door (door open). Referto Tires on page 9-7.


4-120

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (243,1)

4. While the vehicle is parked, press andhold the tire pressure monitoringsystem set switch and verify that thetire pressure monitoring systemwarning light in the instrument clusterflashes twice and a beep sound is heardonce.With instrument cluster type A, amessage indicating that theinitialization has been completed isindicated in the instrument cluster.

CAUTIONIf the system initialization isperformed without adjusting the tirepressure, the system cannot detectthe normal tire pressure and it maynot illuminate the tire pressuremonitoring system warning lighteven if a tire pressure is low, or itmay illuminate the light even if thepressures are normal.The system initialization will not beperformed if the switch is pressedwhile the vehicle is being driven.

When Driving


4-121


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (244,1)

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) Systemí

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is designed to assist the driver by monitoringblind spots on both sides of the vehicle to the rear in certain situations such as whenchanging lanes on roads and freeways or reversing the vehicle from a parking garage.

A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-23.Refer to Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System Warning Beep on page 7-41.The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System consists of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA).

WARNINGDo not rely completely on the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system and be sure tolook over your shoulder before changing lanes or reversing the vehicle from aparking garage:

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system can assist the driver in confirming thesafety of the surroundings but is not a complete substitute. The driver is responsiblefor assuring lane changes and other maneuvers. Always pay attention to thedirection in which the vehicle is traveling and the vehicle's surroundings.

4-122

When Driving

íSome models.

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (245,1)

NOTEl The detectability of the radar sensors has its limitations. The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System

may not operate properly under the following conditions:l Ice, snow, or soil adheres to the rear bumper surface around the radar sensors.l During adverse weather conditions such as rain or snow, or under conditions where water is

sprayed.l The rear bumper area around the radar sensors is blocked by foreign material (such as

stickers or a bicycle carrier).l The radar sensors do not detect human, animal, shopping cart, bicycle, or static objects such as

fences.l The radar sensors may not detect all types of vehicles around your vehicle, especially the

following types of vehicles:l Motorcyclesl Vehicles with body shapes that radar may not reflect such as a flatbed trailer with no cargo.l Vehicles with lower body height such as sports cars.

l Although the system may detect objects on the road side such as parked vehicles or guardrails andoperate the warning light/beep, it does not indicate a malfunction.

l If the vehicle is driven on a road with less traffic and few vehicles that the radar sensors candetect, the system may pause (the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator light in theinstrument panel flashes). However, it does not indicate a malfunction.

l The following conditions may affect the visibility of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warninglights on the outside mirror, making it difficult to confirm the illumination of the lights:l Ice or snow adheres to the surface of the outside mirrors.l The door window glass is tinted.

l The radar sensors are equipped inside the rear bumper. (page 4-130)l Have the radar sensors inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer if any shock is applied to the

rear bumper, even in a minor accident. If the vehicle is driven with a damaged radar sensor, thesystem may not operate properly resulting in an accident.

l For repairs or paintwork around the radar sensors, or replacement of the bumper, consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

l The radar sensors of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may be regulated under the radiowave related laws of the country where the vehicle is driven. The sensors in this system areapproved for use in the U.S.A. (including territories), Canada, and Mexico. If a vehicle with aBlind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system is driven in a country other than the U.S.A., Canada, orMexico, the system has to be turned off using the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF switch.

When Driving


4-123


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (246,1)

qBlind Spot Monitoring (BSM)

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system monitors the detection areas on both sides of thevehicle to the rear and when there are vehicles in the detection area it notifies the driver byilluminating the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light while the vehicle speed isabout 10 km/h (6.2 mph) or faster and driving forward.If the turn signal lever is operated to the side the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warninglight is illuminated, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light flashes and the systemwarns the driver of the vehicle in the detection area using a BSM warning beep sound.

Detection areas

Your vehicle

4-124

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (247,1)

NOTEl The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) does not operate when the vehicle speed is lower than about 10

km/h (6.2 mph).l The detection area of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) has been determined based on the lane

width of general freeways. Therefore on a road with a narrower lane width, the system may detectvehicles on a lane next to the adjacent lane and operate the warning light/beep. On a road withwider lane width, the system may not detect vehicles on the adjacent lane and may not operate thewarning light/beep.

l Under the following conditions, the system may be unable to detect vehicles, or detection may bedelayed.l The vehicle accelerates from a standing-start with a vehicle alongside.l A vehicle moves from a lane two lanes over to the adjacent lane.l The difference in vehicle speed between your vehicle and another vehicle is larger when

passing or being passed, and the vehicle passes the detection area within a short period oftime.

l On a steep incline, or when there is a difference in height between lanes.l Immediately after the system has been activated by pressing the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)

OFF switch again after it has been turned off (Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicatorlight in instrument panel illuminates) by pressing the switch.

l (Automatic transaxle vehicles)The shift lever is shifted to the R position, or directly after being shifted from the R position.

l The system may not operate normally when towing a trailer. Turn off the system by operating theBlind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF switch when towing a trailer.

l The system switches to the Rear Cross Traffic Alert function when the change lever (Manualtransaxle) or the selector lever (Automatic transaxle) is shifted to the R position.

When Driving


4-125


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (248,1)

qRear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

When reversing the vehicle from a parking garage, vehicles approaching both sides of thevehicle are detected to alert the driver of a possible collision by flashing the Blind SpotMonitoring (BSM) warning light and activating the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warningbeep sound.

Detection areas

Your vehicle

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system operation

1. The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) system operates when the shift lever (manualtransaxle) or the selector lever (automatic transaxle) is shifted to the R position.(With rearview monitor)The rearview monitor is displayed.

4-126

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (249,1)

2. If a vehicle approaches which may hit you, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) systemwarning light flashes and the Blind Spot Monitoring system (BSM) warning beepsounds at the same time.(With rearview monitor)The Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) warning indication in the rearview monitor alsosynchronizes with the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system warning light on the doormirrors.

(With rearview monitor)

When Driving


4-127


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (250,1)

NOTEUnder the following conditions, the system may be unable to detect vehicles, or detection may bedelayed.l The vehicle is reversed at a speed of 12 km/h or fasterl The radar is obstructed by objects such as a large vehicle parked adjacently or by a wall.

(Reverse vehicle to position in which radar is not obstructed.)

Your vehicle

l A vehicle approaches from straight behind

Your vehicle

l The vehicle is parked at a highly acute angle

Your vehicle

l Immediately after the system has been activated by pressing the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)OFF switch again after it has been turned off (Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) OFF indicator lightin instrument panel illuminates) by pressing the switch.

4-128

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (251,1)

qBSM Warning Light

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system alerts the driver to the presence of anothervehicle in an adjacent lane using the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights and thewarning beep while the system is operational.The warning light is equipped on the left and right door mirrors.

This warning light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition is switched ON.

Driving forward

If the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system detects a vehicle in the detection area while thevehicle is driven at a speed of about 10 km/h (6.2mph) or more, the Blind Spot Monitoring(BSM) warning light illuminates on the side of the vehicle where the rear on-comingvehicle is detected. Awarning indicator light flashes when the turn signal lever is operatedto the side where the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning lights is illuminated to alertthe driver.

Reversing

If vehicles approach from the rear on the left and right, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)warning lights on both sides flash.

NOTEl If ice or snow adhere to the outer mirror surface, the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) warning light

may not be visible.l If the door window glass is tinted, it may affect the visibility of the Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM)

warning light, making it difficult to confirm the illumination of the light.

When Driving


4-129


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (252,1)

qBSM OFF Switch

When the BSM OFF switch is pressed,the BSM system turns off and the BSMOFF indicator light illuminates.

Press the BSM OFF switch again to turnon the BSM system. The BSM OFFindicator light turns off.

NOTEl The system may not operate normally when

towing a trailer. Turn off the system byoperating the BSM OFF switch whentowing a trailer.

l If the ignition is switched off with the BSMsystem turned off, the system becomesoperable automatically when the ignition isswitched ON.

qCare of Radar Sensors

The radar sensors are equipped inside therear bumper.

Radar sensors

Always keep the bumper surface near theradar sensor area clean so that the BSMsystem operates normally. Refer toExterior Care on page 6-58.

NOTEl The BSM OFF indicator light flashes if the

radar sensors cannot operate normally. Ifthe light remains flashing after cleaning thebumper surface near the radar sensor area,consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

l For repairs or paintwork around the radarsensors, or replacement of the bumper,consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

4-130

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (253,1)

Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)í

l The LDWS notifies the driver that the vehicle may be deviating from its lane.l The system detects the white (yellow) lines on the traffic lane using the ForwardSensing Camera (FSC) and if it determines that the vehicle may be deviating from itslane, it notifies the driver by flashing the LDWS indicator light (green) and operating theLDWS warning sound.

l Use the LDWS when you drive the vehicle on roads with white (yellow) lines.l For vehicles with type A instrument cluster, check the vehicle condition or have thevehicle inspected at an Authorized Mazda Dealer according to the indication.

l A system malfunction or operation conditions are indicated by a warning.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page 4-23.Refer to Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) Warning Sound on page 7-41.


WARNINGDo not use the LDWS under the following conditions.

The system may not operate adequately according to the actual driving conditions,resulting in an accident.Ø Driving on roads with tight curves.Ø Driving under bad weather conditions (rain, fog, and snow).

The functions of the LDWS have limitations.Always stay on course using the steering wheel and drive with care. The system isnot designed to compensate for a driver's lack of caution, and if you rely too muchon the LDWS it could lead to an accident. The driver is responsible for assuring lanechanges and other maneuvers. Always pay attention to the direction in which thevehicle is traveling and the vehicle's surroundings.

When Driving

Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)

4-131íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (254,1)

CAUTIONØ Do not modify the suspension. If the vehicle height or the damping force of the

suspensions is changed, the LDWS may not operate correctly.Ø Do not remove the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC). Otherwise, the system will not

operate normally.Ø Heed the following cautions to assure correct operation of the LDWS.

Ø Do not place objects on the dashboard which reflect light.Ø Keep the area of the windshield glass near the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)

clean.Ø Do not apply accessories, stickers or film to the windshield near the Forward

Sensing Camera (FSC). If there are objects in front of the Forward SensingCamera (FSC) lens, even a transparent sticker, they will obstruct the lens andcause the system to not operate correctly.

Ø Before performing repairs around the rearview mirror, consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

Ø Always keep the windshield glass around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)clean. If the windshield fogs, defog it using the front defroster.

Ø When cleaning the windshield, do not allow glass cleaners or similar cleaningfluids to get on the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens. In addition, do nottouch the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC) lens.

Ø Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer regarding cleaning the interior side of thewindshield around the Forward Sensing Camera (FSC).

4-132

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (255,1)

NOTEl If your vehicle deviates from its traffic lane, the LDWS operates (warning sound and indicator

light). Steer the vehicle adequately to drive the vehicle to the center of the lane.l When the turn signal lever is operated for a lane change, the LDWS warning is automatically

canceled. The LDWS warning becomes operable when the turn signal lever is returned and thesystem detects the white (yellow) lines.

l If the steering wheel, accelerator pedal, or brake pedal is operated abruptly and the vehicle movesclose to a white (yellow) line, the system determines that the driver is making a lane change andthe LDWS warning is automatically canceled.

l The LDWS may not operate during the period immediately after the vehicle has deviated from itslane and the LDWS has operated, or the vehicle deviates from its lane repeatedly within a shortperiod of time.

l The LDWS does not operate if it does not detect the white (yellow) lines of the traffic lane.l Under the following conditions, the LDWS may not be able to detect white (yellow) lines correctly

and the LDWS may not operate correctly.l If an object placed on the dashboard is reflected in the windshield and picked up by the

camera.l Heavy luggage is loaded in the luggage compartment or on the rear seat and the vehicle is

inclined.l The tire pressures are not adjusted to the specified pressure.l When the vehicle is driven on the entry and exit to or from the rest area or tollgate of a

highway.l The white (yellow) lines are less visible because of dirt or paint flaking.l The vehicle in front of your vehicle is running near a white (yellow) line and the line is less

visible.l A white (yellow) line is less visible because of bad weather (rain, fog, or snow).l The vehicle is driven on a temporary lane or section with a closed lane due to construction.l A misleading line is picked up on the road such as a temporary line for construction, or

because of shade, lingering snow, or grooves filled with water.l The surrounding brightness suddenly changes such as when entering or exiting a tunnel.l The illumination of the headlights is weakened because of dirt or the optical axis is deviated.l The windshield is dirty or foggy.l Back-light is reflecting from the road surface.l The road surface is wet and shiny after rain, or there are puddles on the road.l The shade of a guardrail parallel to a white (yellow) line is on the road.l The width of a lane is excessively narrow or wide.l The road is excessively uneven.l The vehicle is shaken after hitting a road bump.l There are two or more adjacent white (yellow) lines.l There are various road markings or lane markings of various shapes near an intersection.

When Driving


4-133


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (256,1)

qWhen The System Operates

1. Press the LDWS switch. The LDWSgoes on stand-by and the LDWSwarning light (amber) illuminates.On the type A instrument cluster, thelane indication (bordered line) isindicated in the display.


2. Drive the vehicle near the center of thelane and the LDWS indicator light(green) illuminates in the instrumentcluster when all of the followingconditions are met.On the type A instrument cluster, thelane indication is indicated in thedisplay.

l The vehicle is driven near the centerof the lane with the white (yellow)line on the left and right sides, or oneither side.

l The vehicle speed is about 65 km/h(41 mph) or more

l The vehicle is driven on a straightroad or road with gentle curves


NOTEl The LDWS remains on stand-by until it

detects white (yellow) lines on both the leftand right sides, or on either side.

l When the system detects a white (yellow)line on one side only, the system willoperate the warning only when the vehicledeviates to the side the white (yellow) linedetected.

4-134

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (257,1)

Auto cancel

Under the following conditions, theLDWS is automatically canceled and kepton stand-by, and the LDWS warning light(amber) in the instrument clusterilluminates.On the type A instrument cluster, the laneindication (bordered line) is indicated inthe display.The LDWS is automatically enabled whenthe condition changes and the system isoperable.l The system cannot detect white(yellow) lines.

l The vehicle speed is less than about 60km/h (37 mph).

l The vehicle is making a sharp curve.l The vehicle is making a curve at aninadequate speed.

l The temperature inside the camera ishigh or low.

l The windshield around the camera isfoggy.

l The windshield around the camera isblocked by an obstruction, causingpoor forward visibility.

Auto cancel of warning

Under the following conditions, theLDWS determines that the driver ismaking lane changes and the warning isautomatically canceled.The LDWS is automatically enabled afterthe operation.l The steering wheel is operatedabruptly.

l The brake pedal is depressed abruptly.l The accelerator pedal is depressedabruptly.

l A turn signal lever is operated (afterthe turn signal lever is returned, theLDWS warning may not operate forabout 3 seconds which is the period oftime required to make a lanecorrection).

NOTEl After about 5 seconds have elapsed with the

turn signal lever left operating, the LDWSwarning may operate if the vehicle is closeto a white (yellow) line.

l The sensitivity of the warning (sensitivitywith which the system determines thedriver’s intentional lane change) can bechanged.

Refer to Personalization Features on page 9-8.

qCanceling The System

To cancel the LDWS, press the LDWSswitch. The LDWS indicator light (Green/Amber) in the instrument cluster turns off.The lane indication displayed in the typeA instrument cluster turns off.

qLDWSWarning

If the system determines that the vehiclemay be deviating from its lane while thesystem is operating, the LDWS warningsounds and the LDWS indicator light(green) flashes.Refer to Warning/Indicator Lights on page4-23.Refer to Lane Departure Warning System(LDWS) Warning Sound on page 7-41.In the display of the type A instrumentcluster, the direction in which the systemdetermined that the vehicle may bedeviating from its lane is indicated.Operate the steering wheel adequately anddrive in the center of the lane.

When Driving


4-135


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (258,1)


NOTEl If the LDWS warning sound is set to

rumble, the sound will be heard from thevehicle speaker on the side which thesystem determined the vehicle may bedeviating from its lane.

l The LDWS warning sound may not beheard depending on the surroundingconditions such as outside noise.

l The warning timing with which the systemdetermines the vehicle may be deviatingfrom its lane can be changed.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.

qForward Sensing Camera (FSC)

l The LDWS camera, located near therearview mirror, also functions as theForward Sensing Camera (FSC) for theHigh Beam Control System (HBC).

l If the temperature inside the ForwardSensing Camera (FSC) is extremelyhigh or low, the LDWS isautomatically canceled and kept onstand-by, and the LDWS warning light(amber) in the instrument clusterflashes. Message information isindicated in the display in the type Ainstrument cluster.The LDWS is automatically enabledwhen the conditions change and thesystem is operable.


4-136

When Driving



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (259,1)

CAUTIONHeed the following cautions to assurethe correct operation of the ForwardSensing Camera (FSC).Ø Do not remove the Forward

Sensing Camera (FSC) cover.Ø Consult an Authorized Mazda

Dealer regarding cleaning of thecamera lens.

Ø Do not hit or apply strong force tothe Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)or the area around it. If theForward Sensing Camera (FSC)has been severely hit, do not usethe LDWS and consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

Ø Consult an Authorized MazdaDealer before performing repairsaround the Forward SensingCamera (FSC).

Ø The Forward Sensing Camera(FSC) is installed to the windshield.Consult an Authorized MazdaDealer for windshield repair andreplacement.

Ø The direction in which the ForwardSensing Camera (FSC) is pointedhas been finely adjusted. Do notchange the installation position ofthe Forward Sensing Camera (FSC)or remove it. Otherwise, it couldresult in damage or malfunction.

Ø Be careful not to scratch theForward Sensing Camera (FSC)lens or allow it to get dirty. Also,do no take the camera apart.Otherwise, it could result indamage or malfunction.

Ø Always keep the windshield glassaround the camera clean byremoving dirt or fogging. Use thewindshield defroster to removefogging on the windshield.

When Driving


4-137


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (260,1)

Rear View Monitorí

The rear view monitor is a visual assist system when reversing the vehicle that providesimages from the rear of the vehicle.

WARNINGAlways drive carefully confirming the safety of the rear and the surroundingconditions by looking directly with your eyes:

Reversing the vehicle by only looking at the screen is dangerous as it may cause anaccident or a collision with an object. The rear view monitor is only a visual assistdevice when reversing the vehicle. The images on the screen may be different fromthe actual conditions.

CAUTIONØ Do not use the rear view monitor under the following conditions: Using the rear

view monitor under the following conditions is dangerous and could result ininjury or vehicle damage or both.Ø Icy or snow-covered roads.Ø Tire chains or a temporary spare tire is installed.Ø The trunk lid is not fully closed.Ø The vehicle is on a road incline.

Ø When the display is cold, images may course across the monitor or the screen andmay be dimmer than usual, which could cause difficulty in confirming thesurrounding conditions of the vehicle. Always drive carefully confirming the safetyof the rear and the surrounding conditions by looking directly with your eyes.

Ø Do not apply excessive force to the camera. The camera position and angle maydeviate.

Ø Do not disassemble, modify, or remove it as it may no longer be waterproof.Ø The camera cover is made of plastic. Do not apply degreasing agents, organic

solvents, wax, or glass coating agents to the camera cover. If any are spilled onthe cover, wipe off with a soft cloth immediately.

Ø Do not rub the cover excessively, or polish it using an abrasive compound or ahard brush. The cover may be damaged affecting the image.

4-138

When Driving

íSome models.

Rear View Monitor


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (261,1)

NOTEl If water, snow, or mud is stuck on the camera lens, wipe it off using a soft cloth. If it cannot be

wiped off, use a mild detergent.l If the camera temperature changes rapidly (Hot to cold, cold to hot), the rear view monitor may

not operate correctly.l When replacing the tires, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer. Replacing the tires could result in

deviation of the guide lines which appear on the display.l If the vehicle's front, side, or rear has been involved in a collision, the alignment of the rear view

parking camera (location, installation angle) may have deviated. Always consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer to have the vehicle inspected.

qRear View Parking Camera Location

Rear View Parking Camera

qSwitching to the Rear View Monitor Display

Shift the shift lever to R with the ignition switched ON to switch the display to the rearview monitor display.

NOTEWhen the shift lever is shifted from R to another shift lever position, the screen returns to the previousdisplay.

When Driving

Rear View Monitor

4-139


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (262,1)

qDisplayable Range on the Screen

The images on the screen may be different from the actual conditions.

(Screen display)

(Actual view)

Object

Garnish

Bumper

NOTEl The displayable range varies depending on the vehicle and road conditions.l The displayable range is limited. Objects under the bumper or around the bumper ends cannot be

displayed.l The distance appearing in the displayed image is different from the actual distance because the

rear view parking camera is equipped with a specific lens.l Some optionally installed vehicle accessories may be picked up by the camera. Do not install any

optional parts that can interfere with the camera view, such as illuminating parts or parts made ofreflective material.

l It may be difficult to see the display under the following conditions, however, it does not indicate amalfunction.l In darkened areas.l When the temperature around the lens is high/low.l When the camera is wet such as on a rainy day or during periods of high humidity.l When foreign material such as mud is stuck around the camera.l When the camera lens reflects sunlight or headlight beams.

l Image display may be delayed if the temperature around the camera is low.

4-140

When Driving

Rear View Monitor


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (263,1)

qViewing the Display

Guide lines which indicate the width of the vehicle (yellow) are displayed on the screen asa reference to the approximate width of the vehicle in comparison to the width of theparking space you are about to back into.Use this display view for parking your vehicle in a parking space or garage.

b

a

a) Vehicle width guide lines (yellow)Guide lines serve as a reference to the approximate width of the vehicle.

b) Distance guide linesThese guide lines indicate the approximate distance to a point measured from thevehicle's rear (from the end of the bumper).The red and yellow lines indicate the points about 50 cm (19 in) for the red line and 100cm (39.3 in) for the yellow lines from the rear bumper (at the center point of each of thelines).

CAUTIONThe guide lines on the screen are fixed lines. They are not synced to the driver'sturning of the steering wheel. Always be careful and check the area to the vehicle'srear and the surrounding area directly with your eyes while backing up.

qRear View Monitor Operation

The operation of the rear view monitor when reversing the vehicle varies depending on thetraffic, road, and vehicle conditions. The amount of steering and the timing also variesdepending on conditions, so confirm the surrounding conditions directly with your eyesand steer the vehicle in accordance with the conditions.Be well aware of the above cautions prior to using the rear view monitor.

NOTEImages displayed on the monitor from the rear view parking camera are reversed images (mirrorimages).

1. Shift the shift lever to R to switch the display to the rear view monitor display.

When Driving

Rear View Monitor

4-141


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (264,1)

2. Confirming the surrounding conditions, reverse the vehicle.

(Display condition) (Vehicle condition)

3. After your vehicle begins entering the parking space, continue backing up slowly so thatthe distance between the vehicle width lines and the sides of the parking space on theleft and right are roughly equal.

4. Continue to adjust the steering wheel until the vehicle width guide lines are parallel tothe left and right sides of the parking space.

4-142

When Driving

Rear View Monitor


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (265,1)

5. Once they are parallel, straighten the wheels and back your vehicle slowly into theparking space. Continue checking the vehicle's surroundings and then stop the vehicle inthe best possible position. (If the parking space has division lines, check whether thevehicle width guide lines are parallel to them.)

(Display condition) (Vehicle condition)

6. When the shift lever is shifted from R to another shift lever position, the screen returnsto the previous display.

When Driving

Rear View Monitor

4-143


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (266,1)

NOTEBecause there may be a difference between the displayed image, such as indicated below, and theactual conditions when parking, always verify the safety at the rear of the vehicle and thesurrounding area directly with your eyes.l In the image of the parking space (or garage) displayed below, even though the back end and

distance guide lines appear parallel in the monitor, they may not actually be parallel on theground.

l When parking in a space with a division line on only one side of the parking space, the divisionline and the vehicle width guide line may appear parallel on the monitor, but they may notactually be parallel on the ground.

4-144

When Driving

Rear View Monitor


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (267,1)

qVariance Between Actual Road Conditions and Displayed Image

Some variance occurs between the actual road and the displayed road. Such variance indistance perspective could lead to an accident. Note the following conditions that maycause a variance in distance perspective.

When the vehicle is tilted due to the weight of passengers and load

When the vehicle rear is lowered, the object displayed on the screen appears farther thanthe actual distance.

Variance

Object

When Driving

Rear View Monitor

4-145


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (268,1)

When there is a steep grade behind the vehicle

When there is a steep upgrade (downgrade) behind the vehicle, the object displayed on thescreen appears farther (downgrade: closer) than the actual distance.

Appears farther than actual distance

Appears closer than actual distance

Object at actual position

Object at actual positionObject on screen

A: Distance between the vehicle and object displayed on the screen.B: Actual distance between the vehicle and object.

Object on screen

4-146

When Driving

Rear View Monitor


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (269,1)

Three-dimensional object on vehicle rear

Because the distance guide lines are displayed based on a flat surface, the distance to thethree-dimensional object displayed on the screen is different from the actual distance.

AA

CB

C B

(Actual distance) B>C=A

Sensed distance on screen A>B>C

(Screen display)

(Actual condition)

qPicture Quality Adjustment

WARNINGAlways adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while the vehicle isstopped:

Do not adjust the picture quality of the rear view monitor while driving the vehicle.Adjusting the picture quality of the rear view monitor such as brightness, contrast,color, and tint while driving the vehicle is dangerous as it could distract yourattention from the vehicle operation which could lead to an accident.

Picture quality adjustment can be done while the shift lever is in reverse (R).There are four settings which can be adjusted including, brightness, contrast, color, andtint. When adjusting, pay sufficient attention to the vehicle surroundings.

1. Press the setup button ( ) to display the picture quality adjustment screen.

2. Touch the and on-screen buttons to change the set value.

Touch the on-screen button to return to the camera image display.

When Driving

Rear View Monitor

4-147


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (270,1)

Reset

All of the screen setting values can be reset to their initial settings.

1. Press the setup button ( ) to display the picture quality adjustment screen.

2. Touch the on-screen button.


4-148

When Driving

Rear View Monitor


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (271,1)

5 Interior Features

Use of various features for ride comfort, including air-conditioning and audiosystem.

Climate Control System ............................................................... 5-2Operating Tips ........................................................................... 5-2Vent Operation .......................................................................... 5-3Manual Type ............................................................................. 5-5Fully Automatic Type ............................................................... 5-9

Audio System ............................................................................... 5-13Antenna ................................................................................... 5-13Operating Tips for Audio System ........................................... 5-13Audio Set (Type A) ................................................................. 5-25Audio Set (Type B) ................................................................. 5-35Audio Control Switch Operation ............................................ 5-56Commander switch operationí .............................................. 5-58AUX/USB/iPod mode ............................................................. 5-60

Bluetooth® .................................................................................. 5-79Bluetooth®í ........................................................................... 5-79Bluetooth® Hands-Free .......................................................... 5-85Bluetooth® Audio ................................................................. 5-104Troubleshooting .................................................................... 5-108

Interior Equipment ................................................................... 5-112Sunvisors ............................................................................... 5-112Interior Lights ....................................................................... 5-113Clock ..................................................................................... 5-115Accessory Sockets ................................................................. 5-116Cup Holder ............................................................................ 5-117Bottle Holder ......................................................................... 5-118Storage Compartments .......................................................... 5-119

5-1íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (272,1)

Operating Tipsl Operate the climate control systemwith the engine running.

l To prevent the battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the fan controldial on for a long period of time withthe ignition switched ON when theengine is not running.

l Clear all obstructions such as leaves,snow and ice from the hood and the airinlet in the cowl grille to improve thesystem efficiency.

l Use the climate control system to defogthe windows and dehumidify the air.

l The recirculate mode should be usedwhen driving through tunnels or whilein a traffic jam, or when you would liketo shut off outside air for quick coolingof the interior.

l Use the outside air mode for ventilationor windshield defrosting.

l If the vehicle has been parked in directsunlight during hot weather, open thewindows to let warm air escape, thenrun the climate control system.

l Run the air conditioner about 10minutes at least once a month to keepinternal parts lubricated.

l Have the air conditioner checkedbefore the weather gets hot. Lack ofrefrigerant may make the airconditioner less efficient.The refrigerant specifications areindicated on a label attached to theinside of the engine compartment.Check the label before refilling therefrigerant. If the wrong type ofrefrigerant is used, it could result in aserious malfunction of the airconditioner.For details, consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

Label

5-2

Interior Features

Climate Control System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (273,1)

Vent Operation

qAdjusting the Vents

Directing airflow

To adjust the direction of airflow, movethe adjustment knob.

NOTEWhen using the air conditioner under humidambient temperature conditions, the systemmay blow fog from the vents. This is not a signof trouble but a result of humid air beingsuddenly cooled.

Side Vents

Open

Knob

Dial

Knob

Dial

Close OpenClose

Center Vents

Knob Dial

Close

Open

Rear Ventsí

Knob Dial

Close

Open

Interior Features


5-3íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (274,1)

qSelecting the Airflow Mode

Dashboard Vents

Dashboard and Floor Vents

Floor Vents

Defroster and Floor Vents

Defroster Vents

* With rear vents

5-4

Interior Features



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (275,1)

Manual Type

Temperature control dial

A/C switch

Rear window defroster switch

Fan control dial Mode selector dial

Air intake selector(recirculated air mode)

Air intake selector(outside air mode)

qControl Switches


This dial controls temperature. Turn itclockwise for hot and counterclockwisefor cold.

NOTEWhen the mode is set to or with the fancontrol dial in a position other than 0 and thetemperature control dial in the maximum coldposition, the air intake selector switches to therecirculated air mode and the A/C turns onautomatically.If A/C is not desired, press the A/C switch toturn it off.

Fan control dial

This dial allows variable fan speeds.The fan has seven speeds.

Mode selector dial

Turn the mode selector dial to selectairflow mode (page 5-4).

NOTEl The mode selector dial can be set at the

intermediate positions ( ) between eachmode. Set the dial to an intermediateposition if you want to split the airflowbetween the two modes.

l For example, when the mode selector dial isat the position between the andpositions, airflow from the floor vent is lessthan that of the position.

A/C switch

Press the A/C switch to turn the airconditioner on. The indicator light on theswitch will illuminate when the fancontrol dial is in any position except OFF.

Press the switch once again to turn the airconditioner off.

NOTEThe air conditioner may not function when theoutside temperature approaches 0 °C (32 °F).

Interior Features


5-5


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (276,1)

Air intake selector

This switch controls the source of airentering the vehicle.

Press the air intake selector switch toalternate between the outside air andrecirculated air modes.

Recirculated air mode ( )

Outside air is shut off. Air within thevehicle is recirculated.

Outside air mode ( )

Use this mode for ventilation orwindshield defrosting.

WARNINGDo not use the recirculated air mode incold or rainy weather:

Using the recirculated air mode incold or rainy weather is dangerous asit will cause the windows to fog up.Your vision will be hampered, whichcould lead to a serious accident.

qHeating

1. Set the mode selector dial to theposition.

2. Set the air intake selector to the outsideair mode.

3. Set the temperature control dial to thehot position.

4. Set the fan control dial to the desiredspeed.

5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turnon the air conditioner.

NOTEl If the windshield fogs up easily, set the

mode selector dial to the position.l If cooler air is desired at face level, set the

mode selector dial at the position andadjust the temperature control dial tomaintain maximum comfort.

l The air to the floor is warmer than air tothe face (except when the temperaturecontrol dial is set at the extreme hot or coldposition).

l In the or position, the airconditioner is automatically turned on andthe outside air mode is automaticallyselected to defrost the windshield. In theor position, the outside air modecannot be changed to the recirculated airmode.

qCooling (With air conditioner)


2. Set the temperature control dial to thecold position.


4. Turn on the air conditioner by pressingthe A/C switch.

5. After cooling begins, adjust the fancontrol dial and temperature controldial as needed to maintain maximumcomfort.

5-6

Interior Features



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (277,1)

CAUTIONIf the air conditioner is used whiledriving up long hills or in heavytraffic, monitor the engine coolanttemperature warning light to see if itis illuminated or flashing (page 4-23).The air conditioner may cause engineoverheating. If the warning light isilluminated or flashing, turn the airconditioning off (page 7-24).

NOTEl When maximum cooling is desired, set the

temperature control dial to the extreme coldposition and set the air intake selector tothe recirculated air mode, then set turn thefan control dial fully clockwise.

l If warmer air is desired at floor level, setthe mode selector dial at the positionand adjust the temperature control dial tomaintain maximum comfort.

l The air to the floor is warmer than air tothe face (except when the temperaturecontrol dial is set at the extreme hot or coldposition).

qVentilation



3. Set the temperature control dial to thedesired position.


qWindshield Defrosting and Defogging




4. If dehumidified heating is desired, turnon the air conditioner.

WARNINGDo not defog the windshield using the

position with the temperaturecontrol set to the cold position:

Using the position with thetemperature control set to the coldposition is dangerous as it will causethe outside of the windshield to fogup. Your vision will be hampered,which could lead to a seriousaccident. Set the temperature controlto the hot or warm position whenusing the position.

NOTEl For maximum defrosting, turn on the air

conditioner, set the temperature control dialto the extreme hot position, and turn the fancontrol dial fully clockwise.

l If warm air is desired at the floor, set themode selector dial to the position.


Interior Features


5-7


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (278,1)

qDehumidifying (With air conditioner)

Operate the air conditioner in cool or coldweather to help defog the windshield andside windows.

1. Set the mode selector dial to thedesired position.




5. Turn on the air conditioner by pressingthe A/C switch.

NOTEOne of the functions of the air conditioner isdehumidifying the air and, to use this function,the temperature does not have to be set to cold.Therefore, set the temperature control dial tothe desired position (hot or cold) and turn onthe air conditioner when you want todehumidify the cabin air.

5-8

Interior Features



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (279,1)

Fully Automatic TypeClimate control information is displayed on the display.

Airflow display

Temperature setting display (driver)

Mode selector display A/C

Temperature setting display (passenger)

Air intake selector(recirculated air position)

Air intake selector(outside air position)

Driver temperature control dial

AUTO switch

Mode selector switch

Fan control dial

OFF switch

Windshield defroster switch

Rear window defroster switch

Passenger temperature control dial

DUAL switch

A/C switch

qControl Switches

AUTO switch

By pressing the AUTO switch thefollowing functions will be automaticallycontrolled in accordance with the selectedset temperature:l Airflow temperaturel Amount of airflowl Selection of airflow model Outside/Recirculated air selectionl Air conditioner operation

NOTEAUTO switch indicator lightl When on, it indicates auto operation, and

the system will function automatically.l If any of the following dials or switches are

operated while in auto control, the AUTOswitch indicator turns off.l Mode selector switchl Fan control diall Windshield defroster switchThe functions for dials and switches otherthan those operated in the above continueto operate in auto control.

OFF switch

Pressing the OFF switch shuts off theclimate control system.

Interior Features


5-9


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (280,1)


This dial controls temperature. Turn itclockwise for hot and counterclockwisefor cold.l When the DUAL switch is off:Turn the driver temperature control dialto control the temperature throughoutthe entire cabin.

l When the DUAL switch is on:Turn the driver or front passengertemperature control dial toindependently control the temperatureon each side of the cabin.

NOTEl The climate control system changes to the

individual operation mode (DUAL switchindicator light illuminated) by turning thefront passenger temperature control dialeven when the DUAL switch is off, whichallows individual control of the settemperature for the driver and frontpassenger.

l The temperature units for the temperaturesetting display can be changed inconjunction with the temperature units forthe outside temperature display. Refer toOutside Temperature Display on page 4-14.

Fan control dial

The fan has seven speeds. The selectedspeed will be displayed.

Mode selector switch

The desired airflow mode can be selected(page 5-4).

NOTEl With the airflow mode set to the

position and the temperature control dialset at a medium temperature, heated air isdirected to the feet and air at a comparablylower temperature will flow through thecentral, left and right vents.

l To set the air vent to , press thewindshield defroster switch.


A/C switch

Pressing the A/C switch while the AUTOswitch is turned on will turn off the airconditioning (cooling/dehumidifyingfunctions).The air conditioning can be turned on andoff by pressing the A/C switch while thefan control dial is on.

NOTEl The air conditioning operates when the A/C

switch is pressed even if the fan is off.l The air conditioner may not function when

the outside temperature approaches 0 °C(32 °F).

Air intake selector

Outside or recirculated air positions canbe selected. Press the switch to selectoutside/recirculated air positions.

Recirculated air position ( )

Use this position when going throughtunnels, driving in congested traffic (highengine exhaust areas) or when quickcooling is desired.

5-10

Interior Features



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (281,1)

Outside air position ( )

Use this mode for ventilation orwindshield defrosting.

WARNINGDo not use the position in cold orrainy weather:

Using the position in cold orrainy weather is dangerous as it willcause the windows to fog up. Yourvision will be hampered, which couldlead to a serious accident.

DUAL switch

Use the DUAL switch to change the modebetween the individual operation (driverand passenger) and interconnection(simultaneous) modes.

Individual operation mode (indicatorlight illuminated)

The set temperature can be controlledindividually for the driver and frontpassenger.

Interconnection mode (indicator lightturned off)

The set temperature for the driver andfront passenger is controlledsimultaneously.

Windshield defroster switch

Press the switch to defrost the windshieldand front door windows.

qOperation of Automatic AirConditioning

1. Press the AUTO switch. Selection ofthe airflow mode, air intake selectorand amount of airflow will beautomatically controlled.

2. Use the temperature control dial toselect a desired temperature.Press the DUAL switch or turn thefront passenger temperature controldial to control the set temperatureindividually for the driver and frontpassenger.

To turn off the system, press the OFFswitch.

NOTEl Setting the temperature to maximum high

or low will not provide the desiredtemperature at a faster rate.

l When selecting heat, the system will restrictairflow until it has warmed to prevent coldair from blowing out of the vents.

qWindshield Defrosting and Defogging

Press the windshield defroster switch.In this position, the outside air position isautomatically selected, and the airconditioner automatically turns on. Theair conditioner will directly dehumidifythe air to the front windshield and sidewindows (page 5-4). Airflow amount willbe increased.

Interior Features


5-11


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (282,1)

WARNINGSet the temperature control to the hotor warm position when defogging (position):

Using the position with thetemperature control set to the coldposition is dangerous as it will causethe outside of the windshield to fogup. Your vision will be hampered,which could lead to a seriousaccident.

NOTEUse the temperature control dial to increasethe air flow temperature and defog thewindshield more quickly.

qSunlight/Temperature Sensor

The fully automatic air conditionerfunction measures inside and outsidetemperatures, and sunlight. It then setstemperatures inside the passengercompartment accordingly.

CAUTIONDo not obstruct either sensor,otherwise the automatic airconditioner will not operate properly.

Sunlight sensor

Interior temperature sensor

5-12

Interior Features



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (283,1)

Antenna

qAM/FM Radio Antenna

The antenna is embedded into the windowglass.

CAUTIONWhen washing the inside of thewindow which has an antenna, use asoft cloth dampened in lukewarmwater, gently wiping the antennalines.Use of glass cleaning products coulddamage the antenna.

qSatellite Radio Antennaí

The satellite radio antenna receivesSIRIUS signals.

Satellite radio antenna

Operating Tips for AudioSystem

WARNINGAlways adjust the audio while thevehicle is stopped:

Do not adjust the audio controlswitches while driving the vehicle.Adjusting the audio while driving thevehicle is dangerous as it coulddistract your attention from thevehicle operation which could lead toa serious accident.Even if the audio control switches areequipped on the steering wheel, learnto use the switches without lookingdown at them so that you can keepyour maximum attention on the roadwhile driving the vehicle.

CAUTIONFor the purposes of safe driving,adjust the audio volume to a levelthat allows you to hear soundsoutside of the vehicle including carhorns and particularly emergencyvehicle sirens.

NOTEl To prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not leave the audio systemon for a long period of time when theengine is not running.

l If a cellular phone or CB radio is used inor near the vehicle, it could cause noise tooccur from the audio system, however, thisdoes not indicate that the system has beendamaged.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-13íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (284,1)

Do not spill any liquid on the audiosystem.

Do not insert any objects, other than CDs,into the slot.

qRadio Reception

AM characteristics

AM signals bend around such things asbuildings or mountains and bounce off theionosphere.Therefore, they can reach longer distancesthan FM signals.Because of this, two stations maysometimes be picked up on the samefrequency at the same time.

Station 2Station 1

Ionosphere

FM characteristics

An FM broadcast range is usually about40―50 km (25―30 miles) from thesource. Because of extra coding needed tobreak the sound into two channels, stereoFM has even less range than monaural(non-stereo) FM.

FM Station

40—50km (25—30 miles)

Signals from an FM transmitter are similarto beams of light because they do notbend around corners, but they do reflect.Unlike AM signals, FM signals cannottravel beyond the horizon. Therefore, FMstations cannot be received at the greatdistances possible with AM reception.

AM waveFM wave

FM wave

100—200 km (60—120 miles)

Ionosphere

Atmospheric conditions can also affectFM reception. High humidity will causepoor reception. However, cloudy daysmay provide better reception than cleardays.

5-14

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (285,1)

Multipath noise

Since FM signals can be reflected byobstructions, it is possible to receive boththe direct signal and the reflected signal atthe same time. This causes a slight delayin reception and may be heard as a brokensound or a distortion. This problem mayalso be encountered when in closeproximity to the transmitter.

Reflected waveDirect

Flutter/Skip noise

Signals from an FM transmitter move instraight lines and become weak in valleysbetween tall buildings, mountains, andother obstacles. When a vehicle passesthrough such an area, the receptionconditions may change suddenly, resultingin annoying noise.

Weak signal noise

In suburban areas, broadcast signalsbecome weak because of distance fromthe transmitter. Reception in such fringeareas is characterized by sound breakup.

Strong signal noise

This occurs very close to a transmittertower. The broadcast signals areextremely strong, so the result is noise andsound breakup at the radio receiver.

Station drift noise

When a vehicle reaches the area of twostrong stations broadcasting at similarfrequencies, the original station may betemporarily lost and the second stationpicked up. At this time there will be somenoise from this disturbance.

Station 2 88.3 MHz

Station 1 88.1 MHz

Interior Features

Audio System

5-15


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (286,1)

qOperating Tips for CD Player

Condensation phenomenon

Immediately after turning on the heaterwhen the vehicle is cold, the CD oroptical components (prism and lens) in theCD player may become clouded withcondensation. At this time, the CD willeject immediately when placed in the unit.A clouded CD can be corrected simply bywiping it with a soft cloth. Cloudedoptical components will clear naturally inabout an hour. Wait for normal operationto return before attempting to use the unit.

Handling the CD player

The following precautions should beobserved.l The CD revolves at high speed withinthe unit. Defective (cracked or badlybent) CDs should never be used.

l Do not use non-conventional discssuch as heart-shaped, octagonal discs,etc. The disc may not eject resulting ina malfunction.

l If the memory portion of the CD istransparent or translucent, do not usethe disc.

Transparent

l A new CD may have rough edges onits inner and outer perimeters. If a discwith rough edges is used, propersetting will not be possible and the CDplayer will not play the CD. Inaddition, the disc may not ejectresulting in a malfunction. Remove therough edges in advance by using a ball-point pen or pencil as shown below. Toremove the rough edges, rub the side ofthe pen or pencil against the inner andouter perimeter of the CD.

l When driving over uneven surfaces,the sound may jump.

5-16

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (287,1)

l The CD player has been designed toplay CDs bearing the identificationlogo as shown below. No other discscan be played.

l Use discs that have been legitimatelyproduced. If illegally-copied discs suchas pirated discs are used, the systemmay not operate properly.

l Be sure never to touch the signalsurface when handling the CDs. Pickup a CD by grasping the outer edge orthe edge of the hole and the outer edge.

l Do not stick paper or tape on the CD.Avoid scratching the reverse side (theside without a label). The disc may noteject resulting in a malfunction.

l Dust, finger smudges, and dirt candecrease the amount of light reflectedfrom the signal surface, thus affectingsound quality. If the CD shouldbecome soiled, gently wipe it with asoft cloth from the center of the CD tothe edge.

l Do not use record sprays, antistaticagents, or household spray cleaners.Volatile chemicals such as benzine andthinner can also damage the surface ofthe CD and must not be used. Anythingthat can damage, warp, or fog plasticshould never be used to clean CDs.

l Insert discs one by one. If two discs areinserted at the same time, the systemmay not operate properly.

l The CD player ejects the CD if the CDis inserted upside down. Also dirtyand/or defective CDs may be ejected.

l Do not insert cleaning discs in the CDplayer.

l Do not insert any disc with a peel-offseal affixed to it.

l This unit may not be able to playcertain CD-R/CD-RWs made using acomputer or music CD recorder due todisc characteristics, scratches,smudges, dirt, etc., or due to dust orcondensation on the lens inside theunit.

l Storing CDs in the vehicle exposed todirect sunlight or high temperature maydamage the CD-R/CD-RWs, and makethem unplayable.

l CD-R/CD-RWexceeding 700 MBcannot be played.

l This unit may not be able to playcertain discs made using a computerdue to the application (writingsoftware) setting used. (For details,consult the store where the applicationwas purchased.)

l It is possible that certain text data, suchas titles, recorded on a CD-R/CD-RWmay not be displayed when musicaldata (CD-DA) is playing.

l The period from when a CD-RW isinserted to when it begins playing islonger than a normal CD or CD-R.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-17


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (288,1)

l Completely read the instruction manualand cautions for CD-R/CD-RWs.

l Do not use discs with cellophane tapeadhering, partially peeled off labels, oradhesive material exuding from theedges of the CD label. Also, do not usediscs with a commercially-availableCD-R label affixed. The disc may noteject resulting in a malfunction.

qOperating Tips for MP3

NOTESupply of this product only conveys a licensefor private, non-commercial use and does notconvey a license nor imply any right to use thisproduct in any commercial (i.e. revenue-generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial,satellite, cable and/or any other media),broadcasting/streaming via the Internet,intranets and/or other networks or in otherelectronic content distribution systems, such aspay-audio or audio-on-demand applications.An independent license for such use isrequired. For details, please visithttp://www.mp3licensing.com.

l This audio system handles MP3 filesthat have been recorded on CD-R/CD-RW/CD-ROMs. Discs that have beenrecorded using the following formatscan be played:l ISO 9660 level 1l ISO 9660 level 2l Joliet extended formatl Romeo extended format

l This unit handles MP3 filesconforming to the MP3 formatcontaining both header frames and dataframes.

l This unit can play multi-sessionrecorded discs that have up to 50sessions.

l This unit can play MP3s with samplingfrequencies of 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/24/32/44.1/48 kHz.

l This unit can play MP3 files that havebeen recorded in bit rates of 8 kbps to320 kbps. Nonetheless, to insureenjoyment of music with consistentsound quality, it is recommended to usediscs that have been recorded at a bitrate of 128 kbps or more.

l If a disc has both music data (CD-DA)and MP3 files, playback of the two filetypes differs depending on how thedisc was recorded.

l Packet written discs cannot be playedon this unit.

l This unit does not play CDs recordedusing MP3i (MP3 interactive), MP3PRO and RIFF MP3 formats.

5-18

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (289,1)

About folders and files

l The arrangement and playing order of arecorded disc containing MP3 files isas follows:

05

06

0102

03

04

1

5

4

2

3

Folder No.

Level1Level2Level3Level4

Playback may not occur in the above hierarchy depending on the audio unit.

: Track (File): Folder

l The folder order is automaticallyassigned and this order cannot beoptionally set.

l Any folder without an MP3 file will beignored. (It will be skipped and thefolder number will not be displayed.)

l MP3 files not conforming to the MP3format containing both header framesand data frames will be skipped andnot played.

l This unit will play MP3 files that haveup to eight levels. However, the morelevels a disc has, the longer it will taketo initially start playing. It isrecommended to record discs with twolevels or less.

l A single disc with up to 512 files canbe played and a single folder with up to255 files can be played.

l When naming an MP3 file, be sure toadd an MP3 file extension (.mp3) afterthe file name.

l The number of characters which can bedisplayed is restricted.

CAUTIONThis unit can only play MP3 files thathave an MP3 file extension (.mp3)attached. Do not attach an MP3 fileextension to any other type file as itcould cause noise to be emitted or amalfunction in the unit.

About ID3 Tag display

l This unit can only display ID3 Tagalbum, track and artist names that havebeen input using Ver.1.0/1.1/2.2/2.3/2.4formats. Any other data that may havebeen input cannot be displayed.

l This unit cannot display somecharacters. Characters which cannot bedisplayed are indicated by an asterisk( ).

Specialized glossary

MP3

Abbreviation for “MPEG Audio Layer 3”.A technical standard for audiocompression as decided by the ISO*1

MPEG working group. Use of MP3allows for audio data to be compressed toapproximately a tenth of the source datasize.*1 International Organization for

Standardization

Interior Features

Audio System

5-19


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (290,1)

ISO 9660

An international standard for logicalformatting of CD-ROM files and folders.It is divided into three separate levelsbased on differences in file namingprocedures, data configuration and othercharacteristics.

Multi-session

A session is the complete amount of datarecorded from the beginning to the end ofa single period of CD-ROM, CD-R/CD-RW data recording. Multi-session refers tothe existence of data from two or moresessions on a single disc.

Sampling

Refers to the process of encoding analogaudio data at regular intervals andconverting it to digital data. The samplingrate refers to the number of times asample is taken in one second and isexpressed in Hz units. Increasing thesampling rate improves the sound qualitybut also increases the data size.

Bit rate

Refers to the volume of data per second,expressed in bps (bits per second).Generally, the larger the number of thetransfer bit rate when compressing anMP3 file, the more information regardingmusical reproduction it carries, andtherefore the better the sound quality.

Packet writing

A general term for the method, similar tothat used for floppy discs or hard drives,of recording the required file in a singleincrement on a CD-R and similar.

ID3 Tag

ID3 tag is a method for storinginformation related to the music in anMP3 file. Information such as track, artistand album name can be stored. Thiscontent can be freely edited using ID3editing function software.

VBR

Abbreviation for Variable Bit Rate. WhileCBR (Constant Bit Rate) is generallyused, VBR varies the bit rate for audiocompression according to compressionconditions and this allows forcompression with preference given tosound quality.

qOperating Tips for WMA

WMA is short for Windows Media Audioand is the audio compression format usedby Microsoft.Audio data can be created and stored at ahigher compression ratio than MP3.* Microsoft and Windows Media are

registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation U.S. in the United Statesand other countries.

Playable WMA files are as follows:

Item Content

SpecificationWindows Media Audio Version7.0, 8.0, 9.0 (standard), 10.0(standard)

Sampling rate 32/44.1/48 kHz

Bit rate 32―320 kbps

5-20

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (291,1)

CAUTIONThis unit plays files with the (.wma)file extension as a WMA file. Do notuse the WMA file extension for filesother than WMA files. Otherwise, itcould result in noise or amalfunction.

l Track, artist and album nameinformation is recorded as data termed“WMA-Tag”, and this information isdisplayable.

l WMA files written under specificationsother than the indicated specificationmay not play normally or files or foldernames may not display correctly.

l The file extension may not be provideddepending on the computer operatingsystem, version, software, or settings.In this case, add the file extension “.wma” to the end of the file name, andthen write it to the disc.

qOperating Tips for AAC

AAC stands for Advanced Audio Coding,which is standardized voice compressionestablished by the ISO*1 working group(MPEG). Audio data can be created andstored at a higher compression ratio thanMP3.*1 International Organization for

Standardization

Playable AAC file specifications

This unit supports playback of AAC filesrecorded in CD-R and CD-RW.

Playable AAC files are as follows:

Item Content

Specification MPEG-4 AAC

Sampling rate8/11.025/12 kHz16/22.05/24 kHz32/44.1/48 kHz


CAUTIONThis unit plays files with the fileextension (m4a) as an AAC file. Donot use the AAC file extension for filesother than AAC files. Otherwise, itcould result in noise or amalfunction.

l Song, artist, and album nameinformation in the AAC file is recordedas data termed “iTunes, m4a, Meta-Data applicable”, and this informationis displayable.

l AAC files written under specificationsother than the indicated specificationmay not play normally or files or foldernames may not display correctly.

l The file extension may not be provideddepending on the computer operatingsystem, version, software, or settings.In this case, add the file extension “.m4a” to the end of the file name, thenwrite it to the disc.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-21


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (292,1)

qOperating Tips for USB device

This unit supports playback of MP3/WMA/AAC files recorded to USB device.

NOTEl Music data (MP3/WMA/AAC (.m4a)

format) stored in a USB mass-storage classcompliant device (such as USB flashmemory) can be played.

l Playback may not be possible depending onthe type and condition of the USB flashmemory even if the audio file complies withthe standard above.

l A copyright protected WMA/AAC filecannot be played in this unit.

l The order of the music data stored in thedevice may differ from the playback order.

l To prevent loss or damage of stored data,we recommend that you always back upyour data.

l If a device exceeds the maximum electriccurrent value of 500 mA, it may not operateor recharge when connected.

l Do not pull out the USB device while in theUSB mode (only pull it out while in FM/AMradio or CD mode).

l The device will not operate if the data ispassword protected.

Playable MP3 file specifications

Playable MP3 files are as follows:

Item Content

SpecificationMPEG1 AUDIO LAYER IIIMPEG2 AUDIO LAYER IIIMPEG2.5

Sampling rate44.1/48/32 kHz (MPEG1)22.05/24/16 kHz (MPEG2)11.025/12/8 kHz (MPEG2.5)

Bit rate32―320 kbps (MPEG1)8―160 kbps (MPEG2)8―160 kbps (MPEG2.5)

CAUTIONThis unit plays files with the fileextension (mp3) as an MP3 file. Donot use the MP3 file extension forfiles other than MP3 files. Otherwise,it could result in noise or amalfunction.

l MP3 files written under specificationsother than the indicated specificationmay not play normally or files or foldernames may not display correctly.

l The file extension may not be provideddepending on the computer operatingsystem, version, software, or settings.In this case, add the file extension “.mp3” to the end of the file name, andthen write it to the memory.

Playable WMA file specification

Playable WMA files are as follows:

Item Content

SpecificationWindows Media Audio Version7.0, 8.0, 9.0 (standard)

Sampling rate8/11.025/12 kHz (LOW)16/22.05 kHz (MID)44.1/48/32 kHz (HI)


CAUTIONThis unit plays files with the fileextension (wma) as a WMA file. Donot use the WMA file extension forfiles other than WMA files.Otherwise, it could result in noise ora malfunction.

l WMA files written under specificationsother than the indicated specificationmay not play normally or files or foldernames may not display correctly.

5-22

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (293,1)

l The file extension may not be provideddepending on the computer operatingsystem, version, software, or settings.In this case, add the file extension “.wma” to the end of the file name, andthen write it to the memory.

Playable AAC file specification

Playable AAC files are as follows:

Item Content

Specification MPEG4 AAC-LC

Sampling rate8/11.025/12 kHz16/22.05/24 kHz32/44.1/48 kHz


CAUTIONThis unit plays files with the fileextension (.aac*1/.m4a) as an AACfile. Do not use the AAC file extensionfor files other than AAC files.Otherwise, it could result in noise ora malfunction.*1 Type B

Refer to Audio Set (Type B) onpage 5-35.

l AAC files written under specificationsother than the indicated specificationmay not play normally or files or foldernames may not display correctly.

l The file extension may not be provideddepending on the computer operatingsystem, version, software, or settings.In this case, add the file extension “.aac*1” or “.m4a” to the end of the filename, and then write it to the memory.*1 Type B

Refer to Audio Set (Type B) onpage 5-35.

qOperating Tips for iPod

This unit supports playback of music filesrecorded to an iPod.

l iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc.,registered in the U.S. and othercountries.

l iPod classic is a trademark of AppleInc., registered in the U.S. and othercountries.

l iPod nano is a trademark of Apple Inc.,registered in the U.S. and othercountries.

l iPod touch is a trademark of AppleInc., registered in the U.S. and othercountries.

l iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc.,registered in the U.S. and othercountries.

Connectable iPods are as follows:

(Type A)

l iPod: 5Gl iPod classicl iPod nano: 1/2/3/4/5Gl iPod touch*1: 1/2Gl iPhone*1: 3G/3GS*1 Only iPod function

(Type B)

l iPod classicl iPod nano: 4/5/6Gl iPod touch*1: 2/3/4Gl iPhone*1: 3GS/4/4S*1 Only iPod function

Interior Features

Audio System

5-23


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (294,1)

CAUTIONØ Remove the iPod when it is not in

use. Because the iPod is notdesigned to withstand excessivechanges in temperature inside thecabin, it could be damaged or thebattery may deteriorate due to theexcessive temperature or humidityinside the cabin if it is left in thevehicle.

Ø If data in the iPod is lost while it isconnected to the unit, Mazdacannot guarantee recovery of anylost data.

Ø If the iPod battery is deteriorated,the iPod may not recharge andplayback may not be possiblewhen it is connected to the unit.Replace the iPod batteryimmediately.

Ø Be careful not to pinch the iPodconnecting cable when opening/closing the center console.

Ø For the details on using the iPod,refer to the iPod instructionmanual.

Ø When connecting the iPod to aUSB port, all commands are madefrom the audio unit. iPod control isnot possible.

NOTEThe audio unit cannot display images orvideos stored in an iPod.

5-24

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (295,1)

Audio Set (Type A)

Power/Volume/Sound Controls ......................................................................... page 5-26Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player .......................................................... page 5-30How to use auxiliary jack/USB port .................................................................. page 5-33Error Indications ................................................................................................ page 5-33

Interior Features

Audio System

5-25


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (296,1)

qPower/Volume/Sound Controls

Audio control dialPower/Volume dial

Power ON/OFF

Switch the ignition to ACC or ON. Pressthe power/volume dial to turn the audiosystem on. Press the power/volume dialagain to turn the audio system off.

Volume adjustment

To adjust the volume, turn the power/volume dial. Turn the power/volume dialto the right to increase volume, to the leftto decrease it.

Audio sound adjustment

1. Press the audio control dial to select thefunction. The selected function will beindicated.

2. Turn the audio control dial to adjust theselected functions as follows:

IndicationSetting value

Turn Left Turn Right

(Automatic volumeadjustment)

Leveldecrease

Levelincrease

(Low pitch sound)

Decreasebass

Increasebass

(Treble sound)

Decreasetreble

Increasetreble

(Front/back volumebalance)

Shift thesound to the

front


rear

(Left/right volumebalance)


left


right

(Audio operation sound)Off On

5-26

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (297,1)

NOTEAbout 5 seconds after selecting any mode, thevolume function will be automatically selected.To reset bass, treble, fade, and balance, pressthe audio control dial for 2 seconds. The unitwill beep and “CLEAR” will be displayed.

Automatic Level Control (ALC)

The automatic level control (ALC)changes the audio volume automaticallyaccording to the vehicle speed. The fasterthe vehicle speed, the higher the volumeincreases. ALC has ALC OFF and ALCLEVEL 1 to 7 modes. At ALC LEVEL 7,the amount that the volume can increase isat the maximum. Select the modeaccording to the driving conditions.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-27


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (298,1)

qOperating the Radio

Seek tuning buttons

Band selector buttons

Scan button

Auto memory button

Manual tuning/Audio control dial

Channel preset buttons

Radio ON

Press a band selector button ( ) toturn the radio on.

Band selection

Successively pressing the band selectorbutton ( ) switches the bands asfollows: FM1→FM2→AM.

The selected mode will be indicated. IfFM stereo is being received, “ST” will bedisplayed.

NOTEIf the FM broadcast signal becomes weak,reception automatically changes fromSTEREO to MONO for reduced noise, and the“ST” indicator will go out.

Tuning

The radio has the following tuningmethods: Manual, Seek, Scan, Presetchannel, and Auto memory tuning. Theeasiest way to tune stations is to set themon preset channels.

NOTEIf the power supply is interrupted (fuse blowsor the battery is disconnected), the presetchannels will be erased.

Manual tuning

Turning the manual tuning dial willchange the frequency higher or lower.

Seek tuning

Pressing the seek tuning button ( , )will cause the tuner to seek a higher orlower frequency automatically.

NOTEIf you continue to press and hold the seektuning button ( , ), the frequency willcontinue changing without stopping.

Scan tuning

Press the scan button ( ) toautomatically sample strong stations.Scanning stops at each station for about 5seconds. To hold a station, press the scanbutton ( ) again during this interval.

Preset channel tuning

The 6 preset channels can be used to store6 AM and 12 FM stations.

1. To set a channel first select AM, FM1,or FM2. Tune to the desired station.

5-28

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (299,1)

2. Depress a channel preset button forabout 2 seconds until a beep is heard.The preset channel number or stationfrequency will be displayed. Thestation is now held in the memory.

3. Repeat this operation for the otherstations and bands you want to store.To tune one in the memory, select AM,FM1, or FM2 and then press itschannel preset button. The stationfrequency or the channel number willbe displayed.

Auto memory tuning

This is especially useful when driving inan area where the local stations are notknown.

Press and hold the auto memory button( ) for about 2 seconds until a beepis heard; the system will automaticallyscan and temporarily store up to 6 stationswith the strongest frequencies in eachselected band in that area.

After scanning is completed, the stationwith the strongest frequency will be tunedand its frequency displayed. Press andrelease the auto memory button ( )to recall stations from the auto-storedstations. One stored station will beselected each time; its frequency andchannel number will be displayed.

NOTEIf no stations can be tuned after scanningoperations, “A” will be displayed.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-29


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (300,1)

qOperating the Compact Disc (CD) Player

Track up/Fast-forward button

Load button

Track down/Reverse button

Folder up button

Folder down button

Text buttonScan button

CD play button

CD eject buttonRepeat buttonRandom button

CD slot

File dial

Type Playable data

Music/MP3/WMA/AAC CD player

l Music data (CD-DA)l MP3/WMA/AAC file

NOTEIf a disc has both music data (CD-DA) andMP3/WMA/AAC files, playback of the two orthree file types differs depending on how thedisc was recorded.

Inserting the CD

Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.The auto-loading mechanism will set theCD and begin play.

NOTEThere will be a short lapse before play beginswhile the player reads the digital signals onthe CD.

Ejecting the CD

Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject theCD.

Playback

Press the CD play button ( ) to startplay when a CD is in the unit. If a CD isnot in the unit when the CD play button( ) is pressed, “NO DISC” will flash onand off.

NOTEWhen the load button ( ) is pressed, theCD will load and play.

Fast-forward/Reverse

Press and hold the fast-forward button( ) to advance through a track at highspeed. Press and hold the reverse button( ) to reverse through a track at highspeed.

Track search

Press the track up button ( ) or turn thefile dial clockwise once to skip forward tothe beginning of the next track.Press the track down button ( ) or turnthe file dial counterclockwise within a fewseconds after playback begins to trackdown to the beginning of the previoustrack.Press the track down button ( ) or turnthe file dial counterclockwise after a fewseconds have elapsed to start playbackfrom the beginning of the current track.

5-30

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (301,1)

Folder search (during MP3/WMA/AACCD playback)

To change to the previous folder, press thefolder down button ( ), or press thefolder up button ( ) to advance to thenext folder.

Music scan

During music CD playback

This function scans the titles on a CD andplays 10 seconds of each song to aid youin finding a song you want to listen to.Press the scan button ( ) duringplayback to start the scan play operation(the track number will flash). Press thescan button ( ) again to cancel scanplayback.

During MP3/WMA/AAC CD playback

This function scans the titles in a foldercurrently being played and plays 10seconds of each song to aid you in findinga song you want to listen to. Press thescan button ( ) during playback tostart the scan play operation (the tracknumber will flash).Press the scan button ( ) again tocancel scan playback.

NOTEIf the unit is left in scan, normal playback willresume where scan was selected.

Repeat playback


Press the repeat button (1) duringplayback to repeat the playback of thecurrent song. “TRACK RPT” is displayedduring playback.Press the repeat button (1) whiledisplaying the “TRACK RPT” to cancel.


(Track repeat)Press the repeat button (1) duringplayback to repeat the playback of thecurrent song. “TRACK RPT” is displayedduring playback.Press the repeat button (1) two timeswhile displaying the “TRACK RPT” tocancel.

(Folder repeat)Press the repeat button (1) two timesduring playback to repeat the playback ofthe current song in the folder. “FOLDERRPT” is displayed during playback.Press the repeat button (1) whiledisplaying “FOLDER RPT” to cancel.

Random playback


Press the random button (2) duringplayback to play the tracks in the CDrandomly. “DISC RDM” is displayedduring playback.Press the random button (2) whiledisplaying “DISC RDM” to cancel.


(Folder random)Press the random button (2) duringplayback to play the tracks in the folderrandomly. “FOLDER RDM” is displayedduring playback.Press the random button (2) two timeswhile displaying “FOLDER RDM” tocancel.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-31


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (302,1)

(CD random)Press the random button (2) two timesduring playback to play the songs on theCD randomly. “DISC RDM” is displayedduring playback.Press the random button (2) whiledisplaying “DISC RDM” to cancel.

Switching the display

For files with a file name and otherinformation that have been input, thedisplay switches between display of thefile name and other information each timethe text button ( ) is pressed duringplayback.

Music CD

Track name

Album name

Artist name

Track number/Elapsed time

MP3/WMA/AAC CD

File name

Folder name

Album name

Song name

Artist name

Folder number/File number

File number/Elapsed time

NOTEl The information viewable in the display is

only CD information (such as artist name,song title) which has been recorded to theCD.

l This unit cannot display some characters.Characters which cannot be displayed areindicated by an asterisk ( ).

Display scroll

Only 9 characters (File name) or 13characters (Except file name) can bedisplayed at one time. To display the restof the characters of a long title, press andhold the text button ( ). The displayscrolls the next 13 characters. Press andhold the text button ( ) again afterthe last 13 characters have been displayedto return to the beginning of the title.

5-32

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (303,1)

NOTEThe number of characters which can bedisplayed is restricted.

Message display

If “CHECK CD” is displayed, it meansthat there is some CD malfunction. Checkthe CD for damage, dirt, or smudges, andthen properly reinsert. If the messageappears again, take the unit to anAuthorized Mazda Dealer for service.

qHow to use Auxiliary jack/USB port

Audio can be heard from the vehicle'sspeakers by connecting a commercially-available portable audio unit to theauxiliary jack.Use a commercially-available, non-impedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable.Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer fordetails.In addition, audio can be played from thevehicle audio device by connecting a USBdevice or an iPod to the USB port.Refer to AUX/USB/iPod mode on page5-60.

qError Indications

If you see an error indication on thedisplay, find the cause in the chart. If youcannot clear the error indication, take thevehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Indication Cause Solution

CHECK CD

CD isinsertedupsidedown

Insert the CD properly. Ifthe error indicationcontinues to display,consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

CD isdefective

Insert another CDproperly. If the errorindication continues todisplay, consult anAuthorized MazdaDealer.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-33


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (304,1)

MEMO

5-34


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (305,1)

Audio Set (Type B)

CAUTIONDo not press the screen strongly or press it with a sharp-pointed object. Otherwise,the screen could be damaged.

Power/Volume/Display/Sound Controls ............................................................ page 5-36Operating the Radio ........................................................................................... page 5-40Operating the Satellite Radio ............................................................................. page 5-44Operating the Compact Disc (CD) Player .......................................................... page 5-52How to use Auxiliary jack/USB port ................................................................. page 5-55Error Indications ................................................................................................ page 5-55Setup .................................................................................................................. page 5-55

Interior Features

Audio System

5-35


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (306,1)

qPower/Volume/Display/Sound Controls

Setup button

Audio control dial

Audio button

Phone button

Navigation button

Power/Volume dial

Power ON/OFF

Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.Press the power/volume dial to turn theaudio system on. Press the power/volumedial again to turn the audio system off.

Volume adjustment

To adjust the volume, turn the power/volume dial.Turn the power/volume dial to the right toincrease volume, to the left to decrease it.

Display setting

Press the setup button ( ) to displaythe display setting screen.Touch the on-screen tab to selectthe item you would like to change.

Brightness adjustment

: Increase brightness: Decrease brightness

Contrast adjustment

: Higher contrast: Lower contrast

Tint adjustment*1

: Green tint enhancement color: Red tint enhancement color

*1 Adjustment can be performed onlywhile in the rear view camera mode.

Color adjustment*1

: To deepen a color: To fade a color

*1 Adjustment can be performed onlywhile in the rear view camera mode.

Daytime/nighttime screen setting*1

The daytime or nighttime screen can beselected even if the headlights areilluminated or turned off (when brightscreen is required at night or dark screenis required at noon).

: Daytime screen setting: Nighttime screen setting: Switches screen automatically

according to headlight illuminationcondition*1 The setting cannot be made while in

rear view camera mode.

Display OFF

The display can be turned off. Touch theon-screen button to turn the

display off.

5-36

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (307,1)

The display can be turned back on asfollows:l Press the audio button ( ) todisplay the audio screen.

l Press the navigation button ( ) todisplay the navigation screen.

l Press the phone button ( ) todisplay the Bluetooth® dial screen.

l Press the setup button ( ) todisplay the setup dial setting screen.

l Press the audio control dial to displaythe setup sound setting screen.

l Shift to the R position to change to therear view camera mode.Shift to a position other than R toreturn to the display off condition.

NOTEThe screen can also be turned off using voicerecognition.Refer to Component Parts on page 5-80.

Display setting reset

All of the screen setting values can bereset to their initial settings.



Audio sound adjustment

Press the audio control dial or touch theon-screen button to display the

sound setting screen.

Indication Setting value

Bass(Low pitch sound)

: Low pitchenhancement

: Low pitchreduction

Treble(Treble sound)

: Trebleenhancement

: Treble reduction

Balance(Left/right volumebalance)

: Right sidevolume reduction

: Left sidevolume reduction

Fader(Front/back volumebalance)

: Front speakervolume reduction

: Rear speakervolume reduction

Button Beep(Audio operation sound)

: on/off*1

Auto Level Control*2


: Level up: Level down

AudioPilot*3


: on/off

Centerpoint*3

(Automatic surroundlevel adjustment)

: on/off

*1 Some functions do not turn off*2 Standard audio*3 Bose® Sound System

Automatic Level Control (ALC)The automatic level control is a featurethat automatically adjusts audio volumeand sound quality according to the vehiclespeed. The volume increases inaccordance with the increase in vehiclespeed, and decreases as vehicle speeddecreases.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-37


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (308,1)

AudioPilot® 2*4

AudioPilot® 2 automatically adjusts audiovolume and sound quality in accordancewith the level of noise entering the vehicleinterior while driving. When AudioPilot®

2 is turned on, the system automaticallycalculates the conditions for optimumhearing of sound which may be difficultto hear depending on exterior noise.AudioPilot® 2 can be set on or off.*4 AudioPilot® 2 is a registered

trademark of Bose Corporation.

Centerpoint® 2*5

Centerpoint® 2 offers you the experienceof 5.1-channel surround sound in yourvehicle even with your conventional 2-channel stereo audio. Centerpoint® 2 canbe set on or off.*5 Centerpoint® 2 is a registered

trademark of Bose Corporation.

NOTECenterpoint® 2 operates optimally with a 2-channel stereo audio. Audio files encoded withhigh compression can be played, however, theymay result in poor sound quality.

Sound setting reset

The settings for bass, treble, balance, andfade can be returned to their initialsettings.



5-38

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (309,1)

MEMO

5-39


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (310,1)

qOperating the Radio

Seek tuning buttons

Manual tuning dial

Audio button

Radio ON

(Connected Satellite Radio)Press the audio button ( ) and touchthe on-screen tab.(Unconnected Satellite Radio)Press the audio button ( ) and touchthe or on-screen tab.

Band selection

(Connected Satellite Radio)Touch the on-screen tab to switchthe band as follows:FM1→FM2→AM

NOTEl is displayed when FM1 is selected,

is displayed when FM2 isselected, and is displayed when AMis selected.

l If the FM broadcast signal becomes weak,reception automatically changes fromSTEREO to MONO for reduced noise, andthe “STEREO” indicator will no longerdisplay.

(Unconnected Satellite Radio)Touch the on-screen tab to selectAM. Touch the on-screen tab toselect FM1 and FM2.

NOTEl When FM1 is selected, is displayed.

When FM2 is selected, is displayed.l If the FM broadcast signal becomes weak,

reception automatically changes fromSTEREO to MONO for reduced noise, andthe “STEREO” indicator will no longerdisplay.

Tuning

The radio has the following tuningmethods: Manual, Seek, Scan, Presetchannel, and Auto memory tuning. Theeasiest way to tune stations is to set themon preset channels.

NOTEIf the power supply is interrupted (fuse blowsor the battery is disconnected), the presetchannels will be erased.

Manual tuning

Turning the manual tuning dial willchange the frequency higher or lower.

NOTEWhen an broadcast is beingreceived, a receivable multicast channel is alsoreceived.

5-40

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (311,1)

Seek tuning

Pressing the seek tuning button ( , )will cause the tuner to seek a higher orlower frequency automatically.

NOTEl If you continue to press and hold the seek

tuning button ( , ) the frequency willcontinue changing without stopping.

l When an broadcast is beingreceived, a receivable multicast channel isalso received.

Scan tuning

You can search for receivable radiostations by touching the on-screenbutton.Scanning stops at each station for aboutfive seconds.Touch the on-screen button one timeduring reception to continue receiving abroadcasting station.

Preset channel tuning

The six preset channels can be used tostore six AM and twelve FM stations.

1. To set a channel, first select AM, FM1,or FM2. Tune to the desired station.

2. Press and hold any of the preset on-screen buttons. The receptionfrequency is programmed anddisplayed on the preset button.

3. Repeat this operation for the otherstations and bands you want to store.When receiving a programmedfrequency, select AM, FM1, or FM2and touch the preset on-screen button.

NOTEThe programmed frequency is displayed on thepreset button.

Auto memory tuning

This is especially useful when driving inan area where the local stations areunknown. Additional AM/FM stationscan be stored without disturbing thepreviously set channels.

1. Touch the on-screen button. Theauto memory preset list is displayedand the previously tuned frequency isreceived.

2. Touch the on-screen button todisplay the frequencies of up to tenradio stations on the auto memorypreset list.

3. Touch the desired frequency.

NOTETouch the on-screen button duringauto memory tuning to return to the AM/FMmain screen.

Radio Broadcast Data System (RBDS)

Radio text information display

A maximum of 64 characters of radio textinformation sent from a broadcastingstation is displayed in the audio display.

NOTERadio text information is a function of FMradio. Text information is not displayed in thefollowing:l During receptionl Not an RBDS broadcastl During HD receptionl RBDS broadcast, but radio text is not

transmitted from the radio station

Interior Features

Audio System

5-41


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (312,1)

Genre Seek

Some FM stations transmit Genre codes(Program type like a Rock, News, and soon). This code enables alternative stationstransmitting the same Genre code to befound quickly. To select from the genrelist, touch the on-screen buttonwhile in the FM mode and the desiredGenre Seek.

(To scan for Genre Seek:)

1. Touch the genre type which you wantto select.

2. Touch the , on-screenbutton.

Ex.)89.3 is currently being received. WithRock selected as the Genre, the radiostations broadcasting Rock are at thefollowing frequencies.98.3*1, 98.7, 104.3*1, 107.1*1 Radio stations with good receptionThe frequency changes as follows eachtime the Genre Seek on-screen button ispressed.89.3→98.3→104.3→98.3

NOTEl Only one Genre can be selected.l Touch the on-screen button to

return to the FM1 or FM2 main screen.l It may not be possible to receive any station

even if the Genre Seek function is used.l If a program in the selected genre is not

broadcast to a region, reception is notpossible even if the Genre Seek function isused.

l The Genre Seek function searches for genrecode (program type) which FM analogbroadcasts transmit. specialtyprograms (HD2-HD8) cannot be searchedbecause they are not FM analogbroadcasts.

l If radio stations which are selected byscanning using the Genre Seek function are

broadcasting stations, they arechanged from analog broadcasts to

broadcasts after a few secondsif the reception conditions are good. Thegenre is displayed after the switch,however, the genre for FM analogbroadcasts may differ.

HD Radio

What is HD Radio™ Technology andhow does it work?

HD Radio™ Technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yourradio product has a special receiver whichallows it to receive digital broadcasts(where available) in addition to the analogbroadcasts it already receives. Digitalbroadcasts have better sound quality thananalog broadcasts as digital broadcastsprovide free, crystal clear audio. For moreinformation, and a guide to available radiostations and programming, please visitwww.hdradio.com.

5-42

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (313,1)

Benefits of HD Radio™ Technology

(Information)The song title, artist name and genre willappear on the screen when available bythe radio station.(Multicast)On the FM radio frequency most digitalstations have “multiple” or supplementalprograms on each FM station.

Listening to HD Radio™ Technology

If turns on by selecting a radiostation which is anbroadcasting station, the analog broadcastis switched to an broadcastautomatically after a few seconds and thenreceived. For FM, , and for AM,

is displayed, and the illuminatesin orange.If the HD Radio broadcast is stopped andchanged to an analog broadcast, pressdown to turn off .

Multicast channel selection (FM)

Press on-screen button toswitch to the multi-cast channel for thedisplayed number.The number of multi-cast channels whichcan be received differs depending on theradio station.

NOTEl If an analog broadcast is received once and

is received while HD1 isselected, the audio unit switches to the

station automatically.l When the button is

illuminated, there could be a noticeabledifference in sound quality and volumewhen a change from digital to analogsignals occurs. If the sound quality andvolume become noticeably diminished orcut off, touch the HD button to turn off

( button is notilluminated).

l Once an analog broadcast is received whenHD1 is selected from the preset channels, itis switched to automatically. Ifthe radio reception conditions are poor, or

is off, switching tobroadcasts is not possible.

l When an HD specialty channel (HD2 toHD8) is selected from the preset channels,“No HD signal” is displayed and no audiois output until is received. Ifthe radio reception conditions are poor,“No HD signal” continues to be displayed.

l If the is not illuminated or does notilluminate in orange, information such assong titles of the station arereceived, however, the audio output isanalog. If information can no longer bereceived and the non-reception conditioncontinues, and on-screen buttons disappear.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-43


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (314,1)

qOperating the Satellite Radioí

Seek tuning buttons

Manual tuning dial

Audio button

What is satellite radio?

With over 130 channels, SIRIUS SatelliteRadio brings you more of what you love.Get channels and channels of commercial-free music, plus sports, news, talk,entertainment and more.Commercial-free music from nearlyevery genre―rock to pop, hip-hop tocountry, jazz, classical and more. Plus liveperformances and artist-dedicatedchannels.Live sports Play-by-Play & Expert Talk―every NFL game, every NASCAR®

race, 24/7 sports talk, college sports andmore.Exclusive entertainment, comedy andtalk ―The biggest names, compellingtalk, hilarious comedy.World-class news plus local traffic andweather.Sign up for SIRIUS Satellite Radio today!

NOTEExclusive to Sirius. If your vehicle is equippedwith Sirius, your new Mazda includes a freeintroductory subscription with a limited termtrial offer. Call 888-539-7474 to activate. Formore information, visit www.siriusxm.com.Satellite radio is only available in regionsproviding satellite radio service (some areas ofthe United States and Canada). ContactAuthorized Mazda Dealer for details.

How to Activate Satellite Radio

You must call SIRIUS to activate yourservice. Activation is free and takes only afew minutes.SIRIUS service uses an ID code toidentify your radio. This code is needed toactivate SIRIUS service, and report anyproblems.

Please have the following informationready:l SIRIUS ID (12-digit electronic serialno, or ESN*1)

l Valid credit card information (may notbe required at initial sign-up)

*1 ESN: Electronic Serial Number

5-44

Interior Features

íSome models.

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (315,1)

Be sure you are parked outside with aclear view of open sky, you will beinstructed to turn on your radio (inSIRIUS mode and tuned to channel 184).Activation typically takes only 2―5minutes.

Displaying the SIRIUS ID (ESN)

Turn the manual tuning dial and selectchannel 0 to display the twelve-digitElectronic Serial Number (ESN) for theSIRIUS tuner.

SIRIUS operation

All operations of the satellite radio areconducted by means of the audio unit.

SIRIUS radio mode selection

Touch the on-screen tab on theaudio screen to receive the previouslyreceived SIRIUS channel.Every time the on-screen tab istouched, the bank changes in the ordershown below.

SIRIUS1 SIRIUS2 SIRIUS3

NOTEl SIRIUS1, SIRIUS2 and SIRIUS3: six

stations can be stored in each bank forconvenient access to your favorite stations.

l is displayed when SIRIUS1 isselected, is displayed whenSIRIUS2 is selected, and isdisplayed when SIRIUS3 is selected.

Operation in the initial state

It may take some time to start up theequipment when it is in the initial state,when there is a change in the user'ssubscription condition, when the firmwareis updated or when the SIRIUS channelmap is changed.“Updating Channels XXX %” isdisplayed when the SIRIUS channel mapis changed.If the user contract content is changed,“Subscription Updated” is displayed.When the firmware is updated, the“Updating Receiver” is displayed.Updating could take as long as a fewminutes depending on the geographicalarea. When the unit is in an initializedstate, channel 184 is displayed after thedisplay indicates “Updating Receiver”.

NOTEDo not perform the following operation while“Updating Channels XXX %”, “UpdatingReceiver” is displayed. Otherwise, theupdating procedure will be canceled.l Turning off the audio powerl Switching to other modesl Switching the ignition off

When the SIRIUS mode is switched toanother mode, or when the power isturned off, the present channel which isbeing received is stored as the lastchannel.

Channel up

Turn the manual tuning dial to the right orpress the seek up button ( ).

Channel down

Turn the manual tuning dial to the left orpress the seek down button ( ).

Interior Features

Audio System

5-45


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (316,1)

NOTEThe channel is continuously switched to thenext or previous channel while the seek tuningbutton ( , ) is continuously pressed.

Unsubscribed channel

When a channel which has been presetbecomes unsubscribed or the currentchannel being listened to becomesunsubscribed, the following is displayed:“Call 888-539-SIRIUS”“to subscribe”

NOTEWhen the subscription contract is canceled, allof the channels including channel 184 appearas unsubscribed.

Preset channel programming

1. Select the desired channel to beprogrammed.

2. Long-press any of the preset on-screenbuttons.

NOTESix stations can be stored in each bank,SIRIUS1, SIRIUS2 and SIRIUS3 forconvenient access to your favorite stations.

Preset channel call-up

Touch the preset on-screen button for thechannel which you want to select.

NOTEIn the initial setting, all channels are preset to184.

Selection from channel list

Receivable channels can be displayed onthe channel list screen. You can easilyselect the channel you want to listen fromthe list. Each category can be alsodisplayed.


2. Touch the channel you want to listenfrom the list.

NOTECurrently available channels (includingparental locked channels) are all displayed inthe list.

(Select from category list)

1. Touch the on-screenbutton on the channel list screen.

2. Touch the category name which youwant to select from the list.

NOTEA category can be set only when a channelwhich belongs to a category is being received.

Scan tuning

Touch the on-screen button toautomatically sample stations. Scanningstops at each station for about fiveseconds.To hold a station, touch the on-screen button again during this interval.

NOTEUnsubscribed channels, invalid channels,parental lock channels and channel 0 are notsubject to the scan, therefore these channelswill skip automatically.

Channel number, channel name,category name, artist name, song titlesand information display

The information regarding the channelwhich is currently being received isdisplayed.

NOTEIf channels have not been subscribed to orparental locked, the channel name, categoryname, artist name, song title and informationis not displayed.

5-46

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (317,1)

Display scroll

If a whole title cannot be displayed at onetime, touch the on-screen button onthe right side of the title. When the lastcharacter is displayed, touch the on-screen button to display the first characterof the title.

NOTEThe on-screen button is displayed only if awhole title cannot be displayed at one time.

Instant replay

This function allows you to rewind andreplay the program that you werepreviously or are currently listening to.When the on-screen button istouched, playback starts from thebeginning of the current program.When the on-screen button istouched twice, playback starts from thebeginning of the previous program.Touch and hold the on-screenbutton to reverse the program while thebutton is being pressed.When the on-screen button istouched, playback starts from thebeginning of the next program.When the on-screen button istouched while the last program is beingplayed, the instant replay mode iscanceled.Touch and hold the on-screenbutton to fast-forward the program whilethe button is being pressed.When touching and holding the buttonuntil the end of the program, the instantreplay mode is canceled.

Instant replay (PAUSE)

If the on-screen button is touched,instant replay mode is turned on in apaused condition (PAUSE).

Touch the on-screen button againto resume playback from the point atwhich it was paused.

Parental lock

Parental lock, parental unlock, parentallock code change, and parental lock codereset can be set.

NOTEl Touch the on-screen button during

all the settings to return to the previousdisplay.

l Touch the on-screen button during thecode and master code input to delete aninput number.

l If only a four-digit code or master code isinput, “Done” can be selected.

l If the registered code has been forgotten,reset the code in “Initialize Parental Code”to [0000].

Parental lock

If a channel is locked, the channel ismuted.

1. Turn the manual tuning dial to selectthe desired channel.

2. Touch the on-screen button todisplay the settings screen.

3. Touch the on-screenbutton to display the parental locksettings screen.

4. “Input Parental Code” is displayed, andinput of the registered code is possible.To enter a number, use the numericalkeypad.

5. After inputting the four digits, touchthe on-screen button to confirmthe four digits.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-47


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (318,1)

6. If the four digits match the registeredcode, “Channel XXX locked” appearsand mute is turned on. If they do notmatch the registered code, “Wrongcode” appears and then the displayreturns to “Input Parental Code”.

Parental unlock

Channels locked using the parental lockfunction can be unlocked.

1. Select a channel to be unlocked byturning the manual tuning dial.


3. Touch the on-screenbutton to display the parental unlocksettings screen.

4. “Input Parental Code” is displayed, andinput of the registered code is possible.To enter a number, use the numericalkeypad.


6. If the four digits match the registeredcode, “Channel XXX unlocked”appears and mute is canceled. If theydo not match the registered code,“Wrong code” appears and then thedisplay returns to “Input ParentalCode”.

Parental-lock code change

When changing the code, the new code isinput after the previous one is input first.


2. Touch the on-screen button to display the codechange screen.

3. “Enter Current Code” is displayed, andinput of the registered code is possible.To enter a number, use the numericalkeypad.


5. If the four digits match the registeredcode, “Enter New Code” is displayed.If they do not match the registeredcode, “Wrong code” appears and thenthe display returns to “Enter CurrentCode”. To enter a number, use thenumerical keypad.


7. “Code changed” appears to indicatethat the new code input has beencompleted.

8. The display returns to its normaldisplay.

NOTEChannels locked before changing the coderemain after changing the code. To unlock achannel, input the changed code.

Parental-lock code reset

If the registered code has been forgotten,reset the code to the default [0000] code.


2. Touch the on-screen button to display the code initialscreen.

3. “Enter Master Code” is displayed, andinput of the registered code is possible.To enter a number, use the numericalkeypad.

5-48

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (319,1)

NOTEMaster code:The Master Code is used to initialize or re-initialize the code in the event that the code isnot set to [0000] and/or the personalized codeis not known. The initialization process resetsthe code to [0000]. The master code canpotentially defeat the intent of the security ofthe parental lock if it is located by persons notauthorized by the owner to access certainchannels.SIRIUS Satellite Radio Master Code: [0913]


5. If the four digits match the mastercode, “Code initialized” appears. Ifthey do not match the master code,“Wrong code” appears and the displayreturns to “Enter Master Code”.

6. The code returns to the default [0000]code.

Seek alert

The song title and artist name for the songcurrently being listened to, and teamnames at the sports game currently beinglistened to can be recorded as favorites.The user is notified when a programbegins which has favorites-relatedinformation recorded.

Selection from seek alert program list

Select the station you want to listen tofrom the list to receive the program.Touch the on-screen button toreturn to the receiving screen.

Storing songs, artists, and sports teamnames

NOTEl A maximum of 10 songs, artists, and sports

team names each can be stored.l If the song title, artist name, sports team

name cannot be displayed, “No availableitems for this program” is displayed.

l Even if the song title, and artist name aredisplayed in the main screen, it may not bepossible to record information for oldsongs.

l If a song name is stored, the song seekfunction is turned on.

l If an artist name is stored, the artist seekfunction is turned on.

l If a sports team name is stored, the gamealert function is turned on.

1. Touch the on-screen button todisplay the current song and artistnames currently being received. Thesports team name is displayed whilethe sports program is being received.

2. Select the item you want to store fromsong title, artist name and sports teamname.

3. “XXXXX (song, artist, sports teamname) stored” is displayed.

NOTEIf there is not enough available storage space,“Song Memory Full” or “Artist Memory Full”or “Team Memory Full” and “Delete one tostore new one” are displayed. Delete from thelist.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-49


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (320,1)

Seek alert setting

On or off switching to song seek, artistseek, or game alert function, and deletionof stored information can be performed.Touch the on-screen button and the

on-screen button. Touch the buttonyou want to change from , , or

.(On or off switching)Touch the , , and

on-screen button.(Deletion)

1. Select song title, artist name, or sportsteam name that you want to delete fromthe list.

2. Touch the on-screen button todisplay “XXXXX (song, artist, sportsteam name) deleted”.

5-50

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (321,1)

MEMO

5-51


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (322,1)

qOperating the Compact Disc (CD) Player

CD slot

Audio button

CD eject button

Track up/Fast-forward buttonTrack down/Reverse buttonFile dial

Type Playable data

Music/MP3/WMA/AAC CD player

l Music data (CD-DA)l MP3/WMA/AAC file

NOTEIf a disc has both music data (CD-DA) andMP3/WMA/AAC files, playback of the two orthree file types differs depending on how thedisc was recorded.

Inserting the CD

Insert the CD into the slot, label-side up.The auto-loading mechanism will set theCD and begin play.

NOTEThere will be a short lapse before play beginswhile the player reads the digital signals onthe CD.

Ejecting the CD

Press the CD eject button ( ) to eject theCD.

Playback

Press the audio button ( ) oron-screen tab with a CD inserted.

Pause

To pause playback, touch the on-screen button.Touch the on-screen button duringa pause to cancel it.


Operations using audio panel

Press and hold the fast-forward button( ) to advance through a track at highspeed.Press and hold the reverse button ( ) toreverse through a track at high speed.

Operations on screen

Touch and hold the on-screenbutton to advance through a track at highspeed.Touch and hold the on-screenbutton to reverse through a track at highspeed.

5-52

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (323,1)

Track search




Touch the on-screen button once toskip forward to the beginning of the nexttrack.Touch the on-screen button withina few seconds after playback begins totrack down to the beginning of theprevious track.Touch the on-screen button after afew seconds have elapsed to startplayback from the beginning of thecurrent track.

Displaying file list

The desired file list in the CD can beviewed.


Touch the on-screen button to displaythe track list in the CD.


(Viewing file list in desired folder)

1. Touch the on-screen button todisplay the folder list in the CD.

2. Touch the folder which you want toselect.

(Viewing file list of current folder)Touch the on-screen button.

Selecting file/track

Select the file/track you want to play.


1. Touch the on-screen button todisplay the track list in the CD.

2. Touch the track you want to play.


NOTEPress the on-screen button on the file listscreen to display the list of folders.

(Selection from all folders in CD)

1. When the on-screen button istouched, the folder list in the CD isdisplayed.

2. Select the folder name from thedisplayed list.

3. The files in the selected folder aredisplayed.

4. Select the file you want to play.

(Selection from inside folder in which asong is currently being played)

1. Press the on-screen button toselect the song list.

2. Touch the song you want to listen to.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-53


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (324,1)

Music scan


This function scans the titles on a CD andplays 10 seconds of each song to aid youin finding a song you want to listen to.

1. Touch the on-screen buttonduring playback to play 10 seconds ofeach subsequent track starting from thenext song.

2. Touch the on-screen buttonduring playback of the song you wantto listen to and continue the playbackfrom that point.


This function scans the titles in a foldercurrently being played and plays 10seconds of each song to aid you in findinga song you want to listen to.


2. Touch the on-screen buttonduring playback of the song you wantto listen to and continue the playbackfrom that point.

NOTEl If the unit is left in scan, normal playback

will resume where scan was selected.l If all the tracks are scanned, the unit will

resume normal playback.

Repeat playback


Touch the on-screen button duringplayback to play the song currently beingplayed repeatedly.“ ” is displayedduring playback.

Touch the on-screen button while“ ” is displayed to cancel.


(Track repeat)Touch the on-screen button to playthe song during playback repeatedly. “ ”is displayed during playback.Touch the on-screen button twotimes while “ ” is displayed to cancel.(Folder repeat)Touch the on-screen button twotimes to play the songs in the folderrepeatedly. “ ” is displayed duringplayback.Touch the on-screen button while“ ” is displayed to cancel.

Shuffle playback


Touch the on-screen button duringplayback to play the songs in the CDshuffle. “ ” is displayed duringplayback.Touch the on-screen button while“ ” is displayed to cancel.


(Folder shuffle)Touch the on-screen button duringplayback to play the songs in the foldershuffle. “ ” is displayed duringplayback.Touch the on-screen button twotimes while “ ” is displayed to cancel.(CD shuffle)Touch the on-screen button twotimes during playback to play the songs inthe CD shuffle. “ ” is displayed duringplayback.Touch the on-screen button while“ ” is displayed to cancel.

5-54

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (325,1)

Display scroll


NOTEl The on-screen button is displayed only

if a whole title cannot be displayed at onetime.

l The information viewable in the display isonly CD information (such as artist name,song title) which has been recorded to theCD.



Message Display

If “CD Error” is displayed, it means thatthere is some CD malfunction. Check theCD for damage, dirt, or smudges, andthen properly reinsert. If the messageappears again, take the unit to anAuthorized Mazda Dealer for service.

qHow to use Auxiliary jack/USB port

Audio can be heard from the vehicle'sspeakers by connecting a commercially-available portable audio unit to theauxiliary jack.Use a commercially-available, non-impedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable.Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer fordetails.In addition, audio can be played from thevehicle audio device by connecting a USBdevice or an iPod to the USB port.Refer to AUX/USB/iPod mode on page5-60.

qError Indications



CDError

CD is insertedupside down

Insert the CDproperly. If the errorindication continuesto display, consult anAuthorized MazdaDealer.

CD is defective

Insert another CDproperly. If the errorindication continuesto display, consult anAuthorized MazdaDealer.

qSetup

You can customize settings in the setupdisplay as follows:

Display

Refer to Power/Volume/Display/SoundControls on page 5-36.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-55


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (326,1)

Sound

Refer to Power/Volume/Display/SoundControls on page 5-36.

Vehicle

l Door Locksl Light Controll Wipers Control

1. Press the setup button ( ).

2. Touch the on-screen tab todisplay the vehicle setting screen.

3. Touch the desired setting item.

4. Select the desired setup item from thelist by touching it.


Language


2. Touch the on-screen tab todisplay the language setting screen.

3. Touch the desired language from thelist.


NOTEOnly the available languages are displayed.

Default (Vehicle settings only)


2. Touch the on-screen tab.




NOTEThe settings for display, sound, and languagecannot be initialized.

Audio Control SwitchOperation

When the audio unit is turned on,operation of the audio unit from thesteering wheel is possible.

NOTEl Because the audio unit will be turned off

under the following conditions, the switcheswill be inoperable.l When the ignition is switched off.l When the power button on the audio unit

is pressed and the audio unit is turnedoff.

l Mazda has installed this system to preventdistraction while driving the vehicle andusing audio controls on the dashboard.Always make safe driving your first priority.

Without Bluetooth® Hands-Free

5-56

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (327,1)

With Bluetooth® Hands-Free

qAdjusting the Volume

To increase the volume, press up thevolume switch ( ).To decrease the volume, press down thevolume switch ( ).

qSeek Switch

When listening to the radio

Press the seek switch ( , ). The radioswitches to the next/previous storedstation in the order that it was stored(1―6).Press and hold the seek switch ( , ) toseek all usable stations at a higher orlower frequency whether programmed ornot.

Radio stations which have beenpreviously stored in the auto memorytuning can be called up by pressing theseek switch ( , ) while any radiostation stored in the auto memory tuningis being received. Radio stations can becalled up in the order they were storedwith each press of the switch ( , ).

When playing a CD, USB, iPod orBluetooth® audio*1

Press the seek switch ( ) to skip forwardto the beginning of the next track.Press the seek switch ( ) within a fewseconds after playback begins to trackdown to the beginning of the previoustrack.Press the seek switch ( ) after a fewseconds have elapsed to start playbackfrom the beginning of the current track.Press and hold the seek switch ( , ) tocontinuously switch the tracks up ordown.*1 Type B

qMute Switchí

Press the mute switch ( ) once to muteaudio, press it again to resume audiooutput.

NOTEIf the ignition is switched off with the audiomuted, the mute will be canceled. Therefore,when the engine is restarted, the audio is notmuted. To mute the audio again, press the muteswitch ( ).

Interior Features

Audio System

5-57íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (328,1)

Commander switchoperationí

qOperation of switches aroundcommander knob

Press a switch around the commanderknob indicated below to operate it:

: Audio screen is displayed: Navigation screen is displayed: Bluetooth® dial screen is

displayed: Setup setting screen is displayed

: Same operations such as on-screen button

5-58

Interior Features

íSome models.

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (329,1)

qCommander knob operation

Selecting button on screen

1. Tilt the commander knob and move thecursor to the button group whichcontains the on-screen button you wantto select.

2. Turn the commander knob and movethe cursor to the desired on-screenbutton.

3. Press the commander knob to select theon-screen button.

NOTEIf the knob is turned to the left when the cursoris at the end item, the audio list moves to thetop item.If the knob is turned to the right when thecursor is at the top item, the audio list movesto the end item.

Setting operation

1. Tilt the commander knob and move thecursor to the setting item group.

2. Turn the commander knob and movethe cursor to the desired setting item.

3. Press the commander knob.

4. Turn or tilt the commander knob andchange the setting value.

5. Press the commander knob to cancelthe setting mode.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-59


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (330,1)

AUX/USB/iPod modeAudio can be heard from the vehicle'sspeakers by connecting a commercially-available portable audio unit to theauxiliary jack.A commercially-available, non-impedance(3.5 ) stereo mini plug cable is required.Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer fordetails.In addition, audio can be played from thevehicle audio device by connecting USBdevice or an iPod to the USB port.

Auxiliary jack/USB port

How to use AUX mode ....... page 5-62How to use USB mode (TypeA) ......................................... page 5-64How to use USB mode (TypeB) ......................................... page 5-68How to use iPod mode (TypeA) ......................................... page 5-72How to use iPod mode (TypeB) ......................................... page 5-76

WARNINGDo not adjust the portable audio unitor a similar product while driving thevehicle:

Adjusting the portable audio unit ora similar product while driving thevehicle is dangerous as it coulddistract your attention from thevehicle operation which could lead toa serious accident. Always adjust theportable audio unit or a similarproduct while the vehicle is stopped.

CAUTIONØ Always close the auxiliary jack/

USB port lid when it is not in use.If foreign matter or liquidpenetrates the auxiliary jack/USBport, it may cause a malfunction.

Ø Depending on the portable audiodevice, noise may occur when thedevice is connected to the vehicleaccessory socket. (If noise occurs,do not use the accessory socket.)

5-60

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (331,1)

NOTEl This mode may not be usable depending on

the portable audio device to be connected.l Before using the auxiliary jack/USB port,

refer to the instruction manual for theportable audio device.

l Use a commercially-available, non-impedance (3.5 ) stereo mini plug forconnecting the portable audio unit to theauxiliary jack. Before using the auxiliaryjack, read the manufacturer's instructionsfor connecting a portable audio unit to theauxiliary jack.

l To prevent discharging of the battery, donot use the auxiliary input for long periodswith the engine off or idling.

l When connecting a device to the auxiliaryjack or USB port, noise may occurdepending on the connected device. If thedevice is connected to the vehicle'saccessory socket, the noise can be reducedby unplugging it from the accessory socket.

qHow to connect USB port/Auxiliary jack

USB port Auxiliary jack

Connecting a device

1. Open the console lid.

2. Open the auxiliary jack/USB port lid.

3. Connect the device plug to the USBport.

Connecting with connector cable

1. Open the console lid.

2. Open the auxiliary jack/USB port lid.

3. Pass the connection plug cord throughthe cutout of the console and insert theplug into the auxiliary jack.

WARNINGDo not allow the connection plug cordto get tangled with the parking brakeor the shift lever:

Allowing the plug cord to becometangled with the parking brake orthe shift lever is dangerous as itcould interfere with driving, resultingin an accident.

CAUTIONDo not place objects or apply force tothe auxiliary jack/USB port with theplug connected.

NOTEl Insert the plug to the auxiliary jack/USB

port securely.l Insert or pull out the plug with the plug

perpendicular to the auxiliary jack/USBport hole.

l Insert or remove the plug by holding itsbase.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-61


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (332,1)

qHow to use AUX mode

Type A Type B

(Type A)

1. Switch the ignition to ACC or ON.

2. Press the power/volume dial to turn theaudio system on.

3. Press the USB/AUX button ( ) of theaudio unit to change to the AUX mode.

(Type B)



3. Press the audio button ( ) todisplay the audio screen.

4. Press the on-screen tab to switchto the AUX mode.

NOTEl When the device is not connected to the

auxiliary jack, the mode does not switch tothe AUX mode.

l Set the volume of the portable audio unit tothe maximum within the range that thesound does not become distorted, thenadjust the volume using the power/volumedial of the audio unit or the up/down switchof the audio control switch.

l Audio adjustments other than audio volumecan only be done using the portable audiodevice.

l If the connection plug is pulled out from theauxiliary jack while in AUX mode, noisemay occur.

5-62

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (333,1)

MEMO

5-63


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (334,1)

qHow to use USB mode (Type A)

Track up/Fast-forward buttonTrack down/Reverse button

Repeat buttonRandom button

Folder down button

Folder up button


USB/AUX button

File dial

Type Playable data

USB mode MP3/WMA/AAC file

Playback



3. Press the USB/AUX button ( ) toswitch to the USB mode and startplayback.

NOTEl Some devices such as smart phones may

require a setting change to allow USBoperation.

l When the USB device is not connected, themode does not switch to USB mode.

l When there is no playable data in the USBdevice, “NO CONTENTS” is flashed.

l Playback of the USB device is in the orderof the folder numbers. Folders which haveno MP3/WMA/AAC files are skipped.

l Do not remove the USB device while in theUSB mode. The data may be damaged.


Press and hold the fast-forward button( ) to advance through a track at highspeed.

Press and hold the reverse button ( ) toreverse through a track at high speed.

Track search


Folder search

To change to the previous folder, press thefolder down button ( ), or press thefolder up button ( ) to advance to thenext folder.

Music Scan

This function scans the titles in a foldercurrently being played and plays tenseconds of each song to aid you in findinga song you want to listen to.

5-64

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (335,1)

Press the scan button ( ) duringplayback to start the scan play operation(the track number will flash). Press thescan button ( ) again to cancel scanplayback.


Repeat playback

(Track repeat)

Press the repeat button (1) duringplayback to play the current trackrepeatedly. “TRACK RPT” is displayedduring playback.Press the repeat button (1) two timeswhile “TRACK RPT” is displayed tocancel.

(Folder repeat)

Press the repeat button (1) two timesduring playback to repeat the playback ofthe songs in the current folder. “FOLDERRPT” is displayed during playback.Press the repeat button (1) while“FOLDER RPT” is displayed to cancel.

Random playback

(Folder random)

Press the random button (2) duringplayback to play the tracks in the folderrandomly. “FOLDER RDM” is displayedduring playback.Press the random button (2) two timeswhile “FOLDER RDM” is displayed tocancel.

(Media random)

Press the random button (2) two timesduring playback to play the songs in theUSB device randomly. “MEDIA RDM” isdisplayed during playback.

Press the random button (2) while“MEDIA RDM” is displayed to cancel.



File number/Elapsed time display

Folder name

File name

Album name

Song name

Artist name

Folder number/File number

NOTEl The information (artist name, music name)

is displayed only when the USB deviceinformation in the USB device hasinformation which can be displayed on thescreen.


Display scroll

Only 9 characters (File name) or 13characters (Except file name) can bedisplayed at one time. To display the restof the characters of a long title, press andhold the text button ( ). The displayscrolls the next 13 characters. Press andhold the text button ( ) again afterthe last 13 characters have been displayedto return to the beginning of the title.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-65


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (336,1)


Error Messages

When the message “CHECK USB” isdisplayed, it indicates that there is someerror in the USB device. Verify that thecontent recorded in the USB device hasMP3/WMA/AAC files and re-connectcorrectly. If the message reappears, havethe unit checked by an Authorized MazdaDealer.

5-66

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (337,1)

MEMO

5-67


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (338,1)

qHow to use USB mode (Type B)

Audio button

Power/Volume dial


File dial

Type Playable data

USB mode MP3/WMA/AAC file

Playback




4. Touch the on-screen tab toswitch to USB mode and startplayback.

NOTEl Some devices such as smart phones may

require a setting change to allow USBoperation.

l When a USB device is not connected to theUSB port, the mode does not switch to theUSB mode even if the on-screen tabis touched.

l Do not remove the USB device while in theUSB mode. Otherwise, the data could bedamaged.

Pause

Touch the on-screen button topause playback.

Touch the on-screen button whileplayback is paused to cancel the pause.






Track search


Press the track up button ( ) or turn thefile dial clockwise once to skip forward tothe beginning of the next track.Press the track down button ( ) or turnthe file dial counterclockwise within a fewseconds after playback begins to trackdown to the beginning of the previoustrack.

5-68

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (339,1)

Press the track down button ( ) or turnthe file dial counterclockwise after a fewseconds have elapsed to start playbackfrom the beginning of the current track.


Touch the on-screen button once toskip forward to the beginning of the nexttrack.Touch the on-screen button withina few seconds after playback begins totrack down to the beginning of theprevious track.Touch the on-screen button after afew seconds have elapsed to startplayback from the beginning of thecurrent track.

Displaying song list

The song list in the USB device can beviewed.

NOTEThe song list may not display depending on theconditions.

(Displaying optional list)

1. Touch the on-screen button duringplayback.

2. Touch the category which you want toselect. The record list or song list isdisplayed.

(Displaying a list being played)

Touch the on-screen button.

NOTEPress the on-screen button to display theupper list.

Selecting from list

Select the desired song to play.

1. Press the on-screen button to selectthe song list.


NOTEThe selected song list becomes the play list.

Repeat playback

Touch the on-screen button duringplayback. “ ” is displayed duringplayback.Touch the on-screen button twotimes while “ ” is displayed to cancel.

Shuffle playback

(Shuffling songs in list being played)


(Shuffling album in list being played)

Touch the on-screen button twotimes during playback. “ ” is displayedduring playback.Touch the on-screen button while“ ” is displayed to cancel.

Text scroll

If a whole title cannot be displayed at onetime, touch the on-screen button onthe right side of each title. When the lastcharacter is displayed, touch the on-screen button to display the first characterof the title.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-69


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (340,1)

NOTEl The on-screen button is displayed when

the whole title is not displayed.l The information (artist name, music name,

album name) is displayed only when theUSB device has information which can bedisplayed on the screen.



Error Messages

If the message “USB Error” is displayed,it indicates that there is no playable file inthe USB device or there is an error in theUSB device. Verify that the contentrecorded in the USB device has MP3/WMA/AAC files and re-connect correctly.If the message reappears, have the unitchecked by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

5-70

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (341,1)

MEMO

5-71


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (342,1)

qHow to use iPod mode (Type A)


Repeat buttonRandom button Category down button

Category up button

List down button

List up button


USB/AUX button

File dial

Connectable iPod is as follows:l iPod: 5Gl iPod classicl iPod nano: 1/2/3/4/5Gl iPod touch*1: 1/2Gl iPhone*1: 3G/3GS*1 For only iPod functions

NOTEThe iPod functions on the iPod cannot beoperated while it is connected to the unitbecause the unit controls the iPod functions.

Playback



3. Press the USB/AUX button ( ) toswitch to the iPod mode and startplayback.

NOTEl When an iPod is not connected, the mode

does not switch to the iPod mode.l When there is no playable data in the iPod,

“NO CONTENTS” is flashed.l Do not remove the iPod while in the iPod

mode. Otherwise, the data could bedamaged.



Track search

Press the track up button ( ) or turn thefile dial clockwise once to skip forward tothe beginning of the next track.Press the track down button ( ) or turnthe file dial counterclockwise within a fewseconds (depends on iPod softwareversion) after playback begins to trackdown to the beginning of the previoustrack.Press the track down button ( ) or turnthe file dial counterclockwise after a fewseconds (depends on iPod softwareversion) have elapsed to start playbackfrom the beginning of the current track.

Category search

Press the category down button (5) toselect the previous category and press thecategory up button (6) to select the nextcategory.

5-72

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (343,1)

NOTEThe types of categories include Playlist, Artist,Album, Song, Podcast, Genre, Composer, andAudio book.

List search

Press the list down button ( ) to selectthe previous list and press the list upbutton ( ) to select the next list.

NOTEWhen the selected category is Song or Audiobook, there is no list.

Music Scan

This function scans the titles in a listcurrently being played and plays 10seconds of each song to aid you in findinga song you want to listen to.Press the scan button ( ) duringplayback to start the scan play operation(the track number will flash). Press thescan button ( ) again to cancel scanplayback.


Repeat playback

Press the repeat button (1) duringplayback to repeat the playback of thesong in the current list. “TRACK RPT” isdisplayed during playback.Press the repeat button (1) whiledisplaying “TRACK RPT” to cancel.

Random playback

(Song random)

Press the random button (2) duringplayback to play the tracks in the listrandomly. “SONG RDM” is displayedduring playback.

Press the random button (2) two timeswhile “SONG RDM” is displayed tocancel.

(Album random)

Press the random button (2) two timesduring playback to play the songs in theiPod randomly. “ALBUM RDM” isdisplayed during playback.Press the random button (2) while“ALBUM RDM” is displayed to cancel.

NOTEThe track number being played randomly is inthe order of the iPod shuffle table.



Album name

Song name

Artist name

Category (Playlist title/Genre title /Composer title/Podcast title)

File number/Elapsed time

Interior Features

Audio System

5-73


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (344,1)

NOTEl The information (artist name, music name)

is displayed only when the iPod hasinformation which can be displayed.


Display scroll

13 characters (Except file name) can bedisplayed at one time. To display the restof the characters of a long title, press andhold the text button ( ). The displayscrolls the next 13 characters. Press andhold the text button ( ) again afterthe last 13 characters have been displayedto return to the beginning of the title.


Error Messages

If the message “CHECK iPod” isdisplayed, it indicates that there is amalfunction in the iPod. Verify that thecontent recorded in the iPod has playablefiles and connect correctly. If the messagereappears, have the unit checked by anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

5-74

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (345,1)

MEMO

5-75


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (346,1)

qHow to use iPod mode (Type B)

Audio button

Power/Volume dial


File dial

The connectable iPods are as follows:l iPod classicl iPod nano: 4/5/6Gl iPod touch*1: 2/3/4Gl iPhone*1: 3GS/4/4S*1 Only iPod function

NOTEThe iPod functions on the iPod cannot beoperated while it is connected to the unitbecause the unit controls the iPod functions.

Playback




4. Touch the on-screen tab toswitch to the iPod mode and startplayback.

NOTEl When the iPod is connected to the USB

port, the on-screen tab changes tothe on-screen tab.

l Do not remove the iPod while in the iPodmode. Otherwise, the data could bedamaged.

Pause

Touch the on-screen button topause playback. Touch the on-screen button while playback is paused tocancel the pause.






Track search


Press the track up button ( ) or turn thefile dial clockwise once to skip forward tothe beginning of the next track.

5-76

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (347,1)

Press the track down button ( ) or turnthe file dial counterclockwise within a fewseconds (depends on iPod softwareversion) after playback begins to trackdown to the beginning of the previoustrack.Press the track down button ( ) or turnthe file dial counterclockwise after a fewseconds (depends on iPod softwareversion) have elapsed to start playbackfrom the beginning of the current track.


Touch the on-screen button once toskip forward to the beginning of the nexttrack.Touch the on-screen button withina few seconds (depends on iPod softwareversion) after playback begins to trackdown to the beginning of the previoustrack.Touch the on-screen button after afew seconds (depends on iPod softwareversion) have elapsed to start playbackfrom the beginning of the current track.

Displaying song list

The song list in the iPod can be viewed.

NOTEThe song list may not display depending on theconditions.

(Displaying optional list)

1. Touch the on-screen button duringplayback.

2. Touch the category which you want toselect. The record list or song list isdisplayed.

(Displaying a list being played)


NOTEPress the on-screen button to display theupper list.

Selecting from list

Select the desired song to play.

1. Press the on-screen button to selectthe song list.


NOTEThe selected song list becomes the play list.

Repeat playback


Shuffle playback

(Shuffling songs in list being played)


(Shuffling album in list being played)

Touch the on-screen button twotimes during playback. “ ” is displayedduring playback.Touch the on-screen button while“ ” is displayed to cancel.

NOTEThe track number being shuffle played is in theorder of the iPod shuffle table.

Interior Features

Audio System

5-77


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (348,1)

Text scroll

If a whole title cannot be displayed at onetime, touch the on-screen button onthe right side of the title to display thewhole title. When the last character isdisplayed, touch the on-screen buttonto display the first character of the title.

NOTEl The on-screen button is displayed when

the whole title is not displayed.l The information (artist name, music name)

is displayed only when the iPod hasinformation which can be displayed on thescreen.



Error Messages

If the message “iPod Error” is displayed,it indicates that there are no playable filesin the iPod or there is a malfunction.Verify that the content recorded in theiPod has playable files and re-connectcorrectly. If the message reappears, havethe unit checked by an Authorized MazdaDealer.

qError Indications



CHECK USB

USB devicemalfunction

Verify that the contentrecorded in the USBdevice hasMP3/WMA/AAC filesand re-connect correctly.If the error indicationcontinues to display,consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

USB Error

CHECK iPod

iPodmalfunction

Verify that the contentrecorded in the iPod hasplayable files andre-connect correctly.If the error indicationcontinues to display,consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

iPod Error

5-78

Interior Features

Audio System


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (349,1)

Bluetooth®í

Bluetooth® Hands-Free outline

When a Bluetooth® device (mobile phone) is connected to the vehicle's Hands-Free unitvia radio wave transmission, a call can be made or received by pressing the talk button,pick-up button, hang-up button, or voice command on the steering wheel, or by operatingthe panel. For example, even if a device (mobile phone) is in your coat pocket, a call canbe made without taking the device (mobile phone) out and operating it directly.

Bluetooth® audio outline

When a portable audio unit equipped with the Bluetooth® communication function isprogrammed to the Bluetooth® unit, you can listen to music recorded on the programmedportable audio device from the vehicle's speakers. It is not necessary to connect theportable audio device to the vehicle's external input terminal. After programming, operatethe vehicle audio control panel to play/stop the audio.

Applicable Bluetooth® specificationVer. 2.0 or higher

Response profilel HFP (Hands-Free Profile) Ver. 1.5l DUN (Dial-up Networking Profile) Ver. 1.1l PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0l OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1l MAP (Message Access Profile) Ver. 1.0

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-79íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (350,1)

qComponent Parts

Microphone

Talk button, Pick-up button and Hang-up button

Microphone

Talk button

Hang-up button

Pick-up button

Audio unit

Audio unit (Type B)

The audio unit (Type B) is used for volume adjustment and touch panel operation.Bluetooth® information is displayed in the display. The screen is switched by touching thetab for each function to be used.Do not press the panel strongly or press it with a sharp-pointed object.

Microphone (Hands-Free)

The microphone is used for speaking voice commands or exchanging conversation.

Talk button, Pick-Up button and Hang-Up button (Hands-Free)

The basic functions of Bluetooth® Hands-Free can be used for such things as making callsor hanging up using the talk button, pick-up button and hang-up button on the steeringwheel.

NOTEThe talk button, pick-up button, and hang-up button are operable with the audio unit turned off.

Volume adjustment

The power/volume dial of the audio unit is used to adjust the volume. Turn the dial to theright to increase volume, to the left to decrease it.The volume can also be adjusted using the volume button on the steering wheel.

5-80

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (351,1)

Conversation volume and the volume of the voice guidance and ringtone can each be set inadvance.

1. Touch the on-screen tab to display the Bluetooth® setting screen.

2. Touch the on-screen button to display the volume adjustment screen.

3. (Volume up) Touch the on-screen button.(Volume down) Touch the on-screen button.

4. Prompt: “Phone call will be at this volume.” or “Voice guidance will be at thisvolume.”

NOTEThe volume of the audio unit cannot be adjusted while Bluetooth® Hands-Free is being used.

qBluetooth® Preparation

Device programming (Pairing)

To use Bluetooth® audio and Hands-Free,the device equipped with Bluetooth® hasto be programmed to the unit using thefollowing procedure. A maximum ofseven devices including Bluetooth® audiodevices and Hands-Free mobile phonescan be programmed.

NOTEl For your safety, a device can be

programmed only when the vehicle isparked. If the vehicle starts to move, thepairing procedure will end. Park the car ina safe place before programming.

l The communication range of a Bluetooth®

equipped device is about 10 meters (32 ft)or less.

CAUTIONSome Bluetooth® mobile devices arenot compatible with the vehicle.Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer,Mazda's call center or Web supportcenter for information regardingBluetooth® mobile devicecompatibility:

Ø U.S.A.Phone: 800-430-0153Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth

Ø CanadaPhone: 800-430-0153Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca

Ø MexicoCenter of Attention to Client (CAC)Phone: 01-800-01-MAZDAWeb: www.mazdamexico.com.mx

Pairing Procedure

1. Press the phone button ( ) on theaudio unit or commander switch.


3. Touch the on-screenbutton. The list of pairing devices isdisplayed.

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-81


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (352,1)

4. Touch the on-screen button todisplay the message and switch to thedevice operation.

5. Using your device, perform a searchfor the Bluetooth® device (Peripheraldevice).

6. Select “Mazda” from the device listsearched by the device.

7. (Device with Bluetooth® version 2.0)Input the displayed 4-digit pairing codeinto the device.(Device with Bluetooth® version 2.1or higher)

l Just Works is detectedThe pairing is performedautomatically.

l Numeric Comparison is detectedMake sure the displayed 6-digitcode on the audio is also displayedon the device, and touch theon-screen button. A connectionlicense agreement may be requireddepending on the device.

After a device is registered, the systemautomatically identifies the device. Byactivating Bluetooth® Hands-Free again,or by activating Bluetooth® Hands-Freefirst after switching the ignition from OFFto ACC, the device connection conditionis indicated in the display.

Device selection

If several devices have been programmed,the Bluetooth® unit links the device lastprogrammed. If you would like to link adifferent programmed device, it isnecessary to change the link. The order ofdevice priority after the link has beenchanged is maintained even when theignition is switched off.

NOTEIf the device name cannot be displayed, “...” isadded at the end of the title which is displayed.

Connecting other devices


2. Touch the on-screenbutton.

3. Touch the device name which youwant to connect to display the deviceinformation screen.

4. Touch the on-screen button toconnect as a Hands-Free device. Touchthe on-screen button to connectas a Bluetooth® audio device.


If the connection is completed, the devicename is displayed. Touch the on-screen button to display the device listscreen and display the or icon in thenew device name which is connected.

Disconnecting a device



3. Touch the device name which iscurrently connected to display thedevice information screen.

4. Touch the on-screen button todisconnect the Hands-Free device.Touch the on-screen button todisconnect the audio device.


Deleting a device


5-82

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (353,1)


3. Touch the device name which youwant to delete.



NOTEIf you want to delete all of the pairing devices,restore the default settings.

Changing PIN code

PIN code (4 digits) can be changed.




4. Delete the PIN code which is currentlyset.

5. Input the new PIN code to be set.


Restoring default settings

All the pairing device information andphonebook data can be deleted.





qAvailable Language

The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Systemapplies to the following languages:l Englishl Spanishl French

Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

qVoice Recognition

The Mazda Bluetooth® Hands-free systemcan be used to make calls or operate theaudio unit using voice recognition whichincludes numerous convenient commands.In this section, the basic operation of thevoice recognition is explained.

Activating Voice Recognition

To Activate the Main Menu: Press thetalk-button.To Activate the Phone Menu: Press thepick-up button, or after activating themain menu, say “Phone”.To Activate the Navi Menu: Afteractivating the main menu, say“Navigation”.

NOTEl When activating the Phone Menu from the

Main Menu, the user is informed of theavailable options (Call, Dial, Redial, Callback ,Setup or Emergency) via voicenavigation.

l For voice recognition details with thenavigation system, refer to the separate“NAVIGATION SYSTEM Owner'sManual”.

Ending Voice Recognition

Use one of the following methods:l Press and hold the talk-button.l Press the hang-up button.

Skipping Voice Guidance (for fasteroperation)

Press and release the talk-button.

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-83


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (354,1)

NOTEl The Bluetooth® Hands-Free system is

operable several seconds after the ignitionis switched to ACC or ON (requires lessthan 15 seconds).

l When operating the audio unit or the A/Cwhile using Bluetooth® Hands-Free, thebeep sounds or voice guidance (audio unit)/cannot be heard.

TutorialThe tutorial explains how to useBluetooth® Hands-Free.The available tutorial items are General,Phone, and Audio.To activate the tutorial, do the following:

1. Press the talk button.

2. Prompt: “Ready”

3. Say: [Beep] “Tutorial”

4. Prompt: “Tutorial”

5. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Tutorialitem)”

6. Follow the prompts to receive theappropriate voice guidanceinstructions.

Commands useable anytime duringvoice recognition

“Help” , “Go Back” , “Cancel” , “DisplayOFF/Display ON” are commands whichcan be used at anytime during voicerecognition.

Help function use

The help function informs the user of allthe available voice commands under thecurrent conditions.

1. Say: [Beep] “Help”

2. Follow the prompts to receive theappropriate voice guidanceinstructions.

Returning to previous operation

This command is for returning to theprevious operation while in the voicerecognition mode.Say: [Beep] “Go Back”

Cancel

The Bluetooth® Hands-Free systemtransitions to standby status if thefollowing operation is performed whilethe system is activated.Say: [Beep] “Cancel”

Display OFF/Display ON

The audio unit display can be switchedoff/on by voice recognition operation.Say: [Beep] “Display OFF” (or “DisplayON”)

To prevent a deterioration in the voicerecognition rate and voice quality, thefollowing points should be observed:

l The Hands-free system cannot performvoice recognition while voice guidanceor a beep sound is operating. Wait untilthe voice guidance or the beep sound isfinished before saying your commands.

l Dialects or different wording other thanHands-Free prompts cannot berecognized by voice recognition. Speakin the wording specified by the voicecommands.

l It is not necessary to face themicrophone or approach it. Speak thevoice commands while maintaining asafe driving position.

l Do not speak too slow or too loud.l Speak clearly, without pausing betweenwords or numbers.

5-84

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (355,1)

l Close the windows and/or themoonroof to reduce loud noises fromoutside the vehicle. Turn down theairflow of the air-conditioning systemwhile Bluetooth® Hands-Free is beingused.

l Make sure the vents are not directingair up towards the microphone.

NOTEIf the voice recognition performance is notsatisfactory.Refer to Troubleshooting on page 5-108.

Bluetooth® Hands-Free

qMaking a Call

Phonebook Usage

Telephone calls can be made by sayingthe contact name in the downloadedphonebook or the name of a person whosephone number has been registered in theBluetooth® Hands-Free. Refer to Importcontact (Download Phonebook).

1. Press the pick-up button.

2. Prompt: “Ready.”

3. Say: [Beep] “Call”

4. Prompt: “Name, please.”

5. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “John”)”(Say a name registered in thephonebook.)The name spoken will be searched forin the phonebook.If a contact is matched, go to Step 7.If multiple contacts are matched, go toStep 6.

6. Prompt: “Would you like to callXXXXX... (Choice 1)?”(Person you would like to call)Say: [Beep] “Yes.” Then go to Step 7.(Person you do not want to call)Say: [Beep] “No” Then go to Step 6(Maximum 3 times)

7. Prompt: “Would you like to callXXXXX... (Ex. “John”) at home, atwork, or mobile, or other... or press thehang-up button to exit Hands-Freemode.”

8. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “athome”)”

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-85


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (356,1)

9. Prompt: “XXXXX... (Ex. “John”)XXXX (Ex. “at home”). Press the pick-up button to call, or say Go Back toenter a different name.”

10. (Dialing) Press the pick-up button orsay “Call”. Then go to Step 11.(Name correction) Say, “Go Back”.Then go back to Step 4.

11. The call is made.

NOTEThe “Call” command, Name in thephonebook, and Location can be combined.Ex. In Step 3, say, “Call John's phone”, then,Steps 4 and 5 can be skipped.

Screen operation

1. Touch the on-screen tab todisplay the phonebook screen.

2. Touch the contact you would like tocall to display the details for thecontact.

3. Touch the desired phone number tomake the call.

Import contact (Download Phonebook)

Phonebook data from your device (Mobilephone) can be sent and registered to yourBluetooth® Hands-Free phonebook usingBluetooth®.



3. Touch the oron-screen button to switch to thedevice operation.

NOTEl If the phonebook has been already

registered to the Hands-Free unit, thecurrent phonebook is overwritten during“all phonebooks download”.

l A maximum of 1000 contacts can beregistered to the phonebook.

l Phonebook, incoming/outgoing call record,and speed dialing memory are exclusive toeach mobile phone to protect privacy.

4. Download will be started from themobile phone.

Phonebook data deletion


2. Touch the contact information whichyou want to delete.


Call History Usage

A call can be made using the call history(incoming/outgoing history) downloadedfrom the mobile phone (Redial/Call back).The call history is downloadedautomatically when connecting or pairingthe Hands-Free and mobile phone.

NOTEIf an anonymous call is received, the phonenumber displayed in the Incoming Call Historymay be random numbers. This is because amobile phone sends random numbers to thevehicle. In this case, please be aware that theRedial and Call back functions below may notoperate.

Redial Function

This voice command makes a call to thelast person you called (either from yourmobile phone or from the vehicle).


5-86

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (357,1)


3. Say: [Beep] “Redial”

4. A call is made to the most recent call inthe Call history (outgoing).

Call back Function

This voice command makes a call to thelast person who called you.



3. Say: [Beep] “Call back”

4. A call is made to the most recent call inthe Call history (incoming).

Speed Dial Function

A maximum of eight telephone numberscan be registered. It will take less time tomake a call after registering the telephonenumber. In addition, you do not have tolook for the person you want to call in thephonebook.

Speed Dial registration fromphonebook



3. Touch the contact you would like toregister to the speed dial.

4. Touch the telephone number youwould like to register.

5. Verify that the registered name andtelephone number are displayed in thephonebook, and touch the on-screen button.

Making calls using the Speed Dial


2. Touch the contact information youwould like to call.

Changing contact




4. Touch the contact you would like toregister to the speed dial.

5. Touch the telephone number youwould like to register.

6. Verify that the registered name andtelephone number are displayed in thephonebook, and touch the on-screen button.

Speed Dial contact deleting


2. Touch the on-screen button forthe contact you would like to delete.

3. Touch the on-screen button todisplay the confirmation screen.


Telephone Number Input

NOTEPractice this while parked until you areconfident you can do it while driving in a non-taxing road situation. If you are not completelycomfortable, make all calls from a safeparking position, and only start driving whenyou can devote your full attention to driving.



3. Say: [Beep] “Dial”

4. Prompt: “Number, please”

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-87


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (358,1)

5. Say: [Beep] “XXXXXXXXXXX (Ex.“5551234”) (Telephone number)”

6. Prompt: “XXXXXXXXXXX. (Ex“5551234”) (Telephone number (firstchoice))”

7. Prompt: “Press the pick-up button todial, or continue to add numbers. Youcan also say ‘Option A’ or ‘Option B’to replace the last block of digits withthe displayed alternate, or say ‘GoBack’ to delete the last block of digits.”

NOTEOption A is the second candidate, Option B isthe third, and they may not be presenteddepending on the conditions.

8. (Dialing)Press the pick-up button or say, “Dial”,then go to Step 9.(Adding/inputting telephonenumber)Say, “XXXX” (desired telephonenumber). Then go to Step 5.(The last recognized telephonenumber is replaced by Option A orB)Say, “Option A” or “Option B”. Thengo to Step 6.(Telephone number correction)Say, “Go Back”. The prompt replies,“The last entered numbers have beenremoved”. Then go back to Step 4 orStep 7.

9. The call is made.

NOTEFor the faster operation, the “Dial” commandand a telephone number can be combined.Ex. In Step 3, say, “Dial 1234567”, then, Steps4 and 5 can be skipped.

Screen operation

1. Input the telephone number using thenumerical keypad.

2. Touch the on-screen button tomake the call.

Numeral or symbol entry

Use the numerical keypad.Long-press the on-screen button toinput .Touch the on-screen button to deletethe currently input value.

Emergency calls

A call can be made to the emergencyphone number (911: U.S.A/Canada, 066:Mexico) using the voice input command.It may not function properly in some areasin Mexico.



3. Say: [Beep] “Emergency”

4. Prompt: “Press the Pick-Up button todial the Emergency number.”

5. (Dialing) Press the pick-up button orsay “Call.”

6. Prompt: “Dialing XXX (911: U.S.A/Canada, 066: Mexico).”

5-88

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (359,1)

Automatic 911 (U.S.A./Canada only)

If the vehicle is involved in a moderate tosevere collision, a call is madeautomatically to 911 from the connecteddevice.

1. If the vehicle is involved in a moderateto severe collision, notification of thecall to 911 is made via audio andscreen display. To cancel the call, pressthe on-screen button or hang-upbutton within 10 seconds.

2. If the on-screen button or hang-up button is not pressed within 10seconds, the call is made to 911automatically.

NOTEl Automatic 911 is a secondary function of

the audio entertainment system. Therefore,the automatic 911 function does not assurethat the call is always made to 911 after anaccident occurs.

l A Hands-free device must be paired andconnected. The 911 operator can verify thevehicle's position information using theHands-free device GPS if equipped.The 911 operator can verify the vehicle’sposition information.

(Switching automatic 911 on and off)

The system can be set to not call 911 ifthe vehicle is involved in a moderate tosevere collision.

CAUTIONThough the system can be set to notcall 911, doing so will defeat thepurpose of the system to immediatelycontact rescue personnel to assist youafter your accident. For the safety ofthe driver and all passengers, Mazdarecommends that the Automatic 911system remain activated so that acall will be made to 911 when needed.



3. Touch the on-screen button oron-screen button.

4. Touch the on screen button.

qReceiving an Incoming Call

1. Prompt: “Incoming call, press thepick-up button to answer”

2. To accept the call, press the pick-upbutton or touch the on-screenbutton.To reject the call, press the hang-upbutton or touch the on-screenbutton.

NOTETo stop receiving phone calls, turn the Don'tDisturb Me function on.

qHanging Up a Call

Press the hang-up button or touch theon-screen button during the call.

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-89


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (360,1)

qMute

The microphone can be muted during acall.Touch the on-screen button.Touch the on-screen button duringmute to cancel the mute.

qTransferring a call from Hands-Free to a mobile phone

Communication between the Hands-Freeunit and a device (Mobile phone) iscanceled, and the line can be switched tothe device (Mobile phone) as a standardcall.Touch the on-screen button.

NOTEIf the ignition is switched off during a Hands-Free call, the line is transferred to the device(Mobile phone) automatically.

qTransferring a call from a device(mobile phone) to Hands-Free

Communication between devices (mobilephone) can be switched to Bluetooth®

Hands-Free.Touch the on-screen button.

qCall interrupt

A call can be interrupted to receive anincoming call from a third party.To switch to a new incoming call.Touch the on-screen button or pressthe pick-up button on the steering wheel.

NOTEl After receiving a new incoming call, the

previous call is placed on hold.l Touch the on-screen button or press

the hang-up button on the steering wheel torefuse a call.

Switching between calls

Touch the on-screen button orpress the pick-up button on the steeringwheel.

Three-way call function


qDTMF (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency Signal) Transmission

This function is used when transmittingDTMF via the Numerical Keypad. Thereceiver of a DTMF transmission isgenerally a home telephone answeringmachine or a company's automatedguidance call center.

1. Touch the on-screen buttonafter connecting to a home device orservice to display the tone transmissionscreen.

2. Input the number using a numericalkeypad.

NOTEIf the DTMF code has two or more digits orsymbols, each one must be transmittedindividually.

qReceiving and Replying toMessages (only MAP 1.0)

SMS (Short Message Service) messages,MMS (Multimedia Messaging Service)messages, and E-mail received byconnected devices can be downloaded,displayed, and played (read by thesystem).Additionally, replies can also be made tocalls and messages in the receivedmessages.

5-90

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (361,1)

Downloading messages

Up to 15 new messages can bedownloaded and displayed from aconnected device.



NOTEl Messages that have not been read are

downloaded first.l Attached data is not downloaded.l Messages up to 160-bytes can be

downloaded.l A message list is created for each device.l If there are unread messages, the receive

icon is displayed.l If the connected device does not correspond

to MAP 1.0, the AT command is used todownload. The downloaded messageindicates that it is already read.

l Downloading using the AT command maynot function depending on the connecteddevice.

Receiving messages

When a device receives a message, amessage received notification isdisplayed.When the on-screen buttonis touched, the message is downloaded.

NOTETo not display the message receivednotification, turn on the Don't Disturb Mefunction.

Displaying messages


2. Touch the message you want todisplay.

NOTEl Touch the on-screen button to display

the next message, and press theon-screen button to display the previousmessage.

l When the on-screen button ispressed, the message content is played(read by the system).

Message playback


2. Touch the message you want to haveplayed (read) back.


NOTETo stop the message playback, touch theon-screen button.

Calling a person who sent a message

Calls can be made to persons sendingSMS and MMS messages.


2. Touch the message to which you wantto make a call.


NOTECalls cannot be made to persons who havesent e-mail.

Replying to messages

Replies to received messages can be sentby selecting from the stored presetmessages.


2. Touch the message to which you wantto reply.


Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-91


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (362,1)

4. Select the sentence to be sent from thepreset messages.

5. Press the on-screen button.

NOTEThe preset messages cannot be changed.

Erasing messages

Downloaded messages can be erased.


2. Touch the message you want to erase.



NOTEThe messages stored in a device cannot beerased.

qDon't Disturb Me function

A setting can be made to not notify you ofincoming phone calls and messages.



3. To set, touch the on-screen buttonor the on-screen button.

4. Touch the on screen button.

NOTEThe following operations are possible evenwhen the Don't Disturb Me function is on.l Downloading messagesl Downloading phone booksl Downloading the incoming/outgoing call

recordl Sending messages

qAudio Operation Using VoiceRecognition

Audio on/off, audio mode switching, andaudio operations can be done using voicerecognition.

NOTE(When playing a USB or iPod)When a track is selected using voicerecognition, the track list is set to VR Playlist.

Starting the audio

The audio can be started using voicerecognition.



3. Say: [Beep] “Turn on audio”

4. Power to the audio is turned on.

Turning off the audio



3. Say: [Beep] “Change mode”

4. Prompt: “Available audio modes are:AM, FM, FM1, FM2, Sirius, Sirius1,Sirius2, Sirius3, USB, iPod,Bluetooth® audio, Pandora®, CD,AUX, Turn off audio”

5. Say: [Beep] “Turn off audio”

6. Power to the audio is turned off.

Switching modes



3. Say: [Beep] “Change mode”

5-92

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (363,1)

4. Prompt: “Available audio modes are:AM, FM, FM1, FM2, Sirius, Sirius1,Sirius2, Sirius3, USB, iPod,Bluetooth® audio, Pandora®, CD,AUX, Turn off audio”

5. Say: [Beep] “XXX (Ex. “AM”) (audiosource)”

6. The audio source is switched.

NOTECD, SIRIUS digital satellite radio, USB, iPod,BT audio, and Pandora® modes cannot beselected in the following cases:l SIRIUS digital satellite radio unit, USB

device, iPod, BT audio, or Pandora® unit isnot equipped on the audio system.

l CD has not been inserted.The AUX mode is locked out unless youconnect a commercially available portableaudio unit (such as an MP3 player) to theauxiliary jack. Connect a portable audio unitor similar product on the market to theauxiliary jack to listen to music or audio overthe vehicle's speakers.

Playing selected track numbers

(When playing a CD)A desired track number on a CD can beplayed using voice recognition.Refer to Operating the Compact Disc(CD) Player on page 5-52.



3. Say: [Beep] “Play track”

4. Prompt: “What track number wouldyou like to play?”

5. Say: [Beep] “XXX (Ex. “15”) (Tracknumber)”

6. The selected track number is played.

Playing selected artist

(When playing a USB or iPod)Tracks from a desired artist on a USBdevice or iPod can be played using voicerecognition.Refer to How to use USB mode (Type B)on page 5-68.Refer to How to use iPodmode (Type B) on page 5-76.



3. Say: [Beep] “Play”

4. Prompt: “Would you like to play byArtist, Album, Playlist, or Genre?”

5. Say: [Beep] “Artist”

6. Prompt: “What artist would you liketo play?”

7. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex.“Michael”) (Artist name)”

8. The name spoken will be searched forin the USB device or iPod.If a contact is matched, go to Step 10.If multiple contacts are matched, go toStep 9.

9. Prompt: “Would you like to playXXXXX... (Choice 1)?”(Artist you would like to play)Say: [Beep] “Yes.” Then go to Step 10.(Artist you do not want to play)Say: [Beep] “No.” Then go to Step 9.(Maximum 3 times)

10. The tracks for the selected artist areplayed.

Playing selected album

(When playing a USB or iPod)The tracks from a desired album on aUSB device or iPod can be played usingvoice recognition.

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-93


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (364,1)

Refer to How to use USB mode (Type B)on page 5-68.Refer to How to use iPodmode (Type B) on page 5-76.





5. Say: [Beep] “Album”

6. Prompt: “What album would you liketo play?”

7. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “I am”)(Album name)”


9. Prompt: “Would you like to playXXXXX... (Choice 1)?”(Album you would like to play)Say: [Beep] “Yes.” Then go to Step 10.(Album you do not want to play)Say: [Beep] “No.” Then go to Step 9.(Maximum 3 times)

10. The tracks from the selected albumare played.

Playing selected playlist

(When playing a USB or iPod)The tracks from a desired playlist on aUSB device or iPod can be played usingvoice recognition.Refer to How to use USB mode (Type B)on page 5-68.Refer to How to use iPodmode (Type B) on page 5-76.



3. Say: [Beep] “Play”.


5. Say: [Beep] “Playlist”

6. Prompt: “What playlist would you liketo play?”

7. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Myfavorite”) (Playlist name)”


9. Prompt: “Would you like to playXXXXX... (Choice 1)?”(Playlist you would like to play)Say: [Beep] “Yes.” Then go to Step 10.(Playlist you do not want to play)Say: [Beep] “No.” Then go to Step 9.(Maximum 3 times)

10. The tracks from the selected playlistare played.

Playing selected genre

(When playing a USB or iPod)Tracks from a desired genre on a USBdevice or iPod can be played using voicerecognition.Refer to How to use USB mode (Type B)on page 5-68.Refer to How to use iPodmode (Type B) on page 5-76.





5. Say: [Beep] “Genre”

5-94

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (365,1)

6. Prompt: “What genre would you liketo play?”

7. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “Rock”)(Genre name)”


9. Prompt: “Would you like to playXXXXX... (Choice 1)?”(Genre you would like to play)Say: [Beep] “Yes.” Then go to Step 10.(Genre you do not want to play)Say: [Beep] “No.” Then go to Step 9.(Maximum 3 times)

10. Tracks from the selected genre areplayed.

Scan

(When playing a Radio, Sirius satelliteradio, CD, or BT audio (AVRCP1.4))The scan function for the radio, Siriussatellite radio, CD, or BT audio(AVRCP1.4) can be launched using voicerecognition.Refer to Operating the Radio on page5-40.Refer to Operating the Satellite Radio onpage 5-44.Refer to Operating the Compact Disc(CD) Player on page 5-52.Refer to How to Use the Bluetooth®Audio System on page 5-104.



3. Say: [Beep] “Scan (or Scan Off)”

4. Scan is performed or stopped.

Mute

Muting of the audio can be done usingvoice recognition.



3. Say: [Beep] “Mute (or Mute Off)”

4. Mute is performed or stopped.

Track search

(When playing a CD, USB, iPod, BTaudio (AVRCP1.0/1.3/1.4))The track up/down function can be runusing voice recognition.Refer to Operating the Compact Disc(CD) Player on page 5-52.Refer to How to use USB mode (Type B)on page 5-68.Refer to How to use iPod mode (Type B)on page 5-76.Refer to How to Use the Bluetooth®Audio System on page 5-104.

Track up



3. Say: [Beep] “Next track”

4. The next track is played.

Track down



3. Say: [Beep] “Previous track”

4. The previous track is played.

Folder search

(When playing BT audio (AVRCP1.4))The folder up/down function can be runusing voice recognition.

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-95


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (366,1)

Refer to How to Use the Bluetooth®Audio System on page 5-104.

Folder up



3. Say: [Beep] “Next folder”

4. The next folder is played.

Folder down



3. Say: [Beep] “Previous folder”

4. The previous folder is played.

Pause/Resume

(When playing a CD, USB, iPod, BTaudio (AVRCP1.0/1.3/1.4), Pandora®)Refer to Operating the Compact Disc(CD) Player on page 5-52.Refer to How to use USB mode (Type B)on page 5-68.Refer to How to use iPod mode (Type B)on page 5-76.Refer to How to Use the Bluetooth®Audio System on page 5-104.Refer to How to Use Pandora® on page5-106.

Pause



3. Say: [Beep] “Pause”

4. Playback is paused.

Resume playback



3. (When playing a CD, USB, iPod, BTaudio (AVRCP1.0/1.3/1.4))Say: [Beep] “Resume”(When playing Pandora®)Say: [Beep] “Play”

4. Playback is resumed.

Repeat

(When playing a CD, USB, iPod, BTaudio (AVRCP1.4))The repeat function can be run usingvoice recognition.Refer to Operating the Compact Disc(CD) Player on page 5-52.Refer to How to use USB mode (Type B)on page 5-68.Refer to How to use iPod mode (Type B)on page 5-76.Refer to How to Use the Bluetooth®Audio System on page 5-104.

(When playing a CD)



3. Say: [Beep] “Repeat (or Repeat Off)”

4. Repeat is performed or stopped.

(When playing a USB, iPod)



3. Say: [Beep] “Repeat”

4. Prompt: “Available repeat options areTrack and Off”

5. Say: [Beep] “Track (or Off)”

6. Track repeat is performed or stopped.

(When playing BT audio)


5-96

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (367,1)


3. Say: [Beep] “Repeat”

4. Prompt: “Available repeat options areTrack , Folder, and Off”

5. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX (Track, Folderor Off)”

6. If “Track” is spoken, track repeat isperformed.If “Folder” is spoken, folder repeat isperformed.If “Off” is spoken, repeat is stopped.

Shuffle

(When playing a CD, USB, iPod, BTaudio (AVRCP1.4))The shuffle function can be run usingvoice recognition.Refer to Operating the Compact Disc(CD) Player on page 5-52.Refer to How to use USB mode (Type B)on page 5-68.Refer to How to use iPod mode (Type B)on page 5-76.Refer to How to Use the Bluetooth®Audio System on page 5-104.

(When playing a CD)



3. Say: [Beep] “Shuffle (or Shuffle Off)”

4. Shuffle is performed or stopped.

(When playing a USB, iPod)



3. Say: [Beep] “Shuffle”

4. Prompt: “Available shuffle options areAlbum, Song, and Off”

5. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX (Album, Songor Off)”

6. If “Album” is spoken, album shuffle isperformed.If “Song” is spoken, song shuffle isperformed.If “Off” is spoken, shuffle is stopped.

(When playing BT audio)



3. Say: [Beep] “Shuffle”

4. Prompt: “Available shuffle options areFolder , All, and Off”

5. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX (Folder, All orOff)”

6. If “Folder” is spoken, folder shuffle isperformed.If “All” is spoken, device shuffle isperformed.If “Off” is spoken, shuffle is stopped.

Switching between display/non-displayof radio text information (U.S.A./Canada only)

(When playing FM Radio)

Switching between display/non-display ofradio text information is possible usingvoice recognition.Refer to Operating the Radio on page5-40.



3. Say: [Beep] “Radio text (or Radio textOFF)”

4. Radio text information is displayed/notdisplayed.

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-97


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (368,1)

Selection by specifying frequency

(When playing the Radio)

Selection by specifying the frequency ispossible using voice recognition.Refer to Operating the Radio on page5-40.



3. Say: [Beep] “Frequency”

4. Prompt: “What frequency would youlike?”

5. Say: [Beep] “XXX (Ex. 610)(Frequency)”

6. The specified frequency is selected.

Seek tuning function

(When playing the Radio)Seek tuning can be run using voicerecognition.Refer to Operating the Radio on page5-40.

Seek up



3. Say: [Beep] “Seek up”

4. Seek up is performed.

Seek down



3. Say: [Beep] “Seek down”

4. Seek down is performed.

Auto memory seek function

(When playing the Radio)The auto memory seek function can berun using voice recognition.Refer to Operating the Radio on page5-40.



3. Say: [Beep] “Auto memory seek”

4. Auto memory seek is performed.

Auto memory preset function

(When playing the Radio)Auto memory preset can be selected usingvoice recognition.Refer to Operating the Radio on page5-40.



3. Say: [Beep] “Auto memory preset”

4. Prompt: “Number, please”

5. Say: [Beep] “X (Ex. 3) (Presetnumber)”

6. The specified preset is selected.

Preset switching

(When playing the Radio, Siriussatellite radio)Radio stations programmed to the presetcan be selected using voice recognition.Refer to Operating the Radio on page5-40.Refer to Operating the Satellite Radio onpage 5-44.

Specify the preset number and select



5-98

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (369,1)

3. Say: [Beep] “Preset”

4. Prompt: “Say a preset numberbetween 1 and 6”

5. Say: [Beep] “X (Ex. 3) (Presetnumber)”

6. The specified preset is selected.

Next preset selection

(When playing the Radio)



3. Say: [Beep] “Next preset”

4. The next preset is selected.

Previous preset selection

(When playing the radio)



3. Say: [Beep] “Previous preset”

4. The previous preset is selected.

Switching channels

(When playing a Sirius satellite radio)Selection of the channel to be received ispossible using voice recognition.Refer to Operating the Satellite Radio onpage 5-44.

Select by specifying the channelnumber



3. Say: [Beep] “Channel”

4. Prompt: “What channel number wouldyou like?”

5. Say: [Beep] “XXX (Ex. 610) (Channelnumber)”

6. The specified channel is selected.

Selecting the next channel



3. Say: [Beep] “Next channel”

4. The next channel is selected.

Selecting the previous channel



3. Say: [Beep] “Previous channel”

4. The previous channel is selected.

Skip track function

(When playing Pandora®)The skip track function can be run usingvoice recognition.Refer to How to Use Pandora® on page5-106.



3. Say: [Beep] “Skip Track”

4. The next track is skipped.

Thumbs up function

(When playing Pandora®)The thumbs up function can be run usingvoice recognition.Refer to How to Use Pandora® on page5-106.



3. Say: [Beep] “Thumbs Up”

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-99


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (370,1)

4. This tells Pandora® that you like thistrack and helps to bring in more trackslike it to your station.

Thumbs down function

(When playing Pandora®)The thumbs down function can be runusing voice recognition.Refer to How to Use Pandora® on page5-106.



3. Say: [Beep] “Thumbs Down”

4. This tells Pandora® not to play thistrack.

Pandora® radio station selection

(When playing Pandora®)A Pandora® radio station can be selectedusing voice recognition.Refer to How to Use Pandora® on page5-106.



3. Say: [Beep] “Station”

4. Prompt: “Which Pandora® station youwould like?”

5. Say: [Beep] “XXXXX... (Ex. “90’sclassic”) (Station name)”

6. The system searches for the announcedradio station.If a contact is matched, go to Step 8.If multiple contacts are matched, go toStep 7.

7. Prompt: “Would you like to playXXXXX... (Choice 1)?”(Station you would like to play)Say: [Beep] “Yes.” Then go to Step 8.(Station you do not want to play)Say: [Beep] “No.” Then go to Step 7.(Maximum 3 times)

8. The specified radio station is selected.

Display of Pandora® radio station list

(When playing Pandora®)The Pandora® radio station list can bedisplayed using voice recognition.Refer to How to Use Pandora® on page5-106.



3. Say: [Beep] “List station”

4. The radio list is displayed.

Bookmark function

(When playing Pandora®)The bookmark function can be run usingvoice recognition.Refer to How to Use Pandora® on page5-106.



3. Say: [Beep] “Bookmark”

4. Prompt: “Would you like to bookmarkTrack, or artist?”

5. Say: [Beep] “Track (or Artist)”

6. Track or artist is bookmarked.

5-100

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (371,1)

qGracenote Database

The Gracenote media database is used to improve voice recognition of artist and albumnames with the Mazda Hands Free system. To make best use of the voice recognition,install the most recent database.

CAUTIONFor information related to the most recent Gracenote database which can be usedand how to install it, go to the Mazda Hands Free Website:http://www.mazdahandsfree.com

Introduction

Music recognition technology and related data are provided by Gracenote®. Gracenote isthe industry standard in music recognition technology and related content delivery. Formore information visit www.gracenote.com.

CD and music-related data from Gracenote, Inc., copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote.Gracenote Software, copyright © 2000 to present Gracenote. One or more patents ownedby Gracenote apply to this product and service. See the Gracenote website for a non-exhaustive list of applicable Gracenote patents. Gracenote, CDDB, MusicID, MediaVOCS,the Gracenote logo and logotype, and the “Powered by Gracenote” logo are eitherregistered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote in the United States and/or othercountries.

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-101


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (372,1)

Gracenote® End User License AgreementThis application or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California(“Gracenote”). The software from Gracenote (the “Gracenote Software”) enables thisapplication to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information,including name, artist, track, and title information (“Gracenote Data”) from online serversor embedded databases (collectively, “Gracenote Servers”) and to perform other functions.You may use Gracenote Data only by means of the intended End-User functions of thisapplication or device.You agree that you will use Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software, and GracenoteServers for your own personal non-commercial use only. You agree not to assign, copy,transfer or transmit the Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data to any third party. YOUAGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTESOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPTAS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN.You agree that your non-exclusive license to use the Gracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and Gracenote Servers will terminate if you violate these restrictions. If yourlicense terminates, you agree to cease any and all use of the Gracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves all rights in Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and the Gracenote Servers, including all ownership rights. Under nocircumstances will Gracenote become liable for any payment to you for any informationthat you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce its rights under thisAgreement against you directly in its own name.The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track queries for statistical purposes. Thepurpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to allow the Gracenote service tocount queries without knowing anything about who you are. For more information, see theweb page for the Gracenote Privacy Policy for the Gracenote service.The Gracenote Software and each item of Gracenote Data are licensed to you “AS IS.”Gracenote makes no representations or warranties, express or implied, regarding theaccuracy of any Gracenote Data from in the Gracenote Servers. Gracenote reserves theright to delete data from the Gracenote Servers or to change data categories for any causethat Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is made that the Gracenote Software orGracenote Servers are error-free or that functioning of Gracenote Software or GracenoteServers will be uninterrupted. Gracenote is not obligated to provide you with newenhanced or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the futureand is free to discontinue its services at any time.GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALLWARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED WARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, ANDNON-INFRINGEMENT. GRACENOTE DOES NOT WARRANT THE RESULTS THATWILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANYGRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANYCONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS ORLOST REVENUES.© 2000 to present. Gracenote, Inc.

5-102

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (373,1)

Updating the database

The Gracenote media database can be updated using USB device.

1. Connect a USB device containing the software for updating Gracenote.



4. Touch the on-screen button to scroll the display.When the display is scrolled to the end of the explanation, the on-screenbutton is displayed.

5. Touch the on-screen button. The update is initiated.


NOTEDo not switch the ignition off or disconnect the USB device while updating the database. Otherwise,data could be lost.

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-103


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (374,1)

Bluetooth® AudioApplicable Bluetooth® specificationVer. 2.0 or higher

Response profilel A2DP (Advanced Audio DistributionProfile) Ver. 1.0/1.2

l AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote ControlProfile) Ver. 1.0/1.3/1.4

A2DP is a profile which transmits onlyaudio to the Bluetooth® unit. If yourBluetooth® audio device corresponds onlyto A2DP, but not AVRCP, you cannotoperate it using the control panel of thevehicle's audio system. In this case, theBluetooth® audio device can be operatedby controlling the device itself, the sameas when a portable audio system withoutthe Bluetooth® communication function isconnected to the AUX terminal.

Function A2DPA2DP·AVRCP

Ver.1.0

Ver.1.3

Ver.1.4

Playback ― X X X

Pause ― X X X

File (Track)up/down

― X X X

Reverse ― ― X X

Fast-forward ― ― X X

Text display ― ― X X

Folder up/down ― ― ― X

Repeat ― ― ― X

Shuffle ― ― ― X

Scan ― ― ― X

X: Available―: Not available

NOTEl To make sure that your Bluetooth® audio

device is Ver. 1.0, 1.3 or 1.4, refer to theOwner's Manual for the Bluetooth® audiodevice.

l The battery consumption of Bluetooth®

audio devices is higher while Bluetooth® isconnected.

l If a general mobile phone device is USBconnected during music playback over theBluetooth® connection, the Bluetooth®

connection is disconnected. For this reason,you cannot have music playback over aBluetooth® connection and music playbackusing a USB connection at the same time.

l The system may not operate normallydepending on the Bluetooth® audio device.

qHow to Use the Bluetooth®Audio System

Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode

To listen to music or voice audio recordedto a Bluetooth® audio device, switch tothe Bluetooth® audio mode to operate theaudio device using the audio systemcontrol panel. Any Bluetooth® audiodevice must be programmed to thevehicle's Bluetooth® unit before it can beused.Refer to Bluetooth® Preparation on page5-81.


2. Turn on the Bluetooth® audio device'spower.Make sure that the “ ” symbol isdisplayed in the audio unit's display.

NOTESome Bluetooth® audio devices need a certainamount of time before the “ ” symbol isdisplayed in the audio unit's display.

5-104

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (375,1)

3. Press the audio button ( ) andthen touch the on-screen tab toswitch to the Bluetooth® audio modeand start playback.

NOTEl If the Bluetooth® audio device does not

begin playback, press the on-screenbutton.

l If the mode is switched from Bluetooth®

audio mode to another mode (radio mode),audio playback from the Bluetooth® audiodevice stops.

Playback

1. To listen to a Bluetooth® audio deviceover the vehicle's speaker system,switch the mode to Bluetooth® audiomode. (Refer to “Switching toBluetooth® audio mode”)

2. To stop playback, press the on-screen button.

3. Press the button again to resumeplayback.

Selecting a file (track)

Selects the next file (track)

Short-press the track up button ( ) ortouch the on-screen button.

Selects the beginning of the current file(track)

Short-press the track down button ( ) ortouch the on-screen button.

Fast-forward/Reverse (AVRCP Ver. 1.3or higher)

Fast-forward

Press and hold the fast-forward button( ) or touch and hold the on-screen button.

Reverse

Press and hold the reverse down button( ) or touch and hold the on-screen button.

Folder search (only AVRCP Ver. 1.4)

To change to the previous folder, touchthe on-screen button, or touch the

on-screen button to advance to thenext folder.

Music scan (only AVRCP Ver. 1.4)

This function scans the titles in a foldercurrently being played and plays 10seconds of each song to aid you in findinga song you want to listen to.


2. Touch the on-screen button againduring playback of the song which youwant to listen to continue the playbackfrom that point.

Repeat playback (only AVRCP Ver. 1.4)

Track repeat

Touch the on-screen button to playthe song during playback repeatedly. “ ”is displayed during playback.Touch the on-screen button twotimes while “ ” is displayed to cancel.

Folder repeat

Touch the on-screen button twotimes to play the songs in the folderrepeatedly. “ ” is displayed duringplayback.Touch the on-screen button while“ ” is displayed to cancel.

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-105


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (376,1)

Shuffle playback (only AVRCP Ver. 1.4)

Folder shuffle

Touch the on-screen button duringplayback to play the songs in the foldershuffle. “ ” is displayed duringplayback.Touch the on-screen button twotimes while “ ” is displayed to cancel.

Device shuffle

Touch the on-screen button twotimes during playback to play the songs inthe device shuffle. “ ” is displayedduring playback.Touch the on-screen button while“ ” is displayed to cancel.

Display scroll


qBluetooth® audio deviceinformation display

If a Bluetooth® audio device is connected,the following information is displayed inthe display.

AVRCPVer. lowerthan 1.3

AVRCPVer. 1.3

AVRCPVer. 1.4 orhigher

Device name X X X

Remainingbattery chargeof device

― X X

Title ― X X

Artist name ― X X

Album name ― X X

File number ― X X

Playback time ― X X

Folder number ― ― X

NOTESome information may not display dependingon the device, and if the information cannot bedisplayed, “No Song Name” is indicated.

qHow to Use Pandora®

What is Pandora®?

Pandora® is free personalized internetradio. Simply enter a favorite artist, track,genre, and Pandora® will create apersonalized station that plays their musicand more like it. Rate songs by givingthumbs-up and thumbs-down feedback tofurther refine your station, discover newmusic and help Pandora® play only musicyou love.* Pandora®, the Pandora® logo, and the

Pandora® trade dress are trademarks orregistered trademarks of PandoraMedia, Inc., used with permission.

NOTETo operate Pandora® from your Bluetooth®

device, perform the following in advance:l Create Pandora® account on the web.l Create Pandora® station using Pandora®

application.l Install Pandora® application on your

device.

Playback

1. To listen to Pandora®, touch theon-screen tab.

2. To stop playback, press the on-screen button.

3. Press the button again to resumeplayback.

Skip song

Press the on-screen button.

5-106

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (377,1)

NOTEl The skip function may not be available

depending on the device.l The number of skips is limited by

Pandora®.

Selection from station list

Selection can be made from aprogrammed radio station list.

1. Press the on-screen button.

2. Select the desired radio station.

NOTEWhen is selected, songs randomlyselected from the radio station list are played.

Thumbs up function

Press the on-screen button to tellPandora® “you like this track” and it helpsto bring in more tracks like it to yourstation.

Thumbs down function

Press the on-screen button to tellPandora® not to play this track.

NOTEIf the on-screen button is touched when theskip song function is running, the next song isskipped.

Bookmarking

You can bookmark song or artist to checkout later on the Web.

Bookmark the song name

Press the on-screen button on the rightside of the song name.

Bookmark the artist name

Press the on-screen button on the rightside of the artist name.

Display scroll

If a whole title cannot be displayed at onetime, touch the on-screen button onthe right side of the title.When the last character is displayed,touch the on-screen button to displaythe first character of the title.

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-107


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (378,1)

TroubleshootingBluetooth® does not operate under the following conditions. Check whether the followingconditions apply to your Bluetooth® device:l The device is not being operated correctly.l The device is not connected to the Bluetooth® unit equipped on the vehicle.l The device's battery is weak.l A device which interferes with radio wave reception has been placed in the vehicle.l The ignition switch has been turned off.If none of the above conditions apply, refer to the following to see if any of the problemsymptoms correspond to your device.If the problem cannot be resolved, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer or MazdaBluetooth® Hands-Free Customer Service.

Mazda Bluetooth® Hands-Free Customer Service

If you have any problems with Bluetooth®, contact with our toll-free customer servicecenter.l U.S.A.Phone: 800-430-0153 (Toll-free)Web: www.MazdaUSA.com/bluetooth

l CanadaPhone: 800-430-0153 (Toll-free)Web: www.mazdahandsfree.ca

l MexicoCenter of Attention to Client (CAC)Phone: 01-800-01-MAZDA (Toll-free)Web: www.mazdamexico.com.mx

5-108

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (379,1)

Device pairing, connection problems

Symptom Cause Solution method

Unable to perform pairing

―

First make sure the device iscompatible with the Bluetooth® unit,and then check whether theBluetooth® function and the FindMode/Visible setting*1 on the deviceare turned on. If pairing is still notpossible after this, contact anAuthorized Mazda Dealer or MazdaBluetooth® Hands-Free CustomerService.

Unable to perform pairing The Bluetooth® function and theFind Mode/Visible setting*1 on thedevice may turn off automaticallyafter a period of time has elapseddepending on the device.

Check whether the Bluetooth®

function and the Find Mode/Visiblesetting*1 on the device are turned onand pairing or reconnect.

Does not connect automaticallywhen starting the engine

Automatically connects, but thendisconnects suddenly

Disconnects intermittently The device is in a location in whichradio wave interference can occureasily, such as inside a bag in a rearseat, in a rear pocket of a pair ofpants.

Move the device to a location inwhich radio wave interference is lesslikely to occur.

*1 Setting which detects the existence of a device external to the Bluetooth® unit

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-109


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (380,1)

Voice recognition related problems


Poor voice recognition l Excessive, slow speech.l Excessive, forceful speech

(shouting).l Speaking before the beep sound

has ended.l Loud noise

(speaking or noise from outside/inside vehicle).

l Airflow from A/C is blowingagainst the microphone.

l Speaking in off-standardexpressions (dialect).

Regarding the causes indicated onthe left, be careful with how youspeak. In addition, when numbers arespoken in a sequence, recognitionability will improve if no stop isplaced between the numbers.

False recognition of numbers

Names in the phonebook are noteasily recognized

The Bluetooth® system is under acondition in which recognition isdifficult.

By carrying out the followingmeasures, the rate of recognition willimprove.l Clear memory from the

phonebook which is not usedvery often.

l Avoid shortened names, use fullnames.(Recognition improves the longerthe name is. By not using namessuch as “Mom”, “Dad”, recogni-tion will improve.)

You want to skip guidance―

Guidance can be skipped by quicklypressing and releasing the Talkbutton.

When the Talk button is pressed,voice recognition ends

The Talk button is pressed for toolong.

Operate the Talk button as follows:l Press the button and release it

within 0.7 seconds to start voicerecognition and skip theguidance.

l Press the button for longer than0.7 seconds to turn off voicerecognition or end aconversation.

Regarding problems with calls


When starting a call, vehicle noisefrom the other party can be heard

For about three seconds after startinga call, the Bluetooth® unit's NoiseSuppression function requires time toadapt to the call environment.

This does not indicate a problemwith the device.

The other party cannot be heard orthe speaker's voice is quiet

The volume is set at zero or low. Increase the volume.

5-110

Interior Features

Bluetooth®


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (381,1)

Other problems


The indication for the remainingbattery is different between thevehicle and the device

The indication method is differentbetween the vehicle and the device. ―

When a call is made from thevehicle, the telephone number isupdated in the incoming/outgoingcall record but the name does notappear

The number has not been registeredinto the phonebook.

If the number has been registeredinto the phonebook, theincoming/outgoing call record isupdated by the name in thephonebook when the engine isrestarted.

The cell phone does not synchronizewith the vehicle regarding theincoming/outgoing call record

Some types of cell phones do notsynchronize automatically.

Operate the cell phone forsynchronization.

It takes a long time to complete thefunction for changing the language

A maximum of 60 seconds isrequired.

―

Interior Features

Bluetooth®

5-111


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (382,1)

SunvisorsWhen you need a sunvisor, lower it foruse in front or swing it to the side.

Sunvisor

qSide Extension Sunvisorsí

The visor extender extends the sunvisor'srange of sun shading.To use, pull it out.

CAUTIONWhen moving the sunvisor, retractthe visor extender to its originalposition. Otherwise, the visorextender could hit the rearviewmirror.

qVanity Mirrors

To use the vanity mirror, lower thesunvisor.If your vehicle is equipped with a vanitymirror light, it will illuminate when youopen the cover.

5-112

Interior Features

íSome models.

Interior Equipment


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (383,1)

Interior LightsOverhead Lights

SwitchPosition

Overhead Lights

Light off

l Light is on when any door is openl Light is on or off when the

illuminated entry system is on

Light on

NOTEThe rear map lights also turn on and off whenthe overhead light switch is operated.

Front Map Lights

When the overhead light switch is in thedoor or off position, press the lens toilluminate the front map lights, and thenpress the lens again to turn them off.

NOTEThe front map lights will not turn off even if thelens is pressed in the following cases:l The overhead light switch is in the ON

position.l The overhead light switch is in the door

position with the door open.l The illuminated entry system is on.

Rear Map Lights

When the overhead light switch is in thedoor or off position, press the lens toilluminate a rear map light, and then pressthe lens again to turn it off.

NOTEl Once the rear map lights have been turned

off, they will turn on and off depending onthe position to which the overhead light isswitched.

l The rear map lights will not turn off even ifthe lens is pressed in the following cases:l The overhead light switch is ON.l The overhead light switch is in the door

position with the door open.l The illuminated entry system is on.

Interior Features

Interior Equipment

5-113


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (384,1)

Courtesy Lights

Turns on when any door is open or theilluminated entry system is on.

Courtesy light

qIlluminated Entry System

When the illuminated entry systemoperates, the overhead light (switch is inthe DOOR position) and the courtesylights turn on for:l About 30 seconds after the driver'sdoor is unlocked and the ignition isswitched off.

l About 15 seconds after all doors areclosed and the ignition is switched off.

l About 5 seconds after all doors areclosed and the ignition is switched offwhen the key is out of the vehicle.

l Illuminates for about 15 seconds whenthe ignition is returned from ACC toOFF.

The light also turns off when:l The ignition is switched on and alldoors are closed.

l The driver's door is locked.

NOTEl Battery saver

If any door is left open with the overheadlight switch in the DOOR position, or thetrunk lid is left open, the overhead light ortrunk light turns off after about 30 minutesto prevent battery depletion.

l The operation of the illuminated entrysystem can be changed.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.

5-114

Interior Features

Interior Equipment


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (385,1)

ClockThe time is displayed when the ignition isswitched to ACC or ON.

With Fully Automatic Type ClimateControl System

Clock

With Manual Type Climate ControlSystem

Clock

Time setting

1. Switch the ignition ACC or ON.

2. Adjust the time using the time settingbuttons ( , ).The hours advance while the timesetting button ( ) is pressed.The minutes advance while the timesetting button ( ) is pressed.

Time resetting


2. Press the :00 button.

3. When the button is pressed, the timewill be reset as follows:

(Example)12:01―12:29→12:0012:30―12:59→1:00

NOTEWhen the :00 button is pressed, the secondswill start at “00”.

Interior Features

Interior Equipment

5-115


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (386,1)

Accessory SocketsOnly use genuine Mazda accessories orthe equivalent requiring no greater than120 W (DC 12 V, 10 A).

Front

The ignition must be switched to ACC orON.

Center

The accessory socket can be usedregardless of whether the ignition is on oroff.

CAUTIONØ To prevent accessory socket

damage or electrical failure, payattention to the following:Ø Do not use accessories that

require more than 120 W (DC 12V, 10 A).

Ø Do not use accessories that arenot genuine Mazda accessoriesor the equivalent.

Ø Close the cover when theaccessory socket is not in use toprevent foreign objects andliquids from getting into theaccessory socket.

Ø Correctly insert the plug intothe accessory socket.

Ø Do not insert the cigarettelighter into the accessorysocket.

Ø Noise may occur on the audioplayback depending on the deviceconnected to the accessory socket.

Ø Depending on the deviceconnected to the accessory socket,the vehicle's electrical system maybe affected, which could cause thewarning light to illuminate.Disconnect the connected deviceand make sure that the problem isresolved. If the problem isresolved, disconnect the devicefrom the socket and switch theignition off. If the problem is notresolved, consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

NOTETo prevent discharging of the battery, do notuse the socket for long periods with the engineoff or idling.

5-116

Interior Features

Interior Equipment


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (387,1)

Connecting the accessory socket

1. Open the lid.

2. Pass the connection plug cord throughthe cutout of the console and insert theplug into the accessory socket.

Plug

Cup Holder

WARNINGNever use a cup holder to hold hotliquids while the vehicle is moving:

Using a cup holder to hold hot liquidswhile the vehicle is moving isdangerous. If the contents spill, youcould be scalded.

Do not put anything other than cups ordrink cans in cup holders:

Putting objects other than cups ordrink cans in a cup holder isdangerous.During sudden braking ormaneuvering, occupants could be hitand injured, or objects could bethrown around the vehicle, causinginterference with the driver and thepossibility of an accident. Only use acup holder for cups or drink cans.

qFront

To use the cup holder, open the centerconsole by pressing the lower center partof its cover.

Interior Features

Interior Equipment

5-117


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (388,1)

qRear

The rear cup holder is on the rear centerarmrest.

Bottle HolderBottle holders are on the inside of thedoors.

Bottle holder

CAUTIONDo not use the bottle holders forcontainers without caps. Thecontents may spill when the door isopened or closed.

5-118

Interior Features

Interior Equipment


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (389,1)

Storage Compartments

WARNINGKeep storage boxes closed whendriving:

Driving with the storage boxes openis dangerous. To reduce thepossibility of injury in an accident ora sudden stop, keep the storageboxes closed when driving.

Do not put articles in storage spaceswith no lid:

Putting articles in storage spaceswith no lid is dangerous as theycould be thrown around the cabin ifthe vehicle is suddenly acceleratedand cause injury depending on howthe article is stored.

CAUTIONDo not leave lighters or eyeglasses inthe storage boxes while parked underthe sun. A lighter could explode orthe plastic material in eyeglassescould deform and crack from hightemperature.

qOverhead Console

This console box is designed to storeeyeglasses or other accessories.Push and release to open.

qStorage Pocketí

To use, open the lid.

Interior Features

Interior Equipment

5-119íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (390,1)

qGlove Compartment

To open the glove compartment, pull thelatch toward you.

To close the glove compartment, firmlypress in the center of the glovecompartment lid.

qCenter Console

To open, pull the lower release handle.

Using the armrestí

CAUTIONØ When sliding the armrest, be

careful not to hit a drink cupplaced in a cup holder and spill itscontents. Remove cups or otherdrink containers from the cupholders before pulling out thearmrest.

Ø Before opening the center console,store the armrest first. Otherwise,the armrest or center console maybe damaged.

To use the armrest, slide it frontward.

To retract the armrest, slide it completelyto the rear.

5-120

Interior Features

íSome models.

Interior Equipment


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (391,1)

qCargo Sub-Compartmentí

Lift the trunk mat.

Cargo sub-compartment

Trunk mat

qRear Coat Hooks

WARNINGNever hang heavy or sharp objects onthe assist grips and coat hooks:

Hanging heavy or sharp-endedobjects such as a coat hanger fromthe assist grips or coat hooks isdangerous as they can fly off and hitan occupant in the cabin if a curtainair bag was to deploy, which couldresult in serious injury or death.

Always hang clothes on the coat hooksand the assist grips without hangers.

Coat hook

qLuggage Compartment

Golf bags can be carried in the luggagecompartment.Up to three golf bags can be carried in theluggage compartment.

Place each of the three golf bags into theluggage compartment with the bottom ofeach bag pointed to the left, and then setthe top of each bag so that it is pointed tothe right.

Interior Features

Interior Equipment

5-121íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (392,1)

NOTESome golf bags cannot fit depending on theirsize.

5-122

Interior Features

Interior Equipment


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (393,1)

6 Maintenance and Care

How to keep your Mazda in top condition.

Essential Information ................................................................... 6-2Introduction ............................................................................... 6-2

Scheduled Maintenance ................................................................ 6-4Scheduled Maintenance (U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico) .... 6-4Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico) ............................................. 6-9

Owner Maintenance ................................................................... 6-16Owner Maintenance Precautions ............................................. 6-16Hood ....................................................................................... 6-18Engine Compartment Overview .............................................. 6-20Engine Oil ............................................................................... 6-21Engine Coolant ....................................................................... 6-23Brake/Clutch Fluid .................................................................. 6-25Washer Fluid ........................................................................... 6-25Body Lubrication .................................................................... 6-26Wiper Blades ........................................................................... 6-27Battery ..................................................................................... 6-30Battery Replacement ............................................................... 6-32Tires ........................................................................................ 6-34Light Bulbs ............................................................................. 6-40Fuses ....................................................................................... 6-51

Appearance Care ........................................................................ 6-58Exterior Care ........................................................................... 6-58Interior Care ............................................................................ 6-63

6-1


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (394,1)

IntroductionBe extremely careful and prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your vehiclewhen using this manual for inspection and maintenance.

If you are unsure about any procedure it describes, we strongly urge you to have a reliableand qualified service shop perform the work, preferably an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Factory-trained Mazda technicians and genuine Mazda parts are best for your vehicle.Without this expertise and the parts that have been designed and made especially for yourMazda, inadequate, incomplete, and insufficient servicing may result in problems. Thiscould lead to vehicle damage or an accident and injuries.

For expert advice and quality service, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

To continue warranty eligibility and to protect your investment, it is your responsibility toproperly maintain your vehicle according to factory recommended schedules outlined inthis manual. As part of this you must keep your maintenance records, receipts, repair ordersand any other documents as evidence this maintenance was performed. You must presentthese documents, should any warranty coverage disagreement occur. Failure to do so canresult in your warranty being voided either in whole or in part.

This evidence may consist of the following:l The Mazda Scheduled Maintenance Record, refer to the Warranty Booklet, must becompletely filled out showing mileage, repair order number, date for each service, andsigned by a qualified automotive service technician who service vehicles.

l Original copies of repair orders or other receipts that include the mileage and date thevehicle was serviced. Each receipt should be signed by a qualified automotive servicetechnician.

l For self maintenance, a statement that you completed the maintenance yourself,displaying mileage and the date the work was performed. Also, receipts for thereplacement parts (fluid, filters, etc.) indicating the date and mileage must accompanythis statement.

NOTEIf you elect to perform maintenance yourself or have your vehicle serviced at a location other than anAuthorized Mazda Dealer, Mazda requires that all fluids, parts and materials must meet Mazdastandards for durability and performance as described in this manual.

Claims against the warranty resulting from lack of maintenance, as opposed to defectivematerials or authorized Mazda workmanship, will not be honored.

6-2

Maintenance and Care

Essential Information


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (395,1)

Any auto repair shop using parts equivalent to your Mazda's original equipment mayperform maintenance. But we recommend that it always be done by an AuthorizedMazda Dealer using genuine Mazda parts.


Essential Information

6-3


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (396,1)

Scheduled Maintenance (U.S.A., Canada, and Puerto Rico)Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditionsapply.l Repeated short-distance drivingl Driving in dusty conditionsl Driving with extended use of brakesl Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are usedl Driving on rough or muddy roadsl Extended periods of idling or low-speed operationl Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climatesl Driving in extremely hot conditionsl Driving in mountainous conditions continuallyIf any do apply, follow Schedule 2 (Canada and Puerto Rico residents follow Schedule 2).

NOTEAfter the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommendedintervals.

6-4


Scheduled Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (397,1)

qSchedule 1

Maintenance Interval

Number of months or kilometers (miles), whichever comes first

Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48

×1000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

×1000 miles 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60

ENGINE

Drive belts I

Engine oil R R R R R R R R

Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R

COOLING SYSTEM

Engine coolantFL22 type*1

Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; afterthat, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years

OthersReplace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that,

every 2 years

FUEL SYSTEM

Air filter R

Fuel lines and hoses*2 I I

Hoses and tubes for emission*2 I

IGNITION SYSTEM

Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)

CHASSIS and BODY

Brake lines, hoses and connections I I

Disc brakes I I I I

Tire (Rotation) Rotate every 12,000 km (7,500 miles)

Steering operation and linkages I I

Front and rear suspension, ball joints and wheelbearing axial play

I I

Driveshaft dust boots I I

Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T

Exhaust system and heat shields Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years

All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L



6-5


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (398,1)



Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48

×1000 km 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96

×1000 miles 7.5 15 22.5 30 37.5 45 52.5 60

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

Cabin air filter R R

Chart symbols:

I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.R: ReplaceL: LubricateT: Tighten

Remarks:

*1 Use FL22 type coolant in vehicles with the inscription “FL22” on the radiator cap itself or the surroundingarea. Use FL22 when replacing the coolant.

*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will notvoid your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed atthe recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.

6-6




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (399,1)

qSchedule 2



Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48

×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96

×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

ENGINE

Drive belts I

Engine oilPuerto Rico Replace every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 3 months

Others R R R R R R R R R R R R

Engine oil filter R R R R R R R R R R R R

COOLING SYSTEM


Replace at first 192,000 km (120,000 miles) or 10 years; afterthat, every 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 5 years

OthersReplace at first 96,000 km (60,000 miles) or 4 years; after that,

every 2 years

Engine coolant level I I I I I I I I I I I I

FUEL SYSTEM

Air filterPuerto Rico R R

Others R

Fuel lines and hoses*2 I I

Hoses and tubes for emission*2 I

IGNITION SYSTEM

Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km (75,000 miles)

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

Function of all lights I I I I I I I I I I I I

CHASSIS and BODY

Brake lines, hoses and connections I I

Brake and clutch fluid level I I I I I I I I I I I I

Disc brakes I I I I

Tire (Rotation) Rotate every 8,000 km (5,000 miles)

Tire inflation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I I I I I I I

Steering operation and linkages I I


I I

Driveshaft dust boots I I

Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T

Body condition*3

(for rust, corrosion and perforation)I I I I

Exhaust system and heat shields Inspect every 72,000 km (45,000 miles) or 5 years

All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L

Washer fluid level I I I I I I I I I I I I



6-7


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (400,1)



Months 4 8 12 16 20 24 28 32 36 40 44 48

×1000 km 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 72 80 88 96

×1000 miles 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60


Cabin air filter Replace every 40,000 km (25,000 miles) or 2 years

Chart symbols:


Remarks:


*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will notvoid your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed atthe recommended time or mileage/kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.

*3 Canada only.

6-8




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (401,1)

Scheduled Maintenance (Mexico)Follow Schedule 1 if the vehicle is operated mainly where none of the following conditionsapply.l Repeated short-distance drivingl Driving in dusty conditionsl Driving with extended use of brakesl Driving in areas where salt or other corrosive materials are usedl Driving on rough or muddy roadsl Extended periods of idling or low-speed operationl Driving for long periods in cold temperatures or extremely humid climatesl Driving in extremely hot conditionsl Driving in mountainous conditions continuallyIf any do apply, follow Schedule 2.

NOTEAfter the prescribed period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommendedintervals.



6-9


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (402,1)

qSchedule 1


Number of months or kilometers, whichever comes first

Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72

×1000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120

ENGINE

Drive belts I I I

Engine oil R R R R R R R R R R R R


COOLING SYSTEM

Cooling system I I I


Replace at first 200,000 km or 10 years; after that, every100,000 km or 5 years

Others Replace every 2 years

FUEL SYSTEM

Air filter R R R R R R

Fuel lines and hoses I*2 I*2 I

Hoses and tubes for emission I*2 I*2 I

Fuel filter Replace every 60,000 km

IGNITION SYSTEM

Spark plugs Replace every 120,000 km

CHASSIS and BODY

Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I

Brake and clutch fluid level I I I I I I I I I

Brake fluid R R R

Disc brakes I I I I I I I I I I I I

Tire (Rotation) Rotate every 10,000 km

Tire inflation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I I I I I I I

Steering operation and linkages I I I I I I I I I I I I


I I I I I I

Driveshaft dust boots I I I I I I

Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T T T T

Exhaust system and heat shields I I I I I I

All locks and hinges L L L L L L L L L L L L

Washer fluid level I I I I I I I I I I I I

6-10




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (403,1)



Months 6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72

×1000 km 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120


Cabin air filter R R R

Chart symbols:


Remarks:


*2 According to state/provincial and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on these items will notvoid your emissions warranties. However, Mazda recommends that all maintenance services be performed atthe recommended time or kilometer period to ensure long-term reliability.



6-11


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (404,1)

qSchedule 2



Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36

×1000 km 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60

ENGINE

Drive belts I



COOLING SYSTEM

Cooling system I





FUEL SYSTEM

Air filter C R C R C R

Fuel lines and hoses I*2

Hoses and tubes for emission I*2


IGNITION SYSTEM


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM


CHASSIS and BODY

Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I

Brake and clutch fluid level I I I I I

Brake fluid R

Disc brakes I I I I I I


Tire inflation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I

Steering operation and linkages I I I I I I


I I I

Driveshaft dust boots I I I

Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T

Exhaust system and heat shields I I I

All locks and hinges L L L L L L

Washer fluid level I I I I I I

6-12




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (405,1)



Months 3 6 9 12 15 18 21 24 27 30 33 36

×1000 km 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60



Chart symbols:

I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.R: ReplaceL: LubricateC: CleanT: Tighten

Remarks:





6-13


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (406,1)

(Cont.)



Months 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72

×1000 km 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120

ENGINE

Drive belts I I



COOLING SYSTEM

Cooling system I I





FUEL SYSTEM

Air filter C R C R C R

Fuel lines and hoses I*2 I

Hoses and tubes for emission I*2 I


IGNITION SYSTEM


ELECTRICAL SYSTEM


CHASSIS and BODY

Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I

Brake and clutch fluid level I I I I

Brake fluid R R

Disc brakes I I I I I I


Tire inflation pressure and tire wear I I I I I I

Steering operation and linkages I I I I I I


I I I

Driveshaft dust boots I I I

Bolts and nuts on chassis and body T T T

Exhaust system and heat shields I I I

All locks and hinges L L L L L L

Washer fluid level I I I I I I

6-14




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (407,1)



Months 39 42 45 48 51 54 57 60 63 66 69 72

×1000 km 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100 105 110 115 120



Chart symbols:

I: Inspect: Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, fill up, or replace if necessary.R: ReplaceL: LubricateC: CleanT: Tighten

Remarks:





6-15


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (408,1)

Owner Maintenance PrecautionsThe owner or a qualified service technician should make these vehicle inspections at theindicated intervals to ensure safe and dependable operation.

Bring any problem to the attention of an Authorized Mazda Dealer or qualified servicetechnician as soon as possible.

When Refueling

l Brake and clutch fluid level (page 6-25)l Engine coolant level (page 6-23)l Engine oil level (page 6-22)l Washer fluid level (page 6-25)

At Least Monthly

Tire inflation pressures (page 6-35)

At Least Twice a Year (For Example, Every Spring and Fall)

You can do the following scheduled maintenance items if you have some mechanicalability and a few basic tools and if you closely follow the directions in this manual.l Engine coolant (page 6-23)l Engine oil (page 6-21)

Improper or incomplete service may result in problems. This section gives instructions onlyfor items that are easy to perform.

As explained in the Introduction (page 6-2), several procedures can be done only by aqualified service technician with special tools.

Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage.Refer to Introduction (page 6-2) for owner's responsibility in protecting your investment.For details, read the separate Mazda Warranty statement provided with the vehicle. If youare unsure about any servicing or maintenance procedure, have it done by an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

There are strict environmental laws regarding the disposal of waste oil and fluids. Pleasedispose of your waste properly and with due regard to the environment.

We recommend that you entrust the oil and fluid changes of your vehicle to an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

6-16


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (409,1)

WARNINGDo not perform maintenance work if you lack sufficient knowledge and experience orthe proper tools and equipment to do the work. Have maintenance work done by aqualified technician:

Performing maintenance work on a vehicle is dangerous if not done properly. Youcan be seriously injured while performing some maintenance procedures.

If you must run the engine while working under the hood, make certain that youremove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and allneckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or coolingfan which may turn on unexpectedly:

Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It becomes evenmore dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing.Either can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury.

Switch the ignition to off and make sure the fan is not running beforeattempting to work near the cooling fan:

Working near the cooling fan when it is running is dangerous. The fan couldcontinue running indefinitely even if the engine has stopped and the enginecompartment temperature is high. You could be hit by the fan and seriously injured.

Do not leave items in the engine compartment:After you have finished checking or doing servicing in the engine compartment, donot forget and leave items such as tools or rags in the engine compartment.Tools or other items left in the engine compartment could cause engine damage or afire leading to an unexpected accident.


Owner Maintenance

6-17


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (410,1)

Hood

WARNINGAlways check that the hood is closedand securely locked:

A hood that is not closed andsecurely locked is dangerous as itcould fly open while the vehicle ismoving and block the driver's visionwhich could result in a seriousaccident.

qOpening the Hood

1. With the vehicle parked, pull therelease handle to unlock the hood.

Release handle

2. Insert your hand into the hood opening,slide the latch lever to the right, and liftup the hood.

Lever

NOTEThe lever is located a little to the left of centerwhen facing the vehicle.

3. Grasp the support rod in the paddedarea and secure it in the support rodhole indicated by the arrow to hold thehood open.

Pad

ClipClip

Support rod

6-18


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (411,1)

qClosing the Hood

1. Check under the hood area to makecertain all filler caps are in place andall loose items (e.g. tools, oilcontainers, etc.) have been removed.

2. Lift the hood, grasp the padded area onthe support rod, and secure the supportrod in the clip. Verify that the supportrod is secured in the clip before closingthe hood.

ClipClip

Clip

3. Lower the hood slowly to a height ofabout 20 cm (7.9 in) above its closedposition and then let it drop.

CAUTIONWhen closing the hood, do not pushit excessively such as by applyingyour weight. Otherwise, the hoodcould be deformed.


Owner Maintenance

6-19


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (412,1)

Engine Compartment Overview

Windshield washer fluid reservoir Brake/Clutch fluid reservoir

Engine oil dipstick Battery Fuse block

Cooling system cap Engine coolant reservoir

Engine oil-filler cap

6-20


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (413,1)

Engine OilNOTEChanging the engine oil should be performedby an Authorized Mazda Dealer.Refer to Introduction (page 6-2) for owner'sresponsibility in protecting your investment.

qRecommended Oil

U.S.A. and CANADA

Use SAE 0W-20 engine oil.Mazda Genuine Oil is used in your Mazdavehicle. Mazda Genuine 0W-20 Oil isrequired to achieve optimum fueleconomy.

For maintenance service, Mazdarecommends Mazda Genuine Parts andCastrol® (U.S.A. only).

(ILSAC)

Only use SAE 0W-20 oil“Certified For Gasoline Engines” by theAmerican Petroleum Institute (API).Oil with this trademark symbol conformsto the current engine and emission systemprotection standards and fuel economyrequirements of the InternationalLubricant Standardization and ApprovalCommittee (ILSAC), comprised of U.S.and Japanese automobile manufacturers.

806040200–40 –20

30

120100

504020100–10–20–30–40

Except U.S.A. and CANADA

Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil.Oil container labels provide importantinformation.A chief contribution this type of oil makesto fuel economy is reducing the amount offuel necessary to overcome enginefriction.

For maintenance service, Mazdarecommends Mazda Genuine Parts andCastrol® (Mexico only).


Owner Maintenance

6-21


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (414,1)

(ILSAC)

(Mexico)Use SAE 5W-30 engine oil. If SAE 5W-30 engine oil is not available, use SAE5W-20 engine oil.

The quality designation SM, or ILSACmust be on the label.

806040200–40 –20

30

120100

504020100–10–20–30–40

qInspecting Engine Oil Level

1. Be sure the vehicle is on a levelsurface.

2. Warm up the engine to normaloperating temperature.

3. Turn it off and wait at least 5 minutesfor the oil to return to the oil pan.

4. Pull out the dipstick, wipe it clean, andreinsert it fully.

Full

OK

Low

5. Pull it out again and examine the level.The level is normal if it is betweenLow and Full.If it is near or below Low, add enoughoil to bring the level to Full.

CAUTIONDo not add engine oil over Full. Thismay cause engine damage.

6. Make sure the O-ring on the dipstick ispositioned properly before reinsertingthe dipstick.

7. Reinsert the dipstick fully.

6-22


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (415,1)

Engine Coolant

qInspecting Coolant Level

WARNINGDo not use a match or live flame in theengine compartment. DO NOT ADDCOOLANT WHEN THE ENGINE IS HOT:

A hot engine is dangerous. If theengine has been running, parts of theengine compartment can becomevery hot. You could be burned.Carefully inspect the engine coolantin the coolant reservoir, but do notopen it.

Switch the ignition to off andmake sure the fan is not running beforeattempting to work near the coolingfan:

Working near the cooling fan when itis running is dangerous. The fancould continue running indefinitelyeven if the engine has stopped andthe engine compartment temperatureis high. You could be hit by the fanand seriously injured.

Do not remove either coolingsystem cap when the engine andradiator are hot:

When the engine and radiator arehot, scalding coolant and steam mayshoot out under pressure and causeserious injury.

NOTEChanging the coolant should be done by anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

Inspect the antifreeze protection andcoolant level in the coolant reservoir atleast once a year―at the beginning of thewinter season―and before travelingwhere temperatures may drop belowfreezing.

Inspect the condition and connections ofall cooling system and heater hoses.Replace any that are swollen ordeteriorated.

The coolant should be at full in theradiator and between the F and L markson the coolant reservoir when the engineis cool.

If it is at or near L, add enough coolant tothe coolant reservoir to provide freezingand corrosion protection and to bring thelevel to F.Securely tighten the coolant reservoir tankcap after adding coolant.


Owner Maintenance

6-23


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (416,1)

CAUTIONØ Radiator coolant will damage

paint.Rinse it off quickly if spilled.

Ø Use only soft (demineralized)water in the coolant mixture.Water that contains minerals willcut down on the coolant'seffectiveness.

Ø Do not add only water. Alwaysadd a proper coolant mixture.

Ø The engine has aluminum partsand must be protected by anethylene-glycol-based coolant toprevent corrosion and freezing.

Ø DO NOT USE coolants ContainingAlcohol, methanol, Borate orSilicate.These coolants could damage thecooling system.

Ø DO NOT MIX alcohol or methanolwith the coolant. This coulddamage the cooling system.

Ø Do not use a solution thatcontains more than 60%antifreeze.This would reduce effectiveness.

NOTEIf the “FL22” mark is shown on or near thecooling system cap, it is recommended to useMazda Genuine FL22 engine coolant (page6-4).

If the coolant reservoir is empty or newcoolant is required frequently, consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

6-24


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (417,1)

Brake/Clutch Fluid

qInspecting Brake/Clutch Fluid Level

WARNINGIf the brake/clutch fluid level is low,have the brakes inspected:

A low brake/clutch fluid level isdangerous.A low level could indicate brakelining wear or a brake system leakwhich could cause the brakes to failand lead to an accident.

The brakes and clutch draw fluid from thesame reservoir.Inspect the fluid level in the reservoirregularly. It should be kept between theMAX and MIN lines.The level normally drops withaccumulated distance, a conditionassociated with wear of brake and clutchlinings. If it is excessively low, have thebrake/clutch system inspected by anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

Washer Fluid

qInspecting Washer Fluid Level

WARNINGUse only windshield washer fluid orplain water in the reservoir:

Using radiator antifreeze as washerfluid is dangerous. If sprayed on thewindshield, it will dirty thewindshield, affect your visibility, andcould result in an accident.

Using Washer Fluid Without Anti-freezeProtection in Cold Weather:

Operating your vehicle intemperatures below 4 degrees C (40degrees F) using washer fluid withoutanti-freeze protection is dangerousas it could cause impaired windshieldvision and result in an accident. Incold weather, always use washerfluid with anti-freeze protection.

NOTEState or local regulations may restrict the useof volatile organic compounds (VOCs), whichare commonly used as anti-freeze agents inwasher fluid. A washer fluid with limited VOCcontent should be used only if it providesadequate freeze resistance for all regions andclimates in which the vehicle will be operated.


Owner Maintenance

6-25


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (418,1)

Inspect fluid level in the washer fluidreservoir; add fluid if necessary.

L

Use plain water if washer fluid isunavailable.But use only washer fluid in cold weatherto prevent it from freezing.

Body LubricationAll moving points of the body, such asdoor and hood hinges and locks, shouldbe lubricated each time the engine oil ischanged. Use a nonfreezing lubricant onlocks during cold weather.

Make sure the hood's secondary latchkeeps the hood from opening when theprimary latch is released.

6-26


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (419,1)

Wiper Blades

CAUTIONØ Hot waxes applied by automatic

car washers have been known toaffect the wiper's ability to cleanwindows.

Ø To prevent damage to the wiperblades, do not use gasoline,kerosene, paint thinner, or othersolvents on or near them.

Ø When the wiper lever is in theAUTO position and the ignition isswitched ON, the wipers maymove automatically in thefollowing cases:Ø If the windshield above the rain

sensor is touched.Ø If the windshield above the rain

sensor is wiped with a cloth.Ø If the windshield is struck with

a hand or other object.Ø If the rain sensor is struck with

a hand or other object frominside the vehicle.

Be careful not to pinch hands orfingers as it may cause injury, ordamage the wipers. Whenwashing or servicing your Mazda,make sure the wiper lever is in theOFF position.

Contamination of either the windshield orthe blades with foreign matter can reducewiper effectiveness. Common sources areinsects, tree sap, and hot wax treatmentsused by some commercial car washes.

If the blades are not wiping properly,clean the window and blades with a goodcleaner or mild detergent; then rinsethoroughly with clean water. Repeat ifnecessary.

qReplacing Windshield Wiper Blades

When the wipers no longer clean well, theblades are probably worn or cracked.Replace them.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the wiper armsand other components, do not try tosweep the wiper arm by hand.

NOTETo prevent damage to the wiper arm bladeswhen raising both the driver and passengerside wiper arms, raise the driver side wiperarm first. Conversely, when setting down thewiper arms, set the passenger side wiper armdown first.

1. Raise the wiper arm.

2. Open the clip and slide the bladeassembly in the direction of the arrow.


Owner Maintenance

6-27


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (420,1)

3. Tilt the blade assembly and remove itfrom the arm.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the windshieldlet the wiper arm down easily, do notlet it slap down on the windshield.

4. Pull down the blade rubber and slide itout of blade holder.

5. Remove the metal stiffeners from eachblade rubber and install them in thenew blade.

CAUTIONØ Do not bend or discard the

stiffeners. You need to use themagain.

Ø If the metal stiffeners areswitched, the blade's wipingefficiency could be reduced.So do not use the driver's sidemetal stiffeners on the passenger'sside, or vice versa.

Ø Be sure to reinstall the metalstiffeners in the new blade rubberso that the curve is the same as itwas in the old blade rubber.

6-28


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (421,1)

6. Carefully insert the new blade rubber.Then install the blade assembly in thereverse order of removal.


Owner Maintenance

6-29


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (422,1)

Battery

WARNINGWash hands after handling the battery and related accessories:

Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Read the following precautions carefully before using the battery or inspectingto ensure safe and correct handling:

Always wear eye protection when working near the battery:Working without eye protection is dangerous. Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACIDwhich could cause blindness if splashed into your eyes. Also, hydrogen gas producedduring normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode.

Wear eye protection and protective gloves to prevent contact with batteryfluid:

Spilled battery fluid is dangerous.Battery fluid contains SULFURIC ACID which could cause serious injuries if it gets ineyes, or on the skin or clothing. If this happens, immediately flush your eyes withwater for 15 minutes or wash your skin thoroughly and get medical attention.

Always keep batteries out of the reach of children:Allowing children to play near batteries is dangerous. Battery fluid could causeserious injuries if it gets in the eyes or on the skin.

Keep flames and sparks away from open battery cells and do not allow metaltools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( ) terminal of the battery whenworking near a battery. Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact the vehiclebody:

Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, producedduring normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. Anexploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. Keep all flames includingcigarettes and sparks away from open battery cells.

6-30


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (423,1)

Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open battery cells:Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, producedduring normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. Anexploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.

NOTEBefore performing battery maintenance, remove the battery cover by pulling the tab.

Tab

qBattery Maintenance

To get the best service from a battery:l Keep it securely mounted.l Keep the top clean and dry.l Keep terminals and connections clean,tight, and coated with petroleum jellyor terminal grease.

l Rinse off spilled electrolyteimmediately with a solution of waterand baking soda.

l If the vehicle will not be used for anextended time, disconnect the batterycables and charge the battery every sixweeks.

When replacing the battery, refer to thespecification charts (page 9-4).


Owner Maintenance

6-31


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (424,1)

Battery ReplacementIf the buttons on the transmitter areinoperable and the operation indicatorlight does not flash, the battery may bedead.Replace with a new battery before thetransmitter becomes unusable.

CAUTIONØ Make sure the battery is installed

correctly. Battery leakage couldoccur if it is not installed correctly.

Ø When replacing the battery, becareful not to touch any of theinternal circuitry and electricalterminals, bend the electricalterminals, or get dirt in thetransmitter as the transmittercould be damaged.

Ø There is the danger of explosion ifthe battery is not correctlyreplaced.

Ø Dispose of used batteriesaccording to the followinginstructions.Ø Insulate the plus and minus

terminals of the battery usingcellophane or equivalent tape.

Ø Never disassemble.Ø Never throw the battery into

fire or water.Ø Never deform or crush.

Ø Replace only with the same typebattery (CR2025 or equivalent).

The following conditions indicate that thebattery power is low:l The KEY indicator light (green) flashesin the instrument cluster for about 30seconds after the engine is turned off(for vehicles with a type A meter,messages are displayed in theinstrument cluster).

l The system does not operate and theoperation indicator light on thetransmitter does not flash when thebuttons are pressed.

l The system's operational range isreduced.

Replacing the battery at an AuthorizedMazda Dealer is recommended to preventdamage to the key. If replacing the batteryby yourself, follow the instruction below.

Replacing the key battery

1. Pull out the auxiliary key.

2. Insert a small, flathead screwdriver intothe groove shown in the figure androtate the screwdriver to open the coverslightly.

6-32


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (425,1)

3. Insert the small, flathead screwdriverinto the gap between the cover and thetransmitter, and then rotate thescrewdriver to detach the cover.

4. Remove the battery cap, then removethe battery.

5. Insert a new battery with the positivepole facing up, and then cover thebattery with the battery cap.

6. Close the cover.

7. Reinsert the auxiliary key.


Owner Maintenance

6-33


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (426,1)

CAUTIONØ Be careful not to allow the rubber

ring shown in the figure to bescratched or damaged.

Ø If the rubber ring detaches,reattach it before inserting a newbattery.

Rubber ring

TiresFor reasons of proper performance, safety,and better fuel economy, always maintainrecommended tire inflation pressures andstay within the recommended load limitsand weight distribution.

WARNINGUsing Different Tire Types:

Driving your vehicle with differenttypes of tires is dangerous. It couldcause poor handling and poorbraking; leading to loss of control.Except for the limited use of thetemporary spare tire, use only thesame type tires (radial, bias-belted,bias-type) on all four wheels.

Using Wrong-Sized Tires:Using any other tire size than what isspecified for your Mazda (page 9-7) isdangerous. It could seriously affectride, handling, ground clearance, tireclearance, and speedometercalibration. This could cause you tohave an accident. Use only tires thatare the correct size specified for yourMazda.

6-34


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (427,1)

qTire Inflation Pressure

WARNINGAlways inflate the tires to the correctpressure:

Overinflation or underinflation oftires is dangerous. Adverse handlingor unexpected tire failure could resultin a serious accident.Refer to Tires on page 9-7.

Use only a Mazda-genuine tire valvecap:

Use of a non-genuine part isdangerous as the correct tire airpressure cannot be maintained if thetire valve becomes damaged. If thevehicle is driven under this condition,the tire air pressure will decreasewhich could result in a seriousaccident. Do not use any part for thetire valve cap that is not a Mazda-genuine part.

Inspect all tire pressures monthly(including the spare) when the tires arecold. Maintain recommended pressuresfor the best ride, handling, and minimumtire wear.Refer to the specification charts (page9-7).After adjusting the tire pressure,initialization of the tire pressuremonitoring system is necessary to makethe system operates normally.Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemInitialization on page 4-120.

NOTEl Always check tire pressure when tires are

cold.l Warm tires normally exceed recommended

pressures. Do not release air from warmtires to adjust the pressure.

l Underinflation can cause reduced fueleconomy, uneven and accelerated tire wear,and poor sealing of the tire bead, whichwill deform the wheel and cause separationof tire from rim.

l Overinflation can produce a harsh ride,uneven and accelerated tire wear, and agreater possibility of damage from roadhazards.Keep your tire pressure at the correctlevels. If one frequently needs inflating,have it inspected.

qTire Rotation

WARNINGRotate tires periodically:

Irregular tire wear is dangerous. Toequalize tread wear for maintaininggood performance in handling andbraking, rotate the tires according tothe scheduled maintenance charts.Refer to Scheduled Maintenance onpage 6-4.


Owner Maintenance

6-35


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (428,1)

During rotation, inspect them for correctbalance.

Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY) spare tire in rotation.

Forward

Also, inspect them for uneven wear anddamage. Abnormal wear is usually causedby one or a combination of the following:

l Incorrect tire pressurel Improper wheel alignmentl Out-of-balance wheell Severe braking

After rotation, inflate all tire pressures tospecification (page 9-7) and inspect thelug nuts for tightness.After adjusting the tire pressure,initialization of the tire pressuremonitoring system is necessary to makethe system operates normally.Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemInitialization on page 4-120.

CAUTIONRotate unidirectional tires and radialtires that have an asymmetrical treadpattern or studs only from front torear, not from side to side. Tireperformance will be reduced ifrotated from side to side.

qReplacing a Tire

WARNINGAlways use tires that are in goodcondition:

Driving with worn tires is dangerous.Reduced braking, steering, andtraction could result in an accident.

Replace all four tires at the same time:Replacing just one tire is dangerous.It could cause poor handling andpoor braking resulting in loss ofvehicle control. Mazda stronglyrecommends that you replace all fourtires at the same time.

If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicatorwill appear as a solid band across thetread.Replace the tire when this happens.

New tread

Tread wear indicator

Worn tread

You should replace the tire before theband crosses the entire tread.After adjusting the tire pressure,initialization of the tire pressuremonitoring system is necessary to makethe system operates normally.Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring SystemInitialization on page 4-120.

6-36


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (429,1)

NOTETires degrade over time, even when they arenot being used on the road. It is recommendedthat tires generally be replaced when they are6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climatesor frequent high loading conditions canaccelerate the aging process. You shouldreplace the spare tire when you replace theother road tires due to the aging of the sparetire. The period in which the tire wasmanufactured (both week and year) isindicated by a 4-digit number.Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-24.

qTemporary Spare Tireí

Inspect the temporary spare tire at leastmonthly to make sure it is properlyinflated and stored.

NOTEThe temporary spare tire condition graduallydeteriorates even if it has not been used.

The temporary spare tire is easier tohandle because of its construction whichis lighter and smaller than a conventionaltire. This tire should be used only for anemergency and only for a short distance.

Use the temporary spare tire only until theconventional tire is repaired, which shouldbe as soon as possible.

Refer to Tires on page 9-7.

CAUTIONØ Do not use your temporary spare

tire rim with a snow tire or aconventional tire. Neither willproperly fit and could damageboth tire and rim.

Ø The temporary spare tire has atread life of less than 5,000 km(3,000 miles). The tread life maybe shorter depending on drivingconditions.

Ø The temporary spare tire is forlimited use, however, if the treadwear solid-band indicatorappears, replace the tire with thesame type of temporary spare(page 6-37).

NOTETires degrade over time, even when they arenot being used on the road. It is recommendedthat tires generally be replaced when they are6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climatesor frequent high loading conditions canaccelerate the aging process. You shouldreplace the spare tire when you replace theother road tires due to the aging of the sparetire. The period in which the tire wasmanufactured (both week and year) isindicated by a 4-digit number.Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-24.

qReplacing a Wheel

WARNINGAlways use wheels of the correct sizeon your vehicle:

Using a wrong-sized wheel isdangerous. Braking and handlingcould be affected, leading to loss ofcontrol and an accident.


Owner Maintenance

6-37íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (430,1)

CAUTIONA wrong-sized wheel may adverselyaffect:Ø Tire fitØ Wheel and bearing lifeØ Ground clearanceØ Snow-chain clearanceØ Speedometer calibrationØ Headlight aimØ Bumper heightØ Tire Pressure Monitoring System

When replacing a wheel, make sure thenew one is the same as the original factorywheel in diameter, rim width, and offset(inset/outset).

Proper tire balancing provides the bestriding comfort and helps reduce treadwear. Out-of-balance tires can causevibration and uneven wear, such ascupping and flat spots.

6-38


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (431,1)

MEMO

6-39


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (432,1)

Light Bulbs

Overhead lights/ Front map lights

Vanity mirror lights

Headlights (Low/High beam)

Daytime running lights/ Parking lights

Headlights (Low beam)

Headlights (High beam)/ Daytime running lights

Front fog lightsFront fog lights

Front turn signal lights/ Front side-marker lights

Front turn signal lights/Front side-marker lights

Parking lights

Brake lights/Taillights

Rear side-marker lights

Rear turn signal lights

Taillights (Trunk lid side)

Reverse lights

High-mount brake light

License plate lights

Trunk lightRear map lights

Side turn signal lights

Courtesy lights

Side turn signal lights

Courtesy lights

With Xenon Fusion Headlights With Halogen Headlights

Overhead lights/ Front map lights

Vanity mirror lights

Some models.

6-40


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (433,1)

WARNINGDo not replace the xenon fusion bulbsyourself:

Replacing the xenon fusion bulbsyourself is dangerous. Because thexenon fusion bulbs require highvoltage, you could receive an electricshock if the bulbs are handledincorrectly. Consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer when the replacementis necessary.

Never touch the glass portion of ahalogen bulb with your bare hands andalways wear eye protection whenhandling or working around the bulbs:

When a halogen bulb breaks, it isdangerous. These bulbs containpressurized gas. If one is broken, itwill explode and serious injuriescould be caused by the flying glass.If the glass portion is touched withbare hands, body oil could cause thebulb to overheat and explode whenlit.

Always keep halogen bulbs out of thereach of children:

Playing with a halogen bulb isdangerous. Serious injuries could becaused by dropping a halogen bulbor breaking it some other way.

NOTEl To replace the bulb, contact an Authorized

Mazda Dealer.l If the halogen bulb is accidentally touched,

it should be cleaned with rubbing alcoholbefore being used.

l Use the protective cover and carton for thereplacement bulb to dispose of the old bulbpromptly and out of the reach of children.

qReplacing Exterior Light Bulbs

Headlights (With xenon fusionheadlights)

Low/High beam bulbs

You cannot replace the low/high beambulbs by yourself. The bulbs must bereplaced at an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Headlights (With halogen headlights)

Low-beam bulbs

1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,and the headlight switch is off.

2. If you are changing the right bulb, startthe engine, turn the steering wheel allthe way to the left, and turn off engine.If you are changing the left bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

3. Pull the center of each plastic retainerand remove the retainers.

Removal

Installation


Owner Maintenance

6-41


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (434,1)

4. Turn the screw counterclockwise andremove it, and then partially peel backthe mudguard.

5. Disconnect the connector from the unitby pressing the tab on the connectorwith your finger and pulling theconnector downward.

6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly toremove it. Carefully remove the bulbfrom its socket in the reflector bygently pulling it straight backward outof the socket.

7. Install the new bulb in the reverse orderof the removal procedure.

High-beam bulbs/Daytime runninglights

(Left side)


2. Lift the hood.

3. Remove the clip.

6-42


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (435,1)

4. Move the air cleaner cover and create aspace large enough to work in.




(Right side)


2. Lift the hood.

3. Disconnect the clip.

Clip


Owner Maintenance

6-43


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (436,1)

4. Remove the windshield washer fluidreservoir and bolts.

Windshield washer fluid reservoir

Bolt

Guide

5. Remove the guide.

Guide




Daytime running lights/Parking lights(With xenon fusion headlights)

Due to the complexity and difficulty ofthe procedure, the LED bulbs must bereplaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTELED bulb replacement is not possible becauseit is built into the unit. Replace the unit.

Front turn signal lights/Front side-marker lights, Parking lights (Withhalogen headlights)



6-44


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (437,1)


Removal

Installation


5. Turn the socket and bulb assemblycounterclockwise and remove it.

6. Disconnect the bulb from the socket.


Parking lights (With halogenheadlights)


Front fog lightsí




Owner Maintenance

6-45íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (438,1)


Removal

Installation



6. Turn the socket and bulb assembly toremove it. Carefully remove the bulbfrom its socket in the reflector bygently pulling it straight back out of thesocket.


Brake lights/Taillights, High-mountbrake light, Side-turn signal lights

Due to the complexity and difficulty ofthe procedure, the LED bulbs must bereplaced by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

6-46


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (439,1)

NOTELED bulb replacement is not possible becauseit is built into the unit. Replace the unit.

Rear turn signal lights, Rear side-marker lights

1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,and the turn signal switch is off.

2. Lift the trunk mat.

3. (Left side)Pull the center of each plastic retainerand remove the retainers and thepocket.(Right side)Remove the pocket.

(Left side)

Removal

Installation

(Right side)

4. Pull the center of each plastic retainerand remove the retainers and the trunkend trim.

Removal

Installation

5. Pull the center of each plastic retainerand remove the retainers and the trunkside trim.




Owner Maintenance

6-47


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (440,1)

Rear turn signal lights

Rear side-marker lights


Taillights (Trunk lid side), Reverselights


2. Pull the center of each plastic retainerand remove the retainers and the trunklid trim.

Removal

Installation

3. (Reverse lights)Disconnect the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pressing the tab onthe connector with your finger andpulling the connector.



6-48


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (441,1)

Taillights (Trunk lid side)

Reverse lights


License plate lights


2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver with a softcloth to prevent damage to the lens,and then remove the lens by carefullyprying on the edge of the lens with aflathead screwdriver.

3. Disconnect the bulb by pulling it out.


qReplacing Interior Light Bulbs

Overhead lights/Front map lights, Rearmap lights, Vanity mirror lightsí,Courtesy lights

1. Wrap a small flathead screwdriver witha soft cloth to prevent damage to thelens, and then remove the lens bycarefully prying on the edge of the lenswith the flathead screwdriver.


Overhead lights/Front map lights


Owner Maintenance

6-49íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (442,1)

Rear map lights

Vanity mirror lightsí

Courtesy lights


Trunk light

1. Press both sides of the lens cap toremove it.

6-50


íSome models.

Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (443,1)



FusesYour vehicle's electrical system isprotected by fuses.

If any lights, accessories, or controls donot work, inspect the appropriate circuitprotector. If a fuse has blown, the insideelement will be melted.

If the same fuse blows again, avoid usingthat system and consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer as soon as possible.

qFuse Replacement

Replacing the fuses on the vehicle's leftside

If the electrical system does not work,first inspect the fuses on the vehicle's leftside.

1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,and other switches are off.

2. Open the fuse panel cover.


Owner Maintenance

6-51


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (444,1)

3. Pull the fuse straight out with the fusepuller provided on the fuse blocklocated in the engine compartment.

4. Inspect the fuse and replace it if it isblown.

Normal Blown

5. Insert a new fuse of the same amperagerating, and make sure it fits tightly. If itdoes not fit tightly, have an expertinstall it. We recommend anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.If you have no spare fuses, borrow oneof the same rating from a circuit notessential to vehicle operation, such asthe AUDIO or OUTLET circuit.

CAUTIONAlways replace a fuse with a genuineMazda fuse or equivalent of the samerating. Otherwise you may damagethe electric system.

6. Reinstall the cover and make sure thatit is securely installed.

Replacing the fuses under the hood

If the headlights or other electricalcomponents do not work and the fuses inthe cabin are normal, inspect the fuseblock under the hood. If a fuse is blown, itmust be replaced. Follow these steps:

1. Make sure the ignition is switched off,and other switches are off.

2. Remove the fuse block cover.

6-52


Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (445,1)

3. If any fuse but the MAIN fuse isblown, replace it with a new one of thesame amperage rating.

Normal Blown

WARNINGDo not replace the main fuse byyourself. Have an Authorized MazdaDealer perform the replacement:

Replacing the fuse by yourself isdangerous because the MAIN fuse isa high current fuse. Incorrectreplacement could cause an electricalshock or a short circuit resulting in afire.

4. Reinstall the cover and make sure thatit is securely installed.


Owner Maintenance

6-53


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (446,1)

qFuse Panel Description

Fuse block (Engine compartment)

DESCRIPTIONFUSE

RATINGPROTECTED COMPONENT

1 ADD FAN GE 30 A Cooling fan

2 IG2 30 A For protection of various circuits

3 INJECTOR 30 A Engine control system

4 FAN DE ― ―

5 P.WINDOW1 30 A Power windowsí

6 ― ― ―

7 ADD FAN DE ― ―

8 EVVT 20 A Engine control system

9 DEFOG 40 A Rear window defroster

10 DCDC DE ― ―

11 FAN GE 30 A Cooling fan

12 ― ― ―

13 ― ― ―

14 ― ― ―

15 ENG.MAIN 40 A Engine control system

16 ABS/DSC M 50 A ABS, Dynamic stability control system

17 50 A For protection of various circuits

6-54


íSome models.

Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (447,1)

DESCRIPTIONFUSE


18 WIPER 20 A Front window wiper and washer

19 HEATER 40 A Air conditioner

20 DCDC REG ― ―

21 ENGINE.IG1 7.5 A Engine control system

22 C/U IG1 15 A For protection of various circuits

23H/L LOW L

HID L15 A Headlight (LH)*1, Headlight low beam (LH)*2

24 H/L LOW R 15 A Headlight low beam (RH)*2

25 ENGINE3 15 A Engine control system



28 AT 15 A Transaxle control systemí

29 H/CLEAN ― ―

30 A/C 7.5 A Air conditioner

31 AT PUMP ― ―

32 STOP 10 A Brake lights

33 R.WIPER 15 A Theft-deterrent systemí

34 H/L HI 20 A Headlight high beam

35 HID R 15 A Headlight (RH)*1

36 FOG 15 A Fog lightsí

37 7.5 A Engine control system

38 AUDIO2 7.5 A Audio system

39 GLOW SIG ― ―

40 METER2 ― ―

41 METER1 10 A Instrument cluster

42 SRS1 7.5 A Air bag

43 BOSE 25 A Bose® Sound System-equipped modelí

44 AUDIO1 15 A Audio system

45 ABS/DSC S 30 A ABS, Dynamic stability control system

46 FUEL PUMP 15 A Fuel system

47 FUELWARM ― ―

48 TAIL 15 A Taillights, License plate lights

49 ― ― ―

50 HAZARD 25 AHazard warning flashers, Turn signal lights/Front side-markerlights, Parking lights

51 DRL 15 A Daytime running lightsí

52 R.OUTLET2 15 A Accessory sockets


Owner Maintenance

6-55íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (448,1)

DESCRIPTIONFUSE


53 HORN 15 A Horn

54 ROOM 15 A Overhead light

*1 With xenon fusion headlights*2 With halogen headlights

Fuse block (Left side)

DESCRIPTIONFUSE


1 P.SEAT D 30 A Power seatí

2 P.WINDOW3 30 A Power windowsí

3 R.OUTLET3 ― ―

4 P.WINDOW2 25 A Power windows

5 SRS2/ESCL 15 A Seat weight sensorí

6 D.LOCK 25 A Power door locks

7 SEAT WARM 20 A Seat warmerí

8 SUNROOF 10 A Moonroofí

9 F.OUTLET 15 A Accessory sockets

10 MIRROR 7.5 A Power control mirror

11 R.OUTLET1 ― ―

12 ― ― ―

6-56


íSome models.

Owner Maintenance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (449,1)

DESCRIPTIONFUSE


13 ― ― ―

14 ― ― ―

15 ― ― ―

16 ― ― ―

17 M.DEF 7.5 A Mirror defrosterí

18 ― ― ―

19 ― ― ―

20 AT IND 7.5 A AT shift indicatorí

21 P.SEAT P 30 A Power seatí


Owner Maintenance

6-57íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (450,1)

Exterior CareThe paintwork on your Mazda representsthe latest technical developments incomposition and methods of application.

Environmental hazards, however, canharm the paint's protective properties, ifproper care is not taken.

Here are some examples of possibledamage, with tips on how to preventthem.

Etching Caused by Acid Rain orIndustrial Fallout

Occurrence

Industrial pollutants and vehicle emissionsdrift into the air and mix with rain or dewto form acids. These acids can settle on avehicle's finish. As the water evaporates,the acid becomes concentrated and candamage the finish.And the longer the acid remains on thesurface, the greater the chance is fordamage.

Prevention

It is necessary to wash and wax yourvehicle to preserve its finish according tothe instructions in this section. Thesesteps should be taken immediately afteryou suspect that acid rain has settled onyour vehicle's finish.

Damage Caused by Bird Dropping,Insects, or Tree Sap

Occurrence

Bird droppings contain acids. If these arenot removed they can eat away the clearand color base coat of the vehicle'spaintwork.

When insects stick to the paint surfaceand decompose, corrosive compoundsform. These can erode the clear and colorbase coat of the vehicle's paintwork ifthey are not removed.

Tree sap will harden and adherepermanently to the paint finish. If youscratch the sap off while it is hard, somevehicle paint could come off with it.

Prevention

It is necessary to have your Mazdawashed and waxed to preserve its finishaccording to the instructions in thissection. This should be done as soon aspossible.

Bird droppings can be removed with asoft sponge and water. If you are travelingand these are not available, a moistenedtissue may also take care of the problem.The cleaned area should be waxedaccording to the instructions in thissection.Insects and tree sap are best removed witha soft sponge and water or a commerciallyavailable chemical cleaner.

Another method is to cover the affectedarea with dampened newspaper for one totwo hours. After removing the newspaper,rinse off the loosened debris with water.

Water Marks

Occurrence

Rain, fog, dew, and even tap water cancontain harmful minerals such as salt andlime. If moisture containing theseminerals settles on the vehicle andevaporates, the minerals will concentrateand harden to form white rings. The ringscan damage your vehicle's finish.

6-58


Appearance Care


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (451,1)

Prevention

It is necessary to wash and wax yourvehicle to preserve its finish according tothe instructions in this section. Thesesteps should be taken immediately afteryou find water marks on your vehicle'sfinish.

Paint Chipping

Occurrence

Paint chipping occurs when gravel thrownin the air by another vehicle's tires hitsyour vehicle.

How to avoid paint chipping

Keeping a safe distance between you andthe vehicle ahead reduces the chances ofhaving your paint chipped by flyinggravel.

NOTEl The paint chipping zone varies with the

speed of the vehicle. For example, whentraveling at 90 km/h (56 mph), the paintchipping zone is 50 m (164 ft).

l In low temperatures a vehicle's finishhardens. This increases the chance of paintchipping.

l Chipped paint can lead to rust forming onyour Mazda. Before this happens, repair thedamage by using Mazda touch-up paintaccording to the instructions in this section.Failure to repair the affected area couldlead to serious rusting and expensiverepairs.

Follow all label and container directionswhen using a chemical cleaner or polish.Read all warnings and cautions.

qMaintaining the Finish

Washing

CAUTIONØ When the wiper lever is in the

AUTO position and the ignition isswitched ON, the wipers maymove automatically in thefollowing cases:Ø If the windshield above the rain

sensor is touched or wiped witha cloth.

Ø If the windshield is struck witha hand or other object fromeither outside or inside thevehicle.

Keep hands and scrapers clear ofthe windshield when the wiperlever is in the AUTO position andthe ignition is switched ON asfingers could be pinched or thewipers and wiper blades damagedwhen the wipers activateautomatically.If you are going to clean thewindshield, be sure the wipers areturned off completely―this isparticularly important whenclearing ice and snow―when it ismost likely that the engine is leftrunning.

Ø Do not spray water in the enginecompartment. Otherwise, it couldresult in engine-starting problemsor damage to electrical parts.

To help protect the finish from rust anddeterioration, wash your Mazdathoroughly and frequently, at least once amonth, with lukewarm or cold water.


Appearance Care

6-59


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (452,1)

If the vehicle is washed improperly, thepaint surface could be scratched. Here aresome examples of how scratching couldoccur.

Scratches occur on the paint surfacewhen:l The vehicle is washed without firstrinsing off dirt and other foreignmatter.

l The vehicle is washed with a rough,dry, or dirty cloth.

l The vehicle is washed at a car washthat uses brushes that are dirty or toostiff.

l Cleansers or wax containing abrasivesare used.

NOTEl Mazda is not responsible for scratches

caused by automatic car washes orimproper washing.

l Scratches are more noticeable on vehicleswith darker paint finishes.

To minimize scratches on the vehicle'spaint finish:l Rinse off any dirt or other foreignmatter using lukewarm or cold waterbefore washing.

l Use plenty of lukewarm or cold waterand a soft cloth when washing thevehicle. Do not use a nylon cloth.

l Rub gently when washing or drying thevehicle.

l Take your vehicle only to a car washthat keeps its brushes well maintained.

l Do not use abrasive cleansers or waxthat contain abrasives.

CAUTIONDo not use steel wool, abrasivecleaners, or strong detergentscontaining highly alkaline or causticagents on chrome-plated or anodizedaluminum parts. This may damagethe protective coating; also, cleanersand detergents may discolor ordeteriorate the paint.

Pay special attention to removing salt,dirt, mud, and other foreign material fromthe underside of the fenders, and makesure the drain holes in the lower edges ofthe doors and rocker panels are clean.

Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,industrial fallout, and similar deposits candamage the finish if not removedimmediately. When prompt washing withplain water is ineffective, use a mild soapmade for use on vehicles.

Thoroughly rinse off all soap withlukewarm or cold water. Do not allowsoap to dry on the finish.

After washing the vehicle, dry it with aclean chamois to prevent water spots fromforming.

6-60


Appearance Care


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (453,1)



When using a high water pressure carwash

High water temperature and high waterpressure car washers are availabledepending on the type of car washmachine. If the car washer nozzle is puttoo close to the vehicle, the force of thespray could damage or deform themolding, affect the sealability of parts,and allow water to penetrate the interior.Keep a sufficient space (30 cm or more)between the nozzle and the vehicle. Inaddition, do not spend too much timespraying the same area of the vehicle, andbe very careful when spraying betweengaps in doors and around windows.

Waxing

Your vehicle needs to be waxed whenwater no longer beads on the finish.Always wash and dry the vehicle beforewaxing it. In addition to the vehicle body,wax the metal trim to maintain its luster.

1. Use wax which contains no abrasives.Waxes containing abrasive will removepaint and could damage bright metalparts.

2. Use a good grade of natural wax formetallic, mica, and solid colors.

3. When waxing, coat evenly with thesponge supplied or a soft cloth.

4. Wipe off the wax with a soft cloth.

NOTEA spot remover to remove oil, tar, and similarmaterials will usually also take off the wax.Rewax these areas even if the rest of thevehicle does not need it.

qRepairing Damage to the Finish

Deep scratches or chips on the finishshould be repaired promptly. Exposedmetal quickly rusts and can lead to majorrepairs.

CAUTIONIf your Mazda is damaged and needsmetal parts repaired or replaced,make sure the body shop appliesanti-corrosion materials to all parts,both repaired and new. This willprevent them from rusting.

qBright-Metal Maintenance

l Use tar remover to remove road tar andinsects. Never do this with a knife orsimilar tool.

l To prevent corrosion on bright-metalsurfaces, apply wax or chromepreservative and rub it to a high luster.

l During cold weather or in coastal areas,cover bright-metal parts with a coatingof wax or preservative heavier thanusual. It would also help to coat themwith noncorrosive petroleum jelly orsome other protective compound.


Appearance Care

6-61


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (454,1)

CAUTIONDo not use steel wool, abrasivecleaners, or strong detergentscontaining highly alkaline or causticagents on chrome-plated or anodizedaluminum parts. This may result indamage to the protective coating andcause discoloration or paintdeterioration.

qUnderbody Maintenance

Road chemicals and salt used for ice andsnow removal and solvents used for dustcontrol may collect on the underbody. Ifnot removed, they will speed up rustingand deterioration of such underbody partsas fuel lines, frame, floor pan, and exhaustsystem, even though these parts may becoated with anti-corrosive material.

Thoroughly flush the underbody andwheel housings with lukewarm or coldwater at the end of each winter. Try alsoto do this every month.

Pay special attention to these areasbecause they easily hide mud and dirt. Itwill do more harm than good to wetdown the road grime without removingit.

The lower edges of doors, rocker panels,and frame members have drain holes thatshould not be clogged. Water trappedthere will cause rusting.



qAluminumWheel Maintenance

A protective coating is provided over thealuminum wheels. Special care is neededto protect this coating.

CAUTIONDo not use any detergent other thanmild detergent. Before using anydetergent, verify the ingredients.Otherwise, the product could discoloror stain the aluminum wheels.

NOTEl Do not use a wire brush or any abrasive

cleaner, polishing compound, or solvent onaluminum wheels. They may damage thecoating.

l Always use a sponge or soft cloth to cleanthe wheels.Rinse the wheels thoroughly with lukewarmor cold water. Also, be sure to clean thewheels after driving on dusty or saltedroads to help prevent corrosion.

l Avoid washing your vehicle in an automaticcar wash that uses high-speed or hardbrushes.

l If your aluminum wheels lose luster, waxthe wheels.

6-62


Appearance Care


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (455,1)

qPlastic Part Maintenance

l When cleaning the plastic lenses of thelights, do not use gasoline, kerosene,rectified spirit, paint, thinner, highlyacidic detergents, or strongly alkalinedetergents. Otherwise, these chemicalagents can discolor or damage thesurfaces resulting in a significant lossin functionality. If plastic parts becomeinadvertently exposed to any of thesechemical agents, flush with waterimmediately.

l If plastic parts such as the bumpersbecome inadvertently exposed tochemical agents or fluids such asgasoline, oil, engine coolant, or batteryfluid, it could cause discoloration,staining, or paint peeling. Wipe off anysuch chemical agents or fluids using asoft cloth immediately.

l High water temperature and high waterpressure car washers are availabledepending on the type of high pressurecar washer device. If the car washernozzle is put too close to the vehicle oraimed at one area for an extendedperiod of time, it could deform plasticparts or damage the paint.

l Do not use wax containing compounds(polish). Otherwise, it could result inpaint damage.

l In addition, do not use an electrical orair tool to apply wax. Otherwise, thefrictional heat generated could result indeformation of plastic parts or paintdamage.

Interior Care

WARNINGDo not spray water in the cabin:

Splashing water on electrical partssuch as the audio unit and switchesis dangerous as it could cause amalfunction or a fire.

qDashboard Precautions

Prevent caustic solutions such as perfumeand cosmetic oils from contacting thedashboard. They will damage and discolorthe dashboard. If these solutions get onthe dashboard, wipe them offimmediately.

CAUTIONDo not use glazing agents.Glazing agents contain ingredientswhich may cause discoloration,wrinkling, cracks and peeling.

Instrument panel top (soft pad)

l Extremely soft material is used for thesoft pad surface. When cleaning, it isrecommended that you use a cleantowel dampened in a mild detergent toremove soiling.

l If the soft pad surface is rubbedharshly, it could result in the surfacebeing damaged leaving white scratchmarks.

qCleaning the Upholstery andInterior Trim

Vinyl

Remove dust and loose dirt from vinylwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean vinyl with a leather-and-vinylcleaner.


Appearance Care

6-63


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (456,1)

Synthetic leather

Remove dust and loose dirt from syntheticleather with a whisk broom or vacuumcleaner.Clean synthetic leather with a leather-and-synthetic leather cleaner.

Leatherí

Remove dust and sand first using avacuum cleaner or other means, then wipedirt off using a soft cloth with a leathercleaner or a soft cloth soaked in mildsoap.Wipe off the remaining cleaner or soapusing a cloth soaked in clean water andwrung out well.Remove moisture with a dry, soft clothand allow the leather to further dry in awell-ventilated, shaded area. If the leathergets wet such as from rain, also removemoisture and dry it as soon as possible.

NOTEl Because genuine leather is a natural

material, its surface is not uniform and itmay have natural scars, scratches, andwrinkles.

l To maintain the quality for as long aspossible, periodical maintenance, abouttwice a year, is recommended.

l Sand and dust on the seat surface maydamage the overcoat of the genuine leathersurfaces and accelerate wear.

l Greasy soiling on genuine leather maycause molding and stains.

l Rubbing hard with a stiff brush or clothmay cause damage.

l Do not wipe the leather using alcohol,chlorine bleach, or organic solvents such asthinner, benzene, or gasoline. Otherwise, itmay cause discoloration or stains.

l If the seats get wet, promptly removemoisture with a dry cloth. Remainingmoisture on the surface may causedeterioration such as hardening andshrinkage.

l Exposure to direct sunlight for long periodsmay cause deterioration and shrinkage.When parking the car under direct sunlightfor long periods, shade the interior usingsunshades.

l Do not leave vinyl products on the seats forlong periods as they may affect the leatherquality and coloring. If the cabintemperature becomes hot, the vinyl maydeteriorate and adhere to the genuineleather.

Fabric

Remove dust and loose dirt from fabricwith a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner.Clean it with a mild soap solution goodfor upholstery and carpets. Remove freshspots immediately with a fabric spotcleaner.

6-64


íSome models.

Appearance Care


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (457,1)

To keep the fabric looking clean andfresh, take care of it. Otherwise its colorwill be affected, it can be stained easily,and its fire-resistance may be reduced.

CAUTIONUse only recommended cleaners andprocedures. Others may affectappearance and fire-resistance.

Panel

When the panel needs to be cleaned, use asoft cloth to wipe off dirt from the surface.

NOTEScratches or nicks on the panels resulting fromthe use of a hard brush or cloth may not berepairable.Be particularly careful when cleaning thefollowing areas which are installed withspecially coated panels.· Piano black panelí

· Decoration panel· AT indicator panel

qCleaning the Lap/Shoulder BeltWebbing

Clean the webbing with a mild soapsolution recommended for upholstery orcarpets. Follow instructions. Do notbleach or dye the webbing; this mayweaken it.

After cleaning the belts, thoroughly drythe belt webbing and make sure there isno remaining moisture before retractingthem.

WARNINGHave an Authorized Mazda Dealerreplace damaged seat beltsimmediately:

Using damaged seat belts isdangerous. In a collision, damagedbelts cannot provide adequateprotection.

qCleaning the Window Interiors

If the windows become covered with anoily, greasy, or waxy film, clean themwith glass cleaner. Follow the directionson the container.

CAUTIONØ Do not scrape or scratch the inside

of the window glass. It coulddamage the thermal filamentsand the antenna lines.

Ø When washing the inside of thewindow glass, use a soft clothdampened in lukewarm water,gently wiping the thermalfilaments and the antenna lines.Use of glass cleaning productscould damage the thermalfilaments and the antenna lines.


Appearance Care

6-65íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (458,1)

qCleaning the Floor Mats

Rubber floor mats should be cleaned withmild soap and water only.

WARNINGDo not use rubber cleaners, such as tirecleaner or tire shine, when cleaningrubber floor mats:

Cleaning the rubber floor mats withrubber cleaning products makes thefloor mats slippery.This may cause an accident whendepressing the accelerator, brake, orclutch (Manual transaxle) pedal orwhen getting in or out of the vehicle.

After removing the floor mats forcleaning, always reinstall themsecurely.Refer to Floor Mat on page 3-45.

6-66


Appearance Care


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (459,1)

7 If Trouble Arises

Helpful information on what to do if a problem arises with the vehicle.

Parking in an Emergency ............................................................. 7-2Parking in an Emergency .......................................................... 7-2

Flat Tire ......................................................................................... 7-3Spare Tire and Tool Storage ...................................................... 7-3Instant Mobility System (IMS) Emergency Flat Tire RepairKití .......................................................................................... 7-7Changing a Flat Tire (With spare tire) ..................................... 7-13

Battery Runs Out ........................................................................ 7-20Jump-Starting .......................................................................... 7-20

Emergency Starting .................................................................... 7-23Starting a Flooded Engine ....................................................... 7-23Push-Starting ........................................................................... 7-23

Overheating ................................................................................. 7-24Overheating ............................................................................. 7-24

Emergency Towing ..................................................................... 7-26Towing Description ................................................................. 7-26Tiedown Hooks ....................................................................... 7-27

Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds ..................... 7-29When Warning/Indicator Lights Illuminate/Flash ................... 7-29Warning Sound is Activated ................................................... 7-39

When Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened ........................................ 7-43When Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened ....................................... 7-43

7-1íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (460,1)

Parking in an EmergencyThe hazard warning lights should alwaysbe used when you stop on or near aroadway in an emergency.

The hazard warning lights warn otherdrivers that your vehicle is a traffic hazardand that they must take extreme cautionwhen near it.

Depress the hazard warning flasher and allthe turn signals will flash. The hazardwarning indicator lights in the instrumentcluster flash simultaneously.

NOTEl The turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning lights are on.l Check local regulations about the use of

hazard warning lights while the vehicle isbeing towed to verify that it is not inviolation of the law.

7-2

If Trouble Arises

Parking in an Emergency


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (461,1)

Spare Tire and Tool StorageSpare tire and tools are stored in the locations illustrated in the diagram.Except Mexico

(With spare tire)

(Without spare tire)

Instant Mobility System (IMS) Emergency Flat Tire Repair Kit

Tiedown eyelet (Long type)


Tiedown eyelet (Short type)


Flat tire belt

Jack lever

Jack lever

Lug wrench

Spare tire

Jack

Spare tire hold-down bolt

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire

7-3


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (462,1)

Mexico

Lug wrench


Jack leverTiedown eyelet (Long type)


Jack

Spare tire

7-4

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (463,1)

qJackí

NOTEYour vehicle may or may not be equipped witha jack and lug wrench. For details, consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

To remove the jack


Trunk mat

2. Remove the pocket.

3. Turn the wing bolt and jack screwcounterclockwise.

Wing bolt

Jack screw

To secure the jack

1. Insert the wing bolt into the jack withthe jack screw pointing to the front andturn the wing bolt clockwise totemporarily tighten it.

2. Turn the jack screw in the directionshown in the figure.

Wing bolt

Jack screw

3. Turn the wing bolt completely tosecure the jack.

NOTEIf the jack is not completely secured, it couldrattle while driving. Make sure the jack screwis sufficiently tightened.

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire

7-5íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (464,1)

Maintenance

l Always keep the jack clean.l Make sure the moving parts are keptfree from dirt or rust.

l Make sure the screw thread isadequately lubricated.

qSpare Tireí

Your Mazda has a temporary spare tire.The temporary spare tire is lighter andsmaller than a conventional tire, and isdesigned only for emergency use andshould be used only for VERY shortperiods. Temporary spare tires shouldNEVER be used for long drives orextended periods.

WARNINGDo not install the temporary spare tireon the front wheels (driving wheels):

Driving with the temporary spare tireon one of the front driving wheels isdangerous. Handling will be affected.You could lose control of the vehicle,especially on ice or snow boundroads, and have an accident. Move aregular tire to the front wheel andinstall the temporary spare tire to therear.

CAUTIONØ When using the temporary spare

tire, driving stability may decreasecompared to when using only theconventional tire. Drive carefully.

Ø To avoid damage to the temporaryspare tire or to the vehicle, observethe following precautions:Ø Do not exceed 80 km/h (50

mph).Ø Avoid driving over obstacles.

Also, do not drive through anautomatic car wash. This tire'sdiameter is smaller than aconventional tire, so the groundclearance is reduced about10 mm (0.4 in).

Ø Do not use a tire chain on thistire because it will not fitproperly.

Ø Do not use your temporaryspare tire on any other vehicle,it has been designed only foryour Mazda.

Ø Use only one temporary sparetire on your vehicle at the sametime.

To remove the spare tire


Trunk mat

7-6

If Trouble Arises

íSome models.

Flat Tire


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (465,1)

2. Turn the spare tire hold-down boltcounterclockwise.


To secure the spare tire

Store the spare tire in the reverse order ofremoval. After storing, verify that thespare tire is stored securely.

Instant Mobility System(IMS) Emergency FlatTire Repair Kití

The IMS emergency flat tire repair kitincluded with your Mazda is for atemporary repair of a slightly damagedflat tire resulting from running over nailsor similar sharp objects on the roadsurface.Perform the emergency flat tire repairwithout removing the nail or similar sharpobject which punctured the tire.

NOTEYour vehicle is not equipped with a spare tire.In the event of a flat tire, use the emergencyflat tire repair kit to repair the tire temporarily.When doing the repair, refer to the instructionsincluded in the emergency flat tire repair kit. Ifan emergency repair was performed on a flattire using the emergency flat tire repair kit,have an Authorized Mazda Dealer, repair orreplace the tire as soon as possible.

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire

7-7íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (466,1)

qAbout the IMS Emergency FlatTire Repair Kit

The IMS emergency flat tire repair kitincludes the following items.

Sealant applied sticker

Compressor

Sealant bottle

Speed restriction sticker

Instructions

WARNINGDo not allow children to touch the tiresealant:

Ingestion of tire sealant is dangerous.In the event tire sealant isaccidentally swallowed, drink largeamounts of water immediately andseek medical assistance.

Do not allow children to touch the tiresealant:

Tire sealant that comes into contactwith the eyes and skin is dangerous.If tire sealant enters the eyes orcontacts the skin, flush immediatelywith large amounts of water andseek medical assistance.

NOTEl The tire sealant cannot be reused. Purchase

new tire sealant at an Authorized MazdaDealer.

l The emergency flat tire repair kit cannot beused in the following cases.Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.l The period of effective use for the tire

sealant has expired. (The period ofeffectiveness is indicated on the bottlelabel.)

l The tear or puncture exceeds about4 mm (0.16 in).

l The damage has occurred to an area ofthe tire other than the tread.

l The vehicle has been driven with nearlyno air remaining in the tire.

l The tire has come off the wheel rim.l Damage to the wheel rim has occurred.l The tire has two or more punctures.

qUsing the IMS Emergency FlatTire Repair Kit

1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-way and set the parking brake.

2. Put a vehicle with an automatictransaxle in Park (P), a manualtransaxle in Reverse (R) or 1, and turnoff the engine.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.

7-8

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (467,1)

4. Have passengers get out of the vehicleand unload any luggage, and thenremove the emergency flat tire repairkit.

NOTEThe tire sealant can be used at outsidetemperatures down to _30°C (_22°F).

5. Remove the injection hose from thecompressor and insert the plug adaptorto the sealant container orifice.

6. Remove the valve cap from the flat tireand install the injection hose to thevalve of the flat tire securely.

HoseValve cap

Valve

7. Install the sealant container to thecompressor and press it in until the tabclicks into place.

Tab

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire

7-9


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (468,1)

8. Insert the compressor plug into theinterior accessory socket.

Center console

Compressor

Compressor plug

CAUTIONØ Before pulling out the compressor

plug from the electrical socket,make sure the compressor powerswitch is off.

Ø The compressor turns on and offwith the push-button switch.

9. Adhere the speed restriction sticker tothe speedometer at the locationindicated in the illustration, and thesealant applied sticker to a flat surfaceon the tire wheel.

Speed restriction sticker

Sealant applied sticker

7-10

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (469,1)

WARNINGAttach the speed restriction sticker in aplace where it can be viewed easily bythe driver:

Ø Applying the speed restrictionsticker to the steering wheel isdangerous as it could interferewith the air bag deployment andresult in serious injury.

Ø Do not apply the sticker to anyposition other than the positionindicated in the illustration of thespeedometer.

10. Switch the ignition ON (enginerunning).

11. Turn the compressor on and wait untilthe sealant is injected into the tire.After the sealant is injected into thetire, continue waiting until the tire isinflated to the correct air pressure.

NOTEl Check the tire inflation pressure label

(driver's door frame) for the correct tireinflation pressure.

l If the tire air pressure is not correct after afew seconds, the tire may be seriouslydamaged. Consult an Authorized MazdaDealer.

12. When the tire has been inflated to theproper inflation pressure, turn thecompressor switch off and remove thehose from the tire valve.

13. Install the tire valve cap.

14. Store the hose, removed from thevalve, in the trunk and resume drivingthe vehicle.

CAUTIONØ Drive carefully to an Authorized

Mazda Dealer and keep thevehicle speed below 80 km/h (50mph).

Ø If the vehicle is driven over 80km/h (50 mph), the vehicle mightbegin to vibrate.

NOTEl If the tire is not properly inflated, the tire

pressure monitoring system warning lightwill illuminate (page 4-23).

l Do not press the tire pressure monitoringsystem set switch after installing the sparetire or after using the emergency flat tirerepair kit. The switch is only to be pressedafter installing the repaired flat tire orinstalling a replacement tire (page 4-23).

15. After driving the vehicle 5 km, set upthe compressor again using Step 8 ofthe procedure. Turn the compressoron and then off after a few seconds,and check the tire air pressure. If thetire air pressure is low, turn thecompressor on again and wait untilthe tire inflates to the correct airpressure.

CAUTIONØ If the tire inflation pressure falls

below 130 kPa (1.3 kgf/cm2 or bar,18.9 psi), repair cannot be donewith the repair kit. Park thevehicle on a level surface off theright-of-way and contact anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

Ø If the tire inflation pressurecontinues to remain low, park thevehicle on a level surface off theright-of-way and contact anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire

7-11


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (470,1)

NOTEWhen checking the tire inflation pressure withthe tire pressure gauge on the compressor unit,make sure the compressor switch is turned off.

16. The emergency flat tire repair iscompleted if the tire air pressure doesnot decrease. Drive the vehiclecarefully to the nearest AuthorizedMazda Dealer promptly and have thetire replaced. Mazda recommends thatthe tire be replaced with a new one. Ifthe tire is to be repaired and reused,consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.Peel off the speed restriction stickerafter replacing the tire.

CAUTIONØ For a tire which has undergone an

emergency flat tire repair usingthe emergency flat tire repair kit,Mazda recommends that the tirebe replaced with a new one assoon as possible. If the tire is to berepaired and reused, consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

Ø The wheel can be reused after anysealant adhering to it is wiped offand carefully inspected. However,replace the tire valve with a newone.

qInspecting the IMS EmergencyFlat Tire Repair Kit

Inspect the emergency tire repair kit atregular intervals.l Check the tire sealant period ofeffective use.

l Check the operation of the tirecompressor.

NOTEThe tire sealant has a period of effective use.Check the period of effective use indicated onthe bottle label and do not use it if it hasexpired. Have the tire sealant replaced at anAuthorized Mazda Dealer before the period ofeffective use has expired.

7-12

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (471,1)

Changing a Flat Tire(With spare tire)

NOTEIf the following occurs while driving, it couldindicate a flat tire.l Steering becomes difficult.l The vehicle begins to vibrate excessively.l The vehicle pulls in one direction.

If you have a flat tire, drive slowly to alevel spot that is well off the road and outof the way of traffic to change the tire.Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder of abusy road is dangerous.

WARNINGBe sure to follow the directions forchanging a tire:

Changing a tire is dangerous if notdone properly. The vehicle can slip offthe jack and seriously injuresomeone.No person should place any portionof their body under a vehicle that issupported by a jack.

Never allow anyone inside a vehiclesupported by a jack:

Allowing someone to remain in avehicle supported by a jack isdangerous. The occupant could causethe vehicle to fall resulting in seriousinjury.

NOTEMake sure the jack is well lubricated beforeusing it.

1. Park on a level surface off the right-of-way and firmly set the parking brake.

2. Put a vehicle with an automatictransaxle in Park (P), a manualtransaxle in Reverse (R) or 1, and turnoff the engine.

3. Turn on the hazard warning flasher.

4. Have everyone get out of the vehicleand away from the vehicle and traffic.

5. Remove the jack, tool, and spare tire(page 7-3).

6. Block the wheel diagonally oppositethe flat tire. When blocking a wheel,place a tire block both in front andbehind the tire.

NOTEWhen blocking a tire, use rocks or wood blocksof sufficient size if possible to hold the tire inplace.

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire

7-13


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (472,1)

qRemoving a Flat Tire

1. Loosen the lug nuts by turning themcounterclockwise one turn each, but donot remove any lug nuts until the tirehas been raised off the ground.

2. Place the jack on the ground.

3. Turn the jack screw in the directionshown in the figure and adjust the jackhead so that it is close to the jack-upposition.

Jack head

4. Place the jack under the jack-upposition closest to the tire beingchanged with the jack head squarelyunder the jack-up point.

Jacking position

5. Continue raising the jack headgradually by rotating the screw withyour hand until the jack head isinserted into the jack-up position.

Tire blocks

Jacking position

7-14

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (473,1)

WARNINGUse only the front and rear jackingpositions recommended in this manual:

Attempting to jack the vehicle inpositions other than thoserecommended in this manual isdangerous. The vehicle could slip offthe jack and seriously injure or evenkill someone. Use only the front andrear jacking positions recommendedin this manual.

Do not jack up the vehicle in a positionother than the designated jack-upposition or place any objects on orunder the jack:

Jacking up the vehicle in a positionother than the designated jack-upposition or placing objects on orunder the jack is dangerous as itcould deform the vehicle body or thevehicle could fall off the jackresulting in an accident.

Use only the jack provided with yourMazda:

Using a jack that is not designed foryour Mazda is dangerous. The vehiclecould slip off the jack and seriouslyinjure someone.

Never place objects under the jack:Jacking the vehicle with an objectunder the jack is dangerous. The jackcould slip and someone could beseriously injured by the jack or thefalling vehicle.

6. Insert the jack lever and attach the lugwrench to tire jack.

7. Turn the jack handle clockwise andraise the vehicle high enough so thatthe spare tire can be installed. Beforeremoving the lug nuts, make sure yourMazda is firmly in position and that itcannot slip or move.

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire

7-15


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (474,1)

WARNINGDo not jack up the vehicle higher thanis necessary:

Jacking up the vehicle higher than isnecessary is dangerous as it coulddestabilize the vehicle resulting in anaccident.

Do not start the engine or shake thevehicle while it is jacked up:

Starting the engine or shaking thevehicle while it is jacked up isdangerous as it could cause thevehicle to fall off the jack resulting inan accident.

Never go under the vehicle while it isjacked up:

Going under the vehicle while it isjacked up is dangerous as it couldresult in death or serious injury if thevehicle were to fall off the jack.

8. Remove the lug nuts by turning themcounterclockwise; then remove thewheel and center cap.

qLocking Lug Nuts

If your vehicle has Mazda optionalantitheft wheel lug nuts, one on eachwheel will lock the tires and you must usea special key to unlock them. This keywill attach to the lug wrench and can bestored with the spare tire. Register themwith the lock manufacturer by filling outthe card provided in the glovecompartment and mailing it in theaccompanying envelope. If you lose thiskey, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealeror use the lock manufacturer's order form,which is with the registration card.

Special keyAntitheft lug nut

To remove an antitheft lug nut

1. Obtain the special key for the antitheftlug nut.

2. Place the special key on top of theantitheft lug nut, and be sure to holdthe key square to it. If you hold the keyat an angle, you may damage both keyand nut. Do not use a power impactwrench.

3. Place the lug wrench on top of the keyand apply pressure. Turn the wrenchcounterclockwise.

7-16

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (475,1)

To install the antitheft lug nut

1. Place the special key on top of the nut,and be sure to hold the key square to it.If you hold the key at an angle, youmay damage both key and nut. Do notuse a power impact wrench.

2. Place the lug wrench on top of thespecial key, apply pressure, and turn itclockwise.

Nut tightening torque

N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)108―147

(12―14, 80―108)

qMounting the Spare Tire

1. Remove dirt and grime from themounting surfaces of the wheel andhub, including the hub bolts, with acloth.

WARNINGMake sure the mounting surfaces ofthe wheel, hub and lug nuts are cleanbefore changing or replacing tires:

When changing or replacing a tire,not removing dirt and grime from themounting surfaces of the wheel, huband hub bolts is dangerous. The lugnuts could loosen while driving andcause the tire to come off, resulting inan accident.

2. Mount the spare tire.

3. Install the lug nuts with the bevelededge inward; tighten them by hand.

WARNINGDo not apply oil or grease to lug nutsand bolts and do not tighten the lugnuts beyond the recommendedtightening torque:

Applying oil or grease to lug nuts andbolts is dangerous. The lug nutscould loosen while driving and causethe tire to come off, resulting in anaccident. In addition, lug nuts andbolts could be damaged if tightenedmore than necessary.

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire

7-17


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (476,1)

4. Turn the lug wrench counterclockwiseand lower the vehicle. Use the lugwrench to tighten the nuts in the ordershown.

If you are unsure of how tight the nutsshould be, have them inspected at anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

Nut tightening torque

N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf)108―147

(12―14, 80―108)

WARNINGAlways securely and correctly tightenthe lug nuts:

Improperly or loosely tightened lugnuts are dangerous. The wheel couldwobble or come off. This could resultin loss of vehicle control and cause aserious accident.

Be sure to reinstall the same nuts youremoved or replace them with metricnuts of the same configuration:

Because the wheel studs and lug nutson your Mazda have metric threads,using a non-metric nut is dangerous.On a metric stud, it would not securethe wheel and would damage thestud, which could cause the wheel toslip off and cause an accident.

5. Open the trunk mat.

6. Remove the belt for securing the flattire.

7. Put the flat tire into the trunk on the leftand toward the back.

8. Fold the seat back forward on the rightside of the rear seat.

9. Thread the belt through the rear seat asshown in the figure.

7-18

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (477,1)

10. Thread the buckle through the wheelas shown in the figure and secure it sothat the buckle does not contact thewheel.

11. Thread the belt through the buckle,then pull the belt end to secure the flattire.

12. Return the seat back on the right sideof the rear seat to its original position.

13. Remove the tire blocks and store thetools and jack.

14. Check the inflation pressure. Refer toTires on page 9-7.

15. Have the flat tire repaired or replacedas soon as possible.

NOTEDo not press the tire pressure monitoringsystem set switch after installing the spare tire.The switch is only to be pressed after installingthe repaired flat tire or installing areplacement tire (page 4-23).

WARNINGDo not drive with any tires that haveincorrect air pressure:

Driving on tires with incorrect airpressure is dangerous. Tires withincorrect pressure could affecthandling and result in an accident.When you check the regular tires' airpressure, check the spare tire, too.

NOTETo prevent the jack and tool from rattling, storethem properly.

If Trouble Arises

Flat Tire

7-19


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (478,1)

Jump-StartingJump-starting is dangerous if done incorrectly. So follow the procedure carefully. If youfeel unsure about jump-starting, we strongly recommend that you have a competent servicetechnician do the work.

WARNING

Follow These Precautions Carefully:To ensure safe and correct handling of the battery, read the following precautionscarefully before using the battery or inspecting it.

Do not allow the positive ( ) terminal to contact any other metal object thatcould cause sparks:

Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, producedduring normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. Anexploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries. When working near abattery, do not allow metal tools to contact the positive ( ) or negative ( )terminal of the battery.

Keep all flames, including cigarettes, and sparks away from open batterycells:

Flames and sparks near open battery cells are dangerous. Hydrogen gas, producedduring normal battery operation, could ignite and cause the battery to explode. Anexploding battery can cause serious burns and injuries.

Do not jump-start a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level:Jump-starting a frozen battery or one with a low fluid level is dangerous. It mayrupture or explode, causing serious injury.

Connect the negative cable to a good ground point away from the battery:Connecting the end of the second jumper cable to the negative ( ) terminal of thedischarged battery is dangerous.A spark could cause the gas around the battery to explode and injure someone.

Route the jumper cables away from parts that will be moving:Connecting a jumper cable near or to moving parts (cooling fans, belts) is dangerous.The cable could get caught when the engine starts and cause serious injury.

7-20

If Trouble Arises

Battery Runs Out


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (479,1)

CAUTIONUse only a 12 V booster system. You can damage a 12 V starter, ignition system, andother electrical parts beyond repair with a 24 V power supply (two 12 V batteries inseries or a 24 V motor generator set).

Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order.

Jumper cables

Booster battery

Discharged battery

1. Remove the battery cover.

2. Make sure the booster battery is 12 Vand that its negative terminal isgrounded.

3. If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, do not allow both vehicles totouch. Turn off the engine of thevehicle with the booster battery and allunnecessary electrical loads in bothvehicles.

4. Connect the jumper cables in the exactsequence as in the illustration.

l Connect one end of a cable to thepositive terminal on the dischargedbattery (1).

l Attach the other end to the positiveterminal on the booster battery (2).

l Connect one end of the other cableto the negative terminal of thebooster battery (3).

l Connect the other end to the groundpoint indicated in the illustrationaway from the discharged battery(4).

If Trouble Arises

Battery Runs Out

7-21


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (480,1)

5. Start the engine of the booster vehicleand run it a few minutes. Then start theengine of the other vehicle.

6. “i-ELOOP charging” is displayed inthe multi-display of the instrumentcluster after the engine is started. Themessage is no longer displayed whenthe engine is running and the chargingis completed. The vehicle may bedriven after the message is no longerdisplayed.

NOTEIf the vehicle is driven while the message isdisplayed, a beep sound is heard.If you turn the steering wheel while themessage is displayed, it will feel heavier thannormal, but this does not indicate anabnormality. The steering operation will returnto normal after the message is no longerdisplayed. Do not remove the jumper cableswhile the message is displayed.

7. When finished, carefully disconnect thecables in the reverse order described inthe illustration.

8. If the battery cover has been removed,install it in the reverse order ofremoval.

NOTEVerify that the covers are securely installed.

7-22

If Trouble Arises

Battery Runs Out


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (481,1)

Starting a Flooded EngineIf the engine fails to start, it may beflooded (excessive fuel in the engine).

Follow this procedure:

1. If the engine does not start within fiveseconds on the first try, wait tenseconds and try again.

2. Make sure the parking brake is on.

3. Depress the accelerator all the way andhold it there.

4. Depress the clutch pedal (Manualtransaxle) or the brake pedal(Automatic transaxle), then press thepush button start. If the engine starts,release the accelerator immediatelybecause the engine will suddenly revup.

5. If the engine fails to start, crank itwithout depressing the accelerator.

If the engine still does not start using theabove procedure, have your vehicleinspected by an Authorized MazdaDealer.

Push-StartingDo not push-start your Mazda.

WARNINGNever tow a vehicle to start it:

Towing a vehicle to start it isdangerous. The vehicle being towedcould surge forward when its enginestarts, causing the two vehicles tocollide. The occupants could beinjured.

CAUTIONDo not push-start a vehicle that hasa manual transaxle. It can damagethe emission control system.

NOTEYou cannot start a vehicle with an automatictransaxle by pushing it.

If Trouble Arises

Emergency Starting

7-23


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (482,1)

OverheatingIf the High engine coolant temperaturewarning light illuminates, the vehicleloses power, or you hear a loud knockingor pinging noise, the engine is probablytoo hot.

WARNING

Switch the ignition to off andmake sure the fan is not running beforeattempting to work near the coolingfan:

Working near the cooling fan when itis running is dangerous. The fancould continue running indefinitelyeven if the engine has stopped andthe engine compartment temperatureis high. You could be hit by the fanand seriously injured.

Do not remove eithercooling system cap when the engineand radiator are hot:

When the engine and radiator arehot, scalding coolant and steam mayshoot out under pressure and causeserious injury.

Open the hood ONLY after steam is nolonger escaping from the engine:

Steam from an overheated engine isdangerous. The escaping steam couldseriously burn you.

If the High engine coolant temperaturewarning light illuminates:

1. Drive safely to the side of the road andpark off the right-of-way.

2. Put a vehicle with an automatictransaxle in park (P), a manualtransaxle in neutral.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Turn off the air conditioner.

5. Check whether coolant or steam isescaping from the engine compartment.

If steam is coming from the enginecompartment:Do not go near the front of the vehicle.Stop the engine.Wait until the steam dissipates, thenopen the hood and start the engine.

If neither coolant nor steam isescaping:Open the hood and idle the engine untilit cools.

CAUTIONIf the cooling fan does not operatewhile the engine is running, theengine temperature will increase.Stop the engine and call anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

6. Make sure the cooling fan is operating,then turn off the engine after thetemperature has decreased.

7. When cool, check the coolant level.If it is low, look for coolant leaks fromthe radiator and hoses.

7-24

If Trouble Arises

Overheating


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (483,1)

If you find a leak or other damage, or ifcoolant is still leaking:Stop the engine and call an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

Cooling system cap

Coolant reservoir

Cooling fan

If you find no problems, the engine iscool, and no leaks are obvious:Carefully add coolant as required (page6-23).

CAUTIONIf the engine continues to overheat orfrequently overheats, have thecooling system inspected. The enginecould be seriously damaged unlessrepairs are made. Consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

If Trouble Arises

Overheating

7-25


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (484,1)

Towing DescriptionWe recommend that towing be done onlyby an Authorized Mazda Dealer or acommercial tow-truck service.

Proper lifting and towing are necessary toprevent damage to the vehicle.Government and local laws must befollowed.

A towed vehicle usually should have itsdrive wheels (front wheels) off theground. If excessive damage or otherconditions prevent this, use wheel dollies.

Wheel dollies

When towing with the rear wheels on theground, release the parking brake.

CAUTIONØ Do not tow the vehicle pointed

backward with driving wheels onthe ground. This may causeinternal damage to the transaxle.

Ø Do not tow with sling-typeequipment. This could damageyour vehicle. Use wheel-lift orflatbed equipment.

7-26

If Trouble Arises

Emergency Towing


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (485,1)

Tiedown Hooks

CAUTIONDo not use the front and reartiedown eyelets for towing thevehicle.They have been designed only forsecuring the vehicle to a transportvessel during shipping.Using the eyelets for any otherpurpose could result in the vehiclebeing damaged.

qTiedown Hooks

1. Remove the tiedown eyelet and the lugwrench from the luggage compartment(page 7-3).

2. Wrap a flathead screwdriver or similartool with a soft cloth to preventdamage to a painted bumper, and openthe cap located on the front or rearbumper.

Front

Rear

CAUTIONDo not use excessive force as it maydamage the cap or scratch thepainted bumper surface.

NOTERemove the cap completely and store it so asnot to lose it.

3. Securely install the tiedown eyeletusing the lug wrench or equivalent.Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Front

Lug wrench


If Trouble Arises

Emergency Towing

7-27


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (486,1)

Rear


Lug wrench

4. Hook the tying rope to the tiedowneyelet.

CAUTIONIf the tiedown eyelet is not securelytightened, it may loosen or disengagefrom the bumper when tying thevehicle. Make sure that the tiedowneyelet is securely tightened to thebumper.

7-28

If Trouble Arises

Emergency Towing


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (487,1)

When Warning/IndicatorLights Illuminate/Flash

qIf the master warning lightilluminates

Type A

Displays when notification of the systemmalfunctions is required.Check the message indicated in thedisplay and consult an Authorized MazdaDealer.(Display example)Displays as follows:

Master warning light

Indication in display and masterwarning light in instrument cluster areilluminated at same timeThis indicates a malfunction with thevehicle system. Check the messageindicated in the display and consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer. For details,refer to the explanations for the warning/indicator lights, in the warning/indicatorlights section, which match the symbol inthe upper part of the display. If a messageis not indicated in the display, operate theINFO switch to display the “Warning”screen.

Type B

The light illuminates continuously if anyone of the following occurs. Consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.l There is a malfunction in the batterymanagement system.

l There is a malfunction in the brakeswitch.

qIf the brake system warning lightilluminates

If the light stays on after the parking brakeis fully released there may be a problemwith the brakes.

Drive to the side of the road and park offthe right-of-way.

If Trouble Arises

Warning/Indicator Lights and Warning Sounds

7-29


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (488,1)

You may notice that the pedal is harder todepress or that it may go closer to thefloor. In either case, it will take longer tostop the vehicle.

1. With the engine stopped, open thehood and check the brake fluid levelimmediately, and then add fluid ifrequired (page 6-25).

2. After adding fluid, check the lightagain.

If the warning light remains on, or if thebrakes do not operate properly, do notdrive the vehicle. Have it towed to anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

Even if the light turns off, have yourbrake system inspected as soon aspossible by an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTEHaving to add brake fluid is sometimes anindicator of leakage. Consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer as soon as possible even if thebrake light is no longer illuminated.

WARNINGDo not drive with the brake systemwarning light illuminated. Contact anAuthorized Mazda Dealer to have thebrakes inspected as soon as possible:

Driving with the brake systemwarning light illuminated isdangerous. It indicates that yourbrakes may not work at all or thatthey could completely fail at anytime. If this light remainsilluminated, after checking that theparking brake is fully released, havethe brakes inspected immediately.

qIf the ABS warning light illuminates

If the ABS warning light stays on whileyou're driving, the ABS control unit hasdetected a system malfunction. If thisoccurs, your brakes will function normallyas if the vehicle had no ABS.Should this happen, consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer as soon as possible.

NOTEl When the engine is jump-started to charge

the battery, uneven rpm occurs and the ABSwarning light may illuminate. If this occurs,it is the result of the weak battery and doesnot indicate an ABS malfunction.Recharge the battery.

l The brake assist system does not operatewhile the ABS warning light is illuminated.

7-30

If Trouble Arises



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (489,1)

qIf the brake system warning lightand the ABS warning lightilluminate simultaneously

If the electronic brake force distributioncontrol unit determines that somecomponents are operating incorrectly, thecontrol unit may illuminate the brakesystem warning light and the ABSwarning light simultaneously. Theproblem is likely to be the electronicbrake force distribution system.

WARNINGDo not drive with both the ABS warninglight and brake warning lightilluminated. Have the vehicle towed toan Authorized Mazda Dealer to havethe brakes inspected as soon aspossible:

Driving when the brake systemwarning light and ABS warning lightare illuminated simultaneously isdangerous.When both lights are illuminated, therear wheels could lock more quicklyin an emergency stop than undernormal circumstances.

qIf the charging system warningindication/warning light is indicated

If the warning light/indication illuminateswhile driving, it indicates a malfunctionof the alternator or of the charging system.Drive to the side of the road and park offthe right-of-way. Consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

CAUTIONDo not continue driving when thecharging system warning light isilluminated because the engine couldstop unexpectedly.

qIf the engine oil warning indication/warning light is indicated

Type A/Type B

This warning light/warning indicationindicates low engine oil pressure.

CAUTIONDo not run the engine if the oilpressure is low. Otherwise, it couldresult in extensive engine damage.

If Trouble Arises


7-31


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (490,1)

If the light illuminates or the warningindication is displayed while driving:

1. Drive to the side of the road and parkoff the right-of-way on level ground.

2. Turn off the engine and wait 5 minutesfor the oil to drain back into the oilpan.

3. Inspect the engine oil level (page 6-22).If it's low, add the appropriate amountof engine oil while being careful not tooverfill.

CAUTIONDo not run the engine if the oil levelis low. Otherwise, it could result inextensive engine damage.

4. Start the engine and check the warninglight/warning indication.

If the light/indication remains illuminatedeven though the oil level is normal or afteradding oil, stop the engine immediatelyand have your vehicle towed to anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

qIf the check engine lightilluminates or flashes

If this light illuminates while driving, thevehicle may have a problem. It isimportant to note the driving conditionswhen the light illuminated and consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

The check engine light may illuminate inthe following cases:l The fuel tank level being very low orapproaching empty.

l The engine's electrical system has aproblem.

l The emission control system has aproblem.

l (U.S.A. and Canada)The fuel-filler cap is missing or nottightened securely.

If the check engine light remains on, or itflashes continuously, do not drive at highspeeds and consult an Authorized MazdaDealer as soon as possible.

qIf the high engine coolanttemperature warning light (red)illuminates or flashes

The light flashes when the engine coolanttemperature is extremely high, andilluminates when the engine coolanttemperature increases further.

Handling Procedure

Flashing light

Drive slowly to reduce engine load untilyou can find a safe place to stop thevehicle and wait for the engine to cooldown.

7-32

If Trouble Arises



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (491,1)

Illuminated light

This indicates the possibility ofoverheating. Park the vehicle in a safeplace immediately and stop the engine.Refer to Overheating (page 7-24).

CAUTIONDo not drive the vehicle with the highengine coolant temperature warninglight illuminated. Otherwise, it couldresult in damage to the engine.

qIf the lane departure warningsystem (LDWS) warning light(amber) flashesí

l The warning light flashes when thesystem has a malfunction. Have yourvehicle inspected at an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

l The LDWS does not operate when thewarning light flashes.

CAUTIONØ If any of the following cases

occurs, the system may have amalfunction. Have the vehicleinspected at an Authorized MazdaDealer.Ø The light flashes while the

vehicle is being driven.Ø The light does not illuminate

when the ignition is switchedON.

Ø Always use tires for all wheels thatare of the specified size, and thesame manufacture, brand, andtread pattern. In addition, do notuse tires with significantlydifferent wear patterns on thesame vehicle. If such impropertires are used, the LDWS may notoperate normally.

Ø When an emergency spare tire isused, the system may not operatenormally.

qIf the automatic transaxlewarning indication/warning lightis indicatedí

The light/indication illuminates when thetransaxle has a problem.

If Trouble Arises


7-33íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (492,1)

CAUTIONIf the automatic transaxle warninglight/warning indication illuminates,the transaxle has an electricalproblem. Continuing to drive yourMazda in this condition could causedamage to your transaxle. Consultan Authorized Mazda Dealer as soonas possible.

qIf the power steering malfunctionwarning indication/indicator lightis indicated

The power steering malfunction indicatorlight illuminates if there is a malfunctionwith the power steering while the engineis running.If the indicator light illuminates, park thevehicle in a safe place immediately andstop the engine.If the indicator light does not turn off evenif the engine is restarted afterwards,consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTEl If the indicator light illuminates, the power

steering will not operate normally. If thishappens, the steering wheel can still beoperated, however, the operation may feelheavy compared to normal, and thesteering wheel could vibrate when turning.

l Repeatedly jerking the steering wheel leftand right while the vehicle is stopped ormoving extremely slowly will cause thepower steering system to go into protectivemode which will make the steering feelheavy, but this does not indicate a problem.If this occurs, park the vehicle safely andwait several minutes for the system toreturn to normal.

qIf the air bag/front seat beltpretensioner system warning lightilluminates or flashes

A system malfunction is indicated if thewarning light constantly flashes,constantly illuminates or does notilluminate at all when the ignition isswitched ON. If any of these occur,consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer assoon as possible. The system may notoperate in an accident.

7-34

If Trouble Arises



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (493,1)

WARNINGNever tamper with the air bag/pretensioner systems and always havean Authorized Mazda Dealer performall servicing and repairs:

Self-servicing or tampering with thesystems is dangerous. An air bag/pretensioner could accidentallyactivate or become disabled causingserious injury or death.

qIf the tire pressure monitoringsystem warning light flashes

If the tire pressure monitoring system hasa malfunction, the tire pressure warninglight flashes for about 1 minute when theignition is switched ON and thencontinues illuminating. Have your vehiclechecked by an Authorized Mazda Dealeras soon as possible.

qIf the KEY indication/warninglight (red) is indicated

Type A

“Keyless System Inspection Required”is displayed

This message is displayed if the advancedkeyless entry & push button start systemhas a problem.Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

CAUTIONIf the above message is indicated, orthe push button start indicator light(amber) flashes, the engine may notstart. If the engine cannot be started,try starting it using the emergencyoperation for starting the engine, andhave the vehicle inspected at anAuthorized Mazda Dealer as soon aspossible.Refer to Emergency Operation forStarting the Engine on page 4-8.

“Set Power to OFF” is displayed

This message is displayed when thedriver's door is opened without switchingthe ignition off.

If Trouble Arises


7-35


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (494,1)

“Key not found” is displayed


l The ignition is switched onl All doors are closed without switchingthe ignition off

Type B

If any malfunction occurs in the keylessentry system, it illuminates continuously.

CAUTIONIf the key warning indicator lightilluminates or the push button startindicator light (amber) flashes, theengine may not start. If the enginecannot be started, try starting itusing the emergency operation forstarting the engine, and have thevehicle inspected at an AuthorizedMazda Dealer as soon as possible.Refer to Emergency Operation forStarting the Engine on page 4-8.

qIf the high beam control system(HBC) warning light (amber)flashesí

This light flashes if there is a malfunctionin the high beam control system (HBC).Have your vehicle inspected by anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

qIf the traction control system(TCS)/dynamic stability control(DSC) indicator light illuminates

If the light stays on, the TCS, DSC or thebrake assist system may have amalfunction and they may not operatecorrectly. Take your vehicle to anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTEl In addition to the indicator light flashing, a

slight lugging sound will come from theengine. This indicates that the TCS/DSC isoperating properly.

l On slippery surfaces, such as fresh snow, itwill be impossible to achieve high rpmwhen the TCS is on.

7-36

If Trouble Arises

íSome models.



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (495,1)

qIf the dynamic stability controlsystem (DSC) OFF indicator lightilluminates

If the light remains illuminated and theTCS/DSC is not switched off, take yourvehicle to an Authorized Mazda Dealer.The DSC may have a malfunction.

qIf the adaptive front lighting system(AFS) OFF indicator light flashesí

The indicator light flashes continuously ifthe system is malfunctioning. Consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTEl Even if the AFS is not operating due to

some malfunction, the normal headlightfunction is still operable.

l If there is a malfunction with the headlightauto-leveling function, the indicator lightflashes.

qIf the low engine coolanttemperature indicator light (blue)does not turn off

If the low engine coolant temperatureindicator light remains illuminated afterthe engine has been sufficiently warmedup, the temperature sensor could have amalfunction. Consult an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.

qIf the turn signal/hazard warningindicator light illuminates or flashesat an abnormally high speed

If an indicator light remains illuminated(does not flash) or if it flashes abnormally,one of the turn signal bulbs may beburned out. Consult an Authorized MazdaDealer.

If Trouble Arises


7-37íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (496,1)

qIf the security indicator lightilluminates or flashes

If the engine does not start with thecorrect key, and the security indicatorlight keeps illuminating or flashing, thesystem may have a malfunction. Consultan Authorized Mazda Dealer.

qIf the blind spot monitoring (BSM)system OFF indicator light flashesí

The indicator light flashes if the BSMsystem has a malfunction. Consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

NOTEIf the vehicle is driven on a road with lesstraffic and few vehicles that the radar sensorscan detect, the system may pause (The BSMOFF indicator light in the instrument panelflashes). However, it does not indicate amalfunction.

qIf the lights-on indicator light flashes

The light continues to flash if the lightingsystem has a malfunction. Consult anAuthorized Mazda Dealer.

7-38

If Trouble Arises

íSome models.



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (497,1)

Warning Sound is Activated

qLights-On Reminder

The lights-on reminder is operable whenthe time setting*1 of the auto headlight offfunction is 0 seconds.If lights are on and the ignition isswitched to ACC or the ignition isswitched off, a continuous beep soundwill be heard when the driver's door isopened.*1 If the light switch is left on, the auto

headlight off function automaticallyturns off the lights about 30 secondsafter switching the ignition off. Thetime setting can be changed.Refer to Personalization Features onpage 9-8.

NOTEl When the ignition is switched to ACC, the

“Ignition Not Switched Off (STOP)Warning Beep” (page 7-40) overrides thelights-on reminder.

l A personalized function is available tochange the sound volume for the lights-onreminder.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.

qAir Bag/Front Seat BeltPretensioner System Warning Beep

If a malfunction is detected in the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner systems andthe warning light, a warning beep soundwill be heard for about 5 seconds everyminute.

The air bag and seat belt pretensionersystem warning beep sound will continueto be heard for approximately 35 minutes.Have your vehicle inspected at anAuthorized Mazda Dealer as soon aspossible.

WARNINGDo not drive the vehicle with the airbag/front seat belt pretensioner systemwarning beep sounding:

Driving the vehicle with the air bag/front seat belt pretensioner systemwarning beep sounding is dangerous.In a collision, the air bags and thefront seat belt pretensioner systemwill not deploy and this could resultin death or serious injury.Contact an Authorized Mazda Dealerto have the vehicle inspected as soonas possible.

qSeat Belt Warning Beep

If the driver's seat belt is not fastenedwhen the ignition is switched ON, a beepsound will be heard for about 6 seconds.If the driver or the front passenger's seatbelt is not fastened and the vehicle isdriven at a speed faster than about 20km/h (12 mph), a beep sound will beheard again for a specified period of time.

If Trouble Arises


7-39


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (498,1)

NOTEl Some models do not have the seat belt

warning function for the front passenger'sseat.

l Placing heavy items on the front passengerseat may cause the front passenger seat beltwarning function to operate depending onthe weight of the item.

l To allow the front passenger seat weightsensor to function properly, do not placeand sit on an additional seat cushion on thefront passenger seat. The sensor may notfunction properly because the additionalseat cushion could cause sensorinterference.

l When a small child sits on the frontpassenger seat, it is possible that thewarning beep will not operate.

qIgnition Not Switched Off(STOP) Warning Beep

If the driver's door is opened while theignition is switched to ACC, a continuousbeep sound will be heard to notify thedriver that the ignition has not beenswitched off (STOP) (for vehicles with atype A meter, messages are displayed inthe instrument cluster). Left in thiscondition, the keyless entry system willnot operate, the car cannot be locked, andthe battery power will be depleted.

qKey Removed from VehicleWarning Beep

Under the following conditions, a beepsound will be heard and the KEY warninglight (red) will flash continuously whenthe ignition has not been switched off tonotify the driver that the key has beenremoved (for vehicles with a type Ameter, messages are displayed in theinstrument cluster). The KEY warninglight (red) will stop flashing when the keyis back inside the vehicle (for vehicleswith a type A meter, messages aredisplayed in the instrument cluster):The ignition has not been switched offand all the doors are closed afterremoving the key from the vehicle. (Abeep sound will be heard 6 times.)


qRequest Switch InoperableWarning Beep (With theadvanced keyless function)

If the request switch is pressed under thefollowing conditions while the key isbeing carried, a beep will be heard forabout 2 seconds to indicate that the frontdoors and the trunk can not be locked.l A door is open (door ajar included).l The ignition has not been switched tooff.

7-40

If Trouble Arises



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (499,1)

qKey Left-in-trunk Warning Beep(With the advanced keyless function)

If the key is left in the trunk with all doorslocked and the trunk lid closed, a beepsound is heard for about 10 seconds toremind the driver the key has been left inthe trunk. If this happens, open the trunklid by pressing the electric trunk lidopener and remove the key. A keyremoved from the trunk may not functionbecause its functions may have beentemporarily suspended. To restore the keyfunction, perform the applicableprocedure (page 3-7).

qKey Left-in-vehicle Warning Beep(With the advanced keyless function)

If a key is left in the vehicle cabin and allthe doors and the trunk are locked using aseparate key, a beep sound is heard forabout 10 seconds to remind the driver thatthe key has been left in the vehicle cabin.If this happens, the doors and the trunklock but the functions of the key left in thevehicle cabin may be temporarilysuspended.Perform the applicable procedure torestore the functions of the key (page 3-7).

qi-ELOOP Warning Beep

If the vehicle is driven while “i-ELOOPcharging” is displayed, a beep sound isheard. Make sure the message is no longerdisplayed before driving.

qTire Inflation Pressure WarningBeep

The warning beep sound will be heard forabout 3 seconds when there is anyabnormality in tire inflation pressures(page 4-118).

qLane Departure Warning System(LDWS) Warning Soundí

While the system is operating, if thesystem determines that the vehicle maydepart from the lane, it sounds a warningsound.

NOTEl The volume of the LDWS warning sound

can be changed.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.

l The type of the LDWS warning sound canbe changed.Refer to Personalization Features on page9-8.

qBlind Spot Monitoring (BSM)System Warning Beepí

Driving forward

The warning beep operates when the turnsignal lever is operated to the side wherethe BSM warning light is illuminated.

NOTEA personalized function is available to changethe BSM warning beep sound volume. Refer toPersonalization Features on page 9-8.

Reversing

If vehicles approach from the rear on theleft and right, the Blind Spot Monitoring(BSM) warning beep operates.

If Trouble Arises


7-41íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (500,1)

qMazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) System Warningsí

The Mazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) system warnings notify thedriver of system malfunctions andcautions on use when required.Check based on the beep sound.

Cautions What to check

The beep sounds 1 timewhile the Mazda RadarCruise Control (MRCC)is operating

The vehicle speed isslower than 25 km/h(16 mph) and the MazdaRadar Cruise Control(MRCC) system has beencanceled.

The beep sounds 5 timeswhile driving

The distance betweenyour vehicle and thevehicle ahead is tooclose. Verify the safety ofthe surrounding area andreduce vehicle speed.

When the Mazda RadarCruise Control (MRCC)is operating, the beepsounds and the MazdaRadar Cruise Control(MRCC) warning light(amber) in the instrumentcluster flashes.

A malfunction in thesystem may be indicated.Have your vehicleinspected at anAuthorized MazdaDealer.

qCollision warningí

If there is the possibility of a collisionwith a vehicle or obstruction ahead, thebeep sounds continuously and a warningis indicated in the display.

7-42

If Trouble Arises

íSome models.



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (501,1)

When Trunk Lid Cannotbe Opened

If the vehicle battery is dead or there is amalfunction in the electrical system andthe trunk lid can not be opened, performthe following procedure as an emergencymeasure to Open it:

1. Open the cover.

2. Turn the lever to the left to fold theseatback.

Cover

Lever

3. Turn the lever to the left to open thetrunk lid.

(Type A)

(Type B)

After performing this emergency measure,have the vehicle inspected at anAuthorized Mazda Dealer as soon aspossible.

If Trouble Arises

When Trunk Lid Cannot be Opened

7-43


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (502,1)

7-44


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (503,1)

8 Customer Information and ReportingSafety Defects

Important consumer information including warranties and add-on equipment.

Customer Assistance ............................... 8-2Customer Assistance (U.S.A.) ............ 8-2Customer Assistance (Canada) ........... 8-7Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico) ... 8-10Customer Assistance (Mexico) ......... 8-11

Mazda Importer/Distributors ............... 8-13Importer/Distributor .......................... 8-13

Reporting Safety Defects ....................... 8-14Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.) .... 8-14Reporting Safety Defects (Canada) ... 8-15

Warranty ................................................ 8-16Warranties for Your Mazda ............... 8-16Outside the United States/Canada ..... 8-17Registering Your Vehicle in A ForeignCountry (Except United States andCanada) ............................................. 8-18Add-On Non-Genuine Parts andAccessories ....................................... 8-19

Cell Phones ............................................. 8-20Cell Phones Warning ......................... 8-20

Event Data Recorder ............................. 8-21Event Data Recorder ......................... 8-21

Uniform Tire Quality Grading System(UTQGS) ................................................ 8-22

Uniform Tire Quality Grading System(UTQGS) .......................................... 8-22

Tire Information (U.S.A.) ..................... 8-24Tire Labeling ..................................... 8-24Location of the Tire Label(Placard) ............................................ 8-30Tire Maintenance .............................. 8-33Vehicle Loading ................................ 8-36Steps for Determining the Correct LoadLimit ................................................. 8-42

Declaration of Conformity .................... 8-43Declaration of Conformity ................ 8-43

Service Publications .............................. 8-50Service Publications .......................... 8-50

8-1


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (504,1)

Customer Assistance (U.S.A.)Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. AllAuthorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehiclein top condition.If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service ofyour Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you takethe following steps:

NOTEIf it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementary restraintsystem modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions in accordance with acertified physician, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

qSTEP 1: Contact Your Mazda Dealer

Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way toaddress the issue.l If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER ofthe dealership or the OWNER.

l If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementaryrestraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical conditions inaccordance with a certified physician, go to STEP 2.

qSTEP 2: Contact Mazda North American Operations

If for any reason you feel the need for further assistance after contacting your dealershipmanagement or it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for thesupplementary restraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medicalconditions in accordance with a certified physician, you can reach Mazda North AmericanOperations by one of the following ways.

Log on: at www.mazdaUSA.com

Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership inthe U.S., can be found here.

E-mail: click on “Contact Us” located on the “Inside Mazda” tab, or at the bottom of thepage at www.mazdaUSA.com

By phone at: 1 (800) 222-5500

8-2

Customer Information and Reporting Safety Defects

Customer Assistance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (505,1)

By letter at:Attn: Customer AssistanceMazda North American Operations7755 Irvine Center DriveIrvine, CA 92618-2922P.O. Box 19734Irvine, CA 92623-9734

In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the followinginformation:

1. Your name, address, and telephone number

2. Year and model of vehicle

3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located onthe upper driver's side corner of the dash)

4. Purchase date and current mileage

5. Your dealer's name and location

6. Your question(s)

If you live outside the U.S.A., please contact your nearest Mazda Distributor.

qSTEP 3: Contact Better Business Bureau (BBB)

Mazda North American Operations realizes that mutual agreement on some issues may notbe possible. As a final step to ensure that your concerns are being fairly considered, MazdaNorth American Operations has agreed to participate in a dispute settlement programadministered by the Better Business Bureau (BBB) system, at no cost to you the consumer.

BBB AUTO LINE works with consumers and the manufacturer in an attempt to reach amutually acceptable resolution of any warranty related concerns. If the BBB is not able tofacilitate a settlement they will provide an informal hearing before an arbitrator.

You are required to resort to BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seekingremedies under the Federal Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. § 2301 et seq. To theextent permitted by the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are also required to resort toBBB AUTO LINE before exercising any rights or seeking remedies under the “LemonLaw”. If you choose to seek remedies that are not created by the Magnuson-Moss WarrantyAct or the applicable state “Lemon Law”, you are not required to first use BBB AUTOLINE.


Customer Assistance

8-3


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (506,1)

The whole process normally takes 40 days or less. The arbitration decision is not bindingon you or Mazda unless you accept the decision. For more information about BBB AUTOLINE, including current eligibility standards, please call 1-800-955-5100 or visit the BBBwebsite at www.lemonlaw.bbb.org.

Being truly committed to customer satisfaction is more than a phrase with Mazda. We hopeto satisfy every customer directly, but if there is ever a question about our decision, Mazdabelieves in providing a fast, fair and free method such as the BBB AUTO LINE to ensureMazda delivers on our commitment to do the right thing for our customers!

qCalifornia Customers

1. Mazda North American Operations participates in BBB AUTO LINE, a mediation/arbitration program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus [4200Wilson Boulevard, Arlington, Virginia 22203] through local Better Business Bureaus.BBB AUTO LINE and Mazda have been certified by the Arbitration CertificationProgram of the California Department of Consumer Affairs.

2. If you have a problem arising under a Mazda written warranty, we encourage you tobring it to our attention. If we are unable to resolve it, you may file a claim with BBBAUTO LINE. Claims must be filed with BBB AUTO LINE within six (6) months afterthe expiration of the warranty.

3. To file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, call 1-800-955-5100. There is no charge for thecall.

4. In order to file a claim with BBB AUTO LINE, you will have to provide your name andaddress, the brand name and vehicle identification number (VIN) of your vehicle, and astatement of the nature of your problem or complaint. You will also be asked to provide:the approximate date of your acquisition of the vehicle, the vehicle's current mileage, theapproximate date and mileage at the time any problem(s) were first brought to theattention of Mazda or one of our dealers, and a statement of the relief you are seeking.

5. BBB AUTO LINE staff may try to help resolve your dispute through mediation. Ifmediation is not successful, or if you do not wish to participate in mediation, claimswithin the program's jurisdiction may be presented to an arbitrator at an informalhearing. The arbitrator's decision should ordinarily be issued within 40 days from thetime your complaint is filed; there may be a delay of 7 days if you did not first contactMazda about your problem, or a delay of up to 30 days if the arbitrator requests aninspection/report by an impartial technical expert or further investigation and report byBBB AUTO LINE.

8-4


Customer Assistance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (507,1)

6. You are required to use BBB AUTO LINE before asserting in court any rights orremedies conferred by California Civil Code Section 1793.22. You are also required touse BBB AUTO LINE before exercising rights or seeking remedies created by Title I ofthe Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If you choose to seekredress by pursuing rights and remedies not created by California Civil Code Section1793.22 or Title I of the Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB AUTO LINE isnot required by those statutes.

7. California Civil Code Section 1793.2 (d) requires that, if Mazda or its representative isunable to repair a new motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle's applicable expresswarranty after a reasonable number of attempts, Mazda may be required to replace orrepurchase the vehicle. California Civil Code Section 1793.22 (b) creates a presumptionthat Mazda has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to itsapplicable express warranties if, within 18 months from delivery to the buyer or 18,000miles on the vehicle's odometer, whichever occurs first, one or more of the followingoccurs:l The same nonconformity [a failure to conform to the written warranty thatsubstantially impairs the use, value or safety of the vehicle] results in a condition thatis likely to cause death or serious bodily injury if the vehicle is driven AND thenonconformity has been subject to repair two or more times by Mazda or its agentsAND the buyer or lessee has directly notified Mazda of the need for the repair of thenonconformity; OR

l The same nonconformity has been subject to repair 4 or more times by Mazda or itsagents AND the buyer has notified Mazda of the need for the repair of thenonconformity; OR

l The vehicle is out of service by reason of repair of nonconformities by Mazda or itsagents for a cumulative total of more than 30 calendar days after delivery of thevehicle to the buyer.

NOTICE TO Mazda AS REQUIRED ABOVE SHALL BE SENT TO THEFOLLOWING ADDRESS:Mazda North American Operations7755 Irvine Center DriveIrvine, CA 92618ATTN: Customer Mediation

8. The following remedies may be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: repairs, reimbursementfor money paid to repair a vehicle or other expenses incurred as result of a vehiclenonconformity, repurchase or replacement of your vehicle, and compensation fordamages and remedies available under Mazda's written warranty or applicable law.

9. The following remedies may not be sought in BBB AUTO LINE: punitive or multipledamages, attorneys' fees, or consequential damages other than as provided in CaliforniaCivil Code Section 1794 (a) and (b).


Customer Assistance

8-5


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (508,1)

10. You may reject the decision issued by a BBB AUTO LINE arbitrator. If you reject thedecision, you will be free to pursue further legal action. The arbitrator's decision andany findings will be admissible in a court action.

11. If you accept the arbitrator's decision, Mazda will be bound by the decision, and willcomply with the decision within a reasonable time not to exceed 30 days after wereceive notice of your acceptance of the decision.

12. Please call BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100 for further details about the program.

8-6


Customer Assistance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (509,1)

Customer Assistance (Canada)

qSatisfaction Review Process

Your complete and permanent satisfaction is of primary concern to Mazda. All AuthorizedMazda Dealers have both the knowledge and tools to keep your Mazda in top condition. Inour experience, any questions, problems, or complaints regarding the operation of yourMazda or any other general service transactions are most effectively resolved by yourdealer. If the cause of your dissatisfaction cannot adequately be addressed by normaldealership procedures, we recommend that you take the following steps:

qSTEP 1: Contact the Mazda Dealer

Discuss the matter with a member of dealership management. If the Service Manager hasalready reviewed your concerns, contact the owner of the dealership or its GeneralManager.

qSTEP 2: Contact the Mazda Regional Office

If you feel that you still require assistance, ask the dealer Service Manager to arrange foryou to meet the local Mazda Service Representative. If more expedient, contact MazdaCanada Inc. Regional Office nearest you for such arrangements. Regional Office addressand phone numbers are shown (page 8-9).

qSTEP 3: Contact the Mazda Customer Relations Department

If still not substantially satisfied, contact the Customer Relations Department, MazdaCanada Inc., 55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill, Ontario, L4B 3K5 Canada TEL:1 (800) 263-4680.Provide the Department with the following information:

1. Your name, address and telephone number


3. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). Refer to the “Vehicle Identification Labels” pageof section 9 of this manual for the location of the VIN.

4. Purchase date

5. Present odometer reading


7. The nature of your problem and/or cause of dissatisfaction

The Department, in cooperation with the local Mazda Service Representative, will reviewthe case to determine if everything possible has been done to ensure your satisfaction.


Customer Assistance

8-7


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (510,1)

Please recognize that the resolution of service problems in most cases requires the use ofyour Mazda dealer's service facilities, personnel and equipment. We urge you to follow theabove three steps in sequence for most effective results.

qMediation/Arbitration Program

Occasionally a customer concern cannot be resolved through Mazda's CustomerSatisfaction Program. If after exhausting the procedures in this manual your concern is stillnot resolved, you have another option.

Mazda Canada Inc. participates in an arbitration program administered by theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP). CAMVAP will advise you abouthow your concern may be reviewed and resolved by an independent third party throughbinding arbitration.

Your complete satisfaction is the goal of Mazda Canada Inc. and our dealers.Mazda's participation in CAMVAP makes a valuable contribution to our achieving thatgoal. There is no charge for using CAMVAP. CAMVAP results are fast, fair and final as theaward is binding on both you and Mazda Canada Inc.

qCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP)

If a specific item of concern arises, where a solution cannot be reached between an owner,Mazda, and/or one of its dealers (that all parties cannot agree upon), the owner may wish touse the services offered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP).

CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial Administrators to assist consumers in schedulingand preparing for their arbitration hearings. However, before you can proceed withCAMVAP you must follow your Mazda dispute resolution process as outlined previously.

8-8


Customer Assistance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (511,1)

CAMVAP is fully implemented in all provinces and territories.Consumers wishing to obtain further information about the Program should contact theProvincial Administrator at 1 (800) 207-0685, or by contacting theCanadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan Office at:

Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan235 Yorkland Boulevard, suite 300North York, OntarioM2J 4Y8http://camvap.caProvincial Administrators may be reached locally as listed below:

Province/Territory CAMVAP Number

British Columbia & Yukon Territories 1 (800) 207-0685

Alberta & Northwest Territories 1 (800) 207-0685

Saskatchewan 1 (800) 207-0685

Manitoba 1 (800) 207-0685

Ontario 1 (800) 207-0685

Atlantic Canada 1 (800) 207-0685

Quebec 1 (800) 207-0685

qRegional Offices

REGIONAL OFFICES AREAS COVERED

MAZDA CANADA INC.WESTERN REGION

8171 ACKROYD ROADSUITE 2000

RICHMOND B.C.V6X 3K1

(604) 303-5670

ALBERTA,BRITISH COLUMBIA,

MANITOBA,SASKATCHEWAN,

YUKON

MAZDA CANADA INC.CENTRAL/ATLANTIC REGION

55 VOGELL ROAD,RICHMOND HILL,ONTARIO, L4B 3K5

(905) 787-7000

ONTARIO

MAZDA CANADA INC.QUEBEC REGION

6111 ROUTE TRANSCANADIENNE

POINTE CLAIRE, QUEBECH9R 5A5

(514) 694-6390

QUEBEC,NEW BRUNSWICK,NOVA SCOTIA,

PRINCE EDWARD ISLAND,NEWFOUNDLAND


Customer Assistance

8-9


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (512,1)

Customer Assistance (Puerto Rico)Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. That is why all AuthorizedMazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehicle in topcondition.If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service ofyour Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you takethe following steps:

qSTEP 1

Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way toaddress the issue. If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS,SALES, SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERALMANAGER of the dealership or the OWNER.

qSTEP 2

If, after following STEP 1, you feel the need for further assistance, please contact yourarea's Mazda representative (Indicated on the next page).

Please help us by providing the following information:



3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located onthe upper driver's side corner of the dash)

4. Purchase date and current mileage


6. Your question(s)

8-10


Customer Assistance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (513,1)

Customer Assistance (Mexico)Your complete and permanent satisfaction is our business. We are here to serve you. AllAuthorized Mazda Dealers have the knowledge and the tools to keep your Mazda vehiclein top condition.If you have any questions or recommendations for improvement regarding the service ofyour Mazda vehicle or servicing by Mazda Dealer personnel, we recommend that you takethe following steps:

qContact Your Mazda Dealer

Discuss the matter with an Authorized Mazda Dealer. This is the quickest and best way toaddress the issue.l If your concern has not been resolved by the CUSTOMER RELATIONS, SALES,SERVICE, or PARTS MANAGER, then please contact the GENERAL MANAGER ofthe dealership or the OWNER.

l If it becomes necessary to have the components or wiring system for the supplementaryrestraint system modified to accommodate a person with certain medical condition inaccordance with a certified physician you must contact your dealership in order to avoidthe potential loss of the warranty of your vehicle which may occur if some third party ishired by the customer to make any modifications to this system.

Log on: at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx

Answers to many questions, including how to locate or contact a local Mazda dealership inMexico, can be found here.

E-mail: click on “Contactanos” at the top of the page at www.MazdaMexico.com.mx

By phone at: 01 800 01 MAZDA (62932)

By letter at:Attn: Customer AssistanceMazda Motor de MexicoMario Pani #150, PB Col. Lomas de Santa FeMexico, D.F. C.P. 05300Del. Cuajimalpa de MorelosTel: Customer Assistance01 800 01 MAZDA (62932).

In order to serve you efficiently and effectively, please help us by providing the followinginformation:



Customer Assistance

8-11


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (514,1)

2. Year and model of vehicle3. Vehicle Identification Number (17 digits, noted on your registration or title or located on

the upper driver's side corner of the dash)4. Purchase date and current mileage5. Your dealer's name and location6. Your question(s)

8-12


Customer Assistance


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (515,1)

Importer/Distributor

qU.S.A.

Mazda North American Operations7755 Irvine Center DriveIrvine, CA 92618-2922 U.S.A.P.O. Box 19734Irvine, CA 92623-9734 U.S.A.TEL:1 (800) 222-5500 (in U.S.A.)(949) 727-1990 (outside U.S.A.)

qCANADA

Mazda Canada Inc.55 Vogell Road, Richmond Hill,Ontario, L4B 3K5 CanadaTEL: 1 (800) 263-4680 (in Canada)(905) 787-7000 (outside Canada)

qPUERTO RICO/U.S. Virgin Island

International Automotive DistributorGroup, LLC. (Mazda de Puerto Rico)P.O. Box 191850, San Juan, Puerto Rico00919-1850TEL: (787) 641-1777

qMEXICO

Mazda Motor de MexicoMario Pani # 150, PB Col. Lomas deSanta Fe Mexico, D.F. C.P. 05300 Del.CuajimalpaTEL: Center of Attention to Clients:01 (800) 016 2932. in Mexico

qGUAM

Triple J Motors157 South Marine Drive, Tamuning,GUAM 96911 USAP.O. Box 6066 Tamuning, Guam 96931TEL: (671) 649-6555

qSAIPAN

Pacific International Marianas, Inc.(d.b.a. Midway Motors)P.O. Box 887 Saipan, MP 96950TEL: (670) 234-7524

Triple J Saipan, Inc.(d.b.a. Triple J Motors)P.O. Box 500487 Saipan, MP 96950-0487TEL: (670) 234-7133/3051

qAMERICAN SAMOA

Polynesia Motors, Inc.P.O. Box 1120, Pago Pago, AmericanSamoa 96799TEL: (684) 699-9347


Mazda Importer/Distributors

8-13


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (516,1)

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S.A.)

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or couldcause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mazda MotorCorporation (Your Mazda Importer/Distributor).

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if itfinds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer, or Mazda Motor Corporation (Your MazdaImporter/Distributor).

To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC,20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

NOTEIf you live in the U.S.A., all correspondence to Mazda Motor Corporation should be forwarded to:

Mazda North American Operations7755 Irvine Center DriveIrvine, California 92618-2922orP.O. Box 19734Irvine, CA 92623-9734Customer Assistance Center or toll free at 1 (800) 222-5500

If you live outside of the U.S.A., please contact the nearest Mazda Distributor shown (page 8-13) inthis booklet.

8-14


Reporting Safety Defects


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (517,1)

Reporting Safety Defects (Canada)Canadian customers who wish to report a safety-related defect to Transport Canada, DefectInvestigations and Recalls, may telephone the toll free hotline 1-800-333-0510, or contactTransport Canada by mail at: Transport Canada, ASFAD, Place de Ville Tower C, 330Sparks Street, Ottawa ON K1A 0N5.

For additional road safety information, please visit the Road Safety website at:http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/menu.htm


Reporting Safety Defects

8-15


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (518,1)

Warranties for Your Mazdal New Vehicle Limited Warrantyl Powertrain Limited Warrantyl Safety Restraint System Limited Warrantyl Anti-perforation Limited Warrantyl Federal Emission Control Warranty/California Emission Control Warranty

l Emission Defect Warrantyl Emission Performance Warranty

l Emission Control Warrantyl Replacement Parts and Accessories Limited Warrantyl Tire Warranty

NOTEWarranty information varies depending on the country. Refer to the Warranty Booklet for detailedwarranty information.

8-16


Warranty


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (519,1)

Outside the United States/CanadaGovernment regulations in the United States/Canada require that automobiles meet specificemission regulations and safety standards. Therefore, vehicles built for use in the UnitedStates/Canada may differ from those sold in other countries.

The differences may make it difficult or even impossible for your vehicle to receivesatisfactory servicing in other countries. We strongly recommend that you NOT take yourMazda outside the United States/Canada.

United StatesHowever, in the event that you are moving to Canada permanently, Mazda vehicles builtfor use in the United States could be eligible for exportation to Canada with specificvehicle modifications to comply with the Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards(CMVSS).

CanadaHowever, in the event that you are moving to the United States permanently, Mazdavehicles built for use in Canada could be eligible for exportation to the United States withspecific vehicle modifications to comply with the United States Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standards (FMVSS).

NOTEThe above is applicable for a permanent import/export situation and not related to travelers onvacation.

You may have the following problems if you do take your vehicle outside of the UnitedStates/Canada:l Recommended fuel may be unavailable. Any kind of leaded fuel or low-octane fuel willaffect vehicle performance and damage the emission controls and engine.

l Proper repair facilities, tools, testing equipment, and replacement parts may not beavailable.

Please refer to your Manufacturer's Warranty Booklet for more information.


Warranty

8-17


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (520,1)

Registering Your Vehicle in A Foreign Country (ExceptUnited States and Canada)

Registering your vehicle in a foreign country may be problematic depending on whether itmeets the specific emission and safety standards of the country in which the vehicle will bedriven. Consequently, your vehicle may require modifications at personal expense in orderto meet the regulations.In addition, you should be aware of the following issues:Satisfactory vehicle servicing may be difficult or impossible in another country.

The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.

Parts, servicing techniques, and tools necessary to maintain and repair your vehicle may beunavailable.

There might not be an Authorized Mazda Dealer in the country you plan to take yourvehicle.

The Mazda warranty is valid only in certain countries.

8-18


Warranty


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (521,1)

Add-On Non-Genuine Parts and AccessoriesNon-genuine parts and accessories for Mazda vehicles can be found in stores.These may fit your vehicle, but they are not approved by Mazda for use with Mazdavehicles. When you install non-genuine parts or accessories, they could affect yourvehicle's performance or safety systems; the Mazda warranty doesn't cover this. Before youinstall any non-genuine parts or accessories, consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

WARNINGAlways consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer before you install non-genuine parts oraccessories:

Installation of non-genuine parts or accessories is dangerous. Improperly designedparts or accessories could seriously affect your vehicle's performance or safetysystems. This could cause you to have an accident or increase your chances ofinjuries in an accident.

Be very careful in choosing and installing add-on electrical equipment, such asmobile telephones, two-way radios, stereo systems, and car alarm systems:

Incorrectly choosing or installing improper add-on equipment or choosing animproper installer is dangerous. Essential systems could be damaged, causing enginestalling, air-bag (SRS) activation, ABS/TCS/DSC inactivation, or a fire in the vehicle.

Mazda assumes no responsibility for death, injury, or expenses that may result from theinstallation of add-on non-genuine parts or accessories.


Warranty

8-19


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (522,1)

Cell Phones Warning

WARNINGPlease comply with the legal regulations concerning the use of communicationequipment in vehicles in your country:

Use of any electrical devices such as cell phones, computers, portable radios, vehiclenavigation or other devices by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous.Dialing a number on a cell phone while driving also ties-up the driver's hands. Use ofthese devices will cause the driver to be distracted and could lead to a seriousaccident. If a passenger is unable to use the device, pull off the right-of-way to a safearea before use. If use of a cell phone is necessary despite this warning, use a hands-free system to at least leave the hands free to drive the vehicle. Never use a cellphone or other electrical devices while the vehicle is moving and, instead,concentrate on the full-time job of driving.

8-20


Cell Phones


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (523,1)

Event Data RecorderThis vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safetysystems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle isdesigned to record such data as:· How various systems in your vehicle were operating;· Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;· How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,· How fast the vehicle was traveling.These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashesand injuries occur.NOTE:EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash or near crash-likesituation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and nopersonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, otherparties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personallyidentifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicleor the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as lawenforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have accessto the vehicle or the EDR.

Mazda will not disclose any of the data recorded in an EDR to a third party unless:l Awritten agreement from the vehicle owner or the lessee is obtainedl Officially requested by the police or other law enforcement authoritiesl Used as a defense for Mazda in a law suit, claim, or arbitrationl Ordered by a judge or courtHowever, if necessary Mazda will:l Use the data for research on Mazda vehicle performance, including safety.l Disclose the data or the summarized data to a third party for research purposes withoutdisclosing vehicle or owner identification information.


Event Data Recorder

8-21


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (524,1)

Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)This information relates to the tire grading system developed by the U.S. NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration for grading tires by tread wear, traction, andtemperature performance.

qTread Wear

The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specified government test course.For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times as well on the governmentcourse as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however,and may depart significantly from the norm because of variations in driving habits, servicepractices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

qTraction-AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades representthe tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.

WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire is based on braking (straight ahead) tractiontests and does not include acceleration cornering (turning), hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

qTemperature-A, B, C

The temperature grades A (the highest), B, and C, represent the tire's resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditionson a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tirelife, and excessive temperatures can lead to sudden tire failure.

Grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger vehicle tires must meetunder the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required bylaw.

8-22


Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (525,1)

WARNINGKeep your vehicle's tires properly inflated and not overloaded:

Driving with improperly inflated or overloaded tires is dangerous. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can causeheat buildup and possible tire failure. The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

These grades will be added to the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires over the next severalyears according to a schedule established by the NHTSA and the tire manufacturers.

The grade of tires available as standard or optional equipment on Mazda vehicles may varywith respect to grade.

ALL PASSENGERVEHICLE TIRES MUST CONFORM TO THESE GRADES ANDTO ALL OTHER FEDERALTIRE-SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.

qUNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AATEMPERATURE A

TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A

UTQGS MARK (example)


Uniform Tire Quality Grading System (UTQGS)

8-23


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (526,1)

Tire LabelingFederal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall ofall tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tireand also provides a tire identification number for safety standard certification and in case ofa recall.

qInformation on Passenger Vehicle Tires

Please refer to the sample below.

1. TIN: U.S. DOT tire identification number

2. Passenger car tire

3. Nominal width of tire in millimeters

4. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)

5. Radial

6. Run-flat tire

7. Rim diameter code

8. Load index & speed symbol

9. Severe snow conditions

10. Tire ply composition and materials used

8-24


Tire Information (U.S.A.)


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (527,1)

11. Max. load rating

12. Tread wear, traction and temperature grades

13. Max. permissible inflation pressure

14. SAFETY WARNING

P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanationof the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size andload index rating may be different from the example.

P

Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designatedby the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).

NOTEIf your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO(European Tire and Rim Technical Organization) or JATMA (Japan Tire Manufacturing Association).

215

“215” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives thewidth in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the largerthe number, the wider the tire.

65

“65” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.

R

“R” is the tire construction symbol. R indicates “Radial ply construction”.

15

“15” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.

95

“95” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight eachtire can support.



8-25


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (528,1)

H

“H” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use ofthe tire is rated.

Letter Rating Speed Rating

Q 99 mph

R 106 mph

S 112 mph

T 118 mph

U 124 mph

H 130 mph

V 149 mph

W 168* mph

Y 186* mph

* For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph, tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR. Fortires with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph, tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR.

M S or M/S: Mud and Snow

AT: All Terrain.AS: All Season. The “M S” or “M/S” indicates that the tire has some functional use inmud and snow.

U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number (TIN)

This begins with the letters “DOT” which indicates the tire meets all federal standards. Thenext two numbers or letters are the plant code where it was manufactured, and the last fournumbers represent the week and year the tire was manufactured. For example, the numbers457 means the 45st week of 1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four digits. For example,the number 2102 means the 21th week of 2002. The other numbers are marketing codesused at the manufacturer's discretion. This information is used to contact consumers if a tiredefect requires a recall.

Tire Ply Composition and Materials Used

The number of plies indicates the number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Ingeneral, the greater the number of plies, the more weight a tire can support. Tiremanufacturers also must indicate the tire materials, which include steel, nylon, polyester,and other.

Maximum Load Rating

This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried bythe tire.

Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure

This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should ever be put in the tire undernormal driving conditions.

8-26




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (529,1)

Tread Wear, Traction and Temperature Grades

Tread wear: The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. Forexample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100.Traction: The traction grades, from highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The gradesrepresent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditionson specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may havepoor traction performance.Temperature: The temperature grades are A (the highest), B and C, representing the tire'sresistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.

Snow Tires

In some heavy snow areas, local governments may require true snow tires, those with verydeeply cut tread. These tires should only be used in pairs or placed on all four wheels.Make sure you purchase snow tires that are the same size and construction type as the othertires on your vehicle.

SAFETYWARNING

The following safety warning appears on the tire's sidewall.SERIOUS INJURY MAY RESULT FROM:l EXPLOSION OF TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY DUE TO IMPROPER MOUNTING-MATCH TIRE DIAMETER TO RIM DIAMETER; NEVER EXCEED 40 psi (275 kPa)TO SEAT BEADS-ONLY SPECIALLY TRAINED PERSONS SHOULD MOUNTTIRES.

l TIRE FAILURE DUE TO UNDER-INFLATION/OVERLOADING/DAMAGE-FOLLOW OWNER'S MANUAL AND PLACARD IN VEHICLE-FREQUENTLYCHECK INFLATION PRESSURE AND INSPECT FOR DAMAGE.



8-27


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (530,1)

qInformation on Temporary Tires

Please refer to the sample below.

1. Temporary tires

2. Nominal width of tire in millimeters

3. Ratio of height to width (aspect ratio)

4. Diagonal

5. Rim diameter code

6. Load index & speed symbol

T115/70D 16 90M is an example of a tire size and load index rating. Here is an explanationof the various components of that tire size and load index rating. Note that the tire size andload index rating may be different from the example.

T

Indicates a tire that may be installed on cars, SUVs, minivans and light trucks as designatedby the Tire and Rim Association (T&RA).

115

“115” is the nominal width of the tire in millimeters. This three-digit number gives thewidth in millimeters of the tire from sidewall edge to sidewall edge. In general, the largerthe number, the wider the tire.

8-28




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (531,1)

70

“70” is the aspect ratio. This two-digit number indicates the tire's ratio of height to width.

D

“D” is the tire construction symbol. D indicates “diagonal ply construction”.

16

“16” is the wheel rim diameter in inches.

90

“90” is the Load Index. This two-or three-digit number indicates how much weight eachtire can support.

M

“M” is the speed rating. The speed rating denotes the maximum speed for which the use ofthe tire is rated.

Letter Rating Speed Rating

M 81 mph



8-29


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (532,1)

Location of the Tire Label (Placard)You will find the tire label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other importantinformation on the driver's side B-pillar or on the edge of the driver's door frame.

SAMPLE

qRecommended Tire Inflation Pressure

On the tire label you will find the recommended tire inflation pressure in both kPa and psifor the tires installed as original equipment on the vehicle. It is very important that theinflation pressure of the tires on your vehicle is maintained at the recommended pressure.You should check the tire pressure regularly to insure that the proper inflation pressure ismaintained.Refer to Tires on page 9-7.

NOTETire pressures listed on the vehicle placard or tire information label indicate the recommended coldtire inflation pressure, measured when the tires are cold, after the vehicle has been parked for at least3 hours. As you drive, the temperature in the tire warms up, increasing the tire pressure.

8-30




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (533,1)

WARNINGAlways check the tire inflation pressures on a regular basis according to therecommended tire inflation pressure on the tire label and in conjunction with theinformation in this owner's manual:

Driving your vehicle with under-inflated tires is dangerous.Under-inflation is the most common cause of failures in any kind of tire and mayresult in severe cracking, tread separation or “blowout”, with unexpected loss ofvehicle control and increased risk of injury. Under-inflation increases sidewall flexingand rolling resistance, resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire. Itresults in unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear, loss of control and accidents. A tirecan lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat!It is impossible to determine whether or not tires are properly inflated just by lookingat them.

qChecking Tire Pressure

1. When you check the air pressure, make sure the tires are cold ―meaning they are nothot from driving even a mile.

2. Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.

3. Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.

4. Add air to achieve recommended air pressure.

5. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of thevalve. Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge.

6. Replace the valve cap.

7. Repeat with each tire, including the spare.

NOTESome spare tires require higher inflation pressure.

8. Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded thatcould poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak.

9. Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges, cuts, bulges, cracks or otherirregularities.



8-31


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (534,1)

qGlossary of Terms

Tire Placard: A label indicating the OE tire sizes, recommended inflation pressure, andthe maximum weight the vehicle can carry.Tire Identification Number (TIN): A number on the sidewall of each tire providinginformation about the tire brand and manufacturing plant, tire size, and date ofmanufacture.Inflation Pressure: A measure of the amount of air in a tire.kPa: Kilopascal, the metric unit for air pressure.psi: Pounds per square inch, the English unit for air pressure.B-pillar: The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door.Original Equipment (OE): Describes components originally equipped on the vehicle.Vehicle Load Limit: The maximum value of the combination weight of occupants andcargo.Bead Area of the Tire: Area of the tire next to the rim.Sidewall Area of the Tire: Area between the bead area and the tread.Tread Area of the Tire: Area on the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when it'smounted on the vehicle.

Seating capacity means the total allowable number of vehicle occupants. Seating capacityis described on the tire label.

Production options weight is the combination weight of installed regular productionoptions weighing over 2.3 kilograms in excess of the standard items which they replace,and not previously considered in the curb weight or accessory weight, including heavyduty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special trim.

Rim is the metal support (wheel) for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tirebeads are seated.

8-32




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (535,1)

Tire MaintenanceImproper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally. Here aresome important maintenance points:

qTire Inflation Pressure

Inspect all tire pressure monthly (including the spare) when the tires are cold. Maintainrecommended pressures for the best ride, top handling, and minimum tire wear. Use thepressures specified on the vehicle tire information placard or tire label for optimum service.

qTire Rotation

To equalize tread wear, rotate the tires every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if irregularwear develops. During rotation, inspect them for correct balance.

Do not include (TEMPORARY USE ONLY) spare tire in rotation.

Forward

Inspect the tires for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by one or acombination of the following:l Incorrect tire pressurel Improper wheel alignmentl Out-of-balance wheell Severe brakingAfter rotation, inflate all tire pressures to specification (page 9-7) and inspect the lug nutsfor tightness.

CAUTIONRotate unidirectional tires and radial tires that have an asymmetrical tread patternor studs only from front to rear, not from side to side. Tire performance will beweakened if rotated from side to side.



8-33


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (536,1)

qReplacing a Tire

WARNINGAlways use tires that are in good condition:

Driving with worn tires is dangerous. Reduced braking, steering, and traction couldresult in an accident.

If a tire wears evenly, a wear indicator will appear as a solid band across the tread.Replace the tire when this happens.

New tread

Tread wear indicator

Worn tread

You should replace the tire before the band crosses the entire tread.

NOTETires degrade over time, even when they are not being used on the road. It is recommended that tiresgenerally be replaced when they are 6 years or older. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent highloading conditions can accelerate the aging process. You should replace the spare tire when youreplace the other road tires due to the aging of the spare tire. The period in which the tire wasmanufactured (both week and year) is indicated by a 4-digit number.Refer to Tire Labeling on page 8-24.

qSafety Practices

The way you drive has a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety. So cultivategood driving habits for your own benefit.l Observe posted speed limits and drive at speeds that are safe for the existing weatherconditions

l Avoid fast starts, stops and turnsl Avoid potholes and objects on the roadl Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against the curb when parking

8-34




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (537,1)

CAUTIONIf you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect yourtire or vehicle has been damaged, immediately reduce your speed. Drive with cautionuntil you can safely pull off the road. Stop and inspect the tire for damage. If the tireis under-inflated or damaged, deflate it, remove the tire and rim and replace it withyour spare tire. If you cannot detect a cause, have the vehicle towed to the nearestvehicle or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected.



8-35


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (538,1)

Vehicle Loading

WARNINGDo not tow a trailer with this vehicle:

Towing a trailer with this vehicle is dangerous because it has not been designed totow a trailer and doing so will affect the drive system which could result in vehicledamage.

This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle, to keep your loadedvehicle weight within its design rating capability. Properly loading your vehicle willprovide maximum return of vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle,familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle's weight ratings,from the vehicle's Safety Certification Label and Tire and Load Information Label:

WARNINGOverloaded Vehicle:

Overloading a vehicle is dangerous. The results of overloading can have seriousconsequences in terms of passenger safety. Too much weight on a vehicle'ssuspension system can cause spring or shock absorber failure, brake failure,handling or steering problems, irregular tire wear, tire failure or other damage.Overloading makes a vehicle harder to drive and control. It also increases thedistance required for stopping. In cases of serious overloading, brakes can failcompletely, particularly on steep grades. The load a tire will carry safely is acombination of the size of the tire, its load range, and corresponding inflationpressure.Never overload the vehicle and always observe the vehicle's weight ratings from thevehicle's Safety Certification and Tire and Load Information labels.

8-36




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (539,1)

Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and allstandard equipment. It does not include passengers, cargo, or optional equipment.

Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from yourdealer plus any aftermarket equipment.

PAYLOAD

Payload is the combination weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is designed tocarry. The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire and LoadInformation label on the driver's door frame or door pillar. Look for “THECOMBINATION WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVEREXCEED XXX kg or XXX lbs” for your maximum payload. The payload listed on the tirelabel is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If anyaftermarket or dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle, the weight ofthe equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the tire label in order to beaccurate.



8-37


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (540,1)

SAMPLE

CARGO

Cargo Weight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo andoptional equipment.

The cargo weight limit decreases depending on the number of vehicle occupants. The cargoweight limit can be calculated by subtracting the total weight of the vehicle occupants fromthe “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed” value on the tirelabel.

8-38




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (541,1)

Examples: Based on a single occupant weight of 68 kg (150 lbs), and a value of 385 kg(849 lbs) for the “combination weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed”:The cargo weight limit with one occupant is 385 kg (849 lbs) _ 68 kg (150 lbs) = 317 kg(699 lbs)The cargo weight limit with two occupants is 385 kg (849 lbs) _ (68 × 2) kg ( (150 × 2)lbs) = 249 kg (549 lbs)If the weight of the occupant increases, the cargo weight limit decreases by that much.

GAW (Gross Axle Weight) is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) -including vehicle curb weight and all payload.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight that can be carriedby a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the Safety ComplianceCertification Label located on the driver's door frame or door pillar. The total load oneach axle must never exceed its GAWR.

GVW

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of the fullyloaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR isshown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the driver's doorframe or door pillar. The GVW must never exceed the GVWR.



8-39


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (542,1)

SAMPLE

WARNINGExceeding Axle Weight Rating Limits:

Exceeding the Safety Certification Label axle weight rating limits is dangerous andcould result in death or serious injury as a result of substandard vehicle handling,performance, engine, transmission and/or structural damage, serious damage to thevehicle, or loss of control.Always keep the vehicle within the axle weight rating limits.

GCW

8-40




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (543,1)

GCW (Gross Combination Weight) is the weight of the loaded vehicle (GVW).

GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) is the maximum allowable weight of thevehicle - including all cargo and passengers - that the vehicle can handle without riskingdamage. The GCW must never exceed the GCWR.

WARNINGExceeding GVWR or GAWR Specifications:

Exceeding the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label is dangerous.Exceeding any vehicle rating limitation could result in a serious accident, injury, ordamage to the vehicle.Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the originalsbecause they may lower the vehicle's GVWR and GAWR limitations. Replacementtires with a higher limit than the originals do not increase the GVWR and GAWRlimitations.Never exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label.



8-41


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (544,1)

Steps for Determining the Correct Load Limit

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit-(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should

never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg

or XXX lbs.(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load

capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and therewill be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of availablecargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1400 _ 750 (5 × 150) = 650lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggageload capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will betransferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how thisreduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

8-42




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (545,1)

Declaration of Conformity

qKeyless Entry System/Immobilizer System



8-43


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (546,1)

qBlind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System

8-44




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (547,1)

NOTEDuring printing time of this user manual the approvals listed above are granted.



8-45


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (548,1)

WARNINGChange or modifications not expressively approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the use's authority to operate the equipment.

qHomeLink Wireless Control System

CAUTIONHomeLink has been tested and complies with FCC and Industry Canada rules.Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user's authority to operate the device.

NOTEFCC ID: NZLMOBHL4CANADA:4112A-MOBHL4This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:1- This device may not cause harmful interference, and2- This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesiredoperation.

qBluetooth® Hands-Free

FCCFCC: CB2MAZGEN6HFT

NOTEThis device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following twoconditions:(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause

undesired operation.

WARNINGChanges or modifications made to this equipment not expressly approved by themanufacturer may void the FCC authorization to operate this equipment.

8-46




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (549,1)

NOTEThis equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protectionagainst harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and canradiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee thatinterference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmfulinterference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment offand on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the followingmeasures:l Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.l Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.l Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is

connected.l Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

ICIC:279B-MAZGEN6HFTLicence exemptThis device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) This device may not cause interference, and(2) This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause

undesired operation of the device.The term “IC: ” before the radio certification number only signifies that Industry Canadatechnical specifications were met. The antenna used for this transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users andinstallers must be provided with installation instructions and transmitter operatingconditions for satisfying RF exposure compliance.



8-47


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (550,1)

qForward Obstruction Warning (FOW)/Mazda Radar Cruise Control (MRCC)

8-48




Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (551,1)



8-49


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (552,1)

Service PublicationsFactory-authorized Mazda service publications are available for owners who wish to dosome of their own maintenance and repair.

When requesting any of our publications through an Authorized Mazda Dealer, refer to thechart below.

If they do not have what you need in stock, they can order it for you.

PUBLICATION ORDER NUMBER PUBLICATION DESCRIPTION

9999-95-063B-14 2014 WORKSHOP MANUAL (English)

9999-MX-063B-14 2014 WORKSHOP MANUAL (Spanish)

9999-95-039G-14 2014 WIRING DIAGRAM (English)

9999-MX-039G-14 2014 WIRING DIAGRAM (Spanish)

9999-95-078C-14R1 2014 OWNER'S MANUAL (English)

9999-EC-078C-14R1 2014 OWNER'S MANUAL (English and French)

9999-PR-078C-14R1 2014 OWNER'S MANUAL (Spanish)

9999-95-101F-14 2014 SERVICE HIGHLIGHTS

9999-95-NAV1-132014 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL(English)

9999-EC-NAV1-132014 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL(English and French)

9999-PR-NAV1-132014 NAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL(Spanish)

qWORKSHOP MANUAL:

Covers recommended maintenance and repair procedures of the drive train, body andchassis.

qWIRING DIAGRAM:

Provides electrical schematics as well as component location for the entire electricalsystem.

qOWNER'S MANUAL:

This booklet contains information regarding the proper care and operation of your vehicle.This is not a technician's manual.

8-50


Service Publications


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (553,1)

qSERVICE HIGHLIGHTS:

Provides description and operation of the many systems of your Mazda.

qNAVIGATION SYSTEM OWNER'S MANUAL:

This booklet contains information regarding the proper operation and use of the navigationsystem. This is not a technician's manual.


Service Publications

8-51


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (554,1)

8-52


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (555,1)

9 Specifications

Technical information about your Mazda.

Identification Numbers ................................................................. 9-2Vehicle Information Labels ....................................................... 9-2

Specifications ................................................................................. 9-4Specifications ............................................................................ 9-4

Personalization Features .............................................................. 9-8Personalization Features ............................................................ 9-8

9-1


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (556,1)

Vehicle Information Labels

qVehicle Identification Number

The vehicle identification number legallyidentifies your vehicle. The number is ona plate attached to the left top side of thedashboard. This plate can easily be seenthrough the windshield.

qMotor Vehicle Safety StandardLabel (U.S.A. and Canada)

qChassis Number

Open the cover shown in the figure tocheck the chassis number.

qVehicle Emission ControlInformation Label (U.S.A. andCanada)

9-2

Identification Numbers


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (557,1)

qTire Pressure Label

qEngine Number

Forward

Identification Numbers

9-3


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (558,1)

Specifications

qEngine

Item Specification

Type DOHC-16V in-line, 4-cylinder

Bore × Stroke 89.0 × 100 mm (3.50 × 3.94 in)

Displacement 2,488 ml (2,488 cc, 151.8 cu in)

Compression ratio 13.0

qElectrical System

Item Classification

BatteryQ-85*1

12V-60Ah/20HR*2 or 12V-65Ah/20HR*2

Spark-plug numberMazda Genuine sparkplug*3

PE5R-18-110 or PE5S-18-110

*1 Q-85 is designed for i-ELOOP system. Only Q-85 should be used to ensure correct operation of i-ELOOPsystem. Consult an Authorized Mazda Dealer for details.

*2 Not for i-ELOOP system.*3 This spark plug provides the SKYACTIV-G engine with optimum performance. Contact an Authorized Mazda

Dealer for details.

CAUTIONWhen cleaning the iridium plugs, do not use a wire brush. The fine particulatecoating on the iridium alloy and platinum tips could be damaged.

qLubricant Quality

Lubricant Classification

Engine oil Refer to Recommended Oil on page 6-21.

Manual transaxle oilAPI Service GL-4

SAE 75W-80

Automatic transaxle fluid Mazda Genuine ATF FZ

Brake/Clutch fluid SAE J1703 or FMVSS116 DOT-3

NOTERefer to Introduction on (page 6-2) for owner's responsibility in protecting your investment.

9-4

Specifications


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (559,1)

qCapacities

(Approximate Quantities)

Item Capacity

Engine oilWith oil filter replacement 4.5 L (4.8 US qt, 4.0 Imp qt)

Without oil filter replacement 4.3 L (4.5 US qt, 3.8 Imp qt)

CoolantManual transaxle 7.5 L (7.9 US qt, 6.6 Imp qt)

Automatic transaxle 7.7 L (8.1 US qt, 6.8 Imp qt)

Manual transaxle oil 1.65 L (1.74 US qt, 1.45 Imp qt)

Automatic transaxle fluid 7.8 L (8.2 US qt, 6.9 Imp qt)

Fuel tank 62.0 L (16.4 US gal, 13.6 Imp gal)

Check oil and fluid levels with dipsticks or reservoir gauges.

qDimensions

Item Vehicle specification

Overall lengthWithout license plate holder 4,865 mm (191.5 in)

With license plate holder 4,895 mm (192.7 in)

Overall width 1,840 mm (72.4 in)

Overall height 1,450 mm (57.1 in)

Front tread17 inch wheel vehicle 1,585 mm (62.4 in)

19 inch wheel vehicle 1,595 mm (62.8 in)

Rear tread17 inch wheel vehicle 1,575 mm (62.0 in)

19 inch wheel vehicle 1,585 mm (62.4 in)

Wheelbase 2,830 mm (111.4 in)

qWeights

U.S.A. and Canada

ItemWeight

Manual transaxle Automatic transaxle

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) 1,917 kg (4,226 lbs) 1,945 kg (4,288 lbs)

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)Front 999 kg (2,202 lbs) 1,029 kg (2,269 lbs)

Rear 923 kg (2,035 lbs) 921 kg (2,030 lbs)

Mexico

Item Weight

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

Total 1,941 kg (4,279 lbs)

Front 993 kg (2,189 lbs)

Rear 948 kg (2,090 lbs)

Specifications

9-5


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (560,1)

qAir Conditioner

The type of refrigerant used is indicated on a label attached to the inside of the engine compartment. Check thelabel before recharging the refrigerant. Refer to Climate Control System on page 5-2.

Item Classification

Refrigerant Type HFC134a (R-134a)

qLight Bulbs

Exterior light

Light bulbCategory

Wattage ECE R (SAE)

HeadlightsHalogen

High beam 60 HB3 (HB3)

Low beam 55 H11 (H11)

Xenon fusion High/Low beam 35 D4S (D4S)

Daytime running lightsWith halogen bulb headlights 60 HB3 (HB3)

With xenon fusion bulb headlights LED*1― (―)

Front turn signal lights/Parkinglights (Front side-marker lights)

With halogen bulb headlights 27/8 ― (#7444NA)


With xenon fusion bulb headlights 27/8 ― (#7444NA)

Parking lights With xenon fusion bulb headlights LED*1 ― (―)

Fog lightsí 55 H11 (H11)

Side turn signal lights LED*1― (―)

High-mount brake light LED*1― (―)

Rear turn signal lights 21 WY21W (22.3CP)

Rear side-marker light 5 W5W (4CP)

Brake lights/Taillights LED*1― (―)

Taillights (Trunk lid side) 5 W5W (4CP)

Reverse light 21 W21W (921)

License plate lights 5 W5W (―)

*1 LED is the abbreviation for Light Emitting Diode.

Interior light

Light bulbCategory

Wattage ECE R

Trunk light 3 ―

Overhead light (Front)/Map lights 8 ―

Rear map lights 8 ―

Courtesy lights 5 W5W

Vanity mirror lightsí 2 ―

9-6 íSome models.

Specifications


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (561,1)

qTires

NOTEThe tires have been optimally matched with the chassis of your vehicle.When replacing tires, Mazda recommends that you replace tires of the same type originally fitted toyour vehicle. For details, contact an Authorized Mazda Dealer.

Check the tire pressure label for tire size and inflation pressure.Refer to Tire Inflation Pressure on page 6-35.After adjusting the tire pressure, initialization of the tire pressure monitoring system isnecessary to make the system operates normally.Refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System Initialization on page 4-120.

Standard tire

(U.S.A. and Canada)

Tire sizeInflation pressure

Front Rear

P225/55R17 95V 250 kPa (36 psi) 250 kPa (36 psi)

P225/45R19 92W 240 kPa (35 psi) 240 kPa (35 psi)

(Mexico)

Tire sizeInflation pressure

Up to 3 persons ―Full load

225/55R17 97VFront 230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi) 250 kPa (2.5 bar, 36 psi)

Rear 230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi) 320 kPa (3.2 bar, 46 psi)

225/45R19 92WFront 230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi) 250 kPa (2.5 bar, 36 psi)

Rear 230 kPa (2.3 bar, 33 psi) 320 kPa (3.2 bar, 46 psi)

1 person's weight: About 75 kg

Temporary spare tireí

(U.S.A. and Canada)

Tire size Inflation pressure

T125/70D17 98M 420 kPa (60 psi)

(Mexico)

Tire size Inflation pressure

185/55R16 87M 320 kPa (3.2 bar, 46 psi)

qFuses

Refer to Fuses on page 6-51.

Specifications

9-7íSome models.


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (562,1)

Personalization FeaturesThe following “Personalization Features” are available. These settings can only be changed by an AuthorizedMazda Dealer.Items in which the function setting can be changed differ depending on the market and specification.

Item Feature Factory Setting Available Settings

Daytime runninglights

The function of the daytime running lights canbe changed.

On Off

9-8

Personalization Features


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (563,1)

The following “Personalization Features” can be changed by the vehicle owner.Items in which the function setting can be changed differ depending on the market and specification.


Power door lock

Changes the auto lock/unlock function setting for allthe doors according to the vehicle speed, the vehiclepower supply condition, and the selector leverposition.Refer to Auto Lock/Unlock Function on page 3-15.Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

Lock: Driving,Unlock: IGN

Off

Off/Lock WhenDriving/Lock: ShiftFrom P, Unlock: In

P/Lock WhenShifting Out Of P

Keyless entrysystem

The method for unlocking the doors using thetransmitter can be changed.Refer to Transmitter on page 3-4.Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

Once: Driver's,Twice: All

Doors

Touch Once: AllDoors

The time required for the doors to relockautomatically after unlocking with the transmitter canbe changed.Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

60 seconds30 seconds/90

seconds

Advanced keylessentry system

The volume of the answer-back beep during advancedkeyless entry system operation can be changed.Refer to Locking, Unlocking with Request Switch(With the advanced keyless function) on page 3-13.Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

Medium Off/Low/High

The function to automatically lock the doors whenleaving the vehicle while carrying the key can bechanged.Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

Off On

The method for unlocking the doors using the requestswitch can be changed.Refer to Locking, Unlocking with Request Switch(With the advanced keyless function) on page 3-13.Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

Once: Driver's,Twice: All

Doors

Touch Once: AllDoors

The time required for the doors to relockautomatically after unlocking with the transmitter canbe changed.Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

60 seconds30 seconds/90

seconds

Illumination entry

The time required for the interior lamp to turn offautomatically can be changed(prevents battery depletion when a door is open/ajar).Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

30 minutes60 minutes/10

minutes

The time required for the interior lamp to turn offautomatically after all doors are closed can bechanged.Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

15 seconds7.5 seconds/30

seconds/60 seconds

Lane-change signalThe three-time flash function can be changed.Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

On Off

Auto-wiper controlThe auto-wiper control function can be changed.Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

On(Rain Sensing)

Off (Intermittent)


9-9


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (564,1)


Auto headlightoff*1

The time required for headlights to turn off afterignition is switched off can be changed.Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

30 seconds

0 seconds*2/60 seconds/90 seconds/120 seconds

Auto-light controlThe headlight illumination on/off timing based onsurrounding lightness/darkness can be changed.Refer to Setup on page 5-55.

MediumLight/MediumLight/MediumDark/Dark

High BeamControl System(HBC)

The High Beam Control System (HBC) function canbe changed.*3

Refer to Setup on page 5-55.On Off

Turn indicatorThe turn indicator beep volume level can be changed.Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switch on page4-18.

High Low

Lights-onreminder*4

The volume of the lights-on reminder warning alarmcan be changed.Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switch on page4-18.

Off High/Low

Blind SpotMonitoring (BSM)system

The volume of the BSM warning beep can bechanged.*5

Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switch on page4-18.

High Low/OFF

Lane DepartureWarning System(LDWS)

The warning sound for the Lane Departure WarningSystem (LDWS) can be changed.*6


Rumble Beep

The volume of the warningsound for the Lane DepartureWarning System (LDWS) canbe changed.Refer to Trip Computer andINFO Switch on page 4-18.

RumbleU.S.A. High Low/Medium

ExceptU.S.A.

Low Medium/High

BeepU.S.A. High Low

ExceptU.S.A.

Low High

The sensitivity of the warning for the Lane DepartureWarning System (LDWS) can be changed.Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switch on page4-18.

High Low

The warning timing in which the Lane DepartureWarning System (LDWS) determines that the vehiclemay be deviating from its lane can be changed.Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switch on page4-18.

Before line At line

9-10



Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (565,1)


Multi-informationdisplay operationsound

The operation sound volume for the followingoperations can be changed.l Trip computer data clearing

The INFO switch is pressed for 1.5 seconds orlonger while the average fuel economy or averagevehicle speed is displayed.

l Numerical value scrollThe Up/Down switch is pressed for 1.5 seconds orlonger, such as while the maintenance monitorperiod setting screen is displayed.


High Low/OFF

Meter display

The distance unit can be changed.Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switch on page4-18.

miles or km km or miles

The display language can be changed.Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switch on page4-18.

English, French,or Spanish

English/French/Spanish

The temperature unit can be changed.Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switch on page4-18.

°F or °C °C or °F

ForwardObstructionWarning (FOW)

The system can be changed so that ForwardObstruction Warning (FOW) does not operate.*3


ON OFF

The distance at which the collision warning activatescan be changed.Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switch on page4-18.

Near Far

The volume of the collision warning can be changed.Refer to Trip Computer and INFO Switch on page4-18.

High Low/OFF

Smart City BrakeSupport (SCBS)

The system can be changed so that Smart City BrakeSupport (SCBS) does not operate.*3


ON OFF

*1 If the setting is changed to 0 seconds, the following operation is performed according to the headlight switchposition:l At position: Headlights turn off immediately after the ignition is switched off.l At any position other than : Headlights do not turn off after the ignition is switched off.

*2 When set to 0 seconds, the lights-on reminder is operable.*3 Though these systems can be turned OFF, doing so will defeat the purpose of the system and Mazda

recommends that these systems remain ON.*4 The setting of the lights-on reminder can be changed with the time setting of auto headlight off function set to

0 seconds. Refer to Lights-On Reminder on page 7-39.*5 Only the volume of the warning beep during Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) operation can be changed. The

volume of the warning beep during Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) operation cannot be changed.*6 For vehicles with an audio system other than the on-screen function type, the warning sound cannot be

changed. The warning sound is only a beep.


9-11


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (566,1)

9-12


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (567,1)

10 Index

10-1


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (568,1)

A

Accessory Socket ............................ 5-116Adaptive Front Lighting System(AFS) ................................................ 4-63Add-On Non-Genuine Parts andAccessories ....................................... 8-19Advanced Key

Operational range ....................... 3-10Advanced Keyless Entry System ........ 3-9Air Bag Systems ............................... 2-39Antilock Brake System (ABS) .......... 4-93Audio Control Switch

Adjusting the Volume ................ 5-57Mute Switch ............................... 5-57Seek Switch ................................ 5-57

Audio SystemAntenna ...................................... 5-13Audio Control Switch ................ 5-56Audio Set (Type A) .................... 5-25Audio Set (Type B) .................... 5-35AUX/USB/iPod mode ................ 5-60Commander switch operation .... 5-58Operating Tips for AudioSystem ........................................ 5-13Satellite Radio ............................ 5-44

Automatic TransaxleDirect Mode ............................... 4-57Driving tips ................................ 4-58Shift-lock override ..................... 4-51Shift-lock system ....................... 4-51Transaxle ranges ........................ 4-50

B

Battery ............................................... 6-30Maintenance ............................... 6-31Specifications ............................... 9-4

Battery runs out ................................. 7-20Jump-Starting ............................. 7-20

B

Beep SoundsAir bag/front seat belt pretensionersystem warning .......................... 7-39Blind spot monitoring(BSM) system warning .............. 7-41i-ELOOP ..................................... 7-41Ignition not switched off(STOP) warning ......................... 7-40Key left-in-trunk compartmentwarning ...................................... 7-41Key left-in-vehicle warning ....... 7-41Key removed from vehiclewarning ...................................... 7-40Lane departure warning system(LDWS) warning ....................... 7-41Lights-on reminder ..................... 7-39Request switch inoperablewarning ...................................... 7-40Seat belt warning ........................ 7-39Tire inflation pressure warning... 7-41

Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) systemRear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) system ........................ 4-126

Blind Spot Monitoring(BSM) System ................................ 4-122

Blind Spot Monitoring(BSM) ...................................... 4-124BSM OFF switch ..................... 4-130BSM warning light ................... 4-129Care of radar sensors ................ 4-130

Bluetooth® ....................................... 5-79Bluetooth® Audio .................... 5-104Bluetooth® Hands-Free ............. 5-85Troubleshooting ....................... 5-108

Body Lubrication .............................. 6-26Bottle Holder ................................... 5-118

10-2

Index


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (569,1)

B

BrakesBrakes assist ............................... 4-84Foot brake .................................. 4-82Pad wear indicator ...................... 4-84Parking brake ............................. 4-83

Break-In ............................................ 3-44

C

Capacities ............................................ 9-5Carbon Monoxide ............................. 3-25Cargo Sub-Compartment ................ 5-121Cell Phones ....................................... 8-20Center Console ................................ 5-120Child Restraint

Child-restraint system installationposition ...................................... 2-27Installing child-restraintsystems ....................................... 2-28LATCH child-restraintsystems ....................................... 2-35

Child Safety Locks for Rear Doors ... 3-19Climate Control System ...................... 5-2

Fully Automatic Type .................. 5-9Gas specifications ........................ 9-6Manual Type ................................ 5-5Operating Tips .............................. 5-2Vent Operation ............................. 5-3

Clock ............................................... 5-115Commander switch operation ........... 5-58

Commander knob operation ....... 5-59Operation of switches aroundcommander knob ........................ 5-58

Courtesy Lights ............................... 5-113Cruise Control ................................. 4-112Cruise Control Set Vehicle Speed ..... 4-15Cup Holder ...................................... 5-117Customer Assistance ........................... 8-2

D

Dashboard Illumination .................... 4-13Daytime Running Lights ................... 4-63Defroster ........................................... 4-73

Mirror ......................................... 4-74Dimensions ......................................... 9-5Direct Mode

Automatic transaxle ................... 4-57Door Locks ....................................... 3-11Drive Selection ............................... 4-100Driving In Flooded Area ................... 3-48Driving on Uneven Road .................. 3-49Driving Tips ...................................... 3-44

Automatic transaxle ................... 4-58Break-in ..................................... 3-44Driving in flooded area .............. 3-48Driving on uneven road ............. 3-49Floor mat .................................... 3-45Hazardous driving ...................... 3-45Money-saving suggestions ......... 3-44Overloading ............................... 3-48Rocking the vehicle .................... 3-46Winter driving ............................ 3-46

Dynamic Stability Control (DSC) ..... 4-95

E

Emergency StartingPush-Starting .............................. 7-23Starting a Flooded Engine .......... 7-23

Emergency TowingTiedown Hooks .......................... 7-27Towing Description .................... 7-26

Emission Control System .................. 3-24

Index

10-3


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (570,1)

E

EngineCoolant ....................................... 6-23Engine CompartmentOverview .................................... 6-20Exhaust gas ................................ 3-25Hood release .............................. 6-18Oil .............................................. 6-21Starting ......................................... 4-3

Essential information .......................... 6-2Event Data Recorder ......................... 8-21Exhaust Gas ...................................... 3-25Exterior Care ..................................... 6-58

Aluminum WheelMaintenance ............................... 6-62Bright-Metal Maintenance ......... 6-61Maintaining the Finish ............... 6-59Plastic Part Maintenance ............ 6-63

F

FlasherHazard warning .......................... 4-75Headlights .................................. 4-59

Flat Tire ............................................... 7-3Mounting the Spare Tire ............ 7-17Removing a Flat Tire ................. 7-14

Floor Mat .......................................... 3-45Fluid

Brake/Clutch .............................. 6-25Washer ........................................ 6-25

FluidsClassification ................................ 9-4

Fog Lights ......................................... 4-68Foot Brake ........................................ 4-82

F

Forward Obstruction Warning(FOW) ............................................. 4-115

Collision Warning .................... 4-117Display ..................................... 4-117Rader Sensor ............................ 4-117

Front Seat ............................................ 2-5Fuel

Filler lid and cap ........................ 3-26Gauge ......................................... 4-13Requirements ............................. 3-23Tank capacity ............................... 9-5

G

Gauges .............................................. 4-10Glove Compartment ........................ 5-120

H

Hazard Warning Flasher .................... 4-75Hazardous Driving ............................ 3-45Head Restraint .................................. 2-12Headlights

Control ....................................... 4-59Flashing ...................................... 4-62High-low beam .......................... 4-62Leveling ..................................... 4-63

High Beam Control System (HBC)... 4-64Hill Launch Assist (HLA) ................. 4-85HomeLink Wireless ControlSystem .............................................. 4-75Hood Release .................................... 6-18Horn .................................................. 4-74

10-4

Index


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (571,1)

I

i-ELOOP ........................................... 4-97Display ....................................... 4-97i-ELOOP Warning Beep ............ 7-41

IgnitionSwitch .......................................... 4-2

Illuminated Entry System ................ 5-114Immobilizer System .......................... 3-40Indicator Light

DSC OFF .................................... 4-42Indicator Lights

AFS OFF .................................... 4-43BSM OFF ................................... 4-45Cruise ......................................... 4-45HBC ........................................... 4-42Headlight high-beam .................. 4-44KEY ............................................ 4-40LDWS ........................................ 4-33Low engine coolanttemperature ................................ 4-43Mazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) ..................................... 4-45Power steering malfunction ........ 4-34Security ...................................... 4-44Shift position .............................. 4-43SPORT mode indicator light ...... 4-44TCS/DSC ................................... 4-42Turn signal/hazard warning ........ 4-44Wrench ....................................... 4-42

Inside Trunk Release Lever ............... 3-21Inspecting Brake/Clutch FluidLevel ................................................. 6-25Inspecting Coolant Level .................. 6-23Inspecting Engine Oil Level ............. 6-22Inspecting Washer Fluid Level ......... 6-25Instrument Cluster ............................. 4-10

I

Interior Care ...................................... 6-63Cleaning the Lap/Shoulder BeltWebbing ..................................... 6-65Cleaning the Upholstery and InteriorTrim ............................................ 6-63Cleaning the Window Interiors... 6-65Dashboard Precautions ............... 6-63

Interior Lights ................................. 5-113Courtesy Lights ........................ 5-113Map Lights ............................... 5-113Overhead Lights ....................... 5-113

J

Jack ..................................................... 7-5Jump-Starting .................................... 7-20

K

Key Suspend Function ........................ 3-7Keyless Entry System ......................... 3-3Keys .................................................... 3-2

Key suspend function ................... 3-7Transmitter ................................... 3-4

L

Label Information ............................... 9-2Lane Departure Warning System(LDWS) .......................................... 4-131Lane-Change Signals ........................ 4-68Light Bulbs

Replacement ............................... 6-40Specifications ............................... 9-6

Lighting Control ............................... 4-59Lubricant Quality ................................ 9-4Luggage Compartment ................... 5-121

Index

10-5


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (572,1)

M

MaintenanceInformation .................................. 6-2Scheduled ..................................... 6-4

Maintenance and Care ........................ 6-2Maintenance Monitor ........................ 4-15Manual Transaxle Operation ............. 4-47

Recommendations for shifting.... 4-48Map Lights ...................................... 5-113Mazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) .......................................... 4-103

Close Proximity Warning ......... 4-106Display Indication .................... 4-106Radar Sensor Handling ............ 4-111Setting the System .................... 4-107Shift-up/Shift-down RequestDisplay ..................................... 4-111

Mazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) System Warnings ............... 7-42Mazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) Warning Light (Amber)/Indicator Light (Green) ..................... 4-45Meters and Gauges ........................... 4-10Mirror Defroster ................................ 4-74Mirrors

Rearview mirror ......................... 3-30Money-Saving Suggestions .............. 3-44Moonroof .......................................... 3-37

O

Odometer and Trip Meter .................. 4-11Outside Temperature Display ............ 4-14Overhead Console ........................... 5-119Overhead Lights .............................. 5-113Overheating ....................................... 7-24Overloading ...................................... 3-48

O

Owner MaintenanceBattery Replacement .................. 6-32Closing the Hood ....................... 6-19Engine CompartmentOverview .................................... 6-20Opening the Hood ...................... 6-18Owner MaintenancePrecautions ................................. 6-16

P

Parking Brake ................................... 4-83Personalization Features ..................... 9-8Power Steering ................................ 4-102Power Windows ................................ 3-32

R

Radar Sensor ..................................... 4-79Rear Coat Hooks ............................. 5-121Rear Cross Traffic Alert(RCTA) system ............................... 4-126Rear Door Child Safety Locks .......... 3-19Rear Seat ........................................... 2-10Rear View Monitor ......................... 4-138Rear window

Rear Window Defroster .............. 4-73Rearview Mirror ................................ 3-30Recommended Oil ............................ 6-21Recreational Towing ......................... 3-50Registering Your Vehicle in A ForeignCountry ............................................. 8-18

10-6

Index


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (573,1)

R

ReplacementElectrical battery ......................... 6-32Fuse ............................................ 6-51Light Bulbs ................................ 6-40Tires ........................................... 6-36Wheel ......................................... 6-37Wiper .......................................... 6-27

Rocking the Vehicle .......................... 3-46

S

Safety Defects, Reporting ................. 8-14Satellite Radio ................................... 5-44Scheduled Maintenance ...................... 6-4Seat

Seat Position Memory(Driver's seat) ............................... 2-8

Seat Belt System3-point type ................................ 2-17Automatic locking ...................... 2-16Emergency locking .................... 2-16Extender ..................................... 2-20Pregnant women ........................ 2-16

SeatsFront seat ...................................... 2-5Head restraint ............................. 2-12Rear seat ..................................... 2-10Seat warmer .................................. 2-7

Security SystemImmobilizer system .................... 3-40Theft-deterrent system ............... 3-42

SensorRadar Sensor .............................. 4-79

Service Publications .......................... 8-50

S

Smart City Brake Support (SCBS) .... 4-87Laser Sensor Handling ............... 4-90Stopping The Smart City BrakeSupport(SCBS) System Operation ......... 4-92

Spare Tire ............................................ 7-6Specifications ...................................... 9-4Speedometer ...................................... 4-11SPORT Mode Indicator Light ........... 4-44SRS Air Bags

Driver and front passenger occupantclassification system .................. 2-54How the SRS air bags work ....... 2-47Limitations to SRS air bag ......... 2-52Monitoring ................................. 2-60SRS air bag deploymentcriteria ........................................ 2-51Supplemental restraint systemcomponents ................................ 2-45

Starting the Engine .............................. 4-3Steering Wheel .................................. 3-28

Horn ........................................... 4-74Storage Compartments .................... 5-119

Cargo sub-compartment ........... 5-121Center console .......................... 5-120Glove compartment .................. 5-120Luggage Compartment ............. 5-121Overhead console ..................... 5-119Rear coat hooks ........................ 5-121Storage pocket .......................... 5-119

Storage Pocket ................................ 5-119Sunshade ........................................... 3-39Sunvisors ......................................... 5-112

T

Tachometer ........................................ 4-12Theft-Deterrent System ..................... 3-42

Index

10-7


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Black plate (574,1)

T

TiedownHook .......................................... 7-27

Tire Information ................................ 8-24Tire Pressure Monitoring System .... 4-118Tires .................................................. 6-34

Flat Tire ........................................ 7-3Replacing a Tire ......................... 6-36Replacing a Wheel ..................... 6-37Snow tires .................................. 3-47Specifications ............................... 9-7Temporary Spare Tire ................. 6-37Tire chains .................................. 3-47Tire Inflation Pressure ................ 6-35Tire Rotation .............................. 6-35Uniform tire quality grading system(UTQGS) ................................... 8-22

TowingRecreational towing ................... 3-50Trailer Towing ............................ 3-50

Towing Description ........................... 7-26Traction Control System (TCS) ........ 4-94Transmitter .......................................... 3-4Trip Computer ................................... 4-18Trip Meter ......................................... 4-11Trouble

Battery runs out .......................... 7-20Emergency Starting .................... 7-23Emergency Towing .................... 7-26Flat Tire ........................................ 7-3Overheating ................................ 7-24Parking in an Emergency ............. 7-2Warning/indicator lights and warningsounds ........................................ 7-29When trunk lid cannot beopened ........................................ 7-43

Trunk Lid .......................................... 3-19Inside trunk release lever ............ 3-21

Turn and Lane-Change Signals ......... 4-68

V

Vanity Mirrors ................................. 5-112Vehicle Information Labels ................. 9-2

W

Warning LightsABS ............................................ 4-30Automatic transaxle ................... 4-34Brake system .............................. 4-30Charging system ......................... 4-31Check engine .............................. 4-32Check fuel cap ........................... 4-36Door-ajar .................................... 4-37Engine oil ................................... 4-32HBC ........................................... 4-42High engine coolanttemperature ................................ 4-33KEY ............................................ 4-40LDWS ........................................ 4-33Low fuel ..................................... 4-36Low washer fluid level ............... 4-38Mazda Radar Cruise Control(MRCC) ..................................... 4-45Seat belt ...................................... 4-36Tire pressure monitoringsystem ........................................ 4-38

Warning/Buzzer ................................ 7-29Warranty ............................................ 8-16Weights ............................................... 9-5Windows

Power windows .......................... 3-32Windshield Washer ........................... 4-73Windshield Wipers ............................ 4-70Winter Driving .................................. 3-46Wiper

Replacing Windshield WiperBlades ........................................ 6-27

10-8

Index


Form No.8DL2-EA-13F

Documents

2014_M6G_OM